water cad users guide

USER’S GUIDE

WaterCAD v5

for Windows

1986−2002 Haestad Methods, Inc. All rights reserved.

WaterCAD v5 User’s Guide (First Printing)

This book is published by Haestad Methods, Inc. and is intended for civil engineers and hydraulic modelers (including professional engineers, technicians, and students). This book may not be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or converted to any electronic or machine-readable form in whole or in part without prior written approval of Haestad Methods, Inc.

Trademarks

The following are registered trademarks of Haestad Methods, Inc.: CulvertMaster, Cybernet, FlowMaster, PondPack, SewerCAD, StormCAD, and WaterCAD.

The following are trademarks of Haestad Methods, Inc.: HECPack, POND-2, Graphical HEC-1, Graphical HEC-Pack , and Darwin Calibrator (patent pending).

.

Haestad Methods is a registered tradename of Haestad Methods, Inc.

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

ESRI is a registered trademark of Environmental Systems Research Institute, Inc.

All other brands, company or product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

37 Brookside Rd.

Waterbury, CT 06708-1499

Voice: (203) 755-1666

FAX: (203) 597-1488

e-mail: [email protected]

Internet: http://www.haestad.com

WaterCAD User’s Guide i

Table of Contents Preface 1

Chapter 1 Orientation 3 1.1 What Is WaterCAD? 3 1.2 What's New in WaterCAD v5.0? 4

1.2.1 New in v4.5 5 1.3 Installation, Upgrades, and Updates 7

1.3.1 Minimum System Requirements 7 1.3.2 Installing Haestad Methods' Products 7 1.3.3 Uninstalling Haestad Methods' Products 8 1.3.4 Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstall 8 1.3.5 Software Registration 8 1.3.6 Upgrades 9 1.3.7 Globe Button 9 1.3.8 Network Licensing 9

1.4 Learning WaterCAD 12 1.4.1 WaterCAD Documentation 12 1.4.2 How to Use Help 13 1.4.3 How Do I? 13 1.4.4 Help 13 1.4.5 Glossary 13 1.4.6 Tutorials 14 1.4.7 Sample Projects 14 1.4.8 Haestad Methods' Workshops 14

1.5 Contacting Haestad Methods 14 1.5.1 Sales 14 1.5.2 Technical Support 15 1.5.3 Your Suggestions Count 15 1.5.4 How to Contact Us 16

Chapter 2 WaterCAD Main Window 17 2.1 Overview 17 2.2 Main Window Components 17

2.2.1 Stand-Alone Mode, AutoCAD Mode 17 2.2.2 WaterCAD Main Window 18 2.2.3 Drawing Pane 19 2.2.4 Status Bar 19 2.2.5 Menus, Toolbars, and Shortcut Keys 20 2.2.6 Command Line 21

2.3 WaterCAD Menus 21 2.3.1 WaterCAD Menus 21 2.3.2 File Menu 22

ii Table of Contents

2.3.3 Edit Menu 24 2.3.4 Analysis Menu 26 2.3.5 View Menu 26 2.3.6 Draw Menu (in AutoCAD Mode Only) 28 2.3.7 Tools Menu 28 2.3.8 Report Menu 29 2.3.9 Help Menu 30

2.4 WaterCAD Toolbars 31 2.4.1 Toolbar Button Summaries 31 2.4.2 Tool Pane Summary 31 2.4.3 The Tool Palette 32 2.4.4 Analysis Toolbar 32 2.4.5 Animation Options 33 2.4.6 Other Toolbar Buttons 33

2.5 The Status Bar 34 2.5.1 Status Bar Contents 34 2.5.2 General Status Information 35 2.5.3 File Status 35 2.5.4 Unit System Status 35 2.5.5 DXF Background Status 35 2.5.6 Cursor Location 35 2.5.7 Calculation Results Status 35

Chapter 3 Quick Start Lessons 37 3.1 Overview 37 3.2 Lesson 1 - Constructing a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis 37 3.3 Lesson 2 - Extended Period Simulation 46 3.4 Lesson 3 - Scenario Management 50 3.5 Lesson 4 - Reporting Results 56 3.6 Lesson 5 - Automated Fire Flow Analysis 65 3.7 Lesson 6 - Water Quality Analysis 68 3.8 Lesson 7 - Working with Data from External Sources 73

Chapter 4 Starting a WaterCAD Project 97 4.1 Overview 97 4.2 File Management 97

4.2.1 File Management 97 4.2.2 Import Command 98 4.2.3 Multiple Sessions 98 4.2.4 Importing a Submodel 99 4.2.5 Exporting a Submodel 99

4.3 Project Management 99 4.3.1 Project Setup Wizard 99 4.3.2 Project Summary 100

4.4 Options 100 4.4.1 Global Options 100 4.4.2 Project Options 101 4.4.3 Drawing Options 103

4.5 FlexUnits 105

WaterCAD User’s Guide iii

4.5.1 FlexUnits Overview 105 4.5.2 Field Options 105 4.5.3 Units 106 4.5.4 Display Precision 106 4.5.5 Scientific Notation 106 4.5.6 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value 106 4.5.7 FlexUnits Manager 107

Chapter 5 Layout and Editing Tools 109 5.1 Graphical Editor Overview 109 5.2 Graphical Editor 109

5.2.1 Using the Graphical Editor 109 5.2.2 Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical Editor 109 5.2.3 Creating New Elements 110 5.2.4 Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type of Node 110 5.2.5 Morphing Elements 111 5.2.6 Splitting Pipes 111 5.2.7 Selecting Elements 111 5.2.8 Editing Elements 112 5.2.9 Other Tools 113

5.3 Selection Sets 114 5.3.1 Selection Sets 114 5.3.2 Selection Set Manager 114 5.3.3 New Selection Set 114 5.3.4 Selection Set Dialog 114 5.3.5 Duplicate Selection Set 115 5.3.6 Rename Selection Set 115 5.3.7 Selection Set Notes 115 5.3.8 Delete Selection Set 115

5.4 Find Element 115 5.4.1 Find Element 115

5.5 Zooming 115 5.5.1 Zooming 115 5.5.2 Zoom Center 116 5.5.3 Aerial View 116

5.6 Drawing Review 117 5.6.1 Drawing Review 117 5.6.2 Selection Tolerance 118

5.7 Relabel Elements 118 5.7.1 Relabel Elements Dialog 118 5.7.2 Relabel Operations 119 5.7.3 Elements Selected 119

5.8 Element Labeling 120 5.8.1 Element Labeling 120 5.8.2 Moving Element Labels and Annotation 121

5.9 Quick Edit 121 5.9.1 Quick Edit 121

Chapter 6 Hydraulic Element Editors 123 6.1 Overview 123

iv Table of Contents

6.2 Element Editors 124 6.2.1 Using Element Editors 124 6.2.2 Pressure Pipe Editor 124 6.2.3 Pressure Junction Editor 125 6.2.4 Tank Editor 125 6.2.5 Reservoir Editor 126 6.2.6 Pump Editor 126 6.2.7 Valve Editor 127

6.3 Element Editors' Tabs 128 6.3.1 General Tab 128 6.3.2 Demand Tab 136 6.3.3 Section Tab 138 6.3.4 Controls Tab 139 6.3.5 Quality Tab 141 6.3.6 Fire Flow Tab 144 6.3.7 Capital Cost Tab 145 6.3.8 User Data Tab 147 6.3.9 Messages Tab 147 6.3.10 VSP Tab 148 6.3.11 Energy Tab 149

6.4 Prototypes 151 6.4.1 Prototypes 151

6.5 User Data Extension 152 6.5.1 User Data Extensions 152 6.5.2 User Data Extension Dialog 152

6.6 Zone Manager 155 6.6.1 Zone Manager 155 6.6.2 Zone Dialog 155

Chapter 7 FlexTables 157 7.1 Tabular Reporting Overview 157 7.2 Table Manager 157

7.2.1 Table Manager 157 7.2.2 Creating New Tables 158 7.2.3 Editing Tables 158 7.2.4 Duplicating Tables 158 7.2.5 Deleting Tables 158 7.2.6 Renaming Tables 159 7.2.7 Resetting Tables 159

7.3 Table Setup Dialog 159 7.3.1 Table Setup Dialog 159 7.3.2 Table Type 160 7.3.3 Available Table Columns 160 7.3.4 Selected Table Columns 160 7.3.5 Table Manipulation Buttons 160 7.3.6 Allow Duplicate Columns 161

7.4 Table Window 161 7.4.1 The Table Window 161 7.4.2 Editing Tables 162 7.4.3 Sorting/Filtering Tables 163 7.4.4 Table Customization 164 7.4.5 Table Output 166

WaterCAD User’s Guide v

Chapter 8 Scenarios and Alternatives 167 8.1 Overview 167 8.2 Alternatives 167

8.2.1 Alternatives 167 8.2.2 Alternatives Manager 168 8.2.3 Alternatives Editor 170 8.2.4 Physical Alternative 170 8.2.5 Active Topology Alternative 173 8.2.6 Demand Alternative 173 8.2.7 Initial Settings Alternative 174 8.2.8 Operational Alternative 175 8.2.9 Logical Control Set Alternative 175 8.2.10 Age Alternative 176 8.2.11 Constituent Alternative 176 8.2.12 Trace Alternative 178 8.2.13 Fire Flow Alternative 178 8.2.14 Capital Cost Alternative 179 8.2.15 User Data Alternative 180 8.2.16 Energy Cost Alternative 180

8.3 Scenarios 180 8.3.1 Scenarios 180 8.3.2 Scenario Selection 181 8.3.3 Editing Scenarios 181 8.3.4 Scenario Manager 181 8.3.5 Scenario Wizard 183 8.3.6 Scenario Editor 185

Chapter 9 Modeling Capabilities 189 9.1 Overview 189 9.2 Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation 190 9.3 Optional Analysis 191 9.4 Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments 191 9.5 Check Data/Validate 192 9.6 Calculate Network 193 9.7 Flow Emitters 193 9.8 Fire Flow Analysis 194

9.8.1 Fire Flow Analysis 194 9.8.2 Fire Flow Results 195 9.8.3 Not getting Fire Flow at a Junction Node 195 9.8.4 Manual Fire Flow Scenarios 195

9.9 Water Quality Analysis 197 9.9.1 Age Analysis 197 9.9.2 Constituent Analysis 197 9.9.3 Trace Analysis 198

9.10 Calculation Options 198 9.10.1 Calculation Options 198 9.10.2 Hydraulic Analysis Options 199 9.10.3 Water Quality Analysis Options 199

9.11 Patterns 200 9.11.1 Patterns 200

vi Table of Contents

9.11.2 Pattern Manager 201 9.11.3 Pattern Editor 201 9.11.4 Importing Patterns 202

9.12 Logical Controls 203 9.12.1 Logical Controls Overview 203 9.12.2 Creating a new Logical Control 203 9.12.3 Logical Controls Operation 205 9.12.4 Logical Control Manager 205 9.12.5 Control Dialogs 208 9.12.6 Condition Dialogs 209 9.12.7 Action Dialogs 213 9.12.8 Finding Controls and Control Components 215 9.12.9 Logical Control Sets 217

9.13 Active Topology 217 9.13.1 Active Topology 217 9.13.2 Active Topology Selection Dialog 218

Chapter 10 GA Optimization and Calibration 219 10.1 Darwin Calibration Overview 219 10.2 Darwin Calibrator 219

10.2.1 Darwin Calibrator 219 10.2.2 New Calibration 220 10.2.3 Optimized Calibration 220 10.2.4 Manual Calibration 222 10.2.5 Calibrations 222 10.2.6 Calibration Solutions 223 10.2.7 Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog 224 10.2.8 GA-Optimized Calibration Tips 224 10.2.9 Calibration Results Statistics 225

10.3 Field Data Sets 225 10.3.1 Field Data Set Dialog 225 10.3.2 Field Data Sets Dialog 227 10.3.3 New Field Data Set 228 10.3.4 Field Data Observation Dialog 228 10.3.5 Entering Fire Flow Test Results 228 10.3.6 Select Element 229 10.3.7 Field Data Import 229

10.4 Adjustment Groups 231 10.4.1 New Adjustment Group Dialog 231 10.4.2 Rename Adjustment Group Dialog 231 10.4.3 Calibration Groups 231 10.4.4 Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog 231 10.4.5 Selection Set Dialog 232

10.5 Calibration Options 233 10.5.1 Calibration Options 233 10.5.2 Optimized Calibration Advanced Options 234 10.5.3 Calibration Options Formulae 235

Chapter 11 Cost Estimating 237 11.1 Overview 237 11.2 Capital Cost Manager 238

WaterCAD User’s Guide vii

11.2.1 Capital Cost Manager 238 11.2.2 Capital Cost Manager - Button Section 238 11.2.3 Capital Cost Manager - Center Pane 238 11.2.4 Capital Cost Manager - Left Pane 239 11.2.5 System Cost Adjustments Table 239 11.2.6 Active Cost Scenarios 240

11.3 Energy Cost Manager 240 11.3.1 Energy Cost Analysis 240 11.3.2 Energy Cost Manager 240 11.3.3 Energy Pricing Manager 242 11.3.4 Energy Pricing Editor 242

11.4 Cost Alternatives Manager 243 11.4.1 Capital Cost Alternatives Manager 243

11.5 Unit Cost Functions 243 11.5.1 Unit Cost Functions 243 11.5.2 Unit Cost Functions Manager 244 11.5.3 New Unit Cost Functions Dialog 244 11.5.4 Unit Cost Function Notes 244 11.5.5 Tabular Unit Cost Function 244 11.5.6 Formula Unit Cost Function 245

11.6 Cost Reports 246 11.6.1 Cost Reports 246 11.6.2 Element Detailed Cost Report 246 11.6.3 Project Detailed Cost Report 247 11.6.4 Project Element Summary Cost Report 247 11.6.5 Project Summary Cost Report 247 11.6.6 Pipe Costs Report 247 11.6.7 Cost Warnings Report 247

Chapter 12 Presenting your Results 249 12.1 Overview 249 12.2 Element Annotation 249

12.2.1 Element Annotation 249 12.2.2 Attribute Annotation Dialog 250 12.2.3 The Annotation Wizard 250

12.3 Color Coding 251 12.3.1 Color Coding 251 12.3.2 Color Coding Dialog 252

12.4 Reports 253 12.4.1 Predefined Reports 253 12.4.2 Element Details Report 253 12.4.3 Element Results Report 254 12.4.4 Tabular Reports 254 12.4.5 Scenario Summary Report 255 12.4.6 Project Inventory Report 255 12.4.7 Calculation Results Table 255 12.4.8 Plan View Report 255 12.4.9 Calculation / Problem Summary Report 255 12.4.10 Contour Plan View 256 12.4.11 Totalizing Flow Meters 256 12.4.12 Tabular Report Window 256 12.4.13 System Head Curve Dialog 257

viii Table of Contents

12.5 Graphs 257 12.5.1 Pump Curve 257 12.5.2 Tank Storage Curve 257 12.5.3 Junction Demand Graph 257 12.5.4 Pattern Graph and Report 257 12.5.5 Plotting a Variable vs Time 257

12.6 Contours 259 12.6.1 Contour Map Manager 259 12.6.2 Contour Plot 260 12.6.3 Contour Smoothing 260 12.6.4 Enhanced Pressure Contours 260 12.6.5 Contour Labeling 261 12.6.6 Spot Elevations 261

12.7 Profile 262 12.7.1 Profile 262 12.7.2 Profile Setup 263 12.7.3 Profile Plot 263 12.7.4 Export Profiles (in AutoCAD Mode) 264 12.7.5 Walk 264 12.7.6 Walk Selection 264

12.8 Scenario Comparison 264 12.8.1 Scenario Comparison 264 12.8.2 Annotation Comparison Wizard 264 12.8.3 Scenario Comparison Window 265

12.9 Graphic Annotation 266 12.9.1 Graphic Annotation 266 12.9.2 Legend 267

12.10 Preview Windows 267 12.10.1 Plot Window 267 12.10.2 Print Preview Window 267 12.10.3 Graph Options 268

12.11 Status Log 269 12.11.1 Status Log 269

Chapter 13 Engineering Libraries 271 13.1 Engineering Libraries Overview 271 13.2 Engineering Library Manager 272

13.2.1 Engineering Library Manager 272 13.2.2 WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules 272 13.2.3 Engineering Library Editor 272 13.2.4 Material Properties 273 13.2.5 Minor Loss Properties 274 13.2.6 Liquid Properties 274 13.2.7 Constituent Properties 275

Chapter 14 GIS and Database Connections 277 14.1 Overview 277 14.2 Database Connections 279

14.2.1 Database Connection Manager 279 14.2.2 Standard Database Import/Export 279 14.2.3 Database Connection Editor 281

WaterCAD User’s Guide ix

14.2.4 ODBC 284 14.2.5 Sharing Database Connections between Projects 285 14.2.6 Database Connection Example 286

14.3 Shapefile Connections 287 14.3.1 Shapefile Connection Manager 287 14.3.2 Shapefile Connection Editor 288 14.3.3 Shapefile Link Wizard 289 14.3.4 Import Shapefile Wizard 289 14.3.5 Export Shapefile Wizard 292 14.3.6 Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects 293 14.3.7 Shapefile Format 294 14.3.8 Shapefile Connection Example 294

Chapter 15 Exchanging Data with CAD Software 295 15.1 AutoCAD Polyline to Pipe Conversion 295

15.1.1 Polyline to Pipe Conversion Overview 295 15.1.2 Converting your Drawing in Multiple Passes 296 15.1.3 Polyline to Pipe Wizard 296

15.2 Import/Export of DXF Files 299 15.2.1 Import a DXF from AutoCAD or MicroStation 299 15.2.2 Exporting a DXF file 299 15.2.3 Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD 299 15.2.4 Advanced DXF Import Techniques 299

Chapter 16 Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version 301 16.1 Overview 301 16.2 AutoCAD Environment 302

16.2.1 AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout 302 16.2.2 Toolbars 302 16.2.3 Drawing Setup 302 16.2.4 Symbol Visibility 302 16.2.5 Rebuild Figure Labels 303

16.3 AutoCAD Project Files 303 16.3.1 AutoCAD Project Files 303 16.3.2 Drawing Synchronization 303 16.3.3 Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg 304

16.4 WaterCAD Element Properties 304 16.4.1 Element Properties 304 16.4.2 Select Layer 304 16.4.3 Select Text Style 305

16.5 Working with Elements 305 16.5.1 Edit Element 305 16.5.2 Deleting Elements 305 16.5.3 Modifying Elements 305

16.6 Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands 306 16.6.1 WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities 306 16.6.2 AutoCAD Commands 307 16.6.3 Explode Elements 307 16.6.4 Moving Elements 307 16.6.5 Moving Element Labels 307 16.6.6 Snap Menu 307

x Table of Contents

16.7 Undo / Redo 308 16.7.1 Undo / Redo Operations in AutoCAD 308

16.8 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements 308 16.8.1 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities 308 16.8.2 Layout Pipe Using Entity 309 16.8.3 Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes 309

16.9 Special Considerations 309 16.9.1 Import WaterCAD 309 16.9.2 Working with Proxies 309

Appendix A: Frequently Asked Questions 311 A.1. Overview: "How Do I" 311 A.2. Import/Export Tips 311

A.2.1. Import/Export Tips 311 A.2.2. Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions 312 A.2.3. Transitioning from Cybernet v2 313 A.2.4. Importing EPANET Files 316 A.2.5. Importing KYpipe Data 316 A.2.6. Importing Spot Elevations 316 A.2.7. Exporting Spot Elevations 316 A.2.8. Importing Database and Shapefile data created with WaterCAD v3 317

A.3. Modeling Tips 317 A.3.1. Modeling Tips 317 A.3.2. Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank 318 A.3.3. Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well 318 A.3.4. Modeling Parallel Pipes 319 A.3.5. Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series 319 A.3.6. Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks 320 A.3.7. Modeling Fire Hydrants 320 A.3.8. Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main 320 A.3.9. Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank 322 A.3.10. Estimating Hydrant Discharge Using Flow Emitters 323 A.3.11. Modeling Variable Speed Pumps 324 A.3.12. Creating Scenarios to Model "What If?" Situations 326 A.3.13. How Do I Access the Haestad Methods Knowledge Base? 326 A.3.14. Darwin Calibrator Troubleshooting Tips 326

A.4. Display Tips 328 A.4.1. Display Tips 328 A.4.2. How Do I Change Units in a Column? 329 A.4.3. How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing? 329 A.4.4. How Do I Color Code Elements? 329 A.4.5. How Do I remove Label Color Coding from imported AutoCAD files? 330 A.4.6. How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels? 330

A.5. Editing Tips 330 A.5.1. Editing Tips 330 A.5.2. Mouse Tips 330 A.5.3. Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline 331 A.5.4. Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline 331

Appendix B: WaterCAD Theory 333 B.1. Overview 333

WaterCAD User’s Guide xi

B.2. Pressure Network Hydraulics 334 B.2.1. Network Hydraulics Theory 334 B.2.2. The Energy Principle 334 B.2.3. The Energy Equation 335 B.2.4. Hydraulic and Energy Grades 335 B.2.5. Conservation of Mass and Energy 336 B.2.6. The Gradient Algorithm 337 B.2.7. Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm 337 B.2.8. The Linear System Equation Solver 339 B.2.9. Pump Theory 340 B.2.10. Pump Type 342 B.2.11. Valve Theory 343

B.3. Friction and Minor Losses 344 B.3.1. Friction Loss Methods 344 B.3.2. Minor Losses 346

B.4. Water Quality Analysis 347 B.4.1. Water Quality Theory 347

B.5. Engineer's Reference 354 B.5.1. Engineer's Reference 354 B.5.2. Roughness Values - Manning's Equation 355 B.5.3. Roughness Values - Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White) 355 B.5.4. Roughness Values, Hazen-Williams Formula 356 B.5.5. Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes 357 B.5.6. Fitting Loss Coefficients 357

B.6. Genetic Algorithms Methodology 358 B.6.1. Darwin Calibrator Methodology 358

B.7. Energy Cost Theory 363 B.7.1. Energy Cost Theory 363

B.8. Variable Speed Pump Theory 365 B.8.1. Variable Speed Pump Theory 365

Appendix C: Scenario Management Guide 371 C.1. Overview 371 C.2. About this Guide 371 C.3. Before Haestad Methods: Distributed Scenarios 372 C.4. With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios 373 C.5. The Scenario Cycle 374 C.6. Scenario Anatomy: Attributes and Alternatives 374 C.7. A Familiar Parallel 375 C.8. Scenario Behavior: Inheritance 375 C.9. Overriding Inheritance 376 C.10. Dynamic Inheritance 376 C.11. When are Values Local, and When are They Inherited? 376 C.12. Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance 377 C.13. Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance 378 C.14. A Water Distribution Example 378 C.15. Building the Model (Average Day Conditions) 379

xii Table of Contents

C.16. Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions) 379 C.17. Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions) 379 C.18. Correcting an Error 380 C.19. Analyzing Improvement Suggestions 380 C.20. Finalizing the Project 381 C.21. Summary 382 C.22. Conclusion 382

Appendix D: Capital Cost Estimating 383 D.1. Capital Cost Estimating Basics 383 D.2. Entering Data for Multiple Elements 385 D.3. Unit Cost Functions 388

D.3.1. Formula Cost Functions 391 D.3.2. Tabular Cost Functions 393 D.3.3. Numeric Variables / Text Variables 393 D.3.4. Complex Pipe Elements 393

D.4. Building Cost Scenarios 394 D.5. Viewing Cost Results 396 D.6. Assigning Costs to Model Elements 400

D.6.1. Assigning Costs to Model Elements 400 D.6.2. Pipe Costs 400 D.6.3. Node Costs 402 D.6.4. Pump Station Costs 404 D.6.5. Non-Construction Costs 405

Appendix E: Haestad Methods 411 E.1. Overview 411 E.2. Software 411

E.2.1. WaterCAD 411 E.2.2. SewerCAD 412 E.2.3. StormCAD 412 E.2.4. PondPack 412 E.2.5. FlowMaster 412 E.2.6. CulvertMaster 412

E.3. Haestad Press 413 E.3.1. Haestad Press Publications 413

E.4. Training and Certification 413 E.4.1. Training and Certification 413

E.5. Internet Resources 414 E.5.1. Internet Resources 414

WaterCAD User’s Guide xiii

Glossary 415

References 423

Index 425

xiv Table of Contents

Notes

WaterCAD User’s Guide 1

Preface

Welcome to WaterCAD Thank you for purchasing WaterCAD. At Haestad Methods, we pride ourselves in providing the very best engineering software available. Our goal is to make software that is easy to install and use, yet so powerful and intuitive that it anticipates your needs without getting in your way.

WaterCAD is a feature-rich program with extensive on-line documentation that is able to provide a level of instruction appropriate to your needs. Do not be fooled by the existence of this user’s guide. You do not need to read anything to get started!

When you first use the program, WaterCAD’s intuitive interface and interactive dialogs will guide you. If you need more information, go to our comprehensive, context-sensitive, on-line help by either pressing the Help button present in each dialog box, pressing the F1 key, or right-clicking anywhere in a dialog. Help text regarding the area of the program in which you are working will be displayed.

We are betting that you will be able to use our product right out of the package. If you know how to run Setup within Windows, then go ahead and get right to work. Install WaterCAD, and enjoy!

2 Preface

Notes


Chapter 1

Orientation

1.1 What Is WaterCAD? WaterCAD is a powerful yet easy to use program that helps engineers design and analyze complex pressurized piping systems. WaterCAD’s powerful graphical interface (both in Stand-Alone and AutoCAD mode) makes it easy to quickly lay out a complex network of pipes, tanks, pumps, and more. You can use WaterCAD to:

• Perform steady-state analyses of water distribution systems with pumps, tanks, and control valves.

• Perform extended period simulations to analyze the piping system's response to varying supply and demand schedules.

• Perform water quality simulations to determine the water source and age, or track the growth or decay of a chemical constituent throughout the network.

• Perform Fire Flow Analyses on your system to determine how your system will behave under extreme conditions.

• Use the powerful Scenario Management features to mix and match a variety of "What If?" alternatives on your system. Create multiple sets of hydraulic, physical property, operational, initial setting, fire flow, cost, and water quality alternatives. Create and run any number of scenarios by mixing and matching alternatives, then view and compare the results quickly and easily with WaterCAD's flexible scenario management feature.

• Calibrate your model manually or with the assistance of the Darwin Calibrator, which utilizes the power of Genetic Algorithms.

• Link to GIS data using Shapefile and Database connections.

Tip: The best introduction to WaterCAD is the One-Minute Tutorial. Explore WaterCAD freely and remember that there is a lot of valuable information in on-line help.

4 Chapter 1 - Orientation

1.2 What's New in WaterCAD v5.0? WaterCAD v5.0 includes a variety of new and enhanced features, including:

• Darwin Calibration - The new Darwin Calibrator harnesses the power of Genetic Algorithms to automatically calibrate pipe roughness, demands, and pipe status. An unlimited number of calibration scenarios can be automatically generated and ranked by their proximity to your observed data, and the adjustments suggested by the calibrator can be automatically applied to your model. Manual Calibration can also be performed from within the Darwin Calibrator on selected groups of elements or for all pipes and junctions in the model. The Darwin Calibrator is available as an optional feature level.

• Active Topology Alternative - By using the Active Topology Alternatives feature, you can temporarily remove any of the network elements from the drawing view. While these elements are Inactive, they are not included in any calculations. This capability allows you to maintain multiple network configuration scenarios within a single project file, eliminating the need to switch between multiple files.

• Variable Speed Pumps - You now have the ability to make any pump a Variable Speed Pump. Variable speed pumps can be controlled using a pump speed pattern or choose to have the pump adjust its speed to meet a specific head at a target node.

• Energy Cost Analysis - WaterCAD v5 has the ability to estimate the energy costs associated with running the pumps in a network. This feature goes beyond simply calculating the amount of electricity used in that it also accounts for the energy losses and gains associated with tank level changes over time.

• Logical Rule-Based Controls - Logical Rule Based Controls provide greater flexibility and functionality than Simple Controls, giving you enhanced ability to dictate the behavior of your system.

• System Head Curve Generation - WaterCAD now has the ability to automatically generate system head curves, which can be used to find the appropriate pump size for the system or to find the operating point for an existing pump.

• General Purpose Valve - GPVs can be used to represent reduced pressure backflow prevention valves, well draw-down behavior, turbines, or any other device or situation with a unique headloss - flow relationship.

• Demand and Pattern Import - You can now import demands and patterns from ASCII text files.

• Time Variable Reservoir - HGL patterns can now be applied to reservoirs, providing the ability to simulate tidal activity and situations where the reservoir represents a tie-in to another system whose pressure varies with time.

• Manual Fire Flow Scenarios - With only a small amount of input data, you can have the program automatically create Fire Flow scenarios for each individual node in which a user-defined Fire Flow demand is applied. You can then perform a batch run on these scenarios to compare them, or run a Steady State or Extended Period simulation on each individual scenario.

• Flow Emitters - Use Flow Emitters to model fire sprinklers, irrigation systems, leakage, or any other situation in which the node demand varies in proportion to the pressure at the emitter node.

• Totalizing Flow Meters - By using Totalizing Flow Meters, you can determine the total and net amount of flow passing through any network element.

• Submodel Import and Export – Export a model, or portions thereof, for import into other projects.

• Animation Support - Animate the plan and profile views separately or at the same time to serve as an ideal tool for presentations and output analysis.


• Quick Attribute Selector - The quick attribute selector organizes the available attributes into groups of related attribute types, allowing you to easily find the desired attribute.

• Mousewheel Pan and Zoom Support - You can now Pan and Zoom inside the drawing pane using the mousewheel.

• Time Of Day Support - WaterCAD now has Time-of Day support, utilizing a standard 24-hour clock. (AM and PM)

• Enhanced Filtering Capability - In addition to the Filtering options available in previous versions, WaterCAD v5 allows you to Filter using the operators "Begins With" and "Contains".

• Improved Element Calculation Messages - A printable list of all elements with messages and warnings can now be accessed from the calculation results tab.

• Improved Element Graphs - Element graphs can now display multiple elements simultaneously.

• AutoCAD Double-click Support - Double-clicking an element opens the Element Editor dialog for that element, eliminating the need to select the Edit menu command.

• AutoCAD Multi-line Tooltips - Hovering the mouse cursor over an element will open a multi-line tooltip which displays any current Annotation applied to that element.

• AutoCAD Contour Labeling - Contour labeling can now be achieved using WaterCAD commands. Labels can be applied to the ends or the interior of the contour lines.

• Windows XP Support - WaterCAD v5 is now compatible with Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.

Note: Support for Windows 95 and AutoCAD R14 has been discontinued in WaterCAD v5.

1.2.1 New in v4.5 • Performance Improvements - The primary focus of this release was performance. WaterCAD has

always provided you with the fastest way to get your Modeling work done. As models continue to grow, WaterCAD continues to improve. This release is the result of extensive user testing using some of the most complex Water Distribution models available.

• Calculation Enhancements - This version of WaterCAD now incorporates the latest in Water Distribution calculation technology. Hydraulic calculations run faster, and Water Quality calculations are performed using the latest and most efficient Water Quality algorithm.

• Editable Quick View - The Quick View Window has always been the fastest way to view the data associated with any element. Now you can use Quick View to make input changes as well (and, as you would expect, with full undo/redo support).

New in v4.0 • AutoCAD 2000 Support - Run WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode (which is the upgrade for Cybernet

v3) inside both AutoCAD 2000 and AutoCAD R14.

• Microsoft Office 2000 Support - Take advantage of the capabilities of Microsoft Excel 2000 and Access 2000 for cut-copy-and-paste, as well as database integration.

• Windows 2000 Support - Load the current version of WaterCAD on Windows 95, Windows 98, NT 4.0, and Windows 2000.

• Network Licensing - Purchase a multi-seat license. With the purchase of the AutoCAD version of WaterCAD, your engineers and technicians can individually use WaterCAD in either Stand-Alone


mode or AutoCAD mode and share project files.

• Custom Fields - Utilize user-defined custom fields for storing information, which you can use to perform many standard operations including filtering, sorting, and color-coding.

• User-Defined Groups - Organize your input, profiling, and reporting steps with persistent user-defined groups of pipes and nodes by type or any other basis.

• Polyline to Pipe Conversion - Batch convert existing AutoCAD lines, polylines, and blocks to water distribution elements via automated polyline to pipe options. Allows you to customize polyline to pipe parameters.

• Drawing Review - Quickly navigate your model using the drawing review tool in order to identify and resolve design problems in the network.

• Element Relabeling - Automatically renumber, replace, or append a prefix/suffix to selected element labels.

• Aerial View - Access this separate window to facilitate zooming, panning, and locating a small viewing area in the main window.

• Aligning Pipe Labels - Automatically align pipe labels and annotations with the associated pipe.

• Cost Estimating - Perform detailed cost estimates using an integrated cost analysis modeling subsystem. Calculate a planning level estimate of the capital cost associated with an entire system or any portion of a system. This makes it easy to compare the costs associated with the various scenarios, thus helping to ensure that the most cost-effective design is chosen.

• Contouring by Selection Set - Generate contours based on any model parameter for a subset of the model.

• Performance Optimization - Experience a 150% performance increase in Calculation Engine, 200% increase in Model Validation, 100% increase in Graphical Editor, and 200% performance increase in opening and saving files.

• Fire Flow Capacity - Analyze fire flow capacity of predefined subsets of the network. Color-code and contour the system or a selection set according to available fire flow.

• Labels - Automatically label pressure, flow quantity, and any other selected input/output parameter. Dynamically updates annotations (labels) with each calculation, alternative scenario, or change in timestep.

• International Settings - Select a local date and time format.

• External Data Sources - Externalize and leverage existing enterprise data using standard database connections. Freely exchange data for all network elements with GIS software using exclusive dynamic shapefile connections. Extract, transform, and load enterprise information to and from the model using built-in automated data tools. Avoid data preprocessing or intermediate file generation. Preserve the consistency of external data using built-in automated data model filters that dynamically validate and enforce model integrity.

• Extensive Documentation - Review lessons and tutorial files that cover the basics of water distribution network design and analysis. Access our extensive Internet-based support database, called the KnowledgeBase, through our ClientCare Program.

• Technical Support - Subscribe to one of our ClientCare packages and access technical support seven days a week.


1.3 Installation, Upgrades, and Updates

1.3.1 Minimum System Requirements Below are the minimum and recommended system requirements for running WaterCAD without significant delays. Note that some of these requirements for AutoCAD Mode, such as RAM, are fairly high due to AutoCAD and operating system demands, not WaterCAD itself.

Stand-Alone Mode: Processor: Pentium II - 450 MHz

RAM: 64 Megabytes

Hard Disk: 25 Megabytes of free storage space, with additional room for data files

Operating System: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows ME, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

Display: 800 x 600 resolution, 256 colors

AutoCAD Mode: Processor: Pentium II - 450 MHz

RAM: 128 Megabytes

Hard Disk: 25 Megabytes of free storage space, with additional room for data files

Display: 800 x 600 resolution, 256 colors

Recommended: While Haestad Methods' software will perform adequately given the minimum system requirements, performance will only improve with a faster system. Our products are designed to perform at optimal levels with a fast CPU and ample amounts of RAM and free disk space. We highly recommend running our software on the best system possible to maximize its potential, especially for larger models containing thousands of pipes. We understand that an engineer's time is a valuable commodity, and we have designed our software to help make the most of that time.

Note: Support for Windows 95 and AutoCAD R14 has been discontinued in WaterCAD v5.

1.3.2 Installing Haestad Methods' Products For Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows ME, and Windows XP follow these six easy steps, for installing a single user license copy of the program:

• If you have not done so, turn on your computer.

• Place the diskette labeled Disk 1 in the floppy disk drive (commonly the a: or b: drive).

• Place the CD in your CD-ROM drive (commonly the d: or e: drive).

• If the Autorun feature of the operating system is enabled, setup will begin automatically. Proceed to step six.

• If Autorun is disabled, click the Start button on the task bar, select Run from the menu, and type d:\setup (use the actual drive letter of the CD-ROM drive if it is not the d: drive), and then click OK.


• Follow the instructions of the Setup Wizard.

Note: If you own a network license version of the software, please refer to the Network Licensing section. If you still have questions, consult the KnowledgeBase on our web site www.haestad.com or contact Haestad Methods technical support.

1.3.3 Uninstalling Haestad Methods' Products Haestad Methods' products come with an uninstall option. After a single user license copy of a Haestad Methods' product is installed onto a computer, it must be uninstalled before a new installation can occur.

To uninstall the program:

On the Windows Start Bar, click Start / Programs / Haestad Methods / WaterCAD / Uninstall WaterCAD. The original floppy disk labeled Disk 1 that came with the product must be in the floppy drive at the time you uninstall.

1.3.4 Troubleshooting Setup or Uninstall Because of the multi-tasking capabilities of Windows 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP, you may have applications running in the background that make it difficult for the setup routines to determine the configuration of your current system. If you have difficulties during the install (setup) or uninstall process, please try these steps before contacting our technical support staff:

• Restart your machine.

• Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications currently in use by pressing Ctrl-Alt-Del in Windows 98, ME, XP, or 2000, or Ctrl-Shift-Esc in Windows NT. Exit any applications that are running.

• Run setup or uninstall again without running any other program first.

If these steps fail to successfully install or uninstall the product, contact our support staff immediately.

1.3.5 Software Registration During the installation of the program, a dialog will appear asking you to register the software. Please note the label with your registration information is on the inside back cover of the manual.

Although this software is not copy protected, registration is required to unlock the software capabilities for the hydraulic features that you have licensed. All registration information must be entered into the Registration dialog exactly as it appears on the label.

• Company

• City

• State/Country

• Product ID

• Registration Number

After you have registered the software, you can check your current registration status by opening the registration dialog in the software itself.

To open the Registration dialog:


• Select Help / About from the pull-down menus.

• Click the Registration button in the About dialog.

The current registration status (number of licenses, expiration date, feature level, etc) will be displayed.

Use the Print button to print a copy of the information shown in the Registration Form dialog.

Use the Copy button to place the registration information in the Windows Clipboard so that you can paste it into another Windows application.

Note: If you own a network license version of the software, please refer to the Network Licensing section. If you still have questions, consult the KnowledgeBase on our web site www.haestad.com or contact Haestad Methods technical support.

1.3.6 Upgrades When you click the Registration button on the Help / About WaterCAD … dialog, the current registration status (number of licenses, expiration date, feature level, etc) is displayed. To upgrade to more pipes or inlets, higher feature levels, or additional licenses, contact our sales team today and request information on our ClientCare Program. We will provide the information you need to get up and running in no time!

1.3.7 Globe Button Haestad Methods makes it easy to stay up-to-date with the latest advances in our software. Software maintenance releases can be downloaded from the Haestad Methods web site quickly and easily if you are a subscriber to our ClientCare Program. Just click the Globe icon on the tool palette to launch your preferred web browser and open the Haestad Methods’ Program Update web site. The web site will automatically check to see if your installed version is the latest available. If it is not, it will provide you with the opportunity to download the correct upgrade to bring it up-to-date.

The ClientCare Program also gives you access to our extensive KnowledgeBase for answers to Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ). Contact our sales team for more information on our ClientCare Program.

Tip: Use the Globe button to keep your investment current.

1.3.8 Network Licensing Network versions of this product are available. If you purchased a network version, your program will run at any workstation located on your network if a floating license key is available for use. Floating licenses allow one or more concurrent users of a particular application to access and use the full capabilities of the software if the number of concurrent licenses does not exceed the number allowed under the terms of the license sale. Once the number of concurrent users exceeds the licensed number, new application sessions will run in a limited demo mode.

Network licensing is implemented using Rainbow Industries SentinelLMTM license manager. Administrators should refer to the SentinelLMTM System Administrators Guide for details on implementing network licensing at your location.


Registering Network Programs During the installation of the network deployment folder, a dialog will appear asking you to register the software. The label with your registration information is on the inside back cover of the manual. This registration data is required to enable the software capabilities for the hydraulic network size and features that you have licensed. All registration information must be entered into the Registration dialog exactly as it appears on the label.

• Company

• City

• State/Country

• Product ID

• Registration Number

After you have registered the software, you can view the current registration and floating license usage status at any of the workstations that has the product software installed on it.

To open the Registration dialog:

• Select Help / About… from the pull-down menu.

• Click the Registration button.

The current registration status (number of floating licenses, expiration date, feature level, etc) will be displayed. If all available floating licenses are in current use, the software will run in demo mode.

Network administrators may activate network licenses and upgrade the features served by their floating licenses by invoking the Request License option, which is activated using the Registration button on this dialog.

Use the Print button to print a copy of the information shown.

Use the Copy button to export the registration information to the Windows Clipboard so that you can paste it into other Windows applications.

Requesting Permanent Network License System administrators who are responsible for managing network license versions of Haestad Methods' software must activate their organization’s floating licenses by obtaining a permanent license file from Haestad Methods. This may be done using the Request License button on the Registration dialog. This button will only be available for users who have purchased the network-licensing feature.

Note: Haestad Methods uses SentinelLM License Manager software from Rainbow Technologies to manage network licensing for this application. For more information concerning the administration of the Haestad Methods floating network licensing, please refer to the Sentinel Software System Administrator’s Guide online documentation installed with your network license server software.

To acquire a network license file, the administrator must first generate the network locking codes for the computer that will be acting as the network license server. To get your license server locking code, use the SentinelLM echoid utility. This is installed with the license server software onto the computer acting as the network license host for this application.

Note: The echoid utility must be run from the same computer that will act as the license server host for this particular Haestad Methods application.


Write down the values for the locking codes that are posted in the echoid utility’s message box. Be certain to record these values accurately, as they will be used by Haestad Methods to generate a custom license file keyed to the specific license server’s hardware signature. Once issued, a license key-code may not be installed on another machine. You will not be able to transport the license server to another network machine without obtaining new lock codes.

With echoid values in hand, start the Haestad Methods product application on any workstation located on the network served by the license manager. You can even install and run the Haestad Methods application from the same computer that will be acting as the license server host computer.

Select Help / About… from the pull-down menus to open the Registration dialog. Open the Request License Key dialog using the Request License button. Fill out the form, then either email or fax the completed form to Haestad Methods using the Submit Request button.

Installation Guide for Network License Versions To set up a Haestad Methods’ software product for operation as a network licensed version:

• Place the diskette labeled Disk 1 in the floppy disk drive (commonly the a: or b: drive).

• Place the CD in your CD-ROM drive (commonly the d: or e: drive).

• If the Autorun feature of the operating system is enabled, setup will begin automatically. Proceed to step 5.

• If Autorun is disabled, click the Start button on the task bar, select Run from the menu, and type d:\setup (use the actual drive letter of the CD-ROM drive if it is not the d: drive). Click OK.

• To perform the following steps, you must have full administrator privileges for the target network-based installation folders. Follow the instructions of the Setup Wizard, which will guide you through the installation of two components:

− Network deployment folder - A directory installed on a network node that is available from all client workstations on which the license product will be installed. Users of the floating licenses will invoke the network-based installation utility setup.exe, which will install and configure the application to each client workstation.

− Network License Manager and Utilities - The license manager service executable file that will automatically monitor availability and distribute network floating licenses to client applications as they are started up across the license hosting LAN. The license manager may be installed on any shared node in the network, but is generally located on a network server machine.

• Start the license server using the appropriate procedure for the host machine’s operating system:

− Windows NT/2000/XP - Use the loadls utility via the Service Loader menu option to install the license server. The license manager runs as a service and can be manually controlled via the Windows NT Control Panel\Services group.

− Windows 98/ME - To enable automatic license server startup, use Windows Explorer to add the license server program, Lserv9x.exe, to the Windows 95/98 system StartUp folder. Manually start the license server by running the lserv9x via the License Server menu option.

• Announce the availability of the product via email. Instruct interested users to install the product the using the Start / Run… menu command and browsing to the network deployment folder installed in step 5 to run setup.exe. The license server ships with special 30-day licenses that will allow users to begin using the application immediately.

• Obtain a permanent license file for the application. A permanent license file must be obtained from Haestad Methods within 30 days of receipt of the product package. Request a permanent license file by following these steps:


− At the host computer on which the license server will run, use the echoid utility via the Locking Codes menu option to determine the locking codes that will be used to generate license keys for your network. The license key file will be configured specifically for the license server machine installation. Write these locking codes down.

− Start the Haestad Methods' product application at any workstation where the product has been installed. The product can even be installed directly on the computer acting as the license server.

− Select Help / About … from the pull-down menus and click the Registration button. Use the Request License button at the bottom of the Registration dialog and fill out the License Key Request form with the system administrator contact and host server locking code information. Be certain to accurately record the locking codes obtained during the previous step since inaccurate information will result in the generation of unusable license files.

− Click the Submit Request… button. Following the instructions in the form, e-mail or fax the form to Haestad Methods. The activation request will be processed, and a license file will be generated and e-mailed to the system administrator making the request.

• Use the lslic utility located in the AdminTools directory to modify the permanent license file managed by the network license server. After the license key file requested above is received via e-mail from Haestad Methods, save the file attachment to a computer folder on any computer resident on the network serviced by the running license server. For future convenience, safety, and ease-of-support, it is recommended that the license file be saved in the license manager tools directory, AdminTools. This utility must be run from the operating system prompt. Enter lslic -F <filename>, where <filename> is the name of the license file attachment emailed by Haestad Methods and saved to the hard-drive. This step will install the new license key into the license file, lservrc, located on the same computer and in the same directory that the license server resides.

Once these steps are completed, floating licenses will be available to concurrent users via the network. Should the number of users exceed the number of license keys available, the unlicensed client sessions will continue to run in demo mode.

Network Deployment Folder Interested users may install the complete product via the network deployment folder using the Windows Start / Run command. Browse to the deployment directory, and run setup.exe to install the program to a client workstation.

1.4 Learning WaterCAD

1.4.1 WaterCAD Documentation WaterCAD’s on-line documentation delivers extensive detail and convenient assistance. Simply click the Help button, press the F1 key, or right-click anywhere in the program to access context-sensitive help.

The WaterCAD User’s Guide is provided to you as a means to read and learn about WaterCAD while you are away from your computer. The topics you find in the User’s Guide will also be found in the on-line help.

Note: The on-line help is typically more complete and up-to-date than the manual, as it is refined with each new software update.


WaterCAD also contains on-line tutorials, lessons, and sample files to help you become familiar with the software’s features and capabilities. The tutorials can be accessed by clicking Help\Tutorials from the pull-down menu. The lessons can be found in the printed documentation as well as in the on-line help. The sample files are located in your Haestad\Wtrc\Sample directory.

1.4.2 How to Use Help All of our products feature extensive context-sensitive help. There are several ways to obtain help on topics:

• Select Help from the pull-down menu.

• To get help for the window in which you are working, press the F1 key or click the Help button.

• To get help for a specific item, right-click the desired item and select Help from the pop-up menu.

To navigate within Help: • When you click text that is underlined, Help "jumps" to the related topic or definition. If the text is

dashed underlined, the text will appear in a pop-up window.

• To return to the previous topic, click the Back button at the top of the Help window.

• To print a Help topic, click the Print button at the top of the Help window.

Tip: To make the Help window stay on top of other windows, select Options / Keep On Top / On Top from the pull-down menu in the main Help window.

1.4.3 How Do I? "How Do I" is an easily referenced topic in WaterCAD’s on-line documentation. It is a listing of commonly asked questions about WaterCAD. Follow these steps to find your way to How Do I:

1 Click Help\How Do I from the pull-down menu.

2 The listing of "How Do I" topics will appear. Click on the topic of your choice for a detailed explanation.

3 To return to the listing of "How Do I" questions, click the Back button.

1.4.4 Help Provides context sensitive help for the current window.

1.4.5 Glossary The glossary contains many terms used throughout the application and the on-line Help.

To use the Glossary:

• Click Help / Contents to open the main Help window.

• Click the Contents tab, and then double-click the Glossary book.


• Click the Glossary page, and the Glossary topic will appear.

• Click the first letter of the word for which you are looking for more information.

• Click the desired term, and a pop-up box will appear with a definition of the selected word.

1.4.6 Tutorials Tutorials provide a quick introduction to various features of the program. To access tutorials, click Help / Tutorials from the pull-down menus. Run a tutorial by selecting one of the entries in the list and clicking the OK button.

End a tutorial at any time by either pressing the Esc key (in Stand-Alone mode), or by clicking the Close button in the upper right-hand corner of any tutorial dialog. If you need further information, access our on-line help by pressing the F1 key.

1.4.7 Sample Projects 1 Select the File\Open command from the pull-down menu to access the Open Project File dialog.

2 Choose EXAMPLE?.WCD (or EXAMPLE?.DWG, if using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode) from the Sample directory, and click Open.

These are working network models, so you can explore the systems and see how different elements are modeled. First, calculate the system by using the GO button on the main toolbar. Then use Quick View, Graphs, Profiles, Tabular views, Detailed Reports, Color Coding, and Contouring to see how the system behaves. To get the best introduction to a new feature, try running some of the tutorials.

1.4.8 Haestad Methods' Workshops Haestad Methods offers a variety of workshops dealing with topics ranging from urban stormwater management to water distribution modeling, alternating theory, modeling insights and hands-on practice with software instruction. These workshops are held at various locations, and include discounted pricing when purchasing Haestad Methods' software.

For more information on our workshops (such as instructors, schedules, pricing, and locations), please contact our sales department, or visit our web site at www.haestad.com for current workshop schedules and locations. We will be glad to answer any questions you may have regarding the workshops and our other products and services.

Haestad Methods offers a range of other training services including on-site training and on-line training. For detailed information on the availability of these options, visit www.haestad.com/eduction.

1.5 Contacting Haestad Methods

1.5.1 Sales Haestad Methods’ professional staff is ready to answer your questions. Please contact your sales representative for any questions regarding Haestad Methods’ latest products and prices. Phone: +1-203-755-1666

Fax: +1-203-597-1488



1.5.2 Technical Support We hope that everything runs smoothly and you never have a need for our technical support staff. However, if you do need support our highly skilled staff offers their services seven days a week, and may be contacted by phone, fax, and the Internet. For information on the various levels of support that we offer, contact our sales team today and request information on our ClientCare Program.

When calling for support, in order to assist our technicians in troubleshooting your problem, please be in front of your computer and have the following information available:

• Operating system your computer is running (Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows ME, Windows 2000, or Windows XP)

• Name and build number of the Haestad Methods software you are calling about. The build number can be determined by clicking on "Help…About [Software Name]". The build number is the number in brackets located in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog box that appears.

• Version of AutoCAD you are running (if applicable)

• Any error messages or other information that was generated

• A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem

When e-mailing or faxing for support, please provide the following additional details to enable us to provide a timely and accurate response:

• Company name, address, and phone number

• A detailed explanation of your concerns

• The Haestad.log and Error.log files located in the product directory (e.g. Haestad\SewerCAD)

Hours: Monday - Friday: 9:00 AM to 8:00 PM EST

Saturday and Sunday: 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM EST

You can contact our technical support team at: Phone: +1-203-755-1666

Fax: +1-203-597-1488


1.5.3 Your Suggestions Count At Haestad Methods, we strive to continually provide you with sophisticated software and documentation. We are very interested in hearing your suggestions for improving our products, our on-line Help system, and our printed manuals. Your feedback will guide us in developing products that will make you more productive.

Please let us hear from you!


1.5.4 How to Contact Us Phone: +1-203-755-1666

Fax: +1-203-597-1488


[email protected]

Internet: http://www.haestad.com

Mail: Haestad Methods

37 Brookside Road

Waterbury, CT 06708-1499

USA


Chapter 2

WaterCAD Main Window

2.1 Overview If you are already familiar with standard Windows interfaces, you will find WaterCAD to be intuitive and comfortable. Even if you are not accustomed to Windows standards, just a few minutes of exploring WaterCAD should be enough to acquaint you with the flexibility and power that this program offers.

In this chapter, we will examine the program’s main window, menus, and toolbars. After reading this chapter, you should be able to interact with this software in a quick and efficient manner. Additional tools for layout, annotating, and editing are described in the chapter "Layout and Editing Tools".

2.2 Main Window Components

2.2.1 Stand-Alone Mode, AutoCAD Mode Both the Stand-Alone graphical editor and the AutoCAD interface perform actions through the WaterCAD model server.

This use of a common central model enables both modes to perform the same functions with the same behaviors. For example, graphical layout and model management are virtually identical between the two modes.

Note: Because of the common WaterCAD model server, model data is easily shared between AutoCAD and Stand-Alone modes.

One advantage of Stand-Alone mode is that your interaction is more streamlined and dynamic by virtue of the fact that the editing environment is a dedicated network editor. Also, since AutoCAD is not needed to run in Stand-Alone mode, less system resources and memory are required.

A significant advantage of the AutoCAD mode is that you can create and model your network directly within your primary drafting environment. This gives you access to all of AutoCAD’s powerful drafting and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform WaterCAD modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between WaterCAD and AutoCAD enables extremely detailed and accurate mapping of model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation features

18 Chapter 2 – WaterCAD Main Window

available in AutoCAD. This facility provides the most flexibility and the highest degree of compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data maintained at your organization.

Note: AutoCAD mode is an available feature level. Contact us to upgrade your WaterCAD Stand-Alone version to include the AutoCAD integration feature level.

2.2.2 WaterCAD Main Window Both the WaterCAD Stand-Alone interface and the AutoCAD interface have many components common to Windows-based programs. The following figures illustrate some of the important areas that make up the WaterCAD Stand-Alone and AutoCAD 2002 interfaces (the WaterCAD main window looks fairly similar in AutoCAD 2000 and AutoCAD 2002):

WaterCAD Stand-Alone Interface


WaterCAD AutoCAD 2002 Interface

Notice that many of the window components (such as the menus and toolbars) are very similar for the Stand-Alone editor and AutoCAD. Other features (such as the command line) are only available in AutoCAD.

For more information regarding the various functions and behaviors of AutoCAD, please refer to AutoDesk’s documentation.

2.2.3 Drawing Pane The drawing pane, the center of WaterCAD’s graphical activity, is where the water network elements are displayed. It is the main interactive area for creating elements, editing data, and even displaying results.

In Stand-Alone mode, the drawing pane can also display a background .DXF image. This background can be helpful for aligning and positioning elements, as well as adding additional drafting elements for printing plan views.

In AutoCAD, the drawing pane is where all graphical elements, not just WaterCAD entities, are displayed and manipulated. Lines, arcs, text, and many other drafting elements can be created and modified within the drawing pane.

2.2.4 Status Bar The status bar is located along the bottom of the main application window and provides useful information about application settings, the current user activity, file save status, etc.


Tip: When you position the mouse pointer over a toolbar button or menu item, the status pane will display a descriptive message. Leave the mouse over a section of the status pane to display an informative popup tip.

2.2.5 Menus, Toolbars, and Shortcut Keys Anyone who has ever watched someone else use a computer should realize that not all people use computers in the same way. Some prefer to primarily use the mouse, some the keyboard, and others use a combination of both.

For this reason, Haestad Methods’ programs provide access to the most common features through several means, including:

• Pull-Down Menus

• Toolbars

• Shortcut Keys

• Command Line (AutoCAD Only)

Pull-down Menus As with any Windows-based program, the menu system provides easy access to many features. Items can be accessed by clicking the desired menu text, or by pressing the Alt key to activate the menus and then pressing the key for the underlined letter of the menu item you wish to access.

For example, to open an existing file you can use the mouse to select File / Open, or you can press the Alt and F keys (Alt + F), then O on the keyboard.

Toolbars Toolbar buttons offer one-click access to some of the most commonly used features, giving you a quicker way to perform the most frequent operations.

For example, to open an existing file (the equivalent of selecting File / Open from the pull-down menu), simply click the File Open tool.

Shortcut Keys Shortcut keys are the keyboard equivalent of toolbars. Key combinations - usually a simultaneous application of the Ctrl (Control) key and a letter key - can provide instant access to common features. If a shortcut is available for a menu item, it will be indicated in the menu itself.

For example, to open an existing file (the equivalent of selecting File / Open from the pull-down menus) you can press the Ctrl and O keys (Ctrl + O) at the same time.


Quick Attribute Selector Whenever attributes are selected, such as when setting up annotations or database connections, you can select them from organized categories using the Quick Attribute Selector tool.

Simply click the in the attribute field to bring up the pull-down menu. From this menu you can select attributes from the list of available categories.

2.2.6 Command Line The command line is a special area that is not available in Stand-Alone mode. In AutoCAD mode, this area enables you to type commands directly, rather than using the menus, toolbars, or shortcut keys.

For example, to open an existing AutoCAD file (the equivalent of selecting File / Open from the pull-down menus) you can simply type the command OPEN at the AutoCAD command line.

Many of AutoCAD’s commands are easy to enter at the command line, including accessing drafting tools (like LINE and CIRCLE) and editing tools (like MOVE and ERASE). Modeling elements can also be manipulated through the AutoCAD command line, just as they can be manipulated via the menus or toolbars.

For more information on the AutoCAD command line, please see the AutoCAD documentation.

2.3 WaterCAD Menus

2.3.1 WaterCAD Menus Although the toolbars and shortcut keys provide quick and easy access to commonly used features, the pull-down menu system provides much more comprehensive access to WaterCAD’s properties and behaviors. Since toolbar buttons and shortcut keys do not exist for all of these features, the menus are a logical choice for exploring all areas of WaterCAD. This section will introduce you to many of the things you can do with the menus in WaterCAD and show you how you can access these features, including the toolbar buttons and shortcut keys that are available.

Commands are grouped under several menus, which are pretty much identical between Haestad Methods products. This makes any Haestad Methods product look very familiar once you already know one. The menu system for WaterCAD consists of the following selections:

• File

• Edit

• Analysis

• View

• Tools

• Report

• Help


2.3.2 File Menu The File menu contains many of the items dealing with project management. It provides features to create, read, write, and print project files, as well as features for sharing data with databases and GIS systems.

• New - Create a new project. When you choose this item, a dialog will appear so that you can enter a drive, directory, and filename for your new project file. The Project Setup Wizard will then help you set up your new project.

Toolbar Button:

Shortcut Key: Ctrl + N

• Open - Load an existing project file from disk. When you select this item, a dialog will appear so that you can choose the name and location of the project you want to open.

Toolbar Button:

Shortcut Key: Ctrl + O

• Save - Save the current project file to disk. While saving the project file, the status pane will briefly display a message to show you the progress of the save command.

Toolbar Button:

Shortcut Key: Ctrl + S

• Save As - Save the current project to disk under a different filename. When you use this command, a dialog will appear prompting you to enter the drive, directory, and a new file name for your project.

• Project Summary - Access the Project Summary information, such as the project title and the project engineer.

• Import\Database - Import data from a Microsoft Access database (*.mdb) using one of the standard database import connections.

• Import\Shapefile - Build network elements from ESRI Shapefiles. This command will start the Shapefile Wizard, which will help you bring the GIS elements and their associated data into your project.

• Import\Polyline to Pipe - (Stand-Alone mode only) Build network elements from a .DXF file. This command will start the Polyline to Pipe Wizard, which will help you convert polyline data representing geographical data into your project as pipes and nodes.

Note: A similar command called ‘Change Entities to Pipes’ is available in the AutoCAD version under the Edit menu.

• Import\Network - Import data from KYpipe v1, v2 or v3, EPANet 1.0, or Cybernet v1 and v2 file.

Note: WaterCAD v3 and v4 projects should simply be opened in WaterCAD v5 (as any WaterCAD v5 project), without using the Import command. However, once you save the project in WaterCAD v5, the project files cannot be opened in WaterCAD v3 or v4 any longer.

• Import\Spot Elevations - Bring spot elevation data from a space or comma delimited ASCII file in a variety of formats.


• Import\Submodel - Combine current network with a previously exported WaterCAD submodel. See the Importing a Submodel and Exporting a Submodel topics for more information.

Note: Coordinate data is included in the .wsm file so elements in the imported submodel may overlap elements in the current drawing. Imported elements will not overwrite the existing elements, and may be moved to the desired location.

• Import\DXF Background - (Stand-Alone mode only) Bring a .DXF drawing file into your project as a background map. This command will open a dialog that prompts you to select the name and location of the desired .DXF file.

• Import\WaterCAD - (AutoCAD mode only) Import a Stand-Alone WaterCAD file (*.wcd) into WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode.

Note: WaterCAD has the ability to import demands and patterns from text files. This option is not available from the File Menu along with the other import options, but can be found in the Demand Alternative editor and the Pattern Manager, respectively. Further information regarding these import options can be found in the following topics: Importing Patterns and Importing Demands.

• Export\Database - Export data to a new Microsoft Access database (*.mdb) using one of the standard database connections.

• Export\Shapefile - Export your project to ESRI Shapefile format for access in GIS applications. This command will start the Shapefile Wizard, which will help you create shapefiles with the desired project elements and associated data.

• Export\Spot Elevations - Export spot elevation data to a space or comma delimited ASCII file.

• Export\Submodel - Exports currently selected network elements to .wsm format for importation into other WaterCAD projects.

• Export\.DXF File - Export the entire network drawing to a .DXF format, which can be read by all popular CAD programs. This command will open a dialog prompting you to enter the name and location for the .DXF file you would like to create.

• Synchronize\Database Connections - Access the Database Connection Manager, which allows you to share WaterCAD data with external databases, spreadsheets, and other ODBC compliant sources. Details of this comprehensive feature are explained in the chapter entitled "GIS and Database Connections".

• Synchronize\Shapefile Connections - Access the Shapefile Connection Manager, which allows you to share WaterCAD data with external GIS systems. Details of this feature are explained in the chapter entitled "GIS and Database Connections".

• Print - Print the current view of the project drawing to a printer. Profiles and tabular reports are printed from their respective windows. The print command invokes the standard Print dialog, which allows you to select the printer and set up properties to be used.

Shortcut Key: Ctrl + P

• Print Preview - Open the Print Preview dialog for the current view of the project drawing. This feature allows you to see the drawing as it will be printed before sending it to the printer.

Toolbar Button:

• Print Setup - Select the default printer for WaterCAD to use. You can also use this command to


change options related to the printer driver, such as resolution, portrait or landscape orientation, and other printer details.

• Exit - Close the current project and exit WaterCAD. If you made any changes to the current project, you will be asked if you want to save the project before you exit WaterCAD.

Shortcut Key: Alt + F4

• 1, 2, etc. - The most recently opened project files appear at the bottom of the File menu. Using this file list, you can quickly select and open a recently used file without locating its drive and directory.

2.3.3 Edit Menu The Edit menu provides access to basic commands for controlling WaterCAD elements, including element navigation, selection, deletion, and undo / redo.

In Stand-Alone mode: • Undo [Last Action Performed] - Reverse the last reversible action performed. Reversible actions

include things such as element creation, deletion, editing, and moves. The Undo command cannot reverse the effects of some model actions, such as calculation, database synchronization, scenario creation, and tabular edits. Additionally, to ensure that the model is maintained in a consistent state, the undo/redo history will be flushed whenever an irreversible menu or button command is issued.

Shortcut Key: Ctrl + Z

• Redo [Last Action Undone] - Reverse the effects of the last undone action. Any action that can be undone can be redone.

Shortcut Key: Ctrl + Y

• Delete - Erase selected elements. Deleting an element removes it from all aspects of the project, including all scenarios.

Shortcut Key: Delete

• Select\All - Select all of the elements in the current project.

Shortcut Key: Ctrl + A

• Select\By Element\[Element Type] - Select all elements of a certain type, such as all pipes or all junctions.

• Select\By Selection Set - Select the elements contained in a predefined selection set.

• Select\Clear Selection - Reset (empty) the current selection set.

• Find Element - open the Find Element dialog, which allows you to locate an element and bring it to the center of the drawing pane. This element search is based on the element label (note that this is not case sensitive).

Shortcut Key: Ctrl + F

• Drawing Review - Open the Drawing Review window to isolate elements that may need to be scrutinized for potential problems (orphaned nodes, elements with messages, superimposed nodes, etc).

In AutoCAD mode: • WaterCAD Undo [Last Action Performed] - Reverse the last reversible action performed.

Reversible actions include such things as element creation, deletion, editing, and moves. The effects


of some model actions cannot be reversed, such as calculation, database synchronization, scenario creation, and tabular edits. Additionally, to ensure that the model is maintained in a consistent state the undo/redo history will be flushed whenever an irreversible menu or button command is issued.

• WaterCAD Redo [Last Action Undone] - Reverse the effects of the last undone action. Any action that can be undone can be redone.

• Cut - Delete the selected entities and place them on the Windows clipboard. These items can be pasted into other Windows programs, or back into AutoCAD.

Shortcut Key: Ctrl+X

• Copy - Place the selected entities from the current AutoCAD drawing on the Windows clipboard.

Shortcut Key: Ctrl+C

• Paste - Place the items on the Windows clipboard into the current AutoCAD drawing.

Shortcut Key: Ctrl+V

• Paste Special - Place special items located on the Windows clipboard, such as Excel Spreadsheets and Word documents, into the current AutoCAD drawing.

• Select\All - Select all of the elements in the current project.

• Select\By Element\[Element Type] - Select all elements of a certain type, such as all pipes or all junctions.

• Select\By Selection Set - Select the elements contained in a predefined selection set.

• Select\Clear Selection - Reset (empty) the current selection set.

• Edit Element - Open an element’s dialog. Select this item from the pull-down menu and click the element you wish to edit.

• Edit Elements - Edit a group of elements. Select this item from the pull-down menu, then select a group of elements using the crosshairs or by windowing an area. After the elements have been selected, right-click and the Table Manager will appear. The selected elements will be reported in the tables.

• Modify Elements\Scale Elements - Scale the symbols representing the elements in the current selection set.

• Modify Elements\Rotate Labels - Rotate the labels of the elements in the current selection set.

• Modify Pipes\Insert Bend - Insert a bend along a selected Pressure Pipe Element.

• Modify Pipes\Remove Bend - Delete a bend along a selected Pressure Pipe Element.

• Modify Pipes\Remove All Bends - Delete all the bends along a selected Pressure Pipe Element.

• Modify Pipes\Change Widths - Change the Width of the lines representing pipes.

• Change Entities to Pipes - Build network elements from AutoCAD entities. This command will start the Polyline to Pipe Wizard, which will help you convert the desired polylines representing geographical data into pipes.

Note: A similar command called ‘Import Polyline to Pipe’ is available in the Stand-Alone version (under the File pull-down menu).

• Find Element - Open the Find Element dialog, which allows you to locate an element and bring it to the center of the drawing pane. This element search is based on the element label and is not case


sensitive.

• Review Drawing - Open the Drawing Review window, which is used to isolate elements that need to be scrutinized for potential problems (orphaned nodes, elements with messages, superimposed nodes, etc).

2.3.4 Analysis Menu The Analysis menu contains items useful for managing calculations. These include the scenario and alternative managers and the calculation commands.

• Scenarios - Access the Scenario Manager, allowing you to analyze and recall an unlimited number of "What If?" alternative calculations for your model.

• Alternatives - Access the Alternative Manager, allowing you to organize your data into building blocks to be combined to form scenarios.

• Active Topology - Access the Active Topology Editor, allowing you to temporarily remove elements from the drawing view and network calculations.

• Patterns - Access the Pattern Manager, allowing you to define automatic time-variable changes within the system.

• Logical Controls - Access the Logical Controls Manager, which allows you to create, edit, and find Rule-Based, or Logical, controls.

• Zones- Access the Zone Manager. From here, you can define zones in which to place network elements.

• System Head Curve - Open the System Head Curve Dialog, allowing you to enter the necessary input data to have WaterCAD generate a system head curve.

• Capital Costs - Open the Capital Cost Manager in order to view, edit, or perform Capital Cost Estimating calculations.

Toolbar Button:

• Energy Costs - Open the Energy Cost Manager in order to view, edit, or perform Energy Cost Estimating calculations.

• Darwin Calibrator - Open the Darwin Calibration Manager.

• Compute - Open the Calculation dialog, which gives you access to items such as calculation options and referenced alternatives.

Toolbar Button:

2.3.5 View Menu In both AutoCAD and Stand-Alone mode, the View menu provides access to tools dealing with the drawing pane, toolbar visibility, and so forth.


In Stand-Alone mode, you are provided with the following tools: • Pan - Upon selection hold down the left mouse button to move the drawing

Toolbar Button:

Shortcut Key: Hold down the mouse wheel

• Zoom In - Enlarge the current view of the drawing.

Toolbar Button:

Shortcut Key: + (Keypad)

Mouse: Hold down Ctrl while scrolling Up with mouse wheel

• Zoom Out - Reduce the current view of the drawing.

Toolbar Button:

Shortcut Key: - (Keypad)

Mouse: Hold down Ctrl while scrolling Down with mouse wheel

• Zoom Window - Activate the user-defined zoom tool. This tool enables you to select the corners of the area within the drawing pane that you wish to enlarge.

Toolbar Button:

• Zoom Extents - Reset the drawing zoom factor such that all elements are displayed in the drawing pane.

Toolbar Button:

• Zoom Previous - Return the drawing pane to the most recent view.

Toolbar Button:

• Zoom Center - Open the Zoom Center dialog, which enables you to specify the central coordinates and zoom factor to change the view in the drawing pane.

• Aerial View - Enable or disable the Aerial View window. This window allows you to display a second view of the drawing at a larger scale.

• Quick Edit - Enable or disable the Quick Edit window, which allows you to quickly view input data, output data, and the legend for active color coding for any element. The Quick Edit dialog also allows you to edit the input data.

Toolbar Button:

• Toolbars / Standard - Toggle the display of the Standard toolbar at the top of the window, which provides shortcuts to the most commonly used commands.

• Toolbars / Analysis Toolbar - Toggle the display of the Analysis toolbar, which includes the scenario selection list, as well as the time step selection list if applicable.

• Status Pane - Toggle the display of information at the bottom of the window regarding your current


project.

• Background - Toggle the visibility of the project’s .DXF background. If there is no .DXF background specified for the current project, this menu item will be disabled.

Tip: In AutoCAD mode, refer to the AutoCAD on-line help.

2.3.6 Draw Menu (in AutoCAD Mode Only) The Draw menu is actually an AutoCAD menu that is accessible in the current program.

Tip: You can add additional AutoCAD menus to your Haestad Methods' application menus using AutoCAD's 'menuload' command. See the AutoCAD documentation for more information.

2.3.7 Tools Menu The Tools menu provides general tools for placing or modifying graphical elements, annotating, color coding, contouring, changing the projects options, etc.

• Selection Sets - Access the Selection Set dialog, which allows you to create selection sets of elements based on element labels, element types, filters, and other means.

• Color Coding - Open the Color Coding dialog, which allows you to control the display of elements based on value ranges such as pipe diameter, hydraulic grade, and so forth.

Toolbar Button:

• Element Annotation - Access to the Element Annotation dialog, which allows you to display element attribute labeling, such as pipe diameter and pipe flow.

Toolbar Button:

• Profiling - Open the Profile Setup dialog, which allows you to generate a profile of your piping system along a specified path.

Toolbar Button:

• Contouring - Access the Contour Map Manager to create and view contours.

Toolbar Button:

• Relabel Elements - Open the Relabel Elements dialog, which enables you to renumber some or all of your project elements.

• Element Labeling - Set the format for the labels applied to elements as they are added to the drawing.

• Prototypes - Specify the default values for new network elements.

• Engineering Libraries - Declare the paths to and edit the libraries used in this project.

• User Data Extension - Open the User Data Extension dialog, where you can add and define custom data fields. For instance, you can add new fields such as the pipe installation date.


• FlexUnits - Open the FlexUnits dialog, where you can control units and display precision for any parameter. Note that you can also change the unit and display precision of variables from several other areas within the program.

• Layout\Select - Activate the selection tool used to highlight elements. Once elements are selected, they may be moved or edited.

Toolbar Button:

• Layout\[Element Type] - Activate the corresponding element tool to place elements in the graphical editor.

Tool Palette:

• Layout\Spot Elevation - Activate the spot elevation tool, which is used to add spot elevations.

Toolbar Button:

• Layout\Graphic Annotation - (Stand-Alone mode only). Activate various annotation tools, which enable you to add lines, borders, and text elements to the project drawing.

Toolbar Button:

• Layout\Legend - Activate the legend tool used to add a key for the current drawing color coding for links and nodes.

Toolbar Button:

• Options - Specify settings for the current project, such as the friction method, coordinate system, unit system, and auto-prompting.

• Element Properties - (AutoCAD mode only) Control on which layer each type of object and its associated text is placed. Also controls the text style for labels and annotations.

• Preferences - (AutoCAD mode only) Activate the AutoCAD Preferences command in order to edit general AutoCAD settings.

• Contour Labeling - (AutoCAD mode only) After exporting a contour plot to the AutoCAD drawing, this option allows you to apply various label types to the contour. See the Contour Labeling topic for more details.

2.3.8 Report Menu The Report menu provides access to a collection of preformatted textual and graphical reports. Furthermore, the report menu provides access to FlexTables, which enable you to create your own custom reports.

• Element Details - Open the Detailed Reports dialog, which enables you to print detailed reports for any set of elements.

• Element Results - Open the Analysis Results dialog, which enables you to print reports of the results for any set of elements.

• Element Graphs - Opens the Graph Setup dialog to allow you to set up custom graphs of any element or set of elements.

• Tables - Access the Table Manager, which enables you to open predefined tables or generate your


own custom tables.

Toolbar Button:

• Scenario Summary - Generate a report for the current scenario, including an alternative summary, calculation options, and so forth.

• Project Inventory - Generate a report summarizing the project elements, including the number and breakdown of pipes, the number of manholes, and so forth.

• Plan View - Generate plan view printable reports of the network for either the current drawing display (Current View) or the entire drawing extents (Full View).

2.3.9 Help Menu The Help menu contains items that relate to on-line documentation for WaterCAD (which includes the information contained in the printed documentation, as well as updated information and built-in tutorials).

Help menu items can also be accessed from the Help button:

Toolbar Button:

• Contents - Open the Table of Contents for the on-line Help.

• How to Use Help - Access instructions for using the Help system.

• AutoCAD Help Topics - Access the AutoCAD on-line Help.

• Release Notes - Provide the latest information on the current version of WaterCAD. This topic, which takes the place of a ReadMe file, includes information about new features, tips, performance tuning, and other general information.

• Services - The services menu items will open an Internet browser on Haestad Methods internet site or a local page that provides an overview of the services and products offered by Haestad Methods. In the local page, accessed by selecting Content, there are links to Haestad Methods Internet sites, which are updated frequently.

• Welcome Dialog - (In Stand-Alone mode only). Open the Welcome dialog, which is also shown at program startup.

• Tutorials - Access the interactive tutorials, which guide you through many of the program’s features. Tutorials are a great way to become familiar with new features.

• Using WaterCAD - Open a Help topic with an Introduction to WaterCAD and related elementary information.

• How Do I - Provide instructions for tasks commonly performed within the program, as well as frequently asked questions.

• About WaterCAD - Open a dialog displaying product and registration information.


2.4 WaterCAD Toolbars

2.4.1 Toolbar Button Summaries The toolbar buttons are grouped based on functionality, so element creation tools are all together in the tool palette, results tools are all together on the tool pane, and so forth.

Note: In AutoCAD mode, some tools are provided by AutoCAD itself (such as file open and save, zoom, and so forth), so these tools are not included on the WaterCAD toolbars.

2.4.2 Tool Pane Summary The tool pane contains buttons for project management, data management, and results presentation.

File Tools (Stand-Alone Only)

New - Create a new project.

Open - Open an existing project.

Save - Save the current project.

Print Preview - View a print preview of the current view.

Zoom Tools (Stand-Alone Only)

Zoom Extents - Zoom to the full extents of the drawing.

Zoom In

Zoom Out

Zoom Window - Zoom to an area selected by you.

Zoom Previous - Zoom to the previous view.

Calculation and Data Management Tools

GO - Open the Calculation dialog for the current scenario.

Tabular Reports- Open the Table Manager dialog.


Reporting Tools

Color Coding - Color code the network.

Annotation - Annotate elements with input or output data.

Profile - Open the Profile wizard to develop a network profile.

Contours - Open the Contours window to generate contours of various attributes.

QuickView - Open the QuickView window for easy data viewing.

Updates and Help Tools

Globe - If you are connected to the Internet, this will take you to Haestad Methods’ web site for product updates and other services.

Help - Access the on-line help system.

2.4.3 The Tool Palette

The tool palette contains a Select tool, Network Element tools, and Annotation tools.

• The Select tool allows you to select elements for group editing, detailed reporting, deleting, or moving elements.

• The Network Element tools allow you to add elements to your network. These tools can also be used to split pipes and morph nodes.

• The Graphic Annotation tools can be used to add polylines, borders, and text to your drawing. You can also add a link or node color-coding legend using the Legend tool.

Note: Click a tool to select it as the active tool. In Stand-Alone mode, when a tool is selected it will be highlighted, and the cursor appearance will change to reflect the active tool.

Tip: In Stand-Alone mode, right-click the tool palette to access the Prototype Manager for setting the default data for each type of network element.

2.4.4 Analysis Toolbar The Analysis toolbar displays the active scenario and provides a means for changing the current scenario and accessing the Scenario Manager. All input and output information displayed in the tables, profiles, element dialogs, and annotation will be related to the active scenario shown on the Analysis toolbar.


You can change the current scenario from the combo box. You can access the Scenario Manager by

clicking the Scenario Manager button . To the right of the Scenario Manager button are the Active

Topology Editor , Darwin Calibrator , and Cost Manager buttons (Capital and Energy Cost

Managers). .

To the left of the Scenario combo box are the Extended Period Simulation Analysis Controls. These include VCR-style controls to move through the time steps or to animate the drawing view and the Increment combo box which controls how many time steps are skipped when the Forward or Reverse buttons are clicked. This increment also controls which time steps are displayed during animation.

By clicking the down arrow next to the Play button, you can access the following Animation Options:

2.4.5 Animation Options Clicking the Animation Options button provides the following functions:

• Animation Delay – Opens a dialog that allows you to set the delay between animated frames.

• Animate All Windows – If this option is selected, then every window capable of being animated will animate when the play button is clicked. If the option is not selected then only the current window will animate.

2.4.6 Other Toolbar Buttons Some of the following toolbar buttons appear on secondary windows, such as the Print Preview window and the Profile window, available throughout the program:

• File

• Print

• Print Preview

• Copy to Clipboard

• Undo

• Redo

• Options

• Page Up/Down

• Close

• Help

Print Preview Open a Print Preview on the contents of the current window.


Page Up/Down Navigate between pages of a multi-page report.

File Export the data in the current window to a file format that can be used by other applications (such as .DXF and ASCII text files).

Copy to Clipboard Copy data to the clipboard, where it can be pasted into most Windows-based spreadsheet, database, and word processor applications.

Print Print the contents of the current window.

Options Options vary depending on the context. They may include things such as printer setup, or graph options for the current window.

Close Close the current window.

2.5 The Status Bar

2.5.1 Status Bar Contents Information displayed in the status bar includes:

(Stand-Alone mode only)

• General Status Information

• File Status


• Unit System Status

• DXF Background Status

• Cursor Location

• Calculation Results Status

The AutoCAD status pane contains similar information, but deals with your AutoCAD drawing status rather than your hydraulic project. For more information about AutoCAD’s status pane, please refer to your AutoCAD documentation.

2.5.2 General Status Information General status information includes messages that relate to the user’s current activities. These messages consist of information such as pull-down menu command descriptions, and indications regarding the progress of an executing command.

2.5.3 File Status If changes have been made since the last time the project file was saved, an image of a diskette appears in the status pane. If the file is currently in a saved state, no such image will appear.

2.5.4 Unit System Status The unit system box on the task bar indicates which unit system, System International (metric) or US Customary (English), is currently active. It does not indicate changes to units of individual fields.

2.5.5 DXF Background Status This area of the status bar simply indicates whether a .DXF background is currently visible for the active project.

2.5.6 Cursor Location The status bar displays the current X and Y (or Northing and Easting) coordinates for the cursor’s position within the drawing pane.

2.5.7 Calculation Results Status In Stand-Alone mode, if the current calculation results are out-of-date or otherwise invalid, an indicator will appear in the status bar that signifies that the results no longer match the state of your input data. If the results are currently valid, no such indicator will appear.


Notes


Chapter 3

Quick Start Lessons

3.1 Overview The purpose of Chapter 3 is to provide step-by-step lessons, in order to give you hands-on experience with many of the features and capabilities of WaterCAD. These detailed lessons will assist you in getting started with the exploration and use of the software. Before proceeding with the lessons, however, it is a good idea to run through the brief online tutorials, accessed from the Help menu. These interactive tutorials will take you rapidly through overviews of key program features.

Another way to become acquainted with WaterCAD is to run and experiment with the included sample files, located in the Haestad\Wtrc\Sample directory. Remember, you can right-click or press the F1 key to access the context-sensitive online Help at any time.

Note: In order to follow these lessons, you can either do them in sequence, since each lesson uses the results of the previous ones, or do the lessons in any order, using the catch up files located in Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson.

3.2 Lesson 1 - Constructing a Network and Performing a Steady-State Analysis

WaterCAD is an extremely efficient tool for laying out a water distribution network. It is easy to prepare a schematic or scaled model and let WaterCAD take care of the link-node connectivity.

In constructing a distribution network for this lesson, you do not need to be concerned with assigning labels to pipes and nodes, because WaterCAD will assign labels automatically. When creating a schematic drawing, pipe lengths are entered manually. In a scaled drawing, pipe lengths are automatically calculated from the position of the pipes’ bends and start and stop nodes on the drawing pane.

In this lesson, you will create and analyze the network shown below. You will use a scaled background drawing for most of the network; however, four of the pipes are not to scale, and will have user-defined lengths.

38 Chapter 3 – Quick Start Lessons

Water Distribution Network

Notes: In this network, the modeling of a reservoir connected to a pump simulates a connection to the main water distribution system. Simplifying the network in this way can approximate the pressures supplied to the system at the connection under a range of demands. This type of approximation is not always applicable, and care should be taken when modeling a network in this way. It is more accurate to trace the network back to the source.

If at any time during this lesson the program asks, "Do you wish to reset all calculated results to N/A?" click NO.

Part 1 - Creating a New Project File

AutoCAD specific instructions Stand-Alone specific instructions

1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD Stand-Alone. If the Welcome to WaterCAD dialog appears, select the Close button.

2. Open the Global Options tab, accessed from the Tools\Options pull-down menu. Since we will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System International. Click OK.

3. Select File\New from the pull-down menu. Click No when asked if you want to save the current project.

4. In the Create Project File As dialog, double-click the ‘Lesson’ folder, enter the file name ‘MyLesson1.wcd’ for your project, and click Save. The Project Setup Wizard will open.


1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD. Open the Global Options tab, accessed from the Tools\Options pull-down menu. Since we will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System International. Click OK.

2. Select File\Open from the pull-down menu. When prompted, do not save changes to the current drawing. If the Select File dialog opens, move to step 3. Otherwise, do the following:

Press the Esc key. At the command prompt, type filedia, press the Enter key to activate the command, and then enter a new value of 1. Select File\Open from the pull-down menu again, and do not save changes to the current drawing. Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear as dialogs or simply at the command prompt.

3. Select the existing AutoCAD file ‘Lesson1.dwg’ from the Wtrc\Lesson folder. With the drawing open, select File\Save As from the pull-down menu. In the Save Drawing As dialog, double-click the ‘Lesson’ folder, enter the filename as ‘MyLesson1.dwg’ and click Save to save the file in your \Wtrc\Lesson directory.

4. Now, select the Layout Elements tool in the WaterCAD toolbar. Then, move the cursor onto the drawing pane and right-click to select Reservoir from the pop-up menu. Click the approximate location of reservoir R-1 (see diagram above). You will be prompted to set up the project. Click Yes to open the Project Setup Wizard.

The remaining commands are for both Stand-Alone and AutoCAD modes. 5. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project ‘Lesson 1 - Steady State Analysis’ and click the Next

button.

6. Choose your desired settings. For this lesson, use the program default values. Click the Next button.

7. Select the Scaled radio button located under the Drawing Scale option. Set the horizontal scale to 1 mm = 4000 mm, and the vertical scale to 1 mm = 400 mm. Stand-Alone users only: Select the Browse button next to the Background Filename box. Select ‘Lesson1.dxf’ from the ‘Lesson’ folder and click Open. All users: Click the Next button to continue.

8. The element prototype buttons allow you to set default values for each element type. We will use the default prototype values in this lesson, so click the Finished button.

Part 2 - Laying Out the Network 1. To draw the skeletonized water distribution network shown previously, select the Pipe Layout tool

from the toolbar. Then, move the cursor onto the drawing pane and right-click to select Reservoir from the pop-up menu. Click the approximate location of reservoir R-1 (see the preceding Water Distribution Network diagram).

2. Next, move the cursor to the location of pump P-1. Right-click and select Pump from the pop-up menu. Click to place it. Place junction J-1 by right-clicking, selecting Junction from the pop-up menu, and clicking the appropriate location.

3. Proceed with laying out the network by placing junctions J-2, J-3, and J-4. Close the loop by selecting junction J-1. Right-click and select Done from the pop-up menu.


Tips: To construct a pipe with bends in the Stand-Alone version, hold down the Ctrl key and click the location of the bend. Then, release the Ctrl key to enter the next element. In the AutoCAD version, right-click and select Bend from the pop-up menu, then insert the bend.

You can insert bends after a pipe is constructed by right-clicking the pipe in Stand-Alone and selecting Bend\Add Bend. Then, drag the new vertex to the appropriate location. In AutoCAD, select Edit\Modify Pipes\Insert Bend, click the pipe, and click to place the new vertex.

4. Select the Pipe Layout tool again and click junction J-3. Move the cursor to the location of J-5, and click to insert the element. Right-click and select Done.

5. Insert the PRV (Valve\PRV on the pop-up menu), junction J-6, and the tank by selecting the Pipe Layout tool and placing the elements in their appropriate locations. Be sure to lay out the pipes in numerical order (P-7 through P-9), so that their labels correspond to the labels in the diagram. Right-click and select Done from the pop-up menu to terminate the Pipe Layout command.

6. Insert the tank, T-1, and the pipe connecting it to node J-3. Right-click and select Done. The network layout is now complete.

7. Save the WaterCAD network by clicking the Disk icon on the toolbar or by choosing File\Save.

Part 3 - Entering Data There are four ways to enter and modify element data in WaterCAD:

• Dialogs - You can use the Select tool and double-click an element to bring up its editor. In AutoCAD, click the element once with the Select tool to open the element’s editor.

• FlexTables - You can click the Tabular Reports button to bring up dynamic tables that allow you to edit and display the model data in a tabular format. You can edit the data as you would in a spreadsheet.

• Database Connections - The database connection feature allows you to import and export element data directly from external sources such as Excel spreadsheets, GIS, Jet Databases like Microsoft Access, or any other ODBC database. This process is further explained in the chapter on Database Connections, in the Database Connections tutorial, and in Lesson 7.

• Alternative Editors - Alternatives are used to enter data for different "What If?" situations used in Scenario Management. This topic is covered extensively in the Scenario Management chapter, in the Scenario tutorial, and in Lesson 3.


Part 4 - Entering Data through Dialogs To access an element’s dialog in Stand-Alone mode, simply double-click the element with the cursor. In AutoCAD, first click the Select tool on the toolbar, then click the element whose attributes you wish to modify.

1. Open the Reservoir Editor for reservoir R-1, and select the General tab. Enter the hydraulic grade line elevation from the following Reservoir Data table.

Reservoir Data

Reservoir Elevation(m)

Zone

R-1 198 Connection Zone

General Tab

2. Click on the ellipsis (…) button next to the Zone field. This action opens the Zone Manager. Click Add, then enter a label for the new pressure zone, ‘Connection Zone’. Click OK, and OK again to exit the Zone Manager.

3. Finally, select the zone you just created from the Zone list box, and then click OK to close the Reservoir Editor.


4. Open the Tank Editor for tank T-1. Enter the data from the table below. Leave the other parameters set to their default values. Click OK to exit the dialog.

Tank Data

General Tab

Tank Zone Section Max.Elev. (m)

InitialElev.(m)

Min.Elev.(m)

Base Elev. (m)

Diameter(m)

T-1 Zone-1 Constant Area 226 225 220 200 8

Section Tab

5. Open the Pump Editor for pump PMP-1. Select Standard (3 Point) from the Pump Type list box. Enter the pump elevation and the discharge curve as given in the Pump Data tables below; however, before entering the first discharge value (3800 l/min), make sure to change the discharge units from m3/min to l/min. Do this by right-clicking in the Design Discharge box, selecting Design Properties, and selecting l/min from the Units list box. Also, notice the pump has an upstream pipe and a downstream pipe to define the direction. If the pump is ever going in the wrong direction, simply click the Reverse button to change it. In this example, the upstream pipe should be P-1, and the downstream pipe should be P-2. Click OK to exit the dialog.

Pump Data

Pump Elevation(m)

PumpType

PMP-1 193 3 Point

General Tab

Head (m)

Discharge(l/min)

Shutoff: 30.0 0Design: 27.4 3800

Max. Operating 24.8 7500

General Tab

6. Enter the Valve Editor for valve PRV-1. Use the information given in the PRV Data table below. Leave the other parameters set to their default values. Click OK to exit the dialog.

PRV Data

Valve Elevation (m)

Diameter(mm) Status Settings Pressure

(kPa)PRV-1 165 150 Active Pressure 390

General Tab

7. Enter the data for the junctions as outlined in the following Junction Node Data table. However, before entering the demand data, right-click in the Demand column, and select Demand Properties from the pop-up menu. From the Units list box, select l/min and click OK. Leave all other fields set to their default values.

Note: Use the procedure described in steps 2 and 3 above to create the new Zone, ‘Zone-2’.


Junction Node Data

Demand Tab

Junction GroundElevation

(m)

Zone Demand(l/min)

J-1 184 Zone-1 38J-2 185 Zone-1 31J-3 184 Zone-1 34J-4 183 Zone-1 38J-5 185.5 Zone-1 350J-6 165 Zone-2 356

General Tab

8. Finally, you need to specify user-defined lengths for pipes P-1, P-7, P-8, P-9 and P-10, since the reservoir, tank, PRV, and nodes J-5 and J-6 are only shown in approximate locations. Select pipe P-1 to open the Pipe Editor. Click the box labeled User Defined Length to activate this feature. Then, enter a value of .01 m in the Length field. Because you are using the reservoir and pump to simulate the connection to the main distribution system, you want headloss through this pipe to be negligible. Therefore, the length is very small and the diameter will be large. Repeat this procedure for pipes P-7, P-8, P-9 and P-10, using the user-defined lengths in the table below.

Pipe Data

Pipe Material

Diameter (mm)

User-Defined Length

(m) P-1 Ductile Iron 1000 0.01 P-2 Ductile Iron 150 N/A P-3 Ductile Iron 150 N/A P-4 PVC 150 N/A P-5 Ductile Iron 150 N/A P-6 Ductile Iron 150 N/A P-7 PVC 150 400P-8 Ductile Iron 150 500 P-9 Ductile Iron 150 31

P-10 Ductile Iron 150 100

Part 5 - Entering Data through FlexTables It is often more convenient to enter data for similar elements in tabular form, rather than to individually open a dialog for an element, enter the data into the dialog, and then select the next element. Using tabular reports, you can enter the data as you would enter data into a spreadsheet.

1. To access the tabular report, click the Tabular Reports button on the toolbar.

2. Click the Pipe Report and click OK. Note that the white fields are editable, but the yellow fields are not. The pipes may not be in alphanumeric order in the table. To sort the table by pipe label, right-click the Label column heading. Select Sort\Ascending from the pop-up menu that appears.


3. For each of the ten pipes, enter the section size and the pipe material as outlined in the Pipe Data table above. Notice that the C values for the pipes will be automatically assigned to preset values based on the material; however, these values could be modified if a different coefficient were required.

4. Leave other data set to their default values. Click the Close button to exit the table when you are finished.

Part 6 - Performing a Steady-State Analysis 1. Click the GO button to bring up the Calculation dialog. Make sure that the Calculation Type is

marked as Steady-State.


2. Click the GO button on the dialog to analyze the model. When calculations are completed, a Results

report is displayed.

3. The Results tab displays a summary of model results. Scroll through the summary to get an idea of the results that are given. There should be a green light displayed on the Results tab of the dialog. You can quickly tell if there were warnings or failures with a glance at the light. A green light indicates no warnings or failures, a yellow light indicates warnings, while a red light indicates problems.


4. Click Close when you are done. After a model run, all the calculated fields in dialogs and tabular reports will display results. See Lesson 4 for an overview of the output options available.

Note: Before proceeding to the next lesson, save this project (for instance as ‘MyLesson1.wcd’ in Stand-Alone mode or ‘MyLesson1.dwg’ in AutoCAD mode).

3.3 Lesson 2 - Extended Period Simulation This lesson will illustrate how WaterCAD can model the behavior of a water distribution system through time using an extended period simulation (EPS). An EPS can be conducted for any duration specified by the user. System conditions are computed over the given duration at a specified time increment. Some of the types of system behaviors that can be analyzed using an EPS include how tank levels fluctuate, when pumps are running, whether valves are open or closed, and how demands change throughout the day.

Note: If, at any time during this lesson, the program asks, "Do you wish to reset all calculated results to N/A?" click NO.

This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 1. If you have not completed Lesson 1, then open the project ‘Lesson2.wcd’ (Lesson2.dwg in the AutoCAD version) from the Wtrc\Lesson directory. If you did complete Lesson 1, then you can use the ‘MyLesson1’ file you created.


After you have opened the file, select File\Save As from the pull-down menu. Type the filename ‘MyLesson2’ and click Save. Select File\Project Summary, and change the Project Title to ‘Lesson 2 - Extended Period Simulation’. Click OK.

Part 1 - Creating Demand Patterns Water demand in a distribution system fluctuates over time. For example, residential water use on a typical weekday is higher than average in the morning before people go to work, and is usually highest in the evening when residents are preparing dinner, washing clothes, etc. This variation in demand over time can be modeled using demand patterns. Demand patterns are simply multipliers that vary with time and are applied to a given base demand, most typically the average daily demand.

In this lesson, you will be dividing the single ‘Fixed’ demands for each junction node in Lesson 1 into two individual demands with different demand patterns. One demand pattern will be created for residential use, and another for commercial use. You will enter demand patterns at the junction nodes through the Junction Editors.

1. Open the editor for Junction J-1 and select the Demand tab. By default, the demand pattern is set to ‘Fixed.’ In the Demands table, leave the first row set to Demand, and set the baseline load to 23 l/min. Click the corresponding cell in the Pattern column, and select the ellipsis (…) button that appears. This action opens the Pattern Manager. Click the Add button to create a new pattern for this model.

2. In the Pattern dialog, enter the name Residential in the Label field. Leave the Start Time to

12:00:00 AM and set the Starting Multiplier to 0.5. Under Format, select the radio button labeled Stepwise. The resulting demand pattern will have multipliers that remain constant until the next pattern time increment is reached.


3. In the Pattern table, enter the times and multipliers from the table below. Click OK when you are finished to return to the Pattern Manager.

Residential Pattern Data

Time from Start (hr)

Multiplier

3 0.46 1.09 1.3

12 1.215 1.218 1.621 0.824 0.5

Note that the multiplier for the last time given (24 hr) must be the same as the Starting Multiplier (0.5). These values are equal because the demand curve represents a complete cycle, with the last point the same as the first.

4. While we are in the Pattern Manager, we will go ahead and create a pattern for commercial demands. Select the Add button, and create a pattern labeled Commercial, having a Start Time of 12:00:00 AM and a Starting Multiplier of 0.4. Enter the data below into the Pattern table. This pattern will also be stepwise. Click OK when you are finished to return to the Pattern Manager.

Commercial Pattern Data


Multiplier

3 0.66 0.89 1.6

12 1.615 1.218 0.821 0.624 0.4

5. Click OK to return to the Junction Editor for J-1. In the Pattern list box for the first row, select ‘Residential’ from the choice list. In the second row, enter a demand of 15 l/min. Select ‘Commercial’ as the pattern for this row. Click OK to exit the junction J-1 editor.


6. Go into the Demands table in the editors for junctions J-2, J-3, J-4, J-5 and J-6 and enter the demand data from the table below. We will use the Residential and Commercial demand patterns already created, so just select the appropriate pattern from the list box.

JunctionResidential

Demand (l/min)

Commercial Demand (l/min)

J-2 23 8J-3 23 11J-4 23 15J-5 350 N/AJ-6 280 76

Demand Tab

7. Now, we will set up an additional demand pattern to simulate a three-hour fire at node J-6. In the Demand tab of Junction Editor for J-6, insert an additional demand of 2000 l/min in row 3 of the Demands table.

8. Click the Pattern column for row 3 and select the ellipsis (…) button to open the Pattern Manager. Select the Add button to add a new demand pattern. In the Pattern dialog, enter a Label of ‘3-Hour Fire’, a Start Time of 12:00:00 AM, and a Starting Multiplier of 0.00. Select the radio button for Stepwise format.

9. Enter the information given below into the pattern table.

3-Hour Fire Pattern Data


Multiplier

18 1.0021 0.0024 0.00

10. After you have filled in the table, select the Report button at the bottom of the dialog box. Choose Graph from the menu to display a graph of the demand pattern. Notice that the value of the multiplier is zero, except for the period between 18 and 21 hours, when it is 1.0. Since we input the demand as 2000 l/min, the result will be a 2000 l/min fire flow at junction J-6 between hours 18 and 21.

11. Click Close to exit the graph, OK to exit the Pattern dialog and OK again to exit the Pattern Manager. Finally, select your new pattern, ‘3-Hour Fire’, from the Pattern selection box in row 3 of the Demands table, and click OK to exit the Junction Editor.

Part 2 - Running an Extended Period Simulation 1. To run the Extended Period Simulation, click the GO button on the toolbar. Select the radio button for

Extended Period. Accept the defaults of a Start Time of 12:00:00, a Duration of 24 hours, and a Hydraulic Time Step of 1 hour. Then, click the GO button to run the analysis.


2. After the model runs, the green light on the Results tab indicates that there are not any warnings for the analysis and WaterCAD was able to compute a balanced solution for the distribution network. Click the Close button.

3. You can view results by opening individual element dialog boxes, clicking the Report button to generate detailed reports and graphs for the individual elements, as well as through output tables, color-coding, profiling, contouring, and annotation. For example, open the Valve Editor for the PRV and click the Report button. Select Detailed Report from the menu. Scroll and page through the report to view the Calculated Results Summary. Notice that the PRV is throttling, except for hours 18 to 20, when the fire occurs and the downstream pressure setting can no longer be maintained. See Lesson 5 on reporting results for more information.

Save this project before proceeding to Lesson 3.

3.4 Lesson 3 - Scenario Management One of WaterCAD’s many powerful and versatile project tools is Scenario Management. Scenarios allow you to calculate multiple "What If?" situations in a single project file. You may wish to try several designs and compare the results, or analyze an existing system using several different demand alternatives and compare the resulting system pressures. A scenario is a set of alternatives, while alternatives are groups of actual model data. Both scenarios and alternatives are based on a parent/child relationship where a child scenario or alternative inherits data from the parent scenario or alternative.

In Lessons 1 and 2, you constructed the water distribution network, defined the characteristics of the various elements, entered demands and demand patterns, and performed steady-state and extended period


simulations. In this lesson, you will set up the scenarios needed to test four "What If?" situations for our water distribution system. These "What If?" situations will involve changing demands and pipe sizes. At the end of the lesson, you will compare all of the results using the Scenario Comparison tool.

Note: If at any time during this lesson the program asks, "Do you wish to reset all calculated results to N/A?" click NO.

This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 2. If you completed Lesson 2, open the project you created previously, MyLesson2 in the Wtrc\Lesson directory. Otherwise, open the file called lesson3.wcd (lesson3.dwg in the AutoCAD version).

After you have opened the file, select File\Save As from the pull-down menu. Type the filename ‘MyLesson3’ and click Save. Select File\Project Summary, and change the Project Title to ‘Lesson 3 - Scenario Management’. Click OK.

Part 1 - Creating a New Alternative First, you need to set up the required data sets, or Alternatives. An Alternative is a group of data that describes a specific part of the model. There are thirteen Alternative types: Physical, Active Topology, Demand, Initial Settings, Operational, Logical Control Set, Age, Constituent, Trace, Fire Flow, Capital Cost, Energy Cost, and User Data. In this example, you need to set up a different Physical or Demand Alternative for each design trial you want to evaluate. Each Alternative will contain different pipe size or demand data.

In WaterCAD, we create families of Alternatives from Base Alternatives. Base Alternatives are Alternatives that do not inherit data from any other Alternative. Child Alternatives can be created from the Base Alternative. A Child Alternative inherits the characteristics of its Parent, but specific data can be overridden to be local to the Child. A Child Alternative can, in turn, be the Parent of another Alternative.

1. Select Analysis\Alternatives from the pull-down menu. Highlight the Demand alternative in the left pane of the dialog. Currently, there is only one Demand Alternative listed. The Base-Demand Alternative contains the demands for the current distribution system.

2. You can change the default ‘Base-Average Daily’ demand name to be something more descriptive of our data. Click the Rename button, and enter the new name, ‘Average Daily with 2000 l/min Fire Flow’.

3. You would like to add a Child of the Base-Demands Alternative because the new Alternative will inherit most data. Then, you can locally change the data that you want to modify. You will modify the existing demand data by increasing the fire flow component at node J-6 from 2000 l/min to 4000 l/min. Click the Add Child button and enter the name ‘4000 l/min Fire Flow’ for the new Alternative, and then click OK.

4. The Demand Alternative Editor for the new Alternative will appear showing you the data that was inherited from the Parent Alternative. Notice the key at the bottom describing the check boxes. As the key indicates, all of your data is inherited. If you change any piece of data, the check box will become checked because that record is now local to this Alternative and not inherited from the Parent.


5. Click in the Demand Summary column for node J-6. A button appears. Click this button to open the

Demand table for this node. Change the 2000 l/min fire demand to 4000 l/min, and click OK. Click Close to exit the Alternative Editor and return to the Alternatives Manager, and Close again to exit back to the drawing pane.

Part 2 - Editing and Creating Scenarios Alternatives are the building blocks of a Scenario. A Scenario is a set of one of each of the thirteen types of Alternatives, plus all of the calculation information needed to solve a model.

Just as there are Base, Parent, and Child Alternatives, there are also Base, Parent, and Child Scenarios. The difference is that instead of inheriting model data, Scenarios inherit sets of Alternatives. To change the new Scenario, change one or more of the new Scenario’s Alternatives. For this lesson, we will create a new Scenario for each different set of conditions we need to evaluate.

1. Select Analysis\Scenarios from the pull-down menu. You are now in the Scenario Manager. There is always a default Base Scenario that is comprised of the thirteen base Alternatives listed in the right pane. The left pane of the Scenario Manager contains a list of the Scenarios. Only the Base is available initially, because we have not created any new Scenarios.

2. You should first rename the Base Scenario as something more descriptive. Click the Scenario Management button and select Rename from the pull-down menu. The Scenario name in the left pane will become editable. Type in a descriptive name for the Scenario, such as ‘2000 l/min, 3-hour Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS)’ and then press the Enter key.

3. Now, you will create a Child Scenario from our existing Base Scenario, to incorporate our new Demand Alternative. Click the Scenario Management menu button, and select Add\Child Scenario from the menu. Type in a Scenario name of ‘4000 l/min Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS)’ and click OK. A dialog for the new Scenario appears listing the Alternatives as inherited from the Base Scenario.


4. Your new Child Scenario initially consists of the same Alternatives as its Parent Scenario, except the Demand Alternative should be the new Alternative you created, ‘4000 l/min Fire Flow’. Check the box next to Demand. A selection box for this Alternative appears. Click the box, and select the new Alternative from the list. The new Alternative is no longer inherited from the Parent, but is local to this Scenario. Click Close to exit the Scenario.

Part 3 - Calculate and Compare 1. You are going to calculate both of the Scenarios at the same time using the Batch Run tool. Click the

Batch Run button on the left side of the Scenario Management dialog. Check the boxes next to both Scenarios, and then click the Batch button. Click Yes at the prompt to run the batch for two Scenarios. When they have finished computing, click OK.

2. You can see the results for each Scenario by highlighting it in the Scenario list. Click the Results tab at the top right in the dialog box to see the selected Scenario’s results. We can see that the Scenarios are different, but what exactly is different about them? We will use the Scenario Comparison tool to compare the results. Click the Scenario Comparison button to start the Annotation Comparison Wizard. Select the ‘2000 l/min, 3-hour Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS)’ Scenario in the first list box and the ‘4000 l/min Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS)’ in the second list box. Click the Next button.

3. We will compare the results for pressures at the junctions and velocities in the pipes, so click the check boxes next to Pressure Junction and Pressure Pipe, and then click Next.


4. Select Pressure from the list box under the Attributes column for Pressure Junction Annotation. Edit the entry in the Mask column by deleting the label name, so that only the pressure and unit variables (%v %u) remain. Click Next.

5. Select Velocity from the list box under the Attributes column for Pressure Pipe Annotation. Again, you can edit the label in the Mask column. Click Next. Check to make sure your annotation is correct, and then click Finished.

6. A plan view of the system with annotation displaying the difference between the two Scenarios will appear. To better view the data, maximize the window and use the zoom buttons from the upper toolbar to look at different areas of the model. The difference between the two is found by subtracting Scenario 1 from Scenario 2. For example, say Scenario 1 has a pressure of 50 kPa at a junction, and Scenario 2, which represents a future scenario, has a pressure of 45 kPa at the same junction. Comparing these pressures for Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 would result in annotation stating a difference of -5 kPa. When you have more than two scenarios, you can select different combinations of the scenarios from the two list boxes and click the Update button to view the differences between the two. You could also click the Auto Update check box and the differences will automatically update every time you change the combination of scenarios and time increments in the list boxes.

7. Check the Auto Update box and use the VCR-style buttons to scroll through different increments. Look at the difference in pressures at junction J-6 during the fire flow (between 18 and 21 hours). There is a very large pressure drop due to the substantial increase in demand. In the next part of this lesson, we will look at scenarios to reduce this decrease in pressure.

Part 4 - Physical Alternative You need to further examine what is going on in the system as a result of the fire flow, and find solutions to any problems that might have arisen in the network as a result. You can review output tables to quickly see what the pressures and velocities are within the system, and create new Alternatives and Scenarios to capture your modifications.


1. Click the Close button to exit the Scenario Comparison Window. Click Close again to exit the Scenario Manager and return to the drawing pane.

2. Select the Tabular Reports button from the toolbar. Highlight Junction Report in the list, and click OK. Select ‘4000 l/min Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS)’ in the Scenario list box, and set the Time to 18.00 hr. Most of the system pressures look acceptable at this time increment; however, the pressure at J-6 is actually negative.

3. Click the Options button and select Table Manager from the menu. Highlight Pipe Report, and click OK. In the Pipe Report table, notice that the headloss gradient for pipes P-8 and P-9 are significantly higher than in the rest of the system. We can reduce the headloss gradient by increasing the sizes of these pipes. The pressure at J-6 should increase as a consequence.

4. Click Close to exit the table. We will create a new Scenario having a new Physical Alternative with the pipe sizes for P-8 and P-9 increased to 200 mm. Select Analysis\Scenarios from the pull-down menu. Highlight ‘4000 l/min Fire Flow at J-6 (EPS)’ in the list of Scenarios, click the Scenario Management button, and select Add\Child Scenario from the menu.

5. Name the new Scenario ‘P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm’, and click OK.

6. Under the Alternatives tab of the Scenario dialog, check the box for Physical. Click the ellipsis (…) button to open the Physical Properties Alternatives dialog. Click the Add Child button, and name the new Alternative ‘P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm’. Click OK.

7. Under the Pipe tab for this Alternative, change the pipe sizes in the table for pipes P-8 and P-9 from 150 mm to 200 mm. Click the Close button to exit the editor, and click Close again to exit the Physical Properties Alternatives dialog.


8. Select the new Physical Alternative from the list box for the scenario, and click Close to return to the Scenario Manager. Select Batch Run to run the model. Turn off the check boxes for the first two scenarios, and turn on the check box for ‘Pipes P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm’. Click Batch and select Yes to confirm and run the Scenario. Click OK when the run is complete.

9. Close the Scenario Manager and return to the drawing pane. Select the Tabular Reports button from the toolbar, and open the Junction Report. In the Scenario list box, select the new Scenario, and examine the pressures at J-6 for 18, 19, and 20 hours. The pressures for this node are now at acceptable levels.

If you would like to learn more about the various results presentation methods available in WaterCAD, see Lesson 4.

Close the open dialogs and save this project before proceeding with Lesson 4, Reporting Results.

3.5 Lesson 4 - Reporting Results An important feature in all water distribution modeling software is the ability to present results clearly. This lesson outlines several of WaterCAD’s reporting features, including:

• Reports, which display and print information on any or all elements in the system.

• Tabular Reports (FlexTables), for viewing, editing, and presentation of selected data and elements in a tabular format.

• Profiles, to graphically show, in a profile view, how a selected attribute, such as hydraulic grade, varies along an interconnected series of pipes.

• Contouring, to show how a selected attribute, such as pressure, varies throughout the distribution system.

• Element Annotation, for dynamic presentation of the values of user-selected variables in the plan view.

• Color Coding, which assigns colors based on ranges of values to elements in the plan view. Color coding is useful in performing quick diagnostics on the network.


For this lesson, you will use the system from Lesson 3, saved as ‘MyLesson3' in the Wtrc\Lesson directory. If you did not complete Lesson 3, you may use the file lesson4.wcd (lesson4.dwg in AutoCAD). After you have opened the file, select File\Save As from the pull-down menu. Type the filename ‘MyLesson4’ and click Save. Select File\Project Summary from the pull-down menu, and change the Project Title to ‘Lesson 4 - Reporting Results’.

Part 1 - Reports 1. Select the ‘2000 l/min, 3 hour fire flow at J-6 (EPS)’ Scenario from the Scenario toolbar. Click the

GO button to open the Batch Run dialog, select that scenario from the list, and click GO to analyze it.

2. When the Results dialog appears, notice that the Results report can be saved to a file or printed using the buttons in the top left corner. This report displays key system characteristics on a formatted page. In an EPS analysis such as this one, these characteristics are displayed for each time increment. If there were any warnings or problems, they would also appear here.


3. Click Close. Note that the results for the current Scenario (the Scenario appearing in the list box in the toolbar) can be accessed at any time by clicking the GO button in the toolbar, and then clicking on the Results tab.

4. Open the Tank Editor for tank T-1. Click the Report button at the bottom of the dialog and select Detailed Report from the pull-down menu to view a formatted summary report for the tank. On page 2, that you can see the tank’s status (draining or filling) at each time increment.

5. Every element can generate a report in the same general format, which includes the name of the

calculated scenario and a series of tables describing the element’s properties and results in detail. You can print this report or copy it to the clipboard using the buttons at the top of the dialog. The report will print or paste into a word processor in the exact format seen on the screen. Click the Close button on the report, and then click OK to exit the Tank Editor.

6. You can also print detailed reports for several elements at one time. In the Stand-Alone version, use the Select tool to draw a window around the elements you want to report, or hold down the shift key while selecting the elements individually. Then, select Report\Element Details from the pull-down menu to bring up the Detailed Reports dialog. In the AutoCAD version, start by selecting Report\Element Details from the pull-down menu. The crosshairs change into a pickbox. Using the pickbox, select elements from the drawing space that you want to report (individually or using a window), and then right-click to bring up the Detailed Reports dialog.

7. When the Detailed Reports dialog opens, the elements selected from the layout view are already highlighted for output. From this dialog, you can edit the element selection set (hold down the Ctrl key


to select multiple elements from the list), and then print the reports. Click the Select button to go to the Selection Set dialog. If you wish to select multiple elements based on some criteria, you can do that here. Click Cancel to return to the Detailed Reports dialog. If you wish, you can click the Print button to print all of the reports for the selected elements. Click Cancel to exit the dialog.

8. Another type of report available is the Element Results Report. The elements to be included in this report are selected the same way as the elements for the Detailed Report, except that Elements Results are selected from the Report pull-down menu. The result is a single report containing calculated analysis results for each of the elements selected. From the Elements Results Report dialog, you can print or copy/paste the report for any element(s). The Elements Results Report contains all of the results calculated for the selected element(s). Select elements to be included in this report and click Preview to view the resulting output. Click Close when you are finished to exit the preview and the Analysis Results Report dialog.

9. Select Scenario Summary from the Report pull-down menu. This report summarizes the alternatives and options selected in the current scenario. Click Close.

10. Click the Report pull-down menu again and select the Project Inventory option. This report will tell you the total number of each type of element and the total length of pipe in the system. Click Close.

11. Finally, click the Cost Management button in the toolbar and select Capital Cost. Assuming Capital Cost Estimating calculations had already been run, clicking the Report button located above the Scenario Costs tree view would generate a Capital Cost Analysis Report. Click Close.

Part 2 - Tabular Reports (FlexTables) Tabular Reports are an extremely powerful tool in WaterCAD. These reports are not only good presentation tools, they are also very helpful in data entry and analysis. When data must be entered for a large number of elements, clicking each element and entering the data can be tedious and time consuming. Using the tabular reports, elements can be changed using the global edit tool, or filtered to display only the desired elements. Values that are entered into the table will be automatically updated in the model. The tables can also be customized to contain only the desired data. Columns can be added or removed, or you can display duplicates of the same column with different units. The tabular reports can save you an enormous amount of time and effort.

Tabular reports are dynamic tables of input values and calculated results. White columns are editable input values, and yellow columns are non-editable calculated values. When data is entered into a table directly, the values in the model will be automatically updated. These tables can be printed or copied into a spreadsheet program.

Two very powerful features in these tables are Global Edit and Filtering. Suppose we decide to evaluate how our network might operate in five years. Assume that the C factor for 5-year old ductile iron pipe reduces from 130 to 120. It would be repetitive to go through and edit the pipe roughness through the individual pipe dialogs, particularly when dealing with a large system. Instead, you will use the filter tool in this example to filter out the PVC pipes, and then use global edit tool to change the pipe roughness on the ductile iron pipes only.

1. Begin by setting up a new Alternative and Scenario to capture the changes to the C values. Select Analysis\Scenarios from the pull-down menu. Highlight the Scenario ‘P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm’ and click the Scenario Management button. Add a Child for this Scenario called ‘5-yr-old D.I.P.’

2. Because we want to create a new Physical Alternative, check the box labeled Physical and click the New button. Name the new Alternative ‘5-yr-old D.I.P.’ and click OK. Click Close to exit the Alternative Editor, and again to exit the Scenario Manager and return to the drawing pane.

3. To open a tabular report, select the Tables option from the Report pull-down menu or click the

Tabular Report button on the toolbar. Select the Pipe Report from the list and click OK.


4. Click the Scenario list box and select the new Scenario from the list. Right-click the Material column

and choose Filter\Quick Filter from the pop-up menu. You want to display only ductile iron pipes in the table. To do so, set the Column field to Material, set the Operator to =, and set the Value field to Ductile Iron. Click OK.

5. Now, you will use the Global Edit tool to modify all of the roughness values in the table. Right-click the Hazen-Williams C column and select Global Edit. Select Set from the Operation list and enter 120 into the Global Edit box. Click OK. All of the values are now set to 120.

6. To deactivate the filter, right-click anywhere in the dialog and select Filter\Reset from the pop-up menu. Click Yes to reset the filter.

7. You may also wish to edit a table by adding or removing columns using the Table Manager. Click the Options button at the top of the table dialog box and select Customize.

8. Scroll through the list on the left side to see the types of data available for placement in the table. You can highlight a particular item, then use the [ < ] and [ > ] buttons to add or remove that column from your table. For this example, we can display junction elevations in both meters and feet by checking the Allow Duplicate Columns box, highlighting Elevation (shown in gray) in the list of available columns, and clicking the [ > ] button. Elevation now appears twice under Selected Columns. You can adjust the order in which the columns will be displayed using the arrows below the right hand list, or simply drag items up and down. Click OK, and OK again to exit the Table Manager.


9. The revised table appears with two Elevation columns, both in meters. Drag and drop the new column

heading to relocate it next to the original Elevation column. To apply separate units to the two columns, click the Options button and select Use Local Units. This option allows the tabular report to have units independent of the project and local to the table. In other words, without this option switched on, changing the units from meters to feet in the table would change the unit for pressure throughout the project. The Use Local Units option is ideal for displaying the same variable with multiple units within the same tabular report. Click Yes in the warning box that appears indicating that you wish to switch to local units. To assign units of feet to one of the columns, right-click the column heading and select Elevation Properties from the pop-up menu. In the Set Field Options dialog, select 'ft' from the Units list box. Click OK to return to the updated table.

10. Click Close to exit the table when you are finished. Click GO to open the Batch Run dialog, and click GO to compute the network for ‘5-yr-old D.I.P’, and then click Close.

Part 3 - Create a Plan and Profile 1. To create a plan view of the distribution system, click the Report pull-down menu and select Plan

View\Full View. This option will create a plan of the entire system regardless of what the screen shows, while the Current View option will create a plan of exactly what is displayed in the window at that moment.

2. The Plan View will be put into a separate window, which can then be printed or copied to the clipboard. If you click the Copy button, you can paste the plan view into a word processor. Click Close.

3. You can also create a plan view in the Stand-Alone version for export to AutoCAD or other compatible software. Simply click the File menu and select Export\DXF File. This action will create a .DXF file of your network that you can then import into AutoCAD. In AutoCAD, use plan views as a quick way to develop simple scaled views of your primary network.

4. To create a profile view, select the Profiling option from the Tools pull-down menu, or click the

Profile button in the toolbar. This activates the Profile Setup dialog. From the dialog, choose


the attribute you wish to profile from the Attribute list box. For this example, choose Calculated Hydraulic Grade.

5. Next, click the Select From Drawing button. The dialog disappears, and the crosshairs change to a pick box in AutoCAD. Click pipes P-1, P-2, P-6, P-8, and P-9, selecting a continuous path, or "walk", through the network. Right-click when you are finished (and select Done in Stand-Alone). The Profile Setup dialog reappears, with the selected elements appearing, in order, in the list. Click the Profile button to view the profile.

6. Once the profile is created, you can make adjustments to its appearance, if desired, by clicking the

Options button and selecting Graph Options. A dialog opens in which you can change the titles, fonts, scaling, and line types used in the graph. Leave everything set to the defaults for this example, and click Cancel to exit the dialog.

7. When you have finished setting up the graph, it can be printed or copied to the clipboard using the buttons at the top of the Plot window.

8. Click Close to exit the Plot window when you are finished. Click Close again to exit the Profile Setup dialog.

Part 4 - Contouring The contouring feature in WaterCAD enables you to generate contours for reporting attributes such as elevation, pressure, and hydraulic grade. You can specify the contour interval, as well as color code the contours by index values or ranges of values. In this lesson, we will contour based on hydraulic grade elevations.


1. To create a plan view of the water distribution system with contours, click the Contour button from the toolbar. Within the Contour Manager, choose Calculated Hydraulic Grade from the Contour list box.

2. Create a Selection Set of elements you will use in contouring by clicking the ellipsis (…) button next to the Selection Set list box. Click Add, name the set ‘Contour by HGL’, and click OK.

3. Define your selection set so that it consists of all junctions in Zone-1. Click Select\By Filter\Pressure Junctions. Under Column, select Zone; for Operator, select [ = ]; and for Value, select Zone-1. Click OK to return to the Selection Set dialog.

4. Notice that the selected elements are now highlighted under Available Items. Click [ > ] to move the elements to the Selected Items list, and click OK. Click OK again to exit the Selection Set Manager.

5. Select ‘Contour by HGL’ in the Selection Set list box, and click Initialize to update the Minimum and Maximum HGL elevations. Enter an Increment of 0.1 m, and an Index Increment of 0.2 m. Make sure the radio button for Color by Index is selected, and click OK.

6. A plan view of the water distribution model is opened in a separate window, along with contours that interpolate between the elevations of the selected network components.

7. To improve the appearance of the contouring, press the Options button and choose Smooth Contours.

8. Click Close to return to the drawing pane.


Part 5 - Element Annotation When you want to label network attributes in the plan view, use the Annotation feature. With it, you can control which values are displayed, how they are labeled, and how units are expressed. For this example, we will annotate demands at the junctions, and flow and velocity in the pipes.

1. Click the Element Annotation option located in the Tools pull-down menu or click the Annotation

button on the toolbar to open the Annotation Wizard.

2. Select the elements you wish to annotate. In this example, we will add annotation to the pressure junctions and pipes. Select these elements from the list and click Next.

3. The next dialog allows you to choose the attributes you wish to annotate for the specified element type. The Attributes column is used for selecting the attribute you would like to annotate. The Mask is a template of how the annotation will appear on the screen. The %v and %u options are added to display and control the value and units associated with the attribute. The Preview column shows an example of the annotation with values for the variables. For this example, we will add annotation for the demand summary at each junction.

4. In the first row of the attribute column select Demand (Calculated) from the list and click Next. Add Discharge and Velocity annotations for the pipes in the same manner and click Next.

5. The final dialog of the Annotation Wizard contains a summary where you can check your annotations. If there are any errors, click the Back button to go backwards in the wizard and make any necessary changes. Click Finished.

6. The drawing will now display all of the annotations. You can try changing the properties of an element

and recalculating. The annotations will update automatically to reflect any changes in the system.

7. If the annotation is crowded, you can click and drag the annotation to move it. In the AutoCAD version, click on the annotation and then click the grip to move it, or use an AutoCAD command such as Move or Stretch. Alternatively, you could go back into the Annotation Wizard, and abbreviate or


remove the Mask labels. A third option is to decrease the Annotation Height. This option is found under the Drawing tab in the Tools\Options menu.

8. If you wish to delete the annotations, click the Annotation toolbar button, and uncheck any checked boxes. Click Next, and then Finished.

Part 6 - Color Coding You can also review results in the plan view by color coding the elements based on attributes or ranges of values.

1. Select the Color Coding option under the Tools pull-down menu or click the Color Coding button

on the toolbar.

2. The Color Coding dialog allows you to set the color coding for links, nodes, or both. We will color code by diameter (link attribute) and pressure (node attribute) in this example. Click the Link tab, and from the Color Coding list box, select the Diameter attribute. In the table, enter values of 150, 200, and 1000 mm with colors of red, blue, and green, respectively.

3. Next, click the Node tab, and select Pressure from the list box. Click the Calculate Range button to

get the minimum and maximum values for the variable displayed at the top of the dialog. Then, click the Initialize button and the model will select the color coding ranges in the table automatically. Finally, click OK to generate the Color Coding.

4. We can add a legends to the drawing by clicking the Insert Legend button, choosing the Link Legend or Node Legend option, and clicking anywhere on the drawing space to place the legend. In AutoCAD, accept the defaults when prompted about scale and legend.


5. Color coding is dynamic; that is, it updates automatically as you change time increment or Scenario

using the list boxes above the drawing pane. Notice that as you switch from the first Scenario to ‘P-8 and P-9 set to 200 mm’, the color of these pipes changes from red to blue.

6. To turn the color coding off, simply open the Color Coding dialog and set the Attribute to <None> on both the Link and Node tabs. To delete a legend, select it by clicking once, and hit the Delete key.

Close the open dialogs and save this project before proceeding with Lesson 5.

3.6 Lesson 5 - Automated Fire Flow Analysis One of the primary goals of a water distribution system is to provide adequate capacity to fight fires. WaterCAD’s automated fire flow analysis can be used to determine if the system can meet the fire flow demands while maintaining minimum pressure constraints. Fire flows can be computed for all nodes in the system, or you can create a selection set consisting of specific nodes where you wish to test available flow.

Fire flows are computed by iteratively assigning demands and computing system pressures. The model assigns the fire flow demand to a node and checks the model, checking to see if all pressure constraints are met at that demand. It will assign a new demand and automatically re-check the system pressures if a constraint is violated. Iterations continue until the constraints are met, or until the maximum number of iterations is reached.

The purpose of this example is to walk you through the steps to create, calculate, and analyze a fire flow scenario. This lesson again uses the distribution system from the previous lessons.


Part 1 - Inputting Fire Flow Data 1. Start WaterCAD and open the file ‘Lesson5’, found in the Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson folder. Or, if you

have previously completed Lesson 3 or 4, you can use your ‘MyLesson3’ or ‘MyLesson4’ file. Select Project Summary from the File menu, and change the title of the project to ‘Lesson 5—Fire Flow Analysis’. Click OK.

2. Previously, we ran an analysis with a fire flow at node J-6 by manually adding a large demand to the individual node. Before running the automated fire flow analysis, we will create a new Demand Alternative, removing that demand. Select Analysis\Alternatives from the pull-down menu and highlight the Demand alternative in the left pane. Highlight ‘Average Daily with 2000 l/min Fire Flow’ in the right pane, and click Duplicate.

3. In the Demand Summary column for node J-6 (row 6), click the word ‘Composite’, and it changes to a button. Click the Composite button to open the editor for the composite demand. Click the 2000 l/min demand, and click Delete. Select Yes to confirm, OK to close the editor, and Close to exit the Demand Alternative.

4. You will now see the Demand Alternative ‘Copy of Average Daily with 2000 l/min Fire Flow’ in the list. Highlight it and click the Rename button. Rename this Alternative ‘Base-Average Daily'.

5. You are going to analyze the fire flows by adding to the Maximum Day Demands, which are 1.5 times the Average Day Demands. Set up the Maximum Day Demand Alternative by highlighting the Base - Average Daily Alternative and selecting Duplicate. Right-click the Demand column, and select Global Edit. Set the Operation to multiply, and enter a value of 1.5. Click OK.

6. Click Close to exit the new Demand Alternative, and Rename this Alternative ‘Max. Day’. Then, highlight the Fire Flow alternative in the Alternative Manager.

7. Click the Edit button to set up the Base-Fire Flow Alternative. Enter a Needed Fire Flow of 3,000 l/min, a Fire Flow Upper Limit of 6,000 l/min, and Apply Fire Flows By Adding to Baseline Demand. This selection means that in performing the analysis, the fire flow will be added to any demands already assigned to the junction. Alternatively, you could have selected to replace these demands, so that the fire flow would represent the total demand at the node.

8. For Pressure Constraints, set both the Residual Pressure and Minimum Zone Pressure to 150 kPa. Leave the box for Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint unchecked, so that the minimum pressure will only be checked for the zone a particular node is in. Note that if you had multiple zones within your project and wanted to insure that a minimum system-wide pressure constraint was met, you could check the Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint box and type it in the box provided. This box is grayed out until the check box is activated.

9. Using the Selection Set list box, you can choose to apply the fire flow to All Junctions or a Subset of Junctions. For this example, choose the Subset of Junctions option. Then, click the ellipsis (…) button to open the Selection Set dialog.

10. For this example, a fire flow analysis is only needed for the junctions at the four street corners in our drawing. Choose the Select From Drawing button and click nodes J-1, J-2, J-3, and J-4 (in Stand-Alone, you must hold down the Shift key while making multiple selections). When you are finished, right-click (and select Done in Stand-Alone).

11. The nodes you selected are now in the Selected Items list. Click OK to exit the Selection Set dialog. Note that the Selection Set table is now filled with your Selection Set. Click the Close button to exit the Fire Flow Alternative dialog, and Close again to exit the Alternative Manager dialog.


Part 2 - Calculating a Fire Flow Analysis 1. You must now set up a new Scenario to utilize the appropriate alternatives and set up the calculation

options. Select Analysis\Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, and choose Scenario Management\Add\Base Scenario. Name your new Scenario ‘Automated Fire Flow Analysis’ and click OK.

2. In the Alternatives tab of the Scenario dialog, change the Physical Alternative to ‘P-8 and P-9 Set to 200 mm’. Change the Demand to ‘Max. Day’ and leave all other Alternatives set to their defaults.

3. Click the Calculation tab, make sure that Steady State is selected, and check the Fire Flow Analysis box. Note that all fire flow calculations must be performed under steady-state conditions. Click Close to exit the Scenario dialog.

4. To run the Scenario, click GO Batch Run. Check the box for ‘Automated Fire Flow Analysis’, and uncheck the other Scenarios. Click Batch to run the analysis, and Yes at the confirmation prompt. When the calculation is complete, click OK and Close to exit the Scenario Manager.

Part 3 - Viewing Fire Flow Results 1. Click the Tabular Reports button, located to the right of the GO button on the WaterCAD toolbar, to

open the Table Manager. Highlight the Fire Flow Report and click the OK button to view the report. Make sure that ‘Automated Fire Flow Analysis’ is selected in the Scenario list box.


2. In the Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints column, all of the boxes are checked except for the nodes that

you did not analyze, because the specified needed flow of 3,000 l/min was available and minimum pressures were exceeded. For nodes J-1 and J-3, pressures were computed for the Fire Flow Upper Limit of 6,000 l/min, because none ever dropped below specified minimum pressures. Nodes J-2 and J-4 reached their minimum residual pressures at flows slightly below the maximum of 6,000 l/min. Notice also that the report contains the Minimum System Pressure (excluding the current node being flowed) and its location.

3. When you are finished reviewing the report, click Close in the WaterCAD Fire Flow Report dialog and save your file as 'Mylesson5.'

Note: Another good way to review an automated fire flow analysis is to use color coding. If you have a situation where no nodes meet the pressure constraints for the needed fire flow, you can color code these nodes in the plan view for easy identification. See Lesson 4, Part 6 in this chapter for more information on color coding.

3.7 Lesson 6 - Water Quality Analysis In conjunction with Extended Period simulations, WaterCAD is capable of performing a water quality analysis to compute water age, constituent concentration, or percentage of water from a given node (trace analysis). Using these features, you can look at factors such as residence time in tanks, chlorine residuals throughout the system, and which tank or reservoir is the primary water source for different areas in your system.

This lesson uses the file called ‘Lesson6.wcd’ (‘Lesson6.dwg’ in the AutoCAD version), located in the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory. Open this file, and then select File\Save As from the pull-down menu. Type the filename ‘MyLesson6’ and click Save.

The water distribution system has already been set up for you. It has one reservoir and one tank. The system serves primarily residential areas, with some commercial water use as well. There are two pumps connected to the reservoir. However, under normal conditions, only one pump will be in use. A background drawing has been included for reference. If you would like to turn off the .DXF background in the Stand-Alone version, select Tools\Options from the pull-down menu, click the Drawing tab, and uncheck the Show Background box. In the AutoCAD version, you can simply turn off the desired layers.



Part 1 - Computing Water Age You will begin by running an age analysis for water in the system, assuming an initial age of 0 for all nodes. The water from the reservoir will be an infinite supply of new water, so the age of water elsewhere in the system will be a reflection of time from the start of the run and how long ago the water left the reservoir. The analysis will be run for a 2-week period (336 hours), in order to determine the equilibrium point of the system.

1. Start by adding a new Alternative for the age analysis. Select Analysis\Alternatives from the pull-down menu and highlight the Age alternative in the left pane. Click the Add button to add a new Alternative, and name it ‘Initial Age = 0’. Since you are assuming an initial age of 0 everywhere in the system, you do not need to enter any initial ages. Close the table and the Alternative Manager.

2. Next, set up a new Scenario to run an Extended Period Simulation incorporating the new Alternative. Select Analysis\Scenarios from the pull-down menu. There is one Scenario already set up called ‘Existing - Avg Day'. Highlight this Scenario and click Scenario Management\Add\Child Scenario. Type in ‘Age Analysis’ as the new Scenario name, and click OK. Under the Alternatives tab, click to check the box labeled Age, and select the Alternative you just created, ‘Initial Age = 0’, from the list box.

3. Click the Calculation tab to view the calculation settings for this Scenario. Extended Period Analysis should already be selected. Enter a Start Time of 0, Duration of 336 hours, and Hydraulic Time Step of 1 hour. Check the Water Quality Analysis box, and select the Age radio button.


4. Click the Options button. In this dialog, you will find various calculation options such as number of trials, accuracy, and tolerance settings for each of the water quality analysis types. You will leave these options set to their default values, so click Cancel to exit the dialog, and Close to exit the Scenario Editor.

5. You are now ready to run the Scenario. Click the Batch Run button and check the box for ‘Age Analysis’. Click Batch, and then Yes at the verification prompt. When the run is complete, click Close to exit the Scenario Manager. Select ‘Age Analysis’ from the Scenario toolbar list box.

6. A good way to view changes in water quality attributes over time is to use color coding. Click the Color Coding button on the toolbar. Under the Link tab, set the Attribute list box to Calculated Age, and then click the Initialize button to set up a default color scheme. Accept this default scheme, and repeat this procedure for the Node tab. When you are finished, click OK.

7. Once back in the drawing pane, click the Legend button on the toolbar, and select either the Node Legend or Link Legend (in this case, the color coding should be the same for both). Click anywhere in your drawing to place the legend. If you do not place it correctly the first time, you can always drag it and drop it in a new location.

8. Set the time increment in the toolbar to 4 hours. Use the VCR-style buttons to scroll through time in your analysis, and observe the color changes in your network reflecting water age.

9. A good way to check if your network has had sufficient time to reach an equilibrium point is to look at Age vs. Time graphs for your elements. Open the Tank Editor for Tank T-1, click the Report button at the bottom of the editor, and select Graph. Select Calculated Age as the Dependent variable. Make sure ‘Age Analysis’ is checked in the Available Scenarios box and click OK.


10. From the graph, you can see that once a repeating pattern is reached, the age of the water fluctuates between approximately 34 and 49 hours in 24-hour periods. Looking at these equilibrium ranges for various nodes can help guide you in setting up initial water age values in subsequent runs.

Part 2 - Analyzing Constituent Concentrations In this portion of the lesson, you will look at chlorine residuals in the system over time. WaterCAD stores information on constituent characteristics in a file called a constituent library. You will add information for chlorine to this library, set up initial concentrations in the system, and run the simulation.

1. Select Analysis\Alternatives from the pull-down menu. Highlight the Constituent alternative, and click the Add button. Name the new Alternative ‘Chlorine Injection’ and click OK.

2. Click the ellipsis (…) button next to the Constituent list box to open the Constituent Library, and click the Insert button. An entry for ‘Unlabeled’ appears in the table. Click the Edit button, and enter the data below into the dialog.

Label: ChlorineBulk Reaction: -0.10/dayW all Reaction: -0.08 m/dayDiffusivity: 1.2e-9 m2/s

3. Leave the Unlimited Concentration box checked, click OK, and then click Close to exit the Constituent

Library. You should now be back in the Constituent Alternative Editor.

4. Select Chlorine from the Constituent list box. Notice that the Bulk Reaction in the table is automatically updated. For the Pump and Valve, set the pumps and valves to an initial concentration of 1 mg/l. Click the Junction tab, and initialize the chlorine concentrations by entering a value of 1 mg/l at each junction node. Under the Reservoir tab, enter a value of 2.0 mg/L for the reservoir, and for the Tank, enter a value of 0.5 mg/l.

Tip: To quickly enter the initial concentrations for an element type, use the Global Edit feature.

5. Close the Editor and the Alternative Manager. Now, open the Scenario Manager and set up a new Scenario in order to run the Constituent Analysis. Create a new Child off of the ‘Age Analysis’ Scenario by highlighting it and clicking Scenario Management\Add\Child Scenario. Type ‘Chlorine


Analysis’ as the new Scenario name, and click OK. Under the Alternatives tab, check the box labeled Constituent, and select the ‘Chlorine Injection’ Alternative from the choice list.

6. Click the Calculation tab, select the Constituent radio button in the Analysis section, and leave everything else set to the inherited values. Click Close to exit the dialog, click GO Batch Run, uncheck 'Age Analysis', check 'Chlorine Analysis', then click Batch to run the model.

7. Make sure ‘Chlorine Analysis’ is visible as the current Scenario and set up color coding using the procedure from Part 1. This time, color code by Calculated Concentration instead of Calculated Age. Scroll through the time steps to view how the concentrations change throughout the network. When you look at your results using color coding, tables, and graphs, try to discover what better initial values for chlorine concentration might be.

Part 3 - Performing a Trace Analysis A trace analysis determines the percentage of water at all nodes and links in the system from a specific source node (the trace node). In systems with more than one source, it is common to perform multiple trace analyses using the various source nodes as the trace nodes in successive analyses. For this run, we will perform a trace analysis to determine the percentages of water coming from the tank.

1. Select Analysis\Alternatives from the pull-down menu. Highlight the Trace alternative, and click the Add button. Name the new Alternative ‘Trace Analysis for Tank’ and click OK. In the Trace Node list box, select the tank, T-1. Leave the initial percentages set to zero, and close the editor and the Alternative Manager.

2. Next, set up a new Scenario to run an Extended Period Simulation incorporating the new Alternative.

Select Analysis\Scenarios from the pull-down menu. Create a new Child for the ‘Age Analysis’ Scenario by highlighting it and clicking Scenario Management\Add\Child Scenario. Type in ‘Trace Analysis’ as the new Scenario name, and click OK. Under the Alternatives tab, click to check the box labeled Trace, and select the ‘Trace Analysis for Tank’ Alternative from the list box.


3. In the Calculation tab, select the Trace radio button in the Analysis section, and leave everything else set to the inherited values. Click Close to exit the dialog, click GO Batch Run, and run the analysis for the new Scenario.

4. Use color coding (by Calculated Trace), tables, and graphs to view the results of this run. As you scroll through the time periods, notice how the colors spread outward from the tank during periods when the tank is draining, and recede when the tank begins to fill. For more information on reporting features, see Lesson 4.

Close the open dialogs and save this project before proceeding with Lesson 7.

3.8 Lesson 7 - Working with Data from External Sources WaterCAD supports several methods of exchanging data with external applications, preventing duplication of effort and allowing you to save time by reusing data already present in other locations. For instance, you can exchange data with databases or a GIS system, or you can convert existing CAD linework to a pipe network.

There are multiple ways of importing data from outside sources into WaterCAD. You can set up one or more database connections to bring in information stored in many standard database and spreadsheet formats. GIS information can be brought in through connections to ESRI Shapefiles. If you have existing drawings of your network in a .DXF format (.DWG format in the AutoCAD version), you can have WaterCAD convert your lines and/or blocks into distribution system elements, setting up preferences for handling situations such as T-intersections and line endpoints, and creating tolerances to allow for drawing imperfections. Or, you can display a .DXF file as a background drawing for use in laying out a scaled network (Stand-Alone version only). Finally, WaterCAD will automatically import networks created in EPANet, KYPipe, and previous versions of Cybernet/WaterCAD.

WaterCAD again utilizes database and Shapefile connections to export data from the model for use externally. You can also copy tables, reports, and graphs and paste them into other Windows applications, or save plan and profile views in .DXF format for use when creating construction documents in CAD.

This lesson covers the three main methods of building your network using external data, summarized in the following table.

Method Description Advantages Disadvantages

Database Connection

Create connections to import and export model data using common database and spreadsheet formats.

Extremely versatile. Allows exchange of most any model data with a wide variety of applications, including anything with an ODBC format. A topographic representation of the network can be created by using node coordinates and assigning "to" and "from" nodes to pipes. Once a connection is established, it can be saved for later use, and multiple connections can be created and synchronized simultaneously.

Pipes will be depicted as straight lines connecting the "to" and "from" nodes, so pipe bends will not be displayed.

Shapefile Connection

Create connections to import and export model data in ESRI Shapefile format.

Advantages are similar to those of Database Connections, except the topographic data exchange is automatic and pipe bends are accounted for.

More proprietary. You have to have software that supports ESRI Shapefiles in order to utilize the data.


Polyline to Pipe Conversion

Convert existinglines, polylines, andblocks inDXF/DWG formatinto pipes and othernetwork elements.

Enables you to use legacy CADdrawings to build your network.You can set up tolerances to allowfor drawing imperfections, andpreferences for how nodes will becreated.

Elements are assigneddefault labels as they arecreated. Only topographicdata can be brought in, notmodel values. Requiresuser to carefully reviewthe drawing for accuracy.

Part 1 - Importing Shapefile Data In this part of the lesson, you will import ESRI Shapefiles to construct the distribution network in WaterCAD from existing GIS data. If you have ArcView, ArcInfo, or other application that can open a Shapefile, then you can, if you choose, view the files externally prior to importing them. However, you will still be able to perform the workshop problem even if you don’t have one of these applications. This lesson uses the network from Lesson 6.

The ESRI Shapefile actually consists of three separate files that combine to define the spatial and non-spatial attributes of a map feature. The three required files are as follows:

• Main File - The main file is a binary file with an extension of .SHP. It contains the spatial attributes associated with the map features. For example, a polyline record contains a series of points, and a point record contains x and y coordinates.

• Index File - The index file is a binary file with an extension of .SHX. It contains the byte position of each record in the main file.

• Database File - The database file is a dBase III file with an extension of .DBF. It contains the non-


spatial data associated with the map features.

All three files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension, and be located in the same directory.

Listed below are the files you will be importing. Only the main files are listed; however, corresponding .SHX and .DBF are present as well.

• PresJunc.shp

• PresPipe.shp

• PRV.shp

• Pump.shp

• Reservoi.shp

• Tank.shp

If you have a program such as ArcView that allows you to view Shapefiles, begin by setting up a View with all of the Shapefiles (Themes) listed above turned on. If you completed Lesson 6, you should recognize the layout from that lesson. You can look at the data table for each of the Themes to see what we will be importing. When you have finished reviewing the Shapefiles, close the application.




3. Select File\New from the pull-down menu. Click No when asked if you want to save the current project. In the Create Project File As dialog, double-click the ‘Lesson’ folder, enter the file name ‘gisprob.wcd’ for your project, and click Save. The Project Setup Wizard will open.

4. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project ‘Lesson 7, Part 1 - Importing GIS Data’. Click Next. Click the Next button again to leave this dialog set to its default values. In this dialog, set up the drawing as Scaled, with a horizontal scale of 1:5000 and a vertical scale of 1:500. Change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to 2.8. Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values, and click Finished.

1. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD. Select Tools\Options from the pull-down menu and choose the Global tab. Since we will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System International. Click OK.

2. Choose File\New from the pull-down menu and select No when prompted to save the existing drawing. If the Create New Drawing dialog opens, move to step 3. Otherwise, do the following:

Press the Esc key. Then, type filedia at the command prompt and press Enter. Type the value '1' and press Enter. Then, choose New on the File pull-down menu again, and do not save changes to the existing drawing. Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear as dialogs or simply at the command prompt.

3. When the Create New Drawing dialog appears, make sure Metric is selected, and click OK. Answer Yes when asked if you want to set up the project. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project ‘Lesson 7, Part 1 - Importing GIS Data’ and click Next. Click Next again to accept the defaults on the second screen.

4. In this dialog, set up the drawing as Scaled, with a horizontal scale of '1:5000' and a vertical scale of '1:500.' Change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to '2.8.' Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values, and click Finished.

The remaining commands are for both Stand-Alone and AutoCAD modes.

5. Select File\Synchronize\Shapefile Connections from the pull-down menu. If you have not defined any Shapefile connections in WaterCAD yet, you will be asked if you want to create a Shapefile connection. Answer Yes to start the Shapefile Connection Wizard. Or, if you have already defined Shapefile Connections in any other WaterCAD project, start the Shapefile Connection Wizard by clicking Add in the Shapefile Connection Manager that appears. Enter the Connection Label ‘Lesson 7, Part 1’ for this connection, and click the Next button.


6. Now, you need to check the boxes for the types of elements you will be importing. For this connections, check the boxes for Pressure Junction, Pressure Pipe, PRV, Pump, Reservoir, and Tank. Click Next.

7. Leave the Shapefile Unit set to 'm,' and check the box to establish missing connectivity data from

spatial data, and then click Next again.

8. Click the ellipsis (…) button next to the Shapefile field. Browse and select the file ‘PresJunc.shp’ from the \Haestad\wtrc\lesson directory, then click Open. Set the Key/Label Field to LABEL. This item designates the field that WaterCAD matches with its own element labels, so that data will be assigned to the correct place.

9. Using the Field Links table, you must now match the data types available in WaterCAD to the data types you will be bringing in from the Shapefile. In row 1, select Elevation from the WaterCAD column, and ELEV from the Database column. Set the Unit to 'm' to let WaterCAD know that the coordinate it is reading from the Shapefile is in meters. If the units in your Shapefile were different than the units set up in WaterCAD, the program would automatically make the necessary conversions.


10. Fill in the next row, so that your entries correspond to the table below. Click Next when you are

finished.

Pressure Junction Shapefile Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitElevation ELEV mDemand DEMAND l/min

11. The wizard now takes you to the dialog for setting up the Pressure Pipe connections. Continue by filling in the information below for the Pressure Pipe and clicking Next to proceed to the next dialog. The Shapefile for each type of element will be located in the \Haestad\wtrc\lesson directory (for instance, select the prespipe.shp file for the pressure pipe connection), and the entry for Key\Label Field will always be LABEL. Your Field Links tables should look like the tables that follow.

Pressure Pipe Shapefile Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitDiameter D mmMaterial MATERIALHazen-Williams C C


PRV Shapefile Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitElevation ELEV mDiameter D mmInitial HGL HGL mInitial Valve Status INITIAL_ST

Pump Shapefile Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitElevation ELEV mShutoff Head SHUT_H mDesign Head DES_H mDesign Discharge DES_Q l/minMaximum Operating Head

MAX_H m

Maximum Opera-ting Discharge MAX_Q l/min

Initial Pump Status INITIAL_ST

Reservoir Shapefile Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitElevation ELEV m

Tank Shapefile Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitTank Diameter TANK_D mBase Elevation BASE_ELEV mMinimum Elevation MIN_ELEV mInitial HGL INITIAL_HG mMaximum Elevation MAX_ELEV m

12. When you are finished setting up the Shapefile connections, click Next to proceed. The Synchronize Now? box will appear. The Synchronize Shapefile Connection box should be checked, and In selected because we will be reading data from the Shapefiles.

13. Click Finished, and Yes when prompted if you want to proceed.


14. A Status Log is generated showing the elements as data is read into the model. When the import is

complete, you should get a yellow light in this window, indicating that the synchronization was successful, but that there are warnings. If there were no warnings, you would get a green light, and if there were errors, a red light. In this case, the warnings are due to the fact that we instructed WaterCAD to generate our network connectivity from the GIS spatial data. The log indicates where connectivity is being established, which is fine. Close the Status Log and click OK to return to the drawing pane.


15. Now, examine the network that you imported. Notice that it looks like the network from Lesson 6, and

many of the pipes have bends and curves in them. Since you have topographic information stored in the Shapefile, these bends can be imported. Because we created a scaled drawing, the pipe lengths will be read from the layout.

16. Notice also that the default Scenario, Base, is currently displayed as the current Scenario. Whenever data is brought in through a database or Shapefile connection, it is automatically written into the Alternatives referenced by the current Scenario. Similarly, whenever data is exported, the data associated with the current Scenario will be used.

17. To run the model, click the GO button in the toolbar, and then click GO in the dialog. Now that you have calculated data, you could export the new data to your GIS database by going into the database and creating a new label for it. In Part 2 of this lesson, we will use an almost identical procedure to export pressures using database connections.

18. When you are finished, close the Scenario Editor. Proceed to Part 2 of this lesson or save your file as 'MyLesson7' and exit WaterCAD.

Part 2 - Importing Data from a Database This portion of the lesson will take you through the steps to set up a connection to a database, in order to create a new water distribution network from existing data.

The necessary data has been included as a Microsoft Excel 5.0 spreadsheet. If you do not have software that can read this file type, you will still be able to perform the workshop, but you won’t be able to open the data to view it externally.


This lesson uses the network from Lesson 6.

1. Open the spreadsheet file ‘Lesson7.xls’ and take a look at it. As you can see from the worksheet tabs, the data is organized into six worksheets, one for each type of element in the network. When setting up a spreadsheet yourself, you may organize and group data however you like. Just make sure that the different types of data are sorted into columns, with a descriptive heading in the topmost cell, and include a column for your labels.



4. Select File\New from the pull-down menu. Click No when asked if you want to save the current project. In the Create Project File As dialog, double-click the ‘Lesson’ folder, enter the file name ‘dbprob.wcd’ for your project, and click Save. The Project Setup Wizard will open.

5. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project ‘Lesson 7, Part 2 - Importing Data from a Database’. Click Next. Click the Next button again to leave this dialog set to its default values. In this dialog, set up the drawing as Schematic, and change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to 25. Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values, and click Finished.


2. Double-click the WaterCAD desktop icon to start WaterCAD for AutoCAD. Open the Global Options tab, accessed from the Tools\Options pull-down menu. Since we will be working in SI units, click the Unit System selection box, and select System International. Click OK.

3. Choose New on the File pull-down menu and select No when prompted to save the existing drawing. If the Create New Drawing dialog opens, move to step 3. Otherwise, do the following:

Click the Esc key. Then, type filedia at the command prompt and press Enter. Type the value '1' and press Enter. Then, choose New on the File pull-down menu again, and do not save changes to the existing drawing. Note that the filedia variable controls whether some AutoCAD commands appear as dialogs or simply at the command prompt.

4. When the Create New Drawing dialog appears, make sure that Metric is selected, and click OK. Answer Yes when asked if you want to set up the project. In the Project Setup Wizard, title the project ‘Lesson 7, Part 2 - Importing Data from a Database’ and click Next. Click Next again to accept the defaults on the second screen.

5. In this dialog, set up the drawing as Schematic, and change the three Annotation Multipliers (Symbol Size, Text Height and Annotation Height) to '25'. Click Next, leave the Prototypes set to their default values, and click Finished.

6. Select File\Synchronize\Database Connections from the pull-down menu. Click the Add button.

7. Enter the Connection Label ‘Lesson 7, Part 2’ for this connection, and click the Add button.


8. Set the Database Type to Excel 5.0. Click the ellipsis (…) button next to the Database File field, and browse to select the ‘Lesson7.xls’ file from the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory.

9. Click the Database Table list box. Notice that the items in the list correspond to the different worksheet tabs in your spreadsheet file. Select Junction$ from the list, and Pressure Junction for the Table Type. Set the Key/Label field to Label. This item designates the field that WaterCAD matches with its own element labels, so that data will be assigned to the correct place.

10. Using the Field Links table, you must now match the data types available in WaterCAD to the data types you will be bringing in from the spreadsheet. In row 1, select X from the WaterCAD column, and X (m) from the Database column. Set the Unit to 'm' to let WaterCAD know that the coordinate it is reading from the spreadsheet is in meters. If the units in your database were different than the units set up in WaterCAD, the program would automatically make the necessary conversions.

11. Fill in the remaining rows, so that your entries correspond to the table below. Click OK when you are finished.

Junction Database Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitX X (m) mY Y (m) mElevation Elevation (m) mDemand Demand (l/min) l/min


12. You should now be back in the Database Connection dialog. Click the Add button, and set up your

database connection for pipe data. Use the same spreadsheet file you used for the junction data, but set the Database Table and Table Type to Pipe$ and Pressure Pipe, respectively. Your Key/Label Field is again Label. Then, set up the following Pipe Database connection.


Pipe Database Connection

W aterCAD Database Unit+Start Node Start Node +Stop Node End NodeDiameter Diameter (mm) mmMaterial MaterialHazen-W illiams C RoughnessLength Length (m) m

13. Repeat the above procedure to set up connections for Pump, Reservoir, Tank, and Valve connections, using information from the following tables.


Pump Database Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitX X (m) mY Y (m) mElevation Elevation (m) mShutoff Head Shutoff Head (m) mDesign Head Design Head (m) mDesign Discharge Design Q (l/min) l/minMaximum Operating Head

Max# Head (m) m

Maximum Operating Discharge Max# Q (l/min) l/min

Initial Pump Status Initial Status

Reservoir Database Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitX X (m) mY Y (m) mElevation Elev# (m) m

Tank Database Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitX X (m) mY Y (m) mTank Diameter Tank Diameter (m) mBase Elevation Base Elev# (m) mMinimum Elevation Minimum Elev# (m) mInitial HGL Initial Elev# (m) mMaximum Elevation Maximum Elev# (m) m

PRV Database Connection

WaterCAD Database UnitX X (m) mY Y (m) mElevation Elevation (m) mDiameter Diameter (mm) mm

Initial HGL Initial Grade Setting (m)

m

Initial Valve Status Initial Status

Note: The Table Type for this connection is PRV.


14. When you are finished setting up the database connections, click OK to close the Database Connection

Editor, and then click the Synchronize In button. WaterCAD will give you a confirmation prompt. Click Yes to proceed. You will then get a message asking if you want to add an element. Click Yes to All.

15. A Status Log is generated showing the elements as data is read into the model. When the import is complete, you should get a green light in this window. If there were warnings or errors you would get a yellow light or red light, respectively. You could then scroll through the log to see where any problems might be occurring. Click Close to exit the Status Log, and OK to exit the Database Connection Manager.


16. You should now be able to see the imported network in the drawing pane, but the symbol and label

sizes are very small. Select Tools\Options from the pull-down menu, and then click the Drawing tab. Set all three Annotation Multipliers to '25', and click OK.

17. Now, examine the network that you imported. Notice that it is different in appearance from the same network imported using a shapefile in Part 1 of this lesson. The difference stems from the fact that in a database connection, a pipe’s layout is defined only by the location of its end nodes. Therefore, pipes appear without bends, making a straight line connection between nodes. Hydraulically, your model will not be affected, since the pipe lengths are user-defined, not scaled from the layout.

18. Notice also that the default Scenario, Base, is currently displayed as the current Scenario. Whenever data is brought in through a database or Shapefile connection, it is automatically written into the Alternatives referenced by the current Scenario. Similarly, whenever data is exported, the data associated with the current Scenario will be used.

19. Click the GO button, and then click GO again to run the model. Now that you have calculated data, we can export it back to our database. For this example, we will only export pressures at the junction nodes. Go ahead and close the Scenario Editor.

20. Use Excel to open ‘Lesson7.xls’ in another window. Click on the tab for the Junction worksheet, and add a new column heading in cell F1 called ‘Pressure’. Save and Close the file.


21. Go back to the WaterCAD window, and choose File\Synchronize\Database Connections from the menu. Highlight ‘Lesson 7, Part 2’, and click the Edit button. Select the junction table from the list, and click Edit again.

22. In Row 5 of the Field Links table, link WaterCAD’s Pressure to the Database’s Pressure. The Unit should be set to 'kPa.' Click OK and OK again to get back to the Database Connection Manager. Click the Synchronize Out button to send the information back to the spreadsheet.


23. Finally, if you reopen the ‘Lesson7.xls’ file in Excel, you will see that the pressure values have now

been added.

Part 3 - Converting CAD Drawing Entities The Polyline to Pipe tool enables you to take existing CAD entities and use them to quickly construct a water distribution network. Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe, Line and Block entities can be converted as well (Polylines and Lines can be converted to pipes; Blocks can be converted to any available node type).

Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error-prone process. Difficulties can arise due to the fact that a drawing may appear to be correct visually, but may contain problems that are not readily apparent. For example, what appears to be a single line in a drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments - or it could be made up of 2 lines, one directly on top of another.

The Polyline to Pipe Wizard will guide you through the conversion process, enabling you to set up options relating to tolerances, node creation, and handling T-intersections. To help alleviate some of the problems that you may encounter during the import process, a comprehensive drawing review is also performed. During conversion, the network is analyzed, and potential problems are flagged for review. After performing the conversion, the Drawing Review window will allow you to navigate to and fix any problems that may be encountered.

For users in Stand-Alone mode only: 1. Open WaterCAD and choose Tools\Options from the pull-down menu. In the Global Options tab,

make sure that the Unit System is set to System International, and then click OK. Next, select File\Import\Polyline to Pipe. You will be asked if you want to set up the project. Click Yes to start the Project Setup Wizard.


For users in AutoCAD mode only: 1. Start WaterCAD for AutoCAD and open the file ‘Lesson7.dwg’ in the \Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory.

Select Edit\Change Entities to Pipes from the pull-down menu. The AutoCAD command line will prompt you to ‘Select objects’. Draw a selection window around all of the objects in the drawing by clicking the upper left and lower right corners, then right-click. Click Yes when asked if you wish to set up the project.

For all users: 2. In the wizard, enter ‘Lesson 7 -- Polyline to Pipe’ as the project title, click Next, and Next again to

accept the default settings. Make sure that you are set up for a Scaled drawing, with a horizontal scale of '1:5000' and a vertical scale of '1:500.' Set the three Annotation Multipliers to 2.8. Click Next again.

3. In order to minimize your data input later, create prototypes for common element characteristics. The most common type of pipe in the model you will be creating is 150 mm ductile iron with a C of 130. Make sure these characteristics coincide with the prototype values, and click OK.

4. Since you have two identical pumps, go ahead and set up a prototype for them, using the data below. Be sure to change the units to 'l/min' before entering the discharge values. Click OK when you are finished.

Pump Data

Elevation(m)

PumpType

148 3 Point

Head (m)

Discharge(l/min)

Shutoff: 70.0 0Design: 50 1200Max. Operating 35 2000

5. Create one more prototype, this time for the PRV’s. They both have an elevation of 129 m and an HGL setting of 185.2 m. Click OK, and then Finished. The Polyline to Pipe Wizard now opens.

For users in Stand-Alone mode only: 6. Browse to open the file ‘Lesson7.dxf’, located in the Haestad\Wtrc\Lesson directory. Leave the .DXF

unit set to meters, and click Next.


For all users: 7. Now, set up the options WaterCAD will use when performing the conversion. Change the Tolerance

to 1 m, so that pipe endpoints that come within a meter of one another will be assumed to be connected. Select the radio button for Convert Polylines and Lines to pipes, and tell WaterCAD create a Pressure Junction if no node is found at a polyline endpoint. Click Next.


8. Select the option to join pipes at T-intersections within the specified tolerance, and click Next.

9. Select Yes when asked if you have blocks that you would like to convert to nodes, and fill in the table

by matching the AutoCAD Blocks JUNCTION, PRV, PUMP, RESERVOIR, and TANK with the corresponding WaterCAD elements (Pressure Junction, PRV, Pump, Reservoir, and Tank). Click Next.


10. You will be given the option to alter the prototype settings. This option is useful if you want to import

in multiple passes, grouping like data together to make the data entry process more automated. For instance, we could have chosen to import all of the 100 mm pipes, then the 150 mm pipes, etc., changing the prototype each time. For this example, we will leave the prototypes as we set them in the Project Setup Wizard. Click Next.

11. Make sure that the layers HMI_NODE and HMI_PIPE are both checked, and click Finished to perform the conversion. When it is completed, Close the statistics window.


12. A Drawing Review dialog opens with five junctions listed in it. The purpose of the Drawing Review is

to alert you to problems or assumptions made during the import. Find any one of these junctions by highlighting it in the list and clicking Go To. The drawing pane will center on the junction and select it. If you have difficulty seeing the selected element, increase the zoom factor in the Drawing Review dialog.

13. Open the element, and click the Messages tab. There will be a message telling you that the node was added during the Polyline to Pipe conversion. The junction had to be added because there was no node at that location in your .DXF drawing, but there was a polyline endpoint. In the Polyline to Pipe Wizard, you instructed WaterCAD to add junctions to endpoints.

Even though you now have your drawing converted to a pipe network, it is still not ready to be run, because you can only bring in element types and network connectivity using this type of import. Before you could run this model, you would have to input data for elevations, demands, pipe sizes, etc., either directly into WaterCAD or through database connections.

For users in AutoCAD mode only: The WaterCAD elements are now on layer 0, since that layer was current when you performed the conversion. If you turn off layers HMI_PIPE and HMI_NODE, only the actual WaterCAD elements will be visible.

From these seven lessons, you have had a brief introduction to the capabilities of WaterCAD. Feel free to continue to play with the program. Use this model to explore and become familiar with all of the features. If you do not know what a button does, just try it.


Chapter 4

Starting a WaterCAD Project

4.1 Overview This chapter explains how to start a new project and describes the files that WaterCAD creates to save your project’s data. At the beginning of a project, you also need to set some global settings. In the Global Options and Project Options dialogs, you can specify the unit system, the friction formula(s) used, and whether you want to use Auto Prompting. In the Drawing Options dialog, you can specify settings such as the drawing scale and the size of the symbols and annotations.

Note: These options can also be viewed or edited by selecting the Options menu item from the Tools pull-down menu.

You can also access the FlexUnit dialog in order to globally specify the units and number of decimals to be displayed for each type of data.

4.2 File Management

4.2.1 File Management WaterCAD uses the .WCD extension to store all model input data (including element inputs, alternatives and scenarios, etc.) both for Stand-Alone and AutoCAD modes.

When WaterCAD runs within AutoCAD, two important files are used. The .WCD file is still used to hold all model data, and a .DWG file contains all of the AutoCAD entities. This means that even a complete AutoCAD drawing corruption (or loss) will not endanger your hydraulic model data - in fact, you can even regenerate the AutoCAD modeling elements from the .WCD file!

WaterCAD Backup Files When a .WCD file is overwritten by a save action, a backup file of the .WCD file is created with a .WCK extension. Note that AutoCAD also generates a backup drawing file, with a .BAK extension.

98 Chapter 4 – Starting a WaterCAD Project

Shapefile/Database Connection Files If you use the Shapefile or Database Connections Managers to exchange data with external data sources, the connection files you create and use have the .HSC and .HDC extension respectively. By default, they are named WTRC.HSC and WTRC.HDC, and are located in your haestad…wtrc directory. In this case, these connections are shared between all your projects. You are also given the option to keep these connections local to your project. In this case, these files are placed in your current project directory, with the same name as your .WCD file but with the .HSC and .HDC file extensions, respectively. See the "Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects" and "Sharing Database Connections between Projects" topics in the "GIS and Database Connections" chapter for more information.

Libraries Libraries are saved in separate files so they can be shared between projects. The paths are specified in the Engineering Library Manager. They have an .HLB extension, and are located by default in your haestad\wtrc directory.

Additional Files WaterCAD creates additional files in the same directory as your .WCD file to save the calculation results. Since recalculating the scenarios can regenerate these results, these files do not necessarily need to be included when backing up your important files. However, if you are unsure, simply copy all files present in your project directory.

Tip: It is recommended to use a separate directory for every WaterCAD project on your computer to facilitate project management and backup.

4.2.2 Import Command The Import Network command allows you to import data from KYpipe v1, v2, or v3, EPANet v1 or v2, and Cybernet v1 or v2. You will then be able to save this project as a WaterCAD v5 project. The data is imported into an empty project. Therefore, before the data is imported, you will be prompted to save your current project if it contains WaterCAD elements.

Notes: The current project remains in schematic mode when importing data.

We have made every effort to prevent the loss of data during these imports. However, all imported data should be checked for accuracy.

WaterCAD v3 and v4 projects should simply be opened in WaterCAD v5 (as any WaterCAD v5 project), without using the Import command. However, once you save the project in WaterCAD v5, the project files cannot be opened in WaterCAD v3 or v4 any longer.

To access the Import dialog, select Import\Network from the File pull-down menu.

4.2.3 Multiple Sessions WaterCAD does not support multiple sessions. WaterCAD uses a single document model and support for multiple views has not been implemented. Therefore, do not try to open more than one session of WaterCAD at the same time or data loss and/or data corruption could occur.


4.2.4 Importing a Submodel • Click the File pulldown menu and select Import…Submodel.

• In the Import WSM File dialog, select the submodel file to be imported. Click the Open button

Note: If any element labels in the submodel are being used by elements in the project, you will be prompted to change these element labels.

• Review the Status Log to ensure that all desired input data has been transferred.

4.2.5 Exporting a Submodel You can export a model, or any portion thereof, as a submodel for import into other projects. Input data is also stored in the .WSM file that is created in the process of Exporting a Submodel. This input data will only be imported to alternatives with the same name. See the Importing a Submodel topic for more information regarding input data transfer.

Also note that the coordinate data associated with the submodel is retained, and this data dictates the location that the submodel elements will appear in the model you are importing to. This can cause elements to overlap one another.

Note: If any element labels in the submodel are being used by elements in the project, you will be prompted to change these element labels.

To export a submodel:

• In the drawing view, highlight the elements to be exported as a submodel. To highlight multiple elements, hold down the Shift key while clicking elements.

• Click the File pulldown menu and select Export…Submodel.

• In the Create WSM File dialog, specify the directory to which the file should be saved, enter a name for the submodel and click the Save button.

• Review the Status Log to ensure that no problems occurred during the export process.

4.3 Project Management

4.3.1 Project Setup Wizard The Project Setup Wizard can only be accessed at the start of a new project. All of the options that are edited from the Wizard, however, can be changed individually from other pull-down menus. The Project Setup Wizard assists you in the creation of a new project by stepping you through many of the project-wide options, allowing you to set up most of your notes and defaults before you even create the first pipe. The areas covered by this Wizard include:

• Project Summary - Includes information about the project, such as the project title, the project engineer, and general comments.

• Project Options - Include information regarding global options, such as the desired friction method and coordinate system.

• Drawing Options - Include information regarding the drawing pane, such as the drawing scale,


annotation multipliers, and background drawing data (for Stand-Alone mode only).

• Prototypes - Enable you to set default values for elements, which are used to initialize values for any new elements that are added to the project.

4.3.2 Project Summary The Summary dialog provides a way to enter a Project Title, the name of the Project Engineer, and any significant comments (for example, the project revision history). The Date field defaults to the current day. To change any portion of the date, click the item to be changed (i.e: month field), then use the up and down arrows on the keyboard to set the date.

The Project Title and Project Engineer will print in the footer of reports.

To access the Project Summary dialog, select File / Project Summary from the pull-down menus.

4.4 Options

4.4.1 Global Options The Global Options dialog allows you to customize the following options for this application:

• Welcome dialog (Stand-Alone mode only)

• Unit System

• Enter Key Behavior

• Background/Foreground Color (Stand-Alone mode only)

• Sticky Tool Palette (Stand-Alone mode only)

• Auto Prompting

To access the Global Options tab, select Tools / Options from the pull-down menus.

Welcome Dialog The Welcome dialog appears when the program is started, and provides easy access to common tasks you may want to perform when you first start using the program. The following options are available:

• Tutorials

• Exit Program

Unit System Although individual units can be controlled throughout the program, you may find it useful to change your entire unit system at once to either the System International (SI) unit system or the US Customary (English) system.

When you switch to a different unit system, you will be asked to confirm this action. If you choose YES, all data will be displayed in the default unit for the selected system.

Note: If the file that you are editing in Stand-Alone mode is already associated with an AutoCAD drawing, be careful not to change the unit systems. Otherwise, the .DWG and the .WCD files may become irreversibly out of sync.


Enter Key Behavior Enter Key Behavior controls which standard the Enter key follows during editing:

• CUA Enter Key - With this setting, the Enter key acts as it normally does for Windows applications. It conforms to Common User Access (CUA) standards. This means that when you press the Enter key, it is as though you pressed the default button on the dialog. CUA Enter Key is the recommended setting.

• Tabbing Enter Key - With this setting, the Enter key behaves the same as the Tab key for editable fields (not buttons). This means that when you press the Enter key, the cursor will move to the next field in the dialog.

Window Color You can specify the background and foreground colors of the main graphical window in Stand-Alone mode. The foreground color is the default color that is applied to all elements symbols, pipes, labels, and annotations when no color coding is defined. These color settings also apply to the Scenario Comparison window, but do not apply to the Profile or Graph Plot windows.

Sticky Tools Sticky Tools are available in Stand-Alone mode. With Sticky Tools disabled, the drawing pane cursor will return to the Select tool after creating a node or finishing a pipe run. With Sticky Tools enabled, the tool does not reset to the Select tool, allowing you to continue dropping new elements into the drawing without reselecting the tool.

The Sticky Tool Palette can be turned on or off to meet your needs and preferences.

Auto Prompting Auto Prompting allows you to immediately enter data as elements are added to the drawing, without interrupting the layout process.

When Auto Prompting is active, the Auto Prompting dialog will immediately appear when you add an element to the drawing. From the Auto Prompting dialog, you can modify the element's default label and access the remaining input data by clicking the associated Edit button. Auto Prompting can also be toggled off in this dialog.

4.4.2 Project Options The Project Options dialog allows you to set the following essential information about your project:

• Friction Method

• Liquid

• Input Modes

• Pipe Length Rounding

To access the Project Options tab, select Tools\Options from the pull-down menu.

Friction Method Theory The Friction Method option enables you to select the methodology for determining flow resistance and friction losses during calculations.


Available methodologies include:

• Darcy-Weisbach

• Hazen -Williams Formula

• Manning’s Formula

If you change the friction method after pipes have been entered into the network, the program will ask if you want to update the roughness values of those pipes. If you select Yes, the program will assign all pipes a new roughness that corresponds to the default roughness of the pipe material.

Liquid You can specify the type of liquid transported by the network, the characteristics of which (kinematic viscosity and specific gravity) are defined in the Liquid Library.

Note: The kinematic viscosity is used in determining the friction coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method.

Input Modes WaterCAD supports several input modes to adjust data entry to your style or the needs of a particular project.

• Coordinates - Coordinates can be displayed either in X and Y format or as Northing and Easting. Whichever coordinate input mode is chosen will be active everywhere within the program (element editors, FlexTables, etc.).

• Settings - This drop-down list allows you to set whether values on control conditions will be input in terms of hydraulic grade or pressure. Note that regardless of the mode you choose, the program will always display values in both hydraulic grade and pressure.

• Tank Levels - This drop-down list allows you to set whether tank operating ranges will be input in terms of elevations (height above a datum elevation of 0) or levels (height above the wet well's base elevation).

Pipe Length Rounding Pipe length rounding is used to determine the level of precision desired for scaled pipe lengths. Pipe lengths will automatically be rounded according to the pipe length rounding value.

For example, consider a pipe with an actual scaled length of 35.8 meters. If the pipe length rounding value is 1.0 meter, the program will assume the pipe length to be 36.0 meters.

Notes: This only affects the value as it appears in elemental editors, FlexTables, and so on. The actual length of the pipe figure in the drawing pane is not physically adjusted to force the pipe to a rounded length.

A change to the pipe rounding length is not retroactive. Therefore, it will not affect existing pipes unless the User Defined Length is toggled off and then on again in the appropriate element editor.


4.4.3 Drawing Options The Drawing Options dialog allows you to specify information regarding the graphical display of elements in the drawing pane, including:

• Drawing Scale

• Annotation Multipliers

• Pipe Text

• Background Drawing

• Symbol Visibility

To access the Drawing Options tab, select Tools / Options from the pull-down menus.

Drawing Scale You can set the scale that you want to use as the finished drawing scale for the plan view output. Drawing scale is determined based upon engineering judgment and the destination sheet sizes to be used in the final presentation.

You may choose either schematic or scaled mode to define the horizontal and vertical distance scales.

• Schematic - Pipe lengths are not automatically initialized from their lengths in the drawing pane, but must be manually entered for each pipe.

• Scaled - Pipe lengths are determined from the lengths of the pipe elements in the drawing pane.

− HOR - Horizontal scale controls the scale of the plan view.

− VER - Vertical scale controls the default elevation scale (for use in profiles, for example).

Scaled or schematic mode can be set on a pipe-by-pipe basis. This is useful when scaled mode is preferred, but an exaggerated scale is needed for layout of detailed piping arrangements.

Whether the drawing is set in scaled or schematic mode automatically reflects the setting of the pipe prototype. While in schematic mode, Gravity Pipe Prototypes and Pressure Pipe Prototypes can be assigned a default length. When the drawing mode is scaled, pipe lengths do not need to be initialized from the prototype. Switching between scaled and schematic in either the Project Options or Pipe Prototype dialogs has no effect on existing pipes.

Annotation Multipliers Annotation multipliers allow you to change the size of symbols, labels and annotation text relative to the drawing scale. There is not a single annotation size that is going to work well with all projects and scales, so these values should be adjusted based on your judgment and the desired look of the finished drawings.

• Symbol Size - The number entered in this field will either increase or decrease the size of your symbols by the factor indicated. For example, a multiplier of 2 would result in the symbol size being doubled. The program selects a default symbol height that corresponds to 4.0 ft (approximately 1.2 m) in actual-world units, regardless of scale.

• Text Height - The text height multiplier increases or decreases the default size of the text associated with element labeling by the factor indicated. The program automatically selects a default text height that displays at approximately 2.5 mm (0.1 in) high at the user-defined drawing scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for example, results in a text height of approximately 1.25 m. Likewise, a 1 in = 40 ft scale equates to a text height of around 4.0 ft.

• Annotation Height - The annotation height multiplier increases or decreases the default size of the element annotation by the multiplier indicated. The program automatically selects a default text


height that displays at approximately 2.5 mm (0.1 in) high at the user defined drawing scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for example, results in a text height (to scale) of approximately 1.25 m. Likewise, a 1 in = 40 ft scale equates to a text height of around 4.0 ft.

• Pipe Text - Selecting the Align Text with Pipe box aligns the text with pipes. For more information, see the Element Annotation topic.

In AutoCAD mode if you change the Symbol Size, Text Height, or Annotation Height you will be prompted with the Text Positioning dialog, which allows you to select one of the following options when applying the scaling operation.

• Maintain current text positions - The current position of all the annotation will be maintained after the scale is changed.

• Reset text to default positions - The annotation will be repositioned to the default position calculated by the program.

On the Text Positioning dialog there is a check box that is labeled Don't show this dialog again. If you check this box you will not be prompted with this dialog until you turn it back on using one of the following commands at the AutoCAD command line.

WTRCScaleChangeOptions - if you are in WaterCAD STMCScaleChangeOptions - if you are using StormCAD SWRCScaleChangeOptions - if you are using SewerCAD

Pipe Text The Align Text with Pipes toggle lets you specify whether you want the pipe labeling and annotations to be parallel to the pipe or horizontal.

Background Drawing (Stand-Alone mode only) In Stand-Alone mode, a .DXF file may be used as a background image for the drawing pane.

• DXF Background Filename - This field enables you to specify a .DXF file to be used as the background for your project. Enter the drive, directory, and file name, or click the Browse button to select a file interactively.

• Show Background - If the background .DXF file is turned off, it will not be read from a disk or displayed in the drawing pane. If the background is not turned off, it will be read from a disk and displayed.

• DXF Unit - The .DXF drawing unit conversion is used when importing .DXF background files, and also when exporting a .DXF file from the project. Note that the value in this field governs the import behavior for .DXF files saved in scientific, decimal, or fractional units, but not for .DXF files saved in architectural or engineering units.

.DXF file import behavior is governed by specific factors within the .DXF file. If a file does not import as you expect, check the options used to generate it carefully. For example, try importing the .DXF back into the original program or into another program that supports the .DXF format, such as AutoCAD or MicroStation. If the file does not import into other applications, there may be an invalid or missing header, invalid elements, or other errors.

Symbol Visibility Symbol visibility allows you to customize the drawing by turning specific layers on or off. Each drawing layer holds a particular type of graphical element, such as labels and annotation. To remove the graphical elements of a particular layer from the drawing view, simply uncheck the associated box, which are as follows:


• Show Labels - The label layer holds the labels for all network elements.

• Show Graphic Annotations - Graphic annotation includes lines, borders, and text (in Stand-Alone mode only).

• Show Element Annotations - Element annotation includes any dynamic annotation that is added to the project, such as through the Annotation Wizard).

• Show Source Symbols - For a water quality analysis, a symbol may be displayed next to nodes that are defined as Constituent Sources.

• Show Control Symbols - A symbol may be displayed next to pump, valve, and pipe elements with one or more controls, as defined in the Controls tab of the element editors.

• Show Flow Arrows - Arrows indicating the flow direction may be displayed after calculations have been run.

4.5 FlexUnits

4.5.1 FlexUnits Overview FlexUnits (the ability to control units, display precision, etc) are available from almost anywhere within Haestad Methods’ software, including element dialogs, FlexTables, and the FlexUnits Manager.

4.5.2 Field Options Most dialogs provide access to FlexUnits to set options such as unit, rounding, and scientific notation for any field in the dialog.

To set the display options for a unitized attribute:

1. Right-click the field, and select Properties from the pop-up menu. The Set Field Options dialog will appear.

2. Set the options you want for your units.

3. Click OK to set the options for the field, or Cancel to leave without making changes.

You will be able to change the following characteristics:

• Units

• Display Precision

• Scientific Notation

• Minimum and Maximum Allowable Values

Some attributes do not have theoretical minimum or maximum values, and others may have an acceptable range governed by calculation restrictions or physical impossibilities. For these attributes, minimum and maximum allowable values may not be applicable.

Tip: You can see the results of your changes in the preview at the top of the dialog.


4.5.3 Units Units are the method of measurement displayed for the attribute. To change units, click the choice list, then click the desired unit. The list is not limited to either SI or US customary units, so you can mix unit systems within the same project. FlexUnits are intelligent - the units actually have meaning. When you change units, the displayed value is converted to the new unit, so the underlying magnitude of the attribute remains the same. For example, a length of 100.0 feet is not converted to a length of 100.0 m or 100.0 in. It is correctly converted to 30.49 m or 1200.0 in.

To change units, right-click the attribute’s field and select Properties from the pop-up menu, or select FlexUnits from the Tools pull-down menu.

4.5.4 Display Precision The precision setting can be used to control the number of digits displayed after the decimal point, or the rounding of numbers.

Number of Digits Displayed After Decimal Point Enter 0 or a positive number to specify the number of digits after the decimal point.

For example, if the display precision is set to 3, a value of 123.456789 displays as 123.457. This works the same regardless of whether scientific notation is active.

Rounding Enter a negative number to specify rounding to the nearest power of 10. (-1) rounds to the nearest 10, (-2) rounds to the nearest 100, and so on.

For example, if the display precision is set to (-3), a value of 1,234,567.89 displays as 1,235,000.

Note: Display precision is for numeric formatting only and will not affect calculation accuracy.

To access display precision, right-click the attribute’s field and select Properties from the pop-up menu, or select FlexUnits from the Tools pull-down menu.

4.5.5 Scientific Notation Scientific notation displays the number as a real number beginning with an integer or real value, followed by the letter "e" and an integer (possibly preceded by a sign). Click the field to turn scientific notation on or off. A check will appear in the box to indicate that this setting is turned on.

Note: Scientific Notation is for numeric formatting only and will not affect calculation accuracy.

To access scientific notation, right-click the attribute’s field and select Properties from the pop-up menu, or select FlexUnits from the Tools pull-down menu.

4.5.6 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Value Minimum and maximum values are used to control the allowable range for an attribute, and are used for validation of user input. For example, some coefficient values might typically range between 0.09 and 0.20. A frequent user input error is to misplace the decimal point when entering a value. If you enter a


number that is less than the minimum allowed value, a warning message will be displayed. This helps reduce the number of input errors.

You may change this number in cases where you find the default limits too restrictive.

Note: These allowable minimums and maximums are only available for certain parameters.

To access unit minimum and maximum, right-click the attributes field and select Properties from the pop-up menu, or select FlexUnits from the Tools pull-down menu.

4.5.7 FlexUnits Manager The FlexUnits Manager allows you to set the parameters for all the units used. The dialog consists of the following columns:

• Attribute Type - Parameter measured by the unit.

• Unit - Type of measurement displayed. To change the unit of an attribute type, click the choice list and click the unit you want. This option also allows you to use both US Customary and SI units in the same worksheet.

• System - Set the system of units. Click the system column for the desired unit, and a button will appear. Click the button, and set the unit system to US or SI.

• Display Precision - Rounding of numbers and number of digits displayed after the decimal point. Enter a negative number for rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1) rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to indicate the number of digits after the decimal point. This feature works the same whether scientific notation is on or off.

• Scientific Notation - Display numbers in scientific notation. Click the field to turn scientific notation on or off. If it is turned on, a checkmark appears in the box.

Note: The display units can also be changed from several other areas in the program, and any changes are project-wide. For example, if length is changed from units of feet to meters, all dialogs will display length in meters. If you change the units in the dialog from meters to yards, the FlexUnits Manager will indicate that length is in yards.

To access the FlexUnits Manager, select Tools / FlexUnits from the pull-down menus.


Notes


Chapter 5

Layout and Editing Tools

5.1 Graphical Editor Overview This chapter describes the various tools that are available to simplify the process of graphically or manually entering network data. These tools allow you to select elements to perform various graphical or editing operations, locate particular elements, review the network for potential problems, label or relabel elements, review your data, or define any new type of data.

5.2 Graphical Editor

5.2.1 Using the Graphical Editor One of the most powerful features of the graphical editor, both in Stand-Alone and AutoCAD modes, is the ability to create, move, edit, and delete network elements graphically. With these capabilities, modeling becomes a simple point and click exercise. The on-line tutorials have step-by-step instructions for performing common tasks in the graphical editor, and Lesson 1 also offers assistance.

5.2.2 Working with Network Elements Within the Graphical Editor Most network editing tasks can be performed using only your mouse. The pull-down menus and AutoCAD command line also offer the ability to perform many of these tasks, but by simply pointing and clicking with the mouse you will be able to:

• Create New Elements

• Select Elements

• Edit Elements

• Move Elements

• Delete Elements

• Graphic Annotation

110 Chapter 5 – Layout and Editing Tools

Note: As you place your mouse over each element, a tool-tip is displayed informing you of the element’s label and annotations. This feature is useful when the element labels have been turned off or when the drawing view is zoomed out.

5.2.3 Creating New Elements The tool palette contains all of the tools necessary for adding network elements to the drawing. These element tools include:

Pipe Layout Tool - Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes, pumps, valves, tanks, and reservoirs.

Pressure Junction Tool - Junctions are non-storage nodes where water can leave the network to satisfy consumer demands or enter the network as an inflow. Junctions are also where chemical constituents can enter the network.

Tank Tool - Tanks are a type of storage node. The water surface elevation of a tank will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation.

Reservoir Tool - Reservoirs are a type of storage node. The water surface elevation of a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation.

Pump Tool - Pumps are elements that add head to the system as water passes through. A Pump is represented as a node.

Valve Tool - Valves are elements that open, throttle, or close to satisfy a condition you specify. A valve is represented as a node.

Spot Elevation Tool - In addition to the elevations at junction nodes and other network elements, supplemental spot elevations can be entered throughout the model without adding unnecessary model nodes.

Although elements can be inserted individually, the most rapid method of network creation is through the Pipe Layout tool. The Pipe Layout tool enables you to connect existing nodes with new pipes, but also allows you to create new nodes as you lay out the pipes.

For example, when the Pipe Layout tool is active, clicking within the drawing pane will insert a node. Clicking again at another location will insert another node and connect the two with a pipe. Use the on-line tutorials to experience it interactively.

5.2.4 Changing the Pipe Layout Tool to Insert a Different Type of Node While laying out a network, you may need to change the type of node that the Pipe Layout tool inserts. This can be done very easily by following the steps outlined below:

With the Pipe Layout tool active, right-click in the drawing pane.

• A pop-up menu will appear with a list of available element types.

• Select an element type from the pop-up menu.

Note: The cursor appearance will change to reflect the type of node to be inserted.


5.2.5 Morphing Elements Occasionally, you may find that you need to replace a node with a different type of node. You can make this change through a process called morphing.

Morphing enables you to change an existing network node type, without having to delete and re-create the node and all of its connecting links. Information types that are common between the existing and new elements will be copied into the new element. To morph an existing element into a different type of element:

• Select the new element type from the Tool Palette.

• In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the old element and click the left mouse button.

• You will be prompted to verify that you want to morph. Answer yes to perform the morph, or answer no and a new element will be added at the specified location. If you accidentally morph an element, this action can be undone by selecting Edit / Undo from the pull-down menus.

5.2.6 Splitting Pipes You may encounter a situation in which you need to add a new node in the middle of an existing pipe. For example, you may want to insert a new inlet to capture excessive surface flow in StormCAD, a new junction to represent additional demand in WaterCAD, or a new manhole to maintain maximum access hole spacing in SewerCAD.

You can split existing pipes simply by inserting a node along the pipe as follows:

From the Tool Palette, select the node type.

• In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the pipe and click.

• You will be prompted to confirm that you wish to split the pipe. If you choose to split the pipe, the node will be inserted and two new pipes will be created with the same characteristics as the original pipe (lengths are split proportionally).

• If you choose not to split the pipe, the new element will be placed on top of the pipe without connecting to anything.

If you accidentally split a pipe, this action can be undone by selecting Edit / Undo from the pull-down menus.

5.2.7 Selecting Elements You can select one element or a group of elements from drawing pane on which to perform various operations such as moving, deleting, and editing.

Selecting Elements (Stand-Alone Mode)

• In Stand-Alone model activate the Select tool .

• To select a single element, simply click the desired element. To select a group of elements, click the drawing pane and drag the mouse to form a selection box around the elements you want to select, then click again to choose the other corner of the selection box. All elements that are fully enclosed within the selection box will be selected.

To toggle the selected status of one or more elements, you can follow the same instructions as above while holding down the Shift key. There are also additional ways to select elements through the Edit menu.


When an element is selected in the Stand-Alone drawing pane, it will be displayed with at least one grip. A grip is a black box, as shown below, that indicates the figure’s insertion point. The label of a selected item, or the number of selected items, will be displayed in the status bar.

Selecting Elements (AutoCAD Mode) Within AutoCAD, the Select tool does not need to be active when making a selection. Simply use the standard AutoCAD selection techniques.

AutoCAD also offers a variety of other selection methods that are outlined in the AutoCAD documentation.

When an element is selected in AutoCAD, it may be displayed in a dashed linetype, and the grips may become visible, as shown below. The exact display depends on how the element was selected and the value of the AutoCAD variable GRIPS.

Other Graphical Selection Functions

Single Element Selection Dialog Use the Select Element dialog box to select a single element from your model.

− Elements -The Elements drop-down list acts as a filter for the elements displayed in the available element display pane. Select an element type here to only display elements of that type, or select <all> if you want all element types to be displayed.

− Ellipsis Button (…) - Opens the Selection Set dialog.

− Select From Drawing - This button returns you to the drawing pane to allow you to visually select an element. When an element is clicked in the drawing view, you are returned to the Select Element dialog, where the element that was clicked will be highlighted.

Calibration Group Selection Dialog This dialog is very similar to the Selection Set dialog, with one exception: Once an element has been added to a group, it cannot be included in any other groups. See the Selection Set topic for more information on using this dialog.

Select From Drawing Button The Select From Drawing button allows you to graphically select elements. Clicking this button brings you back to the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the elements that you want to deactivate. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse button opens a menu that allows you to select Done, which will bring you back to the dialog in which you initially clicked the Select From Drawing button.

5.2.8 Editing Elements There are several methods for editing network element data, including Quick Edit, FlexTables, and the Alternative Manager. You can also import data using Database Connections.

Perhaps the most common method of changing element data, however, is from an individual element’s editor dialog. To edit a single element, use the Select tool in Stand-Alone mode or in AutoCAD mode.


In Stand-Alone mode and in AutoCAD 2000i, editing a single element is very easy. Simply double-click the element, and the Editor dialog will open. Alternatively, you can right-click the element and select Edit… from the pop-up menu.

In AutoCAD 2000/2002, the process is slightly different. First, click the Select tool, then click the element you wish to edit. If you are using AutoCAD 2000/2002, you can also right-click to activate the pop-up context menu or simply double-click the element to be edited.

Right-click context menus can provide easy access to common functions and actions.

In AutoCAD 2000i, as in Stand-Alone, you can also double-click the element to bring up its editor.

Moving Elements You can change the location of elements easily, whether you are in Stand-Alone or AutoCAD mode.

The first step is to select the element(s) to be moved. Next, click to drag the element, and release to drop it at its new location. In AutoCAD mode, you can accomplish this by dragging the grips. When a node is moved to a new location, all connected pipes will remain attached, and pipe lengths will automatically update (unless the pipe has a user-defined length or you are working in schematic mode).

Tip: For more information regarding moving elements within AutoCAD, please refer to your Autodesk documentation.

In the same fashion, you can graphically change the location of element labels and annotation relative to the element.

A node element can also be moved by editing its coordinates in the element’s editor, in FlexTables, or through database connections.

Deleting Elements Deleting elements is quite easy. Simply select the element(s) to be deleted, and press the Delete key on the keyboard. Note that the integrity of the network is automatically maintained when deletions are performed. This means that when a node is deleted, any connecting pipes are also deleted to prevent "dangling" pipes that would cause the network to be invalid.

There are also several other methods of deleting elements, including selecting Edit / Delete from the pull-down menus, or typing ERASE at AutoCAD’s command line.

5.2.9 Other Tools Although this product is primarily a modeling application, some additional drafting tools can be helpful for intermediate calculations and drawing annotation. AutoCAD, of course, provides a tremendous number of drafting tools.

In Stand-Alone mode, drafting and annotation tools allow you to add polylines (multi-segmented lines), rectangles, and text to the drawing pane.


Line-Enclosed Area In Stand-Alone mode, you can calculate the enclosed area of any closed polyline. This feature can be especially helpful for determining the size of storm catchments or land-use areas.

Simply right-click the closed polyline, and select Enclosed Area from the pop-up menu. The Area dialog will open, displaying the calculated area of the polyline enclosure.

Note: This tool is only available for closed polylines. To close an open-ended polyline, right-click it and select Close from the pop-up menu.

Although this feature is not provided in AutoCAD mode, you can determine the area of any AutoCAD polyline by performing a LIST command.

5.3 Selection Sets

5.3.1 Selection Sets Selection sets are user-defined groups of network elements. They allow you to predefine a group of network elements that you want to manipulate together. Selection sets are defined through the Selection Set Manager by selecting Tools / Selection Sets from the pull-down menus.

5.3.2 Selection Set Manager • Add - Add a new selection set.

• Edit - Edit an existing selection set.

• Duplicate - Copy an existing selection set.

• Delete - Delete an existing selection set.

• Rename - Rename an existing selection set.

• Notes - Add a note regarding the selection set.

5.3.3 New Selection Set After clicking Add in the Selection Set Manager, a dialog appears. Simply enter the name of your new selection set in the dialog. Click OK to name the selection set, or Cancel to exit the dialog without creating a selection set.

5.3.4 Selection Set Dialog In this dialog, you will notice two panes. A listing of all the elements in the network is displayed in the Available Items pane. To add items to the Selected Items pane, select the desired elements in the available list and click the [>] button under Add. To add all the elements to your selection set, click the [>>] button.

Additionally, you can use the Select button to highlight items in the Available Items pane using a variety of powerful selection techniques, or by graphically selecting elements from the drawing. It will also allow you to invert the selection set, thereby unselecting the ones already selected and selecting the ones not already selected. You can also clear the selected items using the Select button.


The features mentioned above are also available to remove items from the Selected Items pane.

There is also a Select From Drawing button. Clicking this button brings you back to the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the elements that you want to include in the selection set. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse button brings you back to the Selection Set Dialog.

5.3.5 Duplicate Selection Set Click Duplicate to make a copy of the highlighted selection set.

5.3.6 Rename Selection Set Click Rename to open a dialog that allows you to change the name of the highlighted selection set.

5.3.7 Selection Set Notes Click Notes to input free form paragraph text that will be associated with the highlighted selection set.

5.3.8 Delete Selection Set Click Delete to delete the highlighted selection set.

5.4 Find Element

5.4.1 Find Element This is a powerful feature that allows you to quickly locate any element in the drawing by its label. It performs a case insensitive search. The Find Element feature is available from the Edit menu on the main window.

To find an element:

Choose Edit / Find Element from the pull-down menus.

• Type the label of the element you wish to find, or click the list box to choose from a sorted list of elements in the system.

• You may wish to choose a Zoom Factor from the list provided. 100% is the default Zoom Factor. If you wish to magnify the view of the drawing, then choose a Zoom Factor greater than 100%. To decrease the view of the drawing, choose a Zoom Factor less than 100%.

• Click OK.

5.5 Zooming

5.5.1 Zooming Zooming controls how large or small a drawing appears on the screen. Zooming is helpful when you want to enlarge the display to see the drawing’s details, or to reduce the display to see an entire drawing. Zooming does not change the actual size of the drawing, only the size of the current view.


You can zoom by doing one of the following:

From the View pull-down menu or the toolbars you can perform the following zoom operations:

Zoom In

Enlarge the view of the drawing.

Zoom Out

Decrease the view of the drawing.

Zoom Window

Choose the portion of the drawing to fit in the window by drawing a selection box around it.

Zoom Extents

Bring all elements in the drawing into view.

Zoom Previous

Return to the most recent view of the drawing.

Zoom Center Center the location of specific coordinates within the drawing pane.

Notes: You can use the Plus key (+) and the Minus key (-) on the numeric keyboard as a shortcut for zooming in and out respectively (Stand-Alone mode only).

You can also zoom in and out by holding down the ctrl key and using the mouse wheel.

5.5.2 Zoom Center The Zoom Center dialog provides you with a quick way to zoom to any area of your drawing. This feature is useful if you want to start laying out a network around certain coordinates, or if you know the coordinates of an existing element that you would like to locate.

To use Zoom Center:

• Select View / Zoom Center from the pull-down menus.

• In the Zoom Center dialog, enter the coordinates to which you would like to zoom.

• Select a zoom factor if you would like to increase or decrease the magnification.

• Click OK, and the specified coordinates will be located at the center of the drawing.

5.5.3 Aerial View The Aerial View is a small navigation window that provides a graphical overview of your entire drawing. You can toggle the Aerial View window on or off by selecting View / Aerial View from the pull-down menu.

A Navigation Rectangle is displayed in the Aerial View window. This Navigation Rectangle provides a "you are here" indicator showing you current zoom location respective of the overall drawing. As you pan and zoom around the drawing, the Navigation Rectangle will automatically update to reflect your current location.


You can also use the Aerial View window to navigate around your drawing. To pan, simply click the Navigation Rectangle to drag it to a new location. To zoom, click anywhere in the window to specify the first corner of the Navigation Rectangle, and click again to specify the second corner.

In AutoCAD mode: Refer to the AutoCAD on-line Help for a detailed explanation.

In Stand-Alone mode: With Aerial View window enabled (by selecting the View / Aerial View from the pull-down menu), click and drag to draw a rectangular view box in the aerial view. The area inside this view box is displayed in the main drawing window. Alternately, any zooming or panning action performed directly in the main window updates the size and location of the view box in the Aerial View window.

The Aerial View window contains the following buttons:

• Zoom Extents - Display the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.

• Zoom In - Decrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window.

• Zoom Out - Increase the area displayed in the Aerial View window.

To resize the view box directly from the Aerial View window, simply click to define the new rectangular view box. To change the location of the view box, hover the mouse cursor over the current view rectangle and click to drag the view box frame to a new location.

5.6 Drawing Review

5.6.1 Drawing Review The Drawing Review window allows you to quickly navigate to and review any group of elements. This tool is particularly useful for finding potential problems in a network. These problems may result from data entry errors or data discrepancies in the source (database, Shapefile, or CAD drawing) from which a model was imported.

By default, when the Drawing Review window opens, all elements will appear in the list. You can work with any subset of elements by choosing one of the following items:

• Select / Custom - Allows you to choose any set of elements to review using the Selection Set dialog.

• Select / All Elements - Automatically selects all available elements.

• Select / Nodes in Close Proximity - Allows you to select all nodes that are within a user-defined tolerance of another node. The tolerance is defined in the Nodes in Close Proximity dialog, which opens when this option is selected. This tool is useful for finding and correcting connectivity problems. For example, if two nodes are close to each other they may actually be the same node, and one of them needs to be deleted.

• Select / Pipe-Split Candidates - Allows you to find nodes that are closer to a pipe than a user-defined tolerance, but are not connected to the system. The tolerance is defined in the Pipe-Split Candidates dialog, which opens when this option is selected. This option is useful for finding and correcting connectivity problems.

• Select / Orphaned Nodes - Allows you to select all orphaned nodes in your network. A node is an orphan when it is not connected to any pipe.

• Select / Elements with Messages - Allows you to select all the elements that have warnings or error


messages, appearing in the Messages tab of an Element Editor dialog. This is useful for correcting data entry errors.

• Select / Clear Drawing Review Messages - Allows you to reset Drawing Review messages for all elements in the list. Drawing Review messages are automatically added during various Import operations such as Polyline to Pipe Import and Land Development Desktop Import (SewerCAD or StormCAD only). After you review and fix these problems, you may want to clear the review messages. If you want to retain some of the drawing review messages, simply remove those elements from the list prior to performing this operation.

The elements you select will appear in the primary list located along the left side of the Drawing Review window.

• Go To - To navigate to an element, select the desired element in the list and press the Go To button.

• Next / Prev - To navigate to the elements sequentially, use the Next or Prev buttons.

• Zoom - You can control the degree to which the drawing review zooms into the selected element by choosing a zoom factor from the field labeled Zoom, located in the lower right corner of the dialog.

Tips: You can double-click an element in the list to quickly navigate to that element.

If you know the name of the element to which you wish to navigate, type the label in the field located above the element list and click the Go To button.

All menus and toolbars will remain available even when the Drawing Review window is open. This allows you to navigate to and fix any problems that you find.

Use the Drawing Review window in conjunction with the QuickView window to review the data for the selected elements.

To access the Drawing Review dialog, select Edit / Review Drawing from the pull-down menu.

5.6.2 Selection Tolerance Some select operations require you to specify a tolerance for defining which nodes will be selected for the Drawing Review window.

• Elements in Close proximity - If the distance between the elements in the drawing is within the specified tolerance, those elements will be selected for display in the Drawing Review window.

• Pipe Split Candidates - If the distance between a node and a pipe is within the specified tolerance, it will be selected for display in the Drawing Review window.

5.7 Relabel Elements

5.7.1 Relabel Elements Dialog Element relabeling allows you to modify the labels of a selected set of elements. This feature is especially useful with a model built from a database that uses numeric IDs to identify elements, making it difficult to distinguish between the different types of elements in the system. With element relabeling, you can quickly append a prefix such as ‘P-’ to all pipes in your system so that it is obvious which labels belong to elements representing pipes.


The Relabel Elements dialog contains two sections:

• Relabel Operations - Allows you to select and define the operations you want to perform.

• Elements Selected - Allows you to select which elements in your project you want to relabel.

To access the Relabel Elements dialog, select Tools / Relabel Elements from the pull-down menus.

5.7.2 Relabel Operations The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of element labels: Replace, Renumber, and Append. The active relabel operation is chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of the Relabel Elements dialog. The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active relabel operation appear below the Relabel Operations section. The following list presents a description of the available element relabel operations.

• Replace - This operation allows you to replace all instances of a character or series of characters in the selected element labels with another piece of text. For instance, if you selected elements with labels P-1, P-2, P-12, and J-5, you could replace all the P's with the word Pipe by entering ‘P’ in the Find field, ‘Pipe’ in the Replace With field, and clicking the Apply button. The resulting labels are Pipe-1, Pipe-2, Pipe-12, and J-5. You can also use this operation to delete portions of a label. Suppose you now want to go back to the original labels. You can enter ‘ipe’ in the Find field and leave the Replace With field blank to reproduce the labels P-1, P-2, P-12, and J-5. There is also the option to match the case of the characters when searching for the characters to replace. This option can be activated by checking the box next to the Match Case field.

• Renumber - This operation allows you to generate a new label, including suffix, prefix, and ID number for each selected element. For example, if you had the labels P-1, P-4, P-10, and Pipe-12, you could use this feature to renumber the elements in increments of five, starting at five, with a minimum number of two digits for the ID number field. You could specify a prefix ‘P-’ and a suffix ‘-Z1’ in the Prefix and Suffix fields, respectively. The prefix and suffix are appended to the front and back of the automatically generated ID number. The value of the new ID for the first element to be relabeled, 5, is entered in the Next field. The value by which the numeric base of each consecutive element is incremented, 5, is entered in the Increment field. The minimum number of digits in the ID number, 2, is entered in the Digits field. If the number of digits in the ID number is less then this value, zeros are placed in front of it. Click the Apply button to produce the following labels: P-05-Z1, P-10-Z1, P-15-Z1, and P-20-Z1.

• Append - This operation allows you to append a prefix, suffix, or both to the selected element labels. Suppose that you have selected the labels 5, 10, 15, and 20, and you wish to signify that these elements are actually pipes in Zone 1 of your system. You can use the append operation to add an appropriate prefix and suffix, such as ‘P-’ and ‘-Z1’, by specifying these values in the Prefix and Suffix fields and clicking the Apply button. Performing this operation yields the labels P-5-Z1, P-10-Z1, P-15-Z1 and P-20-Z1. You can append only a prefix or suffix by leaving the other entry field empty. However, for the operation to be valid, one of the entry fields must be filled in.

The selection set of elements on which the relabel operation is to be performed can be selected in the Elements section of the Relabel Elements dialog.

To access the Relabel Elements dialog, select Tools / Relabel Elements from the pull-down menu.

5.7.3 Elements Selected The Elements section contains a pane that lists the elements to be relabeled. You can select the set of elements that appears in this pane by clicking the Select button. This accesses the Selection Set dialog, where you can pick a set of elements from all the elements currently in the project.


For the Append and Replace operations, the order that the elements appear in the text pane does not affect the results of the operation. However, for the Renumber operation, the order in which the elements appear in the text pane determines the order in which they will be renumbered. The default order in which the elements appear in the text pane is in the alphanumeric order of the element labels, called Ascending order. If you wish to change this order, click the Sort button, and select Network Order to put the elements in the order they appear in the network, Descending Order to put them in reverse alphanumeric order, or Ascending Order to put them back in alphanumeric order.

5.8 Element Labeling

5.8.1 Element Labeling The Element Labeling dialog is used to specify the automatic numbering format of new elements as they are added to the network. The following options are available:

• Element - View the type of element to which the label applies.

• Next - Enter the integer you want to use as the starting value for the ID number portion of the label. The program will generate labels beginning with this number, and will choose the first available unique label.

• Increment - Enter the integer that will be added to the ID number after each element is created to yield the number for the next element.

• Prefix - Enter the letters or numbers that will appear in front of the ID number for the elements in your network.

• Digits - Enter the minimum number of digits that the ID number will have. For instance, 1, 10, and 100 with a digit setting of two would be 01, 10, and 100.

• Suffix - Enter the letters or numbers that will appear after the ID number for the elements in your network.

• Preview - View an example of what the label will look like based on the information you have entered in the previous fields.

Changes to the element labeling specifications will only affect the numbering of new elements. Existing elements will not be affected. In order to adjust the numbering of existing elements, utilize the Relabel Elements option accessible from the Tools menu.

Note: Pipe labeling can be aligned with the pipes or be displayed horizontally, depending on the Pipe Text setting specified in the Drawing Options dialog.

You can control the angle at which the text flips from one side of the pipe to the other to read in the opposite direction, when the pipe direction on a plot is nearly vertical. By default, the text flips direction when the pipe direction is 1.5 degrees, measured counter-clockwise from the vertical. You may modify this value by inserting a TextFlipAngle variable in the Haestad.ini file that is located in the program file of your Haestad directory, and specifying the angle at which the text should flip. The angle is measured in degrees, counter-clockwise from the vertical. For instance, if you want the text to flip when the pipe direction is vertical, you should add the following line to the Haestad.ini file:

TextFlipAngle=0.0

Reasonable values typically fall in the range 15.0 deg to -15.0 deg.

To access the Element Labeling dialog, select Tools / Element Labeling from the pull-down menus.


5.8.2 Moving Element Labels and Annotation When multiple lines of annotation are present, you can move all lines as a group by clicking and holding the left mouse button, and dragging the labels to the desired position. If you want to move these labels individually, click on one of the lines of annotation to highlight them. You will notice highlighted grips in the middle of each line. Click on this grip with the left mouse button, hold down the button, and drag to move a single line of annotation to the desired location.

Tip: To select multiple lines of annotation, hold down the Shift key while clicking the lines sequentially.

5.9 Quick Edit

5.9.1 Quick Edit The Quick Edit window provides you with a fast way to edit or view the data associated with any element in the network without having to open the element dialog. It is a floating window that includes input and output information for any element that you have selected. It also includes a convenient color-coding legend. Three tabs are provided on the window:

• Input - Contains input data for the selected element.

• Output - Contains output data for the selected element.

• Legend - Displays ranges of the active color-coding.

When the Quick Edit window is open, the data for an entity will immediately be displayed when you select it within the graphical editor. Once an element has been selected, click on any editable field on the Input tab to edit the associated value. Edits will be committed when you leave the Quick Edit window. Changes made through the Quick Edit window can be undone/redone by accessing the Edit menu.

Notes: You can change the size of the Label, Value, and Unit columns on the Input/Output tabs by using the resizing bar at the top of the Quick Edit window.

You can highlight an Input or Output attribute (e.g. Demand), by clicking the label of that attribute in the Quick Edit window. This highlighting provides for better visual feedback, for example, when monitoring the pressures at several nodes.


Notes


Chapter 6

Hydraulic Element Editors

6.1 Overview This chapter presents a detailed look at the input and output data for each type of element used in a WaterCAD project and the way it is organized in the graphical user interface. First, a description of the elements used to model the water distribution network is provided, including prototypes as a way to initialize new model elements with default values. Then the chapter addresses the user data extension, which allows you to add your own attributes to any element, and the Zone Manager, which allows you to group modeling elements into zones.

The primary component of a WaterCAD project is the network model. The element types that are used to form a network are:

• Pressure Pipes - Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes, pumps, valves, tanks, and reservoirs to each other. The only way for water to travel from one node to another is by following a path through one or more pipes.

• Pressure Junctions - Junctions are non-storage nodes where water can leave the network to satisfy consumer demands, water can enter the network as an inflow, or chemical constituents can enter the network.

• Tanks - Tanks are a type of storage node. The water surface elevation of a tank will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation. Tanks can have either a circular or non-circular cross section.

• Reservoirs - A reservoir is a type of storage node. The water surface elevation of a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation, unless an HGL Pattern has been applied to the reservoir. Reservoirs can be used to model external water sources such as lakes, streams, and wells. When an HGL pattern is applied, reservoirs can also be used to represent tidal activity and connections to other systems where the pressure varies over time.

• Pumps - A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes through. It is typically defined by a pump curve and control elevations, which turn the pump on or off. It is represented as a node.

• Valves - A valve is an element that opens, throttles, or closes to satisfy a condition you specify. It is represented as a node.

124 Chapter 6 – Hydraulic Element Editors

Note: A water distribution system model will not be considered valid for calculation if the number of pipes exceeds the licensed size. To determine how many pipes you are licensed for, choose the Help/About WaterCAD menu item. Click the Registration button to view the size that has been licensed. If the total number of pipes exceeds the licensed size, the project will not calculate.

6.2 Element Editors

6.2.1 Using Element Editors The Element Editors allow you to edit all input data and view all output data defining a single network element.

Note: Element data may also be viewed/edited more efficiently through FlexTables, which display all the data in customizable tabular format, allowing you to perform functions such as sorting, filtering, and global editing. The data may also be quickly reviewed and edited through the Quick Edit window.

To access an Element Editor:

Stand-Alone: Double-click the element you wish to edit, or right-click the element and select Edit from the drop-down menu.

AutoCAD 2000 /2002: Double-click the element you wish to edit, Pick the Select tool and click the element you wish to edit, or select the element and choose Edit from the drop-down menu.

AutoCAD 2000i: Double-click the element you wish to edit, or right-click the element and select Edit from the drop-down menu.

6.2.2 Pressure Pipe Editor Pipes are link elements that connect junction nodes, pumps, valves, tanks, and reservoirs to each other. The only way for water to travel from one node to another is by following a path through one or more pipes. The pressure pipe editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs:

• General - General pipe information including dimension and physical characteristics data, as well as hydraulic results.

• Controls - Control data used to specify whether the pipe is open or closed at a specified time or based on the HGL or pressure at any node in the system.

• Quality - Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog.

• Capital Cost - Cost Analysis input/output data used when performing Cost Analysis calculations.

• User Data - Additional data as defined by the user. New fields can be added, such as the pipe installation date.


• Messages - Calculation messages, such as warnings or error messages, and user-entered notes and descriptions.

For more information on the data, refer to the topics describing each tab.

6.2.3 Pressure Junction Editor • General - General junction information including geographical data and hydraulic results.

• Demand - Assignment of demands or inflows to junction elements in order to simulate water leaving or entering the network. Inflows and demands consist of a baseline flow rate and an associated Fixed or Extended Period Simulation (EPS) Pattern.

• Quality - Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis, as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog.

• Fire Flow - Contains fire flow input and output data.


• User Data - Additional data as defined by the user. New fields can be added, such as the junction installation date.



6.2.4 Tank Editor Tanks are a type of storage node. The water surface elevation of a tank will change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation. Tanks can have either circular or non-circular cross sections. WaterCAD allows you to define tanks with either fixed or variable sections.

Note: For steady-state simulations, a tank is considered to have a constant water surface elevation, similar to a reservoir.

The tank editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs:

• General - General tank information including geographical data and hydraulic results.

• Demand - Assignment of demands or inflows to tank elements in order to simulate water leaving or entering the network.

• Section - Data defining the geometric characteristics of the tank and its operating level range.



• User Data - Additional data as defined by the user. New fields can be added, such as the tank installation date.




6.2.5 Reservoir Editor A reservoir is a type of storage node. The water surface elevation of a reservoir does not change as water flows into or out of it during an extended period simulation. Reservoirs can be used to model external water sources such as lakes, streams, and wells. The reservoir editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs:

• General - General reservoir information including geographical data and hydraulic results.



• User Data - Additional data as defined by the user. New fields can be added, such as the reservoir installation date or other GIS data.



6.2.6 Pump Editor A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes through it. This software can currently be used to model six different pump types:

• Constant Power

• Design Point (One-Point)

• Standard (Three-Point)

• Standard Extended

• Custom Extended

• Multiple Point

Tip: Avoid using constant power or design point pumps except for preliminary estimates. They are often enticing because they require less work on behalf of the engineer, but they are much less accurate than a pump curve based on several representative points.

Note: It is not necessary to place a check valve on the pipe immediately downstream of a pump, because pumps have built in check valves that prevent reverse flow.

The pump editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs:

• General - General pump information including geographical data, pump curve data, initial settings, and hydraulic results.

• VSP - This tab contains the variable speed pump settings.

• Controls - Data specifying the on/off elevation settings of the pump, as well as relative speed factor settings in the case of a variable speed pump.

• Energy - This tab contains the pump efficiency input for use in Energy Cost analysis.


• Quality - Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis as specified in the Scenario Calculation dialog.


• User Data - Additional data as defined by the user. New fields can be added, such as the pump installation date.



6.2.7 Valve Editor A valve is an element that opens, throttles, or closes to satisfy a condition you specify. This software can model several different types of valves. The behavior of a valve is determined by the upstream (From Pipe) and downstream (To Pipe) conditions. The valve types include:

• Pressure Reducer Valve (PRV) - PRVs throttle to prevent the downstream hydraulic grade from exceeding a set value. If the downstream grade rises above the set value, the PRV will close. If the head upstream is lower than the valve setting, the valve will open fully.

• Pressure Sustaining Valve (PSV) - PSVs throttle to prevent the upstream hydraulic grade from dropping below a set value. If the upstream grade is lower than the set grade, the valve will close completely.

• Pressure Breaker Valve (PBV) - PBVs are used to force a specified pressure (head) drop across the valve. These valves do not automatically check flow, and will actually boost the pressure in the direction of reverse flow to achieve a downstream grade that is lower than the upstream grade by a set amount.

• Flow Control Valve (FCV) - FCVs are used to limit the maximum flow rate through the valve from upstream to downstream. FCVs do not limit the minimum flow rate or negative flow rate (flow from the To Pipe to the From Pipe).

• Throttle Control Valve (TCV) - TCVs are used as controlled minor losses. A TCV is simply a valve that has a minor loss associated with it where the minor loss can change in magnitude according to the controls that are implemented for the valve.

• General Purpose Valve (GPV) - GPVs are used to model situations and devices where the flow - headloss relationship is specified by the user rather than utilizing the standard hydraulic formulas. GPVs can be used to represent reduced pressure backflow prevention valves, well draw-down behavior, and turbines.

Tips: You can change a valve from one type to another by a process called "morphing". Just click the new valve type on the toolbar, and drag the new valve on top of the old one.

If you are using a valve that does not normally check flow, but you would like it to, simply set one of the pipes connecting to the valve with a check valve.

The valve editor organizes the related input data and calculated results into the following tabs:

• General - General valve information including geographical data and hydraulic results.

• Controls - Data specifying how the valve is controlled, as a function of the time or the hydraulic condition at any node in the system.

• Quality - Input parameters used when performing a Water Quality Analysis, as specified in the


Scenario Calculation dialog.


• User Data - Additional data as defined by the user. New fields can be added, such as the valve installation date.



6.3 Element Editors' Tabs

6.3.1 General Tab

Pressure Pipe General Tab The General tab for pressure pipes is organized into the following groups:

• Pipe - General pipe data.

• Initial Status - Specify a pipes initial condition, open or closed.

• User-Defined Length - Specify whether the pipe length is calculated automatically or user-defined.

• Nodes - Define a positive direction for the flow in the pipe. This is used for check valves or flow results. A reported negative flow indicates that the water is flowing from the To Node to the From Node.

• Hydraulic Results - Calculated hydraulic data.

• Water Quality - Results of the water quality computations in the pipe reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed.

For more information on the data, see the topic on each data section below.

Pipe Section

In this section you enter in all of the pipe general characteristics: • Label - Unique name referencing the pipe in reports, error messages, and tables.

• Material - Pipe material, with its associated roughness value, selected from the Material Library.

• Diameter - Diameter of the pipe.

• Roughness Coefficient - Pipe roughness coefficient or value associated with the roughness method selected during the project setup (Manning’s n, Hazen-Williams C, or Darcy-Weisbach roughness height) for the selected material. You can keep the roughness value associated with the selected material, as defined in the material library, or override the roughness value for that specific pipe.

• Minor Loss Coefficient - Coefficient K used in the minor loss equation, as defined in the Minor Losses section in Appendix B. This is the equation most commonly used for determining the headloss in a fitting, valve, meter, or other localized component.

• Check Valve - When this box is checked, flow can only travel from the From Node to the To Node in a pressure pipe.


Tips: By clicking the ellipsis (...) button located next to the Material you can access the engineering library to create and customize materials.

By clicking the ellipsis (…) button on the Minor Loss Coefficient field, you can access the Minor Loss elements and generate composite minor loss coefficients to be applied to the pressure pipe.

Set the minor loss coefficient value to 0.0 if there is no minor loss in the pipe.

Minor Loss Elements Pressure pipes can have an unlimited number of minor loss elements associated with them. This program provides an easy-to-use table for editing these minor losses. The minor loss table consists of four columns:

• Quantity - The number of minor losses of the same type to be added to the composite minor loss for the pipe.

• Minor Loss - The type of minor loss element.

• K Each - The headloss coefficient for a single minor loss element of the specified type.

• K Total - The total minor loss coefficient for the row. It is the Quantity multiplied by the K Each.

The Minor Loss Elements dialog also has three command buttons:

• Insert - Insert a row in the table.

• Duplicate - Create a new row in the table with the same values as the selected row.

• Delete - Delete the selected row of the table.

The Minor Loss Elements dialog is accessed by clicking the ellipsis (…) button next to the Minor Loss Coefficient choice list on the Pressure Pipe Editor.

Initial Status Section The initial status of the pipe can be either Open or Closed. It is possible that this status will change when calculations are performed, based on the presence of controls for that pipe.

Note: In Steady-State Analysis mode, the Initial Status is used as the permanent status. However, it can be overruled by the presence of controls, if the Use Controls in Steady-State Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog is checked. The Calculation Options dialog is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor, and then clicking the Options button.

User-Defined Length Section If the User-Defined Length box is checked, you can enter a pipe length. Otherwise, the program will compute a pipe length from node center to node center, accounting for bends if there are any. Creating user-defined lengths is useful for drawing quick schematics to accelerate your design process.

Nodes Section This section allows you to identify the calculated flow direction. A reported positive flow value indicates that the flow is in the direction of the From Node to the To Node. It is also useful for check valves, which allow flow only in the From Node to To Node direction.


The Reverse button allows you to change the direction of a pipe, switching the From Node and the To Node.

Hydraulic Results Section This section reports the following hydraulic results:

• Discharge - Calculated total flow in the pipe.

• Velocity - Calculated velocity in the pipe.

• Headloss Gradient - Headloss in the pipe represented as a slope, or gradient.

• Pressure Pipe Headloss - Loss of energy in the pipe due to friction and minor losses.

• Control Status - Open or Closed status of the pipe. Open means that flow occurs in the pipe and Closed means that there is no flow.

Water Quality Section This section reports the results of the water quality computations at this location, assuming that a Water Quality Analysis was performed. The water quality parameter displayed depends on the type of water quality analysis being performed. This parameter is one of the three types:

• Age - Report how long the water has been in the system at this node or link.

• Trace - Report the percentage of water at this node or link that originated at another chosen node (tank, reservoir, or junction).

• Constituent - Report the concentration of a given constituent at this node or link.

Pressure Junctions General Tab The General tab for junctions is organized into the following sections:

• General - General information about the junction.

• Calculated Hydraulics - Calculated demand, hydraulic grade and pressure at the junction.

• Water Quality - Result of the water quality computations at this node reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed.

For more information on the data, see the topic on each section. The Water Quality section is described in the "Pressure Pipe General Tab" section.

General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the junction, such as:

• Label - Unique "name" referencing the junction in reports, error messages, and tables.

• X (Easting) - The location of the junction may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

• Y (Northing) - The location of the junction may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

• Elevation - Elevation of the junction.

• Zone - Specify the zone the junction belongs to. You may click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Zone Manager, which allows you to edit or add zones.


• Emitter Coefficient - Discharge coefficient for emitter (sprinkler or nozzle) placed at junction. Units are flow units at 1 unit of pressure drop (psi or m). Leave blank or set to 0 if no emitter is present. See the Flow Emitters topic for more information.

Junction Calculated Hydraulics Section This section reports the following results:

• Demand (Calculated) - Total demand leaving (or entering) the pipe network at the junction at the current time.

• Calculated Hydraulic Grade - Hydraulic grade at the junction.

• Pressure - Pressure at the junction.

Tank General Tab The General tab for tanks is organized into the following sections:

• General - General geographic information about the tank.

• Hydraulics - Calculated flow entering/leaving the tank and the calculated hydraulic grade in the tank.


For more information on the data, see the topic on each section. The Water Quality section is identical for all elements and is described in the "Pressure Pipe General Tab" section.

General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the tank such as:

• Label - Unique name referencing the tank in reports, error messages, and tables.

• X (Easting) - The location of the tank may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

• Y (Northing) - The location of the tank may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

• Elevation - Ground elevation of the tank.

• Zone - Specify the zone the tank belongs to. You may click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Zone Manager, which allows you to edit or add zones.

Hydraulics Section This section reports the hydraulic data of the tank:

• Hydraulic Grade - Calculated hydraulic grade in the tank.

• Inflow/Outflow - Flow entering/leaving the tank (the field label changes accordingly).

Reservoirs General Tab The General tab for reservoirs is organized into the following sections:

• General - General geographic information about the reservoir.

• Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics - Calculated flow entering or leaving the reservoir.




General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the reservoir, such as:

• Label - Unique name referencing the reservoir in reports, error messages, and tables.

• X (Easting) - The location of the reservoir may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

• Y (Northing) - The location of the reservoir may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

• Elevation - Elevation of the water surface in the reservoir, which is assumed to remain constant through time.

• HGL Pattern - Allows you to apply a pattern for changes to the reservoir’s hydraulic grade line over time for extended period simulations. Click on the ellipsis (…) button to open the Pattern Manager. From the Pattern Manager, you can create, edit, and import HGL patterns for the reservoir.

• Zone - Specify the zone in which the reservoir belongs. Click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Zone Manager, which allows you to edit or add zones.

Reservoir Calculated Hydraulics Section This section reports the hydraulic data of the reservoir:

Inflow/Outflow - Flow entering/leaving the reservoir (the field label changes accordingly).

Pump General Tab The General tab for pumps is organized into the following groups:

• General - General data about the pump.

• Pump - Type of pump curve and related data.

• Initial Setting - Initial conditions for a pump describing the pump's behavior at the start of the analysis in EPS mode, or its permanent setting in Steady-State mode.

• Pipes - Direction the pump is operating (i.e. from upstream to downstream node). The direction of pumping can be reversed by clicking the Reverse button.

• Operating Point - Values of pump head and discharge, which are computed by the program to balance with the remaining system heads and flow rates.

• Water Quality - Result of the water quality computations at this pump reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed.


Pump General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the pump such as:

• Label - Unique name referencing the pump in reports, error messages, and tables.


• X (Easting) - The location of the pump may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

• Y (Northing) - The location of the pump may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

• Elevation - Elevation of the pump.

Pump Section The information required for a pump depends on the type of pump that is selected. The possible information is as follows:

• Pump Type - Select one of the six available types of pump curves.

• Pump Power - Represents the water horsepower, or horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump to the water. Depending on the pump's efficiency, the actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary.

• Shutoff - Point at which the pump will have zero discharge. It is typically the maximum head point on a pump curve.

• Design - Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.

• Max Operating - Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended to run. At discharges above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly.

• Max Extended - Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can operate, adding zero head to the system. This value may be computed by the program, or entered as a custom extended point.

Note: All defined pump curve points have an associated head and discharge.

Initial Setting Section The initial conditions for a pump describe the pump's behavior at the start of the analysis. These conditions include:

• Status - One of two available status conditions: On (normal operation), Off (no flow under any condition).

• Relative Speed Factor - Characteristics of the pump relative to the speed for which the pump curve was entered, in accordance with the affinity laws. A speed factor of 1.00 will indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the original pump curve.

Note: In Steady-State Analysis mode, the Pump Status is used as the permanent status. However, it can be overruled by the presence of controls, if the Use Controls in Steady-State Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog is checked. The Calculation Options dialog is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor, and then clicking the Options button.

Pipes Section This indicates the direction in which the pump is operating (from upstream pipe to downstream pipe).


Tip: You can switch the Upstream and Downstream Pipes by clicking the Reverse button.

Operating Point Section The pump's operating point represents the values for pump head and discharge, which are computed by the program to balance with the remaining system heads and flow rates.

The calculated parameters are:

• Pump Head - Head generated by the pump at the operating point.

• Discharge - Discharge produced by the pump at the operating point.

• Pump Intake Pressure - Calculated hydraulic grade line at the intake of the pump.

• Pump Discharge Pressure - Calculated hydraulic grade line at the downstream end of the pump.

Note: For a constant power pump, the calculated operating point may be outside of the range for which the pump is representative of a real pump. Be very cautious and check all results carefully.

Tip: For more information about the theory behind the pump operating point, see the Pump Theory chapter.

Valve General Tab The General tab for valves is organized into the following sections:

• General - General information about the valve.

• Valve Characteristics - Diameter and minor loss coefficient of the valve.

• Initial Setting - Behavior of the valve at the start of the analysis.

• Pipes - Direction in which the valve is controlling the flow. You can reverse that direction by clicking the Reverse button.

• Calculated Hydraulics - Calculated hydraulic data upstream, downstream, and through the valve.

• Water Quality - Result of the water quality computations at the valve reported when a Water Quality Analysis has been performed.

• Head-Discharge Points - This section is only displayed for General Purpose Valves. GPVs require at least two unique points to be entered in this table.


General Section This section allows you to enter general information about the valve such as:

• Label - Unique name referencing the valve in reports, error messages, and tables.

• X (Easting) - The location of the valve may be represented by an X-value or an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.


• Y (Northing) - The location of the valve may be represented by a Y-value or a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

• Elevation - Elevation of the valve.

Valve Characteristics Section The Valve Characteristics section defines the following parameters:

• Diameter - Inside diameter of the valve. Used to calculate the velocity through the valve and a corresponding minor loss, when a minor loss coefficient is entered.

• Minor Loss Coefficient - Coefficient used to model any minor loss associated with the valve for the specified valve diameter, when the valve is fully open. Click the ellipsis (…) button to define composite minor losses. The valve is fully open in the following two cases:

− The valve status is set to Inactive.

− The valve status is set to Active and the hydraulic conditions are such that the valve is fully open.

Note: Minor loss data is not required for Throttle Control Valves (TCVs) because the minor losses are already accounted for by the valve's primary purpose.

Tip: To change the type of a valve, use the element morphing feature of WaterCAD.

Initial Setting Section The initial conditions describe the valve's behavior at the start of the analysis. These conditions include:

• Valve Status - A valve can have several different status conditions:

− Active (throttling, opening, or closing depending on system pressures and flows)

− Closed (no flow under any conditions)

− Inactive (wide open, with no regulation)

• Settings/Hydraulic Grade/Pressure - For Pressure Reducing, Pressure Sustaining and Pressure Breaker Valves, specify either the initial hydraulic grade or the pressure setting associated with the valve.

Note: You only need to specify either the pressure setting or the hydraulic grade setting. The other will be automatically calculated based on the valve's elevation.

• Discharge - For Flow Control Valves, specify the initial discharge to maintain through the valve.

• Headloss Coefficient - For Throttle Control Valves, specify the initial minor losses associated with the valve.


Note: In Steady-State Analysis mode (in WaterCAD), the Initial Status is used as the permanent status. However, it can be overruled by the presence of controls, if the Use Controls in Steady-State Analysis check box in the Calculation Options dialog is checked. The Calculation Options dialog is accessed by clicking the GO button in the main view to display the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor, and then clicking the Options button.

Pipes Section This section allows you to specify the Upstream Pipe and Downstream Pipe.

Note: The valve direction, along with the flow direction, affects the behavior of the valve, as explained in the Valve Editor topic at the beginning of this Chapter.

Tip: You can switch the Upstream and Downstream Pipes by clicking the Reverse button.

Calculated Hydraulics Section This section reports the following calculated hydraulic parameters for a valve:

• Discharge - Calculated flow rate passing through the valve.

• Velocity - Calculated velocity inside the valve, based on the valve diameter.

• Headloss - Calculated headloss through the valve.

• From HGL - Calculated hydraulic grade immediately upstream of the valve.

• To HGL - Calculated hydraulic grade immediately downstream of the valve.

Note: Because a valve is modeled internally as two junction nodes connected by a controlled link, the hydraulic grades are referring to the conditions at the two "hidden" nodes, upstream and downstream. These conditions also represent the grade at the adjacent end of each connecting pipe.

Head-Discharge Points Section • Headloss - Enter the desired headloss for the corresponding Discharge.

• Discharge - Enter the Discharge rate at which the corresponding headloss is desired.

• Insert - Click to insert a new Head-Discharge point.

• Delete - Delete an existing Head-Discharge point.

6.3.2 Demand Tab This program provides the ability to define a hydraulic load consisting of multiple demands and inflows for each junction and tank node in the network. Each individual hydraulic demand or inflow consists of a baseline flow rate and a pattern that is applied when performing an Extended Period Simulation (EPS). This software provides a table for editing hydraulic loads. Each row represents an individual hydraulic demand or inflow. The table has three columns: Type, Demand, and Pattern:


• Type - Choose the type of load. Demand represents a withdrawal of liquid from the network system (if the value entered is negative, then the liquid is entering network). Inflow represents the addition of liquid to the system (negative inflow represents flow leaving the system).

• Base Flow - Enter the baseline flowrate for the load. This number will always be positive. If you need to define an inflow, change the load type. The units are volume per unit time (typically l/s or gpm).

• Pattern - Choose the EPS pattern that will apply to this load. Each load in the table can have a different EPS pattern. The multipliers defined in the pattern will be applied against the baseline load.

The Demand dialog has the following command buttons:

• Insert - Insert a row in the table.

• Duplicate - Create a new row in the table with the same values as the selected row.

• Delete - Delete the selected row of the table. The selected demand or inflow is removed from the list.

• Graph - Generate a graph of the total demand over time at this junction.

Note: The EPS Pattern is not considered during Steady State Simulations (the demand baseline load will be used instead).

Tip: Do not use negative values for the baseline flow rate to simulate water entering the network. This program provides you with the option of explicitly defining an inflow. Inflows are essentially negative demands.

Importing Demands WaterCAD now allows you to import simple or composite Demands from an ASCII tab-delimited text file. Demands can be imported to junction and tank elements by accessing the Demand Alternative and clicking the Import button. Junction and Tank demands can be imported from the same file. The file to be imported must be in the following format:

Element Label Demand (Pattern 1) Demand (Pattern 2) etc. Press the Tab key once between each column. An unlimited number of demands can be imported from a single text file by simply adding additional columns, following the same format. The first row of the text file is used to associate the demand values with demand patterns. The first column of the first row is ignored. The pattern(s) to be associated with the demand values are entered in the subsequent column(s). If this row references a pattern that is not available in the current project, a new pattern will be created with the value entered in this column as its label. This pattern will have a demand multiplier of one for every time step by default.

After the file to be imported is chosen, the Demand Import dialog is opened. This dialog allows you to choose the unit type for the demand values in the file to be imported.

Notes: Nodes that are present in the model but are not included in the file being imported will not be modified.

Existing demands are removed without warning from any node that is present in the file being imported.


Note: Each node must have a value entered for every pattern column in the file. If no demand is associated with a specific pattern, enter zero as the demand for that pattern.

Example:

- Pat1 Pat2

J-1 5 10

J-2 6 11

J-3 7 12

J-4 8 13

J-5 9 14

J-6 10 15

J-7 0 20

J-8 15 0

In this example, J-1 will have a composite demand of 15 and will use the patterns Pat1 and Pat2. J-7 will have a demand of 20 and will use the pattern Pat2. J-8 will have a demand of 15 and use pattern Pat1.

Demand Import Dialog The dialog contains a pulldown menu, which allows you to specify the unit type to be associated with the demand values in the file to be imported. This dialog is automatically opened after selecting the text file to import.

6.3.3 Section Tab Tank section data includes the information necessary to describe the storage characteristics of the tank. They have been factored into the following logical groups:

• Section - The type of cross-section and the basic storage parameters.

• Operating Range - The minimum, initial, and maximum operating elevations.

• Cross Section - Parameters describing the cross-sectional geometry.

Tank Section The general information for tank section consists of the following:

• Section - Choose the type of cross section for this storage tank. There are two types of cross sections to choose from: Constant Area and Variable Area.

• Inactive Volume - Enter the inactive volume for this storage tank. This data is used when performing water quality analysis.

• Total Active Volume - If this storage tank is a Constant Area Tank, the total active volume will be computed from the other tank data and this field will not be editable. If this is a Variable Area Tank, then enter the total storage volume for the tank.


Operating Range Section This section allows you to set the absolute limits for the water levels in the tank. Elevations are relative to the same datum as the rest of your system, while levels refer to heights of water above the tank's base elevation. The operating range fields prompt you for the following values:

Elevations/Levels - Select whether you want to enter the data in terms of absolute elevation, typically based on the sea level, or in terms of levels, which are relative to an arbitrary base elevation of the tank you specify.

Maximum - Highest allowable water surface elevation or level. If the tank fills above this point, it will automatically shut off from the system.

Initial - Value used as the water surface elevation or level when performing steady-state calculations, or as the beginning condition when performing an extended period simulation.

Minimum - Lowest allowable water surface elevation or level. If the tank drains below this point, it will automatically shut off from the system.

Base Elevation - Elevation of the storage tank base used as a reference when entering water surface elevations in the tank in terms of levels.

Cross Section Section There are two basic types of storage tanks, as described below:

Constant Area The cross sectional geometry of the tank is constant between the minimum and maximum operating elevations. Two parameters are needed to fully describe a constant area tank section:

• Cross Section - Choose whether the cross section is circular or non-circular.

• Average Area/Diameter - Enter the average area of the non-circular cross-section, or the diameter of the circular cross-section.

Variable Area The cross-sectional geometry varies between the minimum and maximum operating elevations.

Depth/Volume Ratio Table - Enter a series of points describing the storage characteristics of the tank. For example, at 0.1 the total depth (depth ratio = 0.1) the tank stores 0.028 the total active volume (volume ratio = 0.028). At 0.2 the total depth that tank stores 0. 014 the total active volume (0.2, 0.014), etc.

Tip: The storage characteristics of the tank can be plotted. Choose Tank Curve from the Report Button at the bottom of the Tank Dialog.

6.3.4 Controls Tab The Controls dialog is separated into two windows- one lists the Simple Controls, the other lists the Rule-Based, or Logical, Controls. Controls allow you to configure the hydraulic model to change the status or settings of a pump, valve, or pipe at a specific time or when specific junction pressures or tank water levels occur in the network. Rule-Based Controls can only be set in the Logical Control Manager, which is accessed by clicking on "Analysis…Logical Controls". From the Controls tab, the following Simple Control options are available:

• To add a simple control - Click the Add button. This will open the Control dialog where the specifics of the control can be edited.


• To edit an existing simple control - Select the description of the control you wish to edit and click the Edit button.

• To duplicate an existing simple control - Select the description of the control you wish to duplicate and click the Duplicate button.

• To delete an existing simple control - Select the description of the control you wish to delete and click the Delete button.

Note: Pipes with check valves cannot have controls.

Simple Control Dialog Several types of information are required to define a simple control for a pressure pipe, pump, or valve. This data is grouped into the following sections:

• Preview - Textual description of the control being edited.

• Control - Specify the type of control, either Status or Setting.

• Control Condition - Specify whether the control is based on a time condition or a node condition, and specify the control setting.

Simple Control Preview The control preview provides a textual description of the control being edited. The control preview is continuously updated while you edit a control, providing constant feedback as to the state of your control.

Simple Control Type Simple controls support two types of controls:

• Status - Controls the Open/Closed (pipes), inactive/closed (valves), or On/Off (pumps) status.

• Setting - Controls the relative speed factor of a pump and the parameters for a valve.

Notes: Only status controls are available for pipes. Setting controls are not appropriate. When pumps are turned on by a control, their relative speed factor is set to 1.00.

Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump.

Tip: To activate a closed or inactive valve, use a setting control. Similarly, to turn a pump on at a relative speed setting other than 1.00, use a setting control.

Control Condition A control can be triggered by a specified pressure or hydraulic grade being reached in any tank or pressure junction located in the project.


Node Condition A node condition dictates that the control will be triggered when the hydraulic condition of a specified tank or pressure junction is reached.

The comparison component allows the following:

• Above - Trigger the control when the junction or tank’s hydraulic parameter is above the node condition’s hydraulic parameter.

• Below - Trigger the control when the junction or tank’s hydraulic parameter is below the node condition’s hydraulic parameter.

You can express the conditions at the control node in terms of Pressure or Hydraulic Grade.

Example: "Closed if node J-2 below 10 psi" means that the controlled pipe will close when the pressure at junction J-2 goes below 10 psi.

Time Conditions There are two types of Time Condition: Time From Start and Clock Time. A Time From Start condition dictates that the control will be triggered when the specified amount of time has elapsed. A Clock Time condition will trigger the control at the specified hour.

Examples • "Closed at Time From Start 2.00 hr" - At 2.00 hours into the analysis, this link will be closed.

• "Set hydraulic grade to 440 ft at Time From Start 5.50 hr" - At 5.5 hours into the analysis, the hydraulic grade of this pressure regulating valve will be set to 440 feet.

• "Open at Clock Time 12:00:00"- Pipe will open when the clock reaches 12:00:00.

6.3.5 Quality Tab The Quality tab of an element allows you to edit the input data related to water quality. Three types of water quality analyses can be performed, as defined in the Scenario Editor dialog accessed by clicking the GO button in the main WaterCAD window. These are Water Age, Constituent Concentration and Source Tracing. The basic parts of an element's water quality input data vary depending on the element type. Not all of the following input data sections are available for all elements:

• Water Quality - Display the active water quality alternative for the current scenario, as well as initial water quality conditions or component reaction rates, depending on the type of water quality analysis being performed.

• Constituent Source - For nodes only. This section of the dialog contains three data fields which are only active when the Constituent Source checkbox is checked:

− Constituent Source - This pulldown menu allows you to select the Constituent Source Type. The available types are as follows:

• Concentration - A Concentration Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any external inflow entering the network at a node, such as flow from a reservoir or from a negative demand placed at a junction.

• Flow Paced Booster - A Flow Paced Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed concentration to the flow resulting from the mixing of all inflow to the node from other points in the network.

• Setpoint Booster - A Setpoint Booster Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any flow leaving the source node, as long as the concentration resulting from the


inflow to the node is below the set point.

• Mass Booster - A Mass Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed mass flow to the flow entering the node from other points in the network.

− Baseline Concentration - This data field allows you to specify the corresponding constituent concentration at this node over time.

− Pattern - The pulldown menu allows you to apply a constituent pattern to the Constituent Source. The Ellipsis (…) button opens the Pattern Manager dialog.

Notes: A constituent source may be a tank, reservoir, or junction (but not a pump or valve).

The Water Quality data is only used when performing a Water Quality analysis, which can only be done in Extended Period Simulation mode.

Tip: When performing a Constituent or Trace Analysis, the constituent and source trace node are defined in the Constituent and Age Alternative Editor respectively.

• Tank Mixing Model - For Tanks only. This section allows you to specify the Tank Mixing Model that will be used by the current tank. The mixing model is specified on a tank-by-tank basis, and Completely Mixed is the default model. The following mixing models are available:

− Two Compartment - Under this mixing model, available storage is divided into two completely mixed compartments. Inflow and outflow is assumed to take place in the first compartment. The second compartment receives overflow from the first, and this overflow is completely mixed. When this mixing model is selected, the Two Compartment section appears.

− Completely Mixed - The default mixing model. Under this model, all inflow and outflow is assumed to have been completely mixed.

− FIFO - First In / First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. Water parcels move through the tank in a segregated fashion where the first parcel to enter is the first parcel to leave.

− LIFO - Last In / First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. As in the FIFO mixing model, water parcels are segregated, however in the LIFO mixing model, the parcels stack up on top of each other, and the last parcel to enter is the first to leave.

• Two Compartment - For Tanks using the Two Compartment mixing model only. This section contains two fields, which describe the division of total tank volume between the two compartments. The field labeled Compartment 1 allows you to enter the percentage of total tank volume that the first compartment occupies. The percentage for Compartment 2 is then initialized for you.

Water Quality Section The general water quality information consists of several parameters, some of which vary depending on the type of water quality analysis (Water Age, Constituent Concentration or Source Tracing):

• Alternative - Read-only field showing which water quality alternative is active for the current scenario.

• Initial Age, Constituent, or Trace - Specify the initial water age, constituent concentration, or


source trace at the current location, depending on which type of water quality analysis is currently selected in the Scenario Editor dialog. This does not apply to pipes.

When performing Constituent analysis, reaction coefficients are needed, as defined below:

• Bulk Reaction Coefficient - Coefficient defining how rapidly a constituent grows or decays over time. This applies to Tank and Pipes only.

• Wall Reaction Coefficient - Coefficient defining the rate at which a substance reacts with the wall of a pipe.

Note: For age and trace analyses, pipe velocity and flow rate are the only related data needed for computations. Therefore, these reaction coefficient fields are grayed out or not displayed. For constituent analyses, however, the bulk and pipe reaction coefficients are needed to define the reactions that occur within the pipes (in the water and between the water and pipe wall) and in the tanks.

Tip: The bulk and wall reaction coefficient fields are initialized with the values defined in the constituent library, but may also be edited individually. In order to select the constituent being modeled, and its corresponding parameters, or revert to default values, use the Constituent Alternative Editor.

Constituent Source Section Any node element (i.e. tank, reservoir, or junction) can serve as a source for a chemical constituent.

To turn a node into a constituent source:

• Click the check box in the Constituent Source group title.

• Enter values for:

− Constituent Source - This pulldown menu allows you to select the Constituent Source Type. The available types are as follows:

• Concentration - A Concentration Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any external inflow entering the network at a node, such as flow from a reservoir or from a negative demand placed at a junction.

• Flow Paced Booster - A Flow Paced Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed concentration to the flow resulting from the mixing of all inflow to the node from other points in the network.

• Setpoint Booster - A Setpoint Booster Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any flow leaving the source node, as long as the concentration resulting from the inflow to the node is below the set point.

• Mass Booster - A Mass Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed mass flow to the flow entering the node from other points in the network.

− Constituent Baseline Load - Concentration of the constituent to be modeled, used in conjunction with the constituent pattern to represent the concentration over time.

− Constituent Pattern - EPS Pattern that will apply to this load. The multipliers defined in the pattern will be applied against the constituent baseline load.


The behavior of the source during the course of a water quality calculation varies depending on the type of element, as follows:

• Junction - The concentration is the source concentration and varies with time according to the constituent pattern.

• Tank - If a tank is tagged as a source, only the discharge from that tank will have a source concentration that varies with time according to the source pattern. The internal concentration of the tank will vary over time according to inflowing concentrations and hydraulic demands.

• Reservoir – Reservoirs can be considered constant concentration sources whose initial concentration does not vary with time. If a reservoir is selected as the source the concentration will vary according to the source type and the selected source pattern.

Note: Any water leaving a constituent source has a concentration in accordance with the baseline concentration and the chosen pattern.

6.3.6 Fire Flow Tab The Fire Flow tab of the junction editor offers the ability to adjust an individual junction's required fire flows and pressures. If these values are not specifically entered for a given junction, the values will be based on the default fire flow data as entered in the Fire Flow Alternative Editor, accessed by selecting the Analysis\Alternatives menu item, and clicking the Edit button on the Fire Flow tab. The Fire Flow Tab is divided into the following sections:

• Fire Flow Input - Minimum required fire flow at the selected junction, and minimum pressures to be maintained.

• Fire Flow Calculation Results - After performing a fire flow analysis, results are available for the junction node assuming it is part of the fire flow selection set.

Tip: Edit the following data exclusively in the Fire Flow Alternative Editor: whether a fire flow analysis is to be performed at a node, whether the needed fire flow is to replace or be added to current demands, whether a minimum pressure is required for the entire system, and default fire flow input values.

Note: Results of fire flow calculations, which are obtained from calculations performed separately for an automatic batch run, are only reported in the Fire Flow tab and in the Fire Flow Tabular Report (accessed from Report\Tables\Fire Flow Report or the FlexTable icon). Results reported in the other Element Editor tabs do not take into account any fire flow, unless you explicitly entered this fire flow as a demand at a specific junction.

Fire Flow Input Section The fire flow input data for a junction are as follows:

• Needed Fire Flow - The flow rate required at the junction to meet fire flow demands. This value will be added to or replace the junction’s baseline demand, depending on the default setting for applying fire flows as specified in the Fire Flow Alternative dialog.

• Fire Flow Upper Limit -This input defines the maximum allowable fire flow that a junction can provide and the maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at any single withdrawal location. This


is a user-specified practical limit that will prevent the program from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have a large diameter and high service pressures. Remember that a system's ability to deliver fire flows is ultimately limited by the size of the hydrant opening and service line, as well as the number of hydrants available to combat a fire at a specific location.

• Residual Pressure - Minimum residual pressure to occur at the junction node. The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual pressure at the junction node does not fall below this target pressure.

• Minimum Zone Pressure - Minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes within the Zone you are testing. The model determines the available fire flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure. Each junction has a zone associated with it, which can be located in the junction’s input data. If you do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction node’s fire flow analysis, move it to another Zone.

• Minimum System Pressure - Minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the entire system as a result of the fire flow withdrawal. If a node’s pressure anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will not be satisfied. A fire flow analysis may be configured to ignore this constraint.

Fire Flow Calculation Results Section After performing a fire flow analysis, the following calculation results are available for each junction node in the fire flow selection set:

• Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints - Whether the selected junction node meets the fire flow constraints.

• Available Fire Flow - Amount of flow available for fire protection while maintaining all fire flow pressure constraints.

• Calculated Residual Pressure - Calculated pressure at the junction node during the fire flow withdrawal.

• Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure - Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the same zone as this junction.

• Minimum Zone Junction - Label of the junction corresponding to the minimum zone pressure.

• Calculated Minimum System Pressure - Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the system.

• Minimum System Junction - Label of the junction corresponding to the minimum system pressure.

6.3.7 Capital Cost Tab On this tab, you can specify whether or not the element is to be included in the capital cost analysis. If the element is selected to appear in the cost analysis then you can enter the costs associated with the element. This tab is comprised of the following components:

• Include in Cost Calculation? - A check box that allows you to control whether or not this element will be included in the cost analysis. If this box is checked, the element will be included in the cost calculation.

• Construction Costs - Contains a table for an element for entering cost items that can be expressed in terms of a quantity, unit, and unit cost.

• Non-Constructions Costs - Contains a table for entering costs related to the elements that need to be expressed either as a lump sum or as a percentage of the construction costs.


Include In Cost Calculation? This check box allows you to control whether or not this element will be included in the cost calculation. If this box is checked, the element will be included in the cost calculation. If you are modeling a new subdivision, most of the elements in your model will probably be included in the cost calculation. However, if you are adding onto an existing system, you may only calculate the cost for a small portion of the total elements in your system.

The value of this field can be varied by alternative. This can be useful if you want to compute the costs for different portions of your system separately. For instance, if you have several phases of construction that you want to cost separately, you could create one cost alternative that only includes elements in phase one, and another alternative that only includes elements in phase two. After you perform your cost analysis, you can then perform cost reports detailing each phase of construction.

Non-Construction Costs The Non-Construction Costs section of the Capital Cost tab contains a table that allows you to enter an unlimited number of non-construction cost items for each element. A non-construction cost item can be specified either as a lump sum value or as a percentage of the total construction costs for the element. Each non-construction cost contains the following four components.

− Label - A unique name that identifies the non-construction cost item. The labels must be different for all non-construction cost items in a table.

− Factor - A numeric value that is used in conjunction with the operation to compute the cost for a non-construction cost item.

− Operation - The operation that will be applied against the factor to compute the total cost for the non-construction cost item. The two possible values for this field are lump sum or percentage of the total construction costs.

− Cost - The cost of the non-construction cost item.

Construction Costs The Construction Costs section of the Capital Cost tab consists of the following two components:

− Construction Costs Table - This table allows you to specify an unlimited number of construction costs for each element.

− Advanced Construction Costs Options - This button is only available for elements such as pipes, inlets, gravity junctions, and manholes that support Unit Cost Functions. Clicking this button accesses advanced options for the selected construction cost item.

Construction Costs Table The construction costs table allows you to specify an unlimited number of construction cost items for each element. Each construction cost item is composed of four basic characteristics, which are listed below.

− Label - This is a string that identifies the construction cost item. It must be unique for every construction cost in the table.

− Quantity - This field holds a numeric value that will be multiplied by the unit cost to compute the total cost for the construction cost item.

− Unit - The value in this field signifies the unit of the value held in the quantity field. For pipes, this field can be either a length unit or "each." For nodal elements this field is a user-defined string.


− Unit Cost - This is the cost per unit specified in the unit column. For instance, for a pipe it could be cost per length. This value is multiplied by the quantity to calculate the total cost for the construction cost item. If a Unit Cost Function is assigned to a construction cost item then this field will not be editable as the value will be computed based on the Unit Cost Function.

− Total Cost - This is calculated by multiplying the unit cost by the quantity. The value in this field is always calculated by the program.

Advanced Construction Cost Options Construction cost items for pipes and gravity structures (inlets, manholes, and junction chambers) have a set of advanced options. Under these advanced options, you can specify a Unit Cost Function to associate with a construction cost item. A Unit Cost Function describes the relationship between the unit cost for a construction cost item and the value of an attribute of the element. For instance, the unit cost for a pipe may be a function of the diameter. If you assign a Unit Cost Function to a construction cost item then the unit cost for that item is automatically updated as the physical characteristics of the element change.

For pipes there is an additional advanced option Set Quantity Equal to Pipe Length, which allows you to set the quantity field for a construction cost item equal to the length of the pipe.

6.3.8 User Data Tab The User Data tab allows you to view and edit the customizable user data for each element. This tab is composed of two sections:

• User Data - Any Date/Time, Number, Text, and Yes/No data defined by the user.

• User Memos - Any memo data fields defined by the user.

For information on how to add new fields or edit an existing field format, see the Help on the User Data Extension dialog.

Note: Default user-defined attributes are provided. These can easily be deleted or modified.

Tip: User Data Extensions are a powerful way to add your own data to the project. This data will not affect the hydraulic calculations in any way, but can be used as any other data for operations such as sorting, annotating, reporting, and importing/exporting.

User Data Section This section contains a list of Date/Time, Number, Text, and Yes/No user data fields, displayed as single line fields. User data fields are defined in the User Data Extension dialog.

User Memos Section This section contains a list of any memo fields displayed as multiple line scrolling text panes. User memos are defined in the User Data Extension dialog.

6.3.9 Messages Tab All Element Editors have a Messages tab, which contains three parts:


• Message List - Contains information that is generated during the calculation of the model, such as warnings, errors, and status updates.

• Description - An informative statement that you may enter about the element.

• Notes - Contains notes that you enter, and may include a description of the element, a summary of your data sources, or any other information of interest.

Note: Messages, descriptions, and notes will be printed in any element report.

6.3.10 VSP (Variable Speed Pump) Tab The Variable Speed Pump tab is split into two sections:

• Variable Speed Pump Type - This section of the dialog is comprised of a checkbox and a pulldown menu.

− VSP Checkbox - Checking this box On makes the current pump a Variable Speed Pump and activates the VSP Type pulldown and the VSP Settings section.

− VSP Type Pulldown - This pulldown allows you to specify the Variable Speed Pump type. The choices include Pattern Based and Fixed Head.

• Variable Speed Pump Settings - The available input fields in this section vary depending on the VSP type that is chosen.

− Pattern Based - When the Pattern Based VSP type is selected, this section consists of a pulldown menu and an ellipsis (…) button. The Pump Speed Pattern pulldown allows you to select a previously created pattern, and the ellipsis button opens the Pattern Manager, which allows you to select a previously created pattern or create a new one.

Note: Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump.

Tip: Use the Pattern Based VSP type when you already know the Relative Speed Settings for the Variable Speed Pump.

− Fixed Head - When the Fixed Head VSP type is chosen, the pump will increase or decrease its relative speed factor to maintain the Head specified at a control node. When this VSP type is selected, this section consists of the following items:

• Control Node - The node that the VSP checks to determine whether to increase, maintain, or decrease its relative speed factor.

Note: The algorithm may become unstable when a junction is specified as the control node on the suction side of a pump. For best results, tanks should be specified as the control node when maintaining a head on the suction side.

• Target Head - The Head that the VSP will attempt to maintain for the Control Node.


Note: The control node target head is the constant elevation of the hydraulic grade line (HGL) that the VSP will attempt to maintain. The target head at the control node must be within the physical limitations of the VSP as it has been defined (pump curve and maximum speed setting). If the target head is greater then the maximum head the pump can generate at the demanded flow rate the pump will automatically revert to fixed speed operation at the maximum relative speed setting, and the target head will not be maintained. The VSP target head for junction nodes can be set on the "VSP" tab of the "Pump" dialog box, and for tanks on the "Section" tab of the Tank dialog box by adjusting the initial level.

• Maximum Relative Speed Factor - The highest relative speed factor that the pump can be set at to meet the target head at the control node. If the target head cannot be met when the pump is set at the maximum relative speed factor, the maximum will be used.

• Ellipsis Button - Opens the Select Element dialog.

• Select From Drawing Button - Clicking this button brings you back to the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the element that will be the Control Node. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse button opens a context menu with a Done option. Clicking this will return you to the VSP tab.

6.3.11 Energy Tab The Energy Tab is divided into the following sections:

• Pump Efficiency - Allows you to choose the pump’s efficiency type, and plot the efficiency curve.

• Efficiency Settings - The input requirements for this section vary depending on the efficiency type selected in the Pump Efficiency section.

• Daily Energy Cost Summary Section - After an Energy Cost Analysis has been performed, this section displays a summary of the general calculated results, such as energy usage and total daily cost.

• Peak Demand Summary - After an Energy Cost Analysis has been performed, this section displays the calculated results for the peak power usage and the cost associated with this peak usage.

• Efficiency Summary - After an Energy Cost Analysis has been performed, this section displays the calculated results for wire power coming into the pump(s), the power transferred to the water, and the efficiency of the transfer.

Pump Efficiency Section This section allows you to specify the Efficiency Type for the pump that is being edited. The following choices are available:

• Best Efficiency Point - This efficiency type generates a parabolic efficiency curve using the input value as the best efficiency point.

• Constant Efficiency - This efficiency type maintains the efficiency determined by the input value regardless of changes in discharge.

Note: Avoid using the Constant Efficiency efficiency type whenever possible. This efficiency type is much less accurate than the other types because of the lack of a realistic efficiency curve.

• Multiple Efficiency Points - This efficiency type generates an efficiency curve based upon two or


more user-defined efficiency points. These points are linearly interpolated to form the curve.

When using the Best Efficiency Point or Multiple Efficiency Points efficiency types, the Plot button in this section is activated. Clicking this button graphs the efficiency curve in the Plot Window.

Efficiency Settings Section The available input fields in this section change depending on which Efficiency Type is selected.

• When the Best Efficiency Point type is selected, the input fields are as follows:

− Motor Efficiency - The Motor Efficiency value is representative of the ability of the motor to transform electrical energy to rotary mechanical energy.

− BEP Efficiency - The efficiency of the pump when it is operating at its Best Efficiency Point.

− BEP Flow - The flow delivered when the pump is operating at its Best Efficiency point.

• When the Constant Efficiency type is selected, the input fields are as follows:


− Pump Efficiency - The Pump Efficiency value is representative of the ability of the pump to transfer the mechanical energy generated by the motor to Water Power.

• When the Multiple Efficiency Points type is selected, the input fields are as follows:


− Efficiency Points Table - This table allows you to enter the pump’s efficiency at various discharge rates.

Daily Energy Cost Summary Section This section displays the following calculated results after performing an Energy Cost Analysis:

• Utilization - Percentage of total time during the EPS that the pump was On.

• Daily Energy Usage - Amount of energy used during a 24-hour period.

• Daily Energy Use Cost - The cost of the energy used during a 24-hour period, determined by the calculated energy usage and the energy pricing pattern.

• Daily Peak Power Cost - The cost associated with the Peak Demand Charge, if applicable.

• Total Daily Cost - The total cost accumulated during a 24-hour period. This value is the total of the Daily Energy Use Cost and the Daily Peak Demand Cost (if a peak demand charge has been applied).

Note: The Energy Cost Results displayed here are not automatically updated to reflect any input data modifications when a new Extended Period Simulation is calculated. The Energy Cost Analysis must be recalculated in the Energy Cost Manager to update the results.

Peak Demand Summary Section This section displays the following calculated results after performing an Energy Cost Analysis:

• Peak Power - Displays the peak energy usage, as calculated during the extended period simulation. This result is displayed even if Peak Demand Charges are not applied.


• Peak Power Cost - Displays the energy cost as calculated during the extended period simulation. If no Peak Demand Charge has been applied to the associated Energy Price Definition, this field will display as zero.


Efficiency Summary Section • Water Power - The amount of energy transferred to the water by the pump.

• Wire to Water Efficiency - The ratio of the Water Power to the Wire Power.

• Wire Power - The amount of energy delivered to the pump motor.


6.4 Prototypes

6.4.1 Prototypes Prototypes allow you to enter default values for the elements in your network. These values are used while laying out the network. Prototypes can reduce data entry requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common data. For example, if a section of the network contains all PVC pipes, use the pipe prototype to set the Material field to PVC. When a new pipe is created, its material attribute will default to PVC.

Note: Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect any elements created prior to the change.

Tip: If a section of your system has distinctly different characteristics than the rest of the system, adjust your prototypes before laying out that section. This will save time when you edit the properties later.

You can configure the element prototypes at the beginning of a new project during the Project Setup Wizard. You can also select Tools\Prototypes to edit the prototypes for the project at any time.


6.5 User Data Extension

6.5.1 User Data Extensions User Data Extensions are a set of one or more fields that you can define to hold data to be stored in the model. The User Data Extension feature allows you to add your own data fields to the project. For instance, you can add a field for keeping track of the date of installation for an element, or the type of area serviced by a particular element.

User Data Extensions exhibit the same characteristics as the pre-defined data used in and produced by the model calculations. This means that User Data Extensions can be imported or exported through database and Shapefile connections, viewed and edited in FlexTables, included in tabular reports or element detailed reports, annotated in the drawing, color coded, and reported in the detailed element reports. This data can also be accessed on the User Data tab of each Element Editor dialog.

Note: The user data does not affect the hydraulic model calculations. However, their behavior concerning capabilities like editing, annotating, sorting and database connections is identical to any of the standard pre-defined attributes.

6.5.2 User Data Extension Dialog The User Data Extension dialog holds a summary of the user data extensions currently defined in the project. In this dialog, there is a tab for each type of element. By clicking a particular tab, you can access the user data extensions currently defined for that type of element. The software initially contains default user data extensions, but these can be deleted or edited. Each tab in the User Data Extension dialog is composed of a table listing characteristics of the user data extensions defined for that type of element. In addition, there are a series of buttons that can be used to add, edit, delete, and share individual user data extensions. The table listing the user data extensions consists of the following four columns:

• Label - Description that will appear next to the field for the user data extension, or as the column heading if the data extension is selected to appear in a FlexTable.

• Type - Lists the type of data that is valid for the data extension. The available data types are Date/Time, Number, Text, Memo, and Yes/No.

• Unit / Picture - Contains the unit of each numeric data extension, or the date and time presentation format for Date/Time data extensions. Both the unit and the date and time representations are specified when you create the data extension. They can always be modified by editing the data extension.

• Shared - If an asterisk appears in this column, it indicates that the user data extension is shared among two or more types of elements. See explanations on the Existing Fields to Share With dialog for more details.

The following list describes the four buttons that appear on the right side of the table:

• Add - Adds a new User Data Field. The User Field Specification dialog will open when you click this button. Here, you can define the properties of the user data extension that you are adding.

• Edit - You can edit an existing user data extension by highlighting the data extension you wish to edit and clicking this button. This will open the User Field Specification dialog where you can change the properties for that item.

• Delete - You can delete a data extension by highlighting it and clicking this button. If the data extension you are deleting is shared among multiple types of elements, it will only be removed from the element type that you are currently editing. If you remove a user data extension, all the


information contained in that field will be permanently removed.

• Share - You can open the Existing Fields to Share With dialog by clicking this button. Here, you pick which of the available attributes defined for other types of elements you would like to share with the current type of element.

At the bottom of the User Data Extension dialog is a File button that allows you to import or save a set of user-defined data extensions. You can save the current configuration of user data extensions for later use by selecting File / Save, and specifying a file location and name. The file extension for the files holding the user data extension configurations is '.udx'. Select File / Import to merge the data extension configurations defined in these files into the current project. Importing a '.udx' file will not remove any of the other data extensions defined in your project. User data extensions that have the same name as those already defined in your project will not be imported.

To access the User Data Extensions dialog, click Tools / User Data Extensions… from the pull-down menus.

User Field Specification Dialog The properties defining a user data extension can be viewed and edited in the User Field Specification dialog, which is composed of two tabs:

Type - Enter the user data specification.

Notes - Enter any notes related to the User Data Specification.

Type Tab The Type tab is composed of two sections:

Type - Contains fields for entering the label for the user data extension, as well as the data type.

Format - Contains fields for defining the specification of the type of user data extension selected in the Type section.

Type Section The Type section contains fields for entering the label and data type for the user data extension. The name entered in the Label field corresponds with the User Data Extension field on the User Data tab of the Element Editor. This label will also be used as the column heading if the user data extension is added to a FlexTable.

If you want the label to be displayed on multiple rows when it is used as a column heading, you can use forward slashes to specify the location of line breaks. When the label is used as a field label in a dialog, the forward slashes will be converted to spaces. In FlexTables, there is an option to use abbreviated labels for the column headings. If you want an alternative label to be displayed, you can specify an abbreviated label after the original label, and separate them by the bar symbol, '|'. When the option to display abbreviated labels is enabled in the FlexTables, this is the text that will be used as the column heading. For instance, if you specified the label 'Date/Installed | Date/Inst.' it will be displayed in one of the following three ways, depending on the location and options selected.

Field Label (Reports/Element

Dialogs)

Column Heading

(FlexTable)

Column heading with abbreviated label option

selected (FlexTable)

Date Installed Date Installed

Date Inst.


You can select from five different types of data for the user data extension from the drop-down list in the Type field. An explanation of each is presented in the list below:

• Date/Time - Use this data type when you want the values you are entering to be in a standard date and time format. This format can be more useful than storing date information in a simple text field because it allows the dates to be sorted correctly when they appear in a FlexTable.

• Memo - If a user data extension is defined to be a memo, it will appear as a scrolling text pane in the User Memos section of the User Data tab in the Element Editor dialog.

• Number - Use this data type for fields that contain numeric values. You can specify a unit for the information in this field. The values contained in this field will then be automatically converted if you change the unit for this field.

• Text - Use this data type to create a single-line text field.

• Yes/No - Use this data type to display the attribute as a check box to represent true/false data.

Format Section This section is enabled only if you select Date/Time or Number in the Type section. Here is where you define the properties governing the type of data selected.

Number Format - If the type of data you selected was numeric, you can select a unit type (length, volume, intensity, etc.), a unit, a display precision, and whether to use scientific notation. There are no format options for memo, text, and Yes/No data types.

Date/Time Type Format - If you selected the Date/Time type, you can specify whether you would like the date or time to appear first in the input field, as well as the format of the date and time information. The format in which the date and time information will be displayed can either be selected from the drop-down lists, or you can type your own custom format directly into the Date Picture and Time Picture fields. If one of these fields is left blank, the corresponding information will not be displayed.

The Date/Time data type consists of an input and an output format. The input format is a fixed format that is determined by the regional settings on your computer. Whenever you enter information into a Date/Time field, the information must be entered according to the input format. If it is not entered in the proper input format, the value will simply revert to the original value.

The output format is simply a mask that defines the manner in which the date and time information will be displayed. It does not affect the way the date and time information can be entered into a Date/Time field.

The output format can be edited as follows:

• To specify dates with no leading zeros for single-digit days, years, or months, use lowercase d, lowercase y, or uppercase M.

• To specify dates with leading zeros for single-digit days, years, or months, use lowercase dd, lowercase yy, or uppercase MM.

• To specify abbreviations for the day, year, or month, use lowercase ddd, lowercase yyy, or uppercase MMM.

• To specify the full name of the day, year, or month, use lowercase dddd, lowercase yyyy, or uppercase MMMM.

If there are characters in the output format that do not map to valid date or time information, then the actual value of the character will be displayed. For example, if you wanted the date to be displayed as June 15, 1998, you would define the format as 'MMMM d, yyyy'. Since the spaces and comma do not map to any of the date information, their actual values are displayed. To include a piece of text that contains a character that maps to the date or time information, use single quotation marks (') around the text.


Notes Tab This tab contains a text pane for entering notes about the current data extension. The text entered here is not displayed anywhere in the model, but allows you to keep records for a particular data extension.

Existing Fields to Share With Dialog This dialog allows you to choose which of the available attributes defined for other types of elements you want to share with the current type of element. The following sections are available:

• Available Items - Lists attributes defined for other element types that have not already been shared with the current type of element. In order to add attributes to the current element type, highlight them and click the Add button to transfer them to the Selected Items list.

• Selected Items - The attributes in the Selected Items list will be added to the current element after you click the OK button.

All the characteristics (such as data type, format, unit, and display precision) for a particular user data extension are the same for all the elements that share it. This is useful when the attribute you are adding needs to be the same for all the element types for which it is defined. For instance, if you have a Date Installed field for every element, sharing guarantees that the date format is the same for every element and will appear in a single FlexTable column. If, at a later point, you decide the date should be in a different format, you can change the format for one type of element. That change will filter through to all the elements that share that attribute.

6.6 Zone Manager

6.6.1 Zone Manager The zone manager allows you to manipulate zones quickly and easily. Zones listed in the Zone Manager can be associated with each nodal element using the Element Editors, Prototypes, or FlexTables. This manager includes a list of all of the available zones and standard manager features, such as:

• Add - Add a new zone to the zone list.

• Edit - Make changes to an existing zone.

• Duplicate - Create a copy of an existing zone.

• Delete - Delete an existing zone.

Note: A Zone cannot be deleted if it is referenced by any element.

To open the Zone Manager dialog, choose Zones from the Analysis menu.

6.6.2 Zone Dialog The zone dialog allows you to name the zone label. When a zone is named, the junctions are automatically assigned the new name. The zone dialog contains pertinent information, including:

• Label - Required name to identify the zone.

• Notes - Optional input describing the zone.


In addition to this information, there are also buttons that enable you to make changes to the collection of elements in the zone, such as adding elements to the zone.

Note: Only one zone can reference an element. If you add an element to a zone, the element is automatically removed from the zone that it was previously in.


Chapter 7

FlexTables

7.1 Tabular Reporting Overview FlexTables provide you with a powerful data management tool that can be used to edit input data and present output data in a quick, efficient manner. Haestad Methods provides you with default element tables. However, these tables can be customized to fit your particular needs. You can also create your own tables combining various input and output data for different model elements. You can use FlexTables to view all elements in the network, all elements of a specific type (e.g. all pipes), or any subset of elements. Additionally, tables can be filtered, globally edited, and sorted to ease data input and present output data for specific elements.

FlexTables may also be used for creating results reports that can be sent to a printer, a file, the Windows clipboard, or copied to your favorite word processing and spreadsheet software.

7.2 Table Manager

7.2.1 Table Manager The Table Manager provides support for creating, opening, and managing tables. Although the predefined tables provide access to most of the network element information, it is sometimes practical to present model results and input data through user-defined tables. The Table Management button provides the following tools for manipulating user-defined tables:

• OK - Open the selected table.

• Close - Exit the Table Manager dialog without opening a table.

• Table Management / New - Create a new table using the Create New Table and Table Setup dialogs.

• Table Management / Edit - Modify the layout of the selected table using the Table Setup dialog.

• Table Management / Rename - Rename the selected table.

• Table Management / Duplicate - Duplicate the selected table for additional customization. This is a very useful feature when you need to make changes to a predefined table.

158 Chapter 7 - FlexTables

• Table Management / Delete - Delete the selected table.

• Table Management / Reset - Reset a table’s units to the current unit system or reset a predefined table to factory defaults.

Notes: You cannot rename or delete the predefined tables that come with this software.

When you choose to print a table, the table name will be used as the title for the printed report. You can change the report title by renaming the table.

The predefined tables may need to be modified in certain situations to have them properly display the desired data. For instance, if you set up a project and choose the Mannings friction method, the default Pipe Report will still display a Hazen Williams C column, which will contain no data. The proper column must be added by Editing the table.

To access the Table Manager, select the Tabular Reports button on the main toolbar, or choose Report / Tables from the pull-down menu.

7.2.2 Creating New Tables

To create a new table, open the Table Manager by clicking the Tabular Reports button on the main toolbar, or by choosing Report / Tables from the pull-down menu. In the Table Manager dialog, click the Table Management button and select New.

• Specify the Table Type to indicate the type of network elements you want to display in your table.

• Specify either a one or two row display for your table (in SewerCAD or StormCAD).

• Enter the name of your new table in the Enter the description for this table: field. This name will also be used as the report title when this table is printed.

• Click OK to accept these settings and proceed to the Table Setup dialog where you can define your table.

7.2.3 Editing Tables The Edit option allows you to modify the list of attributes that will appear in your table.

Note: The predefined tables may need to be modified in certain situations to have them properly display the desired data. For instance, if you set up a project and choose the Mannings friction method, the default Pipe Report will still display a Hazen Williams C column, which will contain no data. The proper column must be added by Editing the table.

7.2.4 Duplicating Tables The Duplicate option allows you to create a new table based on an existing table.

7.2.5 Deleting Tables The Delete option allows you to delete any table that you have defined. You cannot delete the predefined tables.


7.2.6 Renaming Tables The Rename option allows you to change the name of any table that you have defined. You cannot rename any of the predefined tables.

Note: The table name will be used as the title in printed reports. You cannot rename any of the predefined tables. If you need to rename a predefined table, duplicate it first and then rename it.

7.2.7 Resetting Tables Reset Units to the Current Unit System - This option is only available for tables that are in Local Units mode. Local Units mode allows the table to maintain its own "local" set of column properties, such as units and precision. Use this option to reset all units in the selected table to the defaults for the current unit system, which refers to the units used in the current project. You will be prompted to confirm before this action is performed.

Reset to Factory Defaults - You can reset any of the predefined tables to the factory defaults. This option is not available for tables that you create.

To reset units to the current unit system select Table Management / Reset / Reset Units to <the current Unit System> in the Table Manager.

To reset the table to factory defaults select Table Management / Reset / Reset to Factory Defaults… in the Table Manager.

7.3 Table Setup Dialog

7.3.1 Table Setup Dialog The Table Setup dialog allows you to customize any table through the following options:

• Table Type - Allows you to specify the type of network elements that will appear in the table. For example, only pipes will appear in a "pipe" table.

• Available Columns - Contains all the attributes that are available for your table design. These attributes will change based on the Table Type field.

• Pick Button - You can click on this button to access the categorized Quick Attribute Selector for selecting columns to be added to the tabular report. The selected column will be highlighted in the Available Columns Window to be easily added to the Selected Columns as seen fit.

• Selected Columns - Contains attributes that will appear in your custom designed table. When you open the table, the selected attributes will appear as columns in the table in the same order that they appear in the list. You can drag and drop or use the up and down buttons to change the order of the attributes in the table.

• Allow Duplicate Columns - An advanced feature that allows you to place two or more identical columns in the same table and set them to different unit systems.

• Column manipulation buttons - Allows you to select or deselect columns to be used in the table, as well as to arrange the order in which the columns will appear.


Note: The number next to the Selected Columns label indicates the number of columns that will appear in your table.

To access Table Setup from the Table Manager, highlight the desired table and select Edit from the Table Management menu button.

7.3.2 Table Type The Table Type field allows you to specify the types of elements that will appear in the table. It also provides a filter for the attributes that appear in the Available Columns list. When you choose a table type, the available list will only contain attributes that can be used for that table type. For example, only pipe attributes will be available for a "pipe" table.

7.3.3 Available Table Columns The Available Columns list is located on the left side of the Table Setup dialog. This list contains all of the attributes that are available for the type of table you are creating. The attributes displayed in yellow represent non-editable attributes, while those displayed in white represent editable attributes.

7.3.4 Selected Table Columns The Selected Columns list is located on the right-hand side of the Table Setup dialog. The attributes in this list will appear as columns in the table when it is opened. The columns will appear in the same order as the attributes in the selected list.

To add columns to the Selected Columns list:

• Select one or more attributes in the Available Columns list.

• Click the Add button [>] or drag and drop the highlighted attributes to the Selected Columns list.

7.3.5 Table Manipulation Buttons The Add and Remove buttons are located in the center of the Table Setup dialog.

[ > ] Adds the selected item(s) from the Available Columns list to the Selected Columns list.

[ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available Columns list to the Selected Columns list.

[ < ] Removes the selected item(s) from the Selected Columns list.

[ << ] Removes all items from the Selected Columns list.

To rearrange the order of the attributes in the Selected Columns list:

• Highlight the item to be moved.

• Move it up or down in the list by clicking the up or down button located below the Selected Columns list, or by simply dragging it to the desired location.

Note: You can select multiple attributes in the Available Columns list by holding down the Shift key or the Control key while clicking with the mouse. Holding down the Shift key will provide group selection behavior. Holding down the Control key will provide single element selection behavior.


Note: The items displayed in yellow represent non-editable columns (e.g. columns that contain calculated data) while those in white represent editable columns (e.g. columns that contain input data).

7.3.6 Allow Duplicate Columns Set this check box to allow duplicate columns in a table. Allow Duplicate Columns is an advanced feature that allows you to place two identical columns in the same table and set them to different unit systems.

7.4 Table Window

7.4.1 The Table Window The Table window is where you will perform most of your data input and review. It has many features to assist you with data entry, data formatting, report customization, and output generation. To access the Table window, highlight a table in the Table Manager, and click OK. Here are some of the topics that will be covered in this section:

• Table Navigation

• Table Customization

Options: • Sorting Tables

• Filtering Tables

• Changing Column Headings

• Globally Editing Data

• Include Inactive Topology

• Local vs. Synchronized Units

• Mixing Units in a Tabular Report

• Abbreviated Labels

• Changing Column Display Properties

Output: • File (Export Table to ASCII File)

• Table Copy to Clipboard

• Table Print

• Table Print Preview

Columns: See the Glossary for information regarding the definitions of the columns in the Table window.


Note: Use the Scenario control located at the top of the Table Window to quickly view the data for different scenarios.

To access the Table window, open the Table Manager, highlight the table you wish to open, and click OK.

7.4.2 Editing Tables

Editable Table Columns Editable table columns correspond to input data that you can change. The values in these columns can be modified either directly or through the Global Edit option. These columns are displayed with a white background.

Non-editable table columns are displayed with a yellow background, and correspond to model results calculated by the program and composite values.

Table Navigation The Table window supports two modes: Table Navigation Mode and Cell Navigation Mode. By pressing the F2 key, you can toggle between them.

Table Navigation Mode The Arrow keys, Home, End, PgUp, PgDn, Ctrl+<arrow> keys navigate to different cells in a table. Table Navigation Mode is the default mode when editing a table. To edit within a single cell of a table, press the F2 key to switch to Cell Navigation Mode.

Cell Navigation Mode (Edit Mode) In Cell Navigation Mode, the Arrow keys, Home, and End keys navigate within a single cell. When Cell Navigation Mode is active, the word "EDIT" will appear on the status pane at the bottom of the window. Cell Navigation Mode will automatically terminate when you press any key except for Left, Right, Home, End, Delete, or Backspace.

Globally Editing Data You can globally change the values of any editable column in a table. Right-click the column that you wish to globally change and choose the Global Edit menu item.

For numeric columns:

• Choose the operation to be performed: Add, Divide, Multiply, Set, or Subtract.

• Enter the value you wish to use.

• Click OK, and the values in the entire column will be updated to reflect this change.

For non-numeric columns:

• Enter the new value.

• Click OK, and the values in the entire column will be updated to reflect this change.


Note: Global Edit is available only for editable columns. Global Edit is not available in 2-row tables (in SewerCAD or StormCAD). You can use Global Edit in conjunction with Filtering to globally edit a subset of elements.

7.4.3 Sorting/Filtering Tables

Sorting Tables Tables can be sorted based on a single column or multiple columns.

Custom Sort You can sort elements in the table based on one or more columns, in ascending or descending order. For example, the following table is given:

Slope (ft/ft) Depth (ft) Discharge (cfs) 0.001 1 4.11 0.002 1 5.81 0.003 1 7.12 0.001 2 13.43 0.002 2 19.00 0.003 2 23.27

A custom sort is set up to sort first by Slope, then by Depth, in ascending order. The resulting table would appear in the following order:

Slope (ft/ft) Depth (ft) Discharge (cfs) 0.001 1 4.11 0.001 2 13.43 0.002 1 5.81 0.002 2 19.00 0.003 1 7.12 0.003 2 23.27

To access the custom sort capability, open the table you wish to sort. Then, right-click a column label and select Sort / Custom.

Filtering Tables To access the filtering operations, use the Options button at the top of the Table window (in the case of a FlexTable), or right-click the column header by which you wish to filter. Filters allow you to change the table so only rows that match the specified criteria will appear.

• Quick Filter - Set up a simple filter by right-clicking the column by which you wish to filter.

• Custom Filter - Set up a custom filter based on one or more criterion.

• Reset - Turn off the active filter, causing all available rows in the table to be displayed.


Tip: Another way to select which elements are displayed in the table consists of first selecting elements, either graphically, or by using the Selection Set tool. Then, right-click any of the selected elements and choose Edit Group from the pop-up menu that appears. This will display the Table Manager dialog. Only the selected elements will appear in any of the tables you open at this point.

When you perform a Quick Filter or a Custom Filter, the Filter dialog will open allowing you to specify your filtering criterion.

Each filter criterion is made up of three items:

• Column - The attribute to filter.

• Operator - The operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, <>, Contains, and Begins With).

Note: The new filtering options Contains and Begins With allow more flexibility with regard to filtering tables. These filters are only available for Column Types that have alphabetic values, for example Label or Zone. The Contains filter checks for the specified value anywhere in the word(s), and the Begins With filter checks only the first letter for the specified value.

• Value - The comparison value.

Any number of criterion elements can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criterion are implicitly joined with a logical "AND" statement. When multiple filter criterion are defined, only rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A filter will remain active for the associated table until the filter is reset.

The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g. "10 of 20 elements displayed"). When a filter is active, this message will appear in a highlighted color.

Table filtering allows you to perform global editing on any subset of elements. Only the elements that appear in the filtered table will be edited.

7.4.4 Table Customization There are several ways to customize tables to meet a variety of output requirements:

• Changing the Report Title - When you print a table, the table name is used as the title for the printed report. You can change the title that appears on your printed report by renaming the table, using the Table Manager.

• Adding/Removing Columns - You can add, remove, and change the order of columns by using the Table Setup dialog. Use the Table Manager to access the Table Setup dialog.

• Drag/Drop Column Placement - With the Table window open, select the column that you would like to move by holding down the left mouse button on its column heading. Drag the column heading to the left or right, and release the mouse button to drop the column into its new location.

• Resizing Columns - With the Table window open, place your pointer over the vertical separator line between column headings. Notice that the cursor changes shape to indicate that you can resize. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the left or right to "stretch" the column to its new size. When you are satisfied, release the mouse button to set the new column width.

• Changing Column Display Properties - With the Table window open, right-click in the heading area of the column you wish to change and choose the Properties menu item. The current column


properties will be displayed in the Set Field Options dialog. Refer to the section on Local Units for additional information.

• Changing Column Headings - With the Table window open, right-click the column heading that you wish to change and choose Edit Column Label. Refer to section on Changing Column Headings for additional information.

Changing Column Headings To change the label of any column in the Table window, right-click the column heading that you wish to change and choose Edit Column Label from the context menu. The backslash character (\) can be used to insert a line-break wherever you want the title to be split into multiple lines. If you enter an empty label, the column heading will be restored to the default label.

Abbreviated Labels Using label abbreviations will allow columns to take up less space. This will permit more data to fit on each page when printing a report. If you wish to define an abbreviated label, right-click the desired column heading and choose Edit Column Label. In the Label dialog, separate the abbreviated label from the default label with the '|' symbol, located above the backslash (\) on most keyboards. For example, to use the abbreviation L for the Length column, type Length|L in the field provided. When the Use Label Abbreviations option is toggled on, the abbreviated label will appear.

To toggle the Use Label Abbreviations option on and off, select Options \ Use Abbreviated Labels from the Table window.

Changing Column Display Properties You can change the display properties (e.g. units, precision) of any numeric column in the Table window. Right-click the label of the column that you wish to change, and select Properties from the pop-up menu. This opens the Set Field Options dialog, where you can change the display properties of the column.

Local vs Synchronized Units Use the Options button at the top of the Table window to access the Use Local Units menu item. Click the menu item to toggle between Local Units and Synchronized Units. A check mark will appear next to the Use Local Units menu item to indicate that Local Units mode is active. Otherwise, Synchronized Units mode is active.

• Synchronized Units - This is the default mode that allows the table to stay synchronized with the active project. If you have one project in US Customary and one project in SI units, the Table will match the units in the project that is currently open.

• Local Units - Local Units mode allows the table to maintain its own "local" set of column properties (units, precision, etc). This is a powerful feature that gives you the ability to build tables that are always in a fixed unit system, no matter what unit system the active project is currently using. This is useful for printing reports in different unit systems.

When the Table window is open, the current unit synchronization mode is displayed in the status pane at the bottom of the window.

Mixing Units in a Tabular Report This software allows for duplicate columns in a table, thus giving you the ability to display an attribute in different units.

For example, to see two "Pipe Length" columns in a Table, one in feet and one in meters:

• Open the Table Manager.


• Click the Table Management button, and select New to create a new table.

• Select the Pipe Table Type from the choice list, and enter a name for your new table. Click OK and you will be taken to the Table Setup dialog where you can customize your table.

• In the Table Setup dialog, activate the Allow Duplicate Columns check box located at the lower left corner of the dialog.

• Add the Length column to the Selected Columns list.

Note: The Length column will still appear in the Available Columns list, but will be displayed in a lighter color, indicating that it has already been selected.

• Add the Length column again.

• Click OK to close the Table Setup dialog. From the Table Manager, highlight the table you have just created, and click OK.

• Click the Options button at the top of the window and select the Use Local Units menu item to turn Local Units on. You will be prompted to verify that you want to use local units. Click Yes.

• Right-click the first Length column and select Length Properties to set the units in the column to "ft." Then, right-click the second Length column to set the units to "m."

7.4.5 Table Output

File (Export Table to ASCII File) You may export the data shown in the Table window to an ASCII text file in either tab or comma-delimited format.

To export a table to an ASCII File format, select File\Export Data and either Tab Delimited or Comma Delimited from the Table window.

Table Copy to Clipboard The Copy button at the top of the Table window allows you to copy tab delimited data to the Windows clipboard. Tab delimited data can be pasted directly into your favorite spreadsheet program or word processor.

Table Print The Print button at the top of the Table window is used to output the table directly to the printer.

Table Print Preview Click the Print Preview button at the top of the Table window to view the report in the format that will be printed.

Note: Using label abbreviations will allow some columns to be narrower, permitting more data to fit on each page. Use the Options button at the top of the Table window to access this option.

Printing with landscape orientation will also allow more columns to fit on a single page. From the Print Preview window, use the Options \ Print Setup menu item to access orientation.


Chapter 8

Scenarios/Alternatives

8.1 Overview The scenario management feature allows you to easily analyze and recall an unlimited number of "What If?" calculations for your model. The powerful two-level design, which uses Scenarios that contain Alternatives, gives you precise control over changes to the model, while eliminating any need to input or maintain redundant data.

We have worked hard to devise a system that offers the power and flexibility that you demand, with the ease of use that you have come to expect from us. If you are like most users, you will want to jump right in without having to spend a lot of time reading. When you are ready to create your first scenario, you will find that you will be able to accomplish what you want easily and quickly.

The Scenario Wizard is designed to get you started quickly, while slowly exposing you to the power behind scenarios and alternatives.

When you are ready to model more complex scenarios, you will appreciate the power and flexibility provided by the various scenario management features.

If you are a beginning user, try the Scenario Wizard and run the Scenario tutorial. Also, refer to the Scenario Management Reference Guide in Appendix D. Be sure to read about Alternatives, and investigate the Alternatives Manager dialog.

8.2 Alternatives

8.2.1 Alternatives Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios. They are categorized data sets that create scenarios when placed together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of records. A record holds the data for a particular element in your system. The different types of alternatives are as follows:

• Active Topology

• Physical

• Demand

168 Chapter 8 – Scenarios and Alternatives

• Initial Settings

• Operational

• Logical Control Set

• Age

• Constituent

• Trace

• Fire Flow

• Capital Cost

• Energy Cost

• User Data

The exact properties of each alternative are discussed in their respective sections. By breaking up alternatives into these different types, we give you the ability to mix different alternatives any way that you want within any given scenario.

Scenarios are composed of alternatives, as well as other calculation options, allowing you to compute and compare the results of various changes to your system. Alternatives can vary independently within scenarios, and can be shared between scenarios.

There are two kinds of alternatives: Base alternatives and Child alternatives. Base alternatives contain local data for all elements in your system. Child alternatives inherit data from base alternatives, or even other child alternatives, and contain data for one or more elements in your system. The data within an alternative consists of data inherited from its parent, and the data altered specifically by you (local data).

When you first set up your system, the data that you enter is stored in the various base alternative types. If you wish to see how your system will behave, for example, by increasing the diameter of a few select pipes, you can create a child alternative to accomplish that. You can make another child alternative with even larger diameters, and another with smaller diameters. There is no limit to the number of alternatives that you can create.

Scenarios allow you to specify the alternatives you wish to analyze. In combination with scenarios, you can perform calculations on your system to see what effect each alternative will have. Once you have determined an alternative that works best for your system, you can permanently merge changes from the preferred alternative to the base alternative if you wish.

Remember that all data inherited from the base alternative will be changed when the base alternative changes. Only local data specific to a child alternative will remain unchanged.

8.2.2 Alternatives Manager The Alternatives Manager is the central location for managing the alternatives in your project. It allows you to edit, create, and manage the various types of alternatives. It also gives you more advanced capabilities, such as merging alternatives and creating child alternatives.

The available alternatives of each type are conveniently organized in a list on the left side of the dialog. The network element data is grouped into the following types:

• Physical

• Active Topology

• Demand


• Initial Settings

• Operational

• Logical Control Set

• Age

• Constituent

• Trace

• Fire Flow

• Capital Cost

• Energy Cost

• User Data

On the right side of the dialog are a number of buttons that provide functions for managing the alternatives. The following list provides a brief description of the function of each of these buttons.

Add - Create a new base alternative, first prompting for a name, and then opening an Alternatives editor. Base alternatives are initialized with the first data set entered either in tables or specific element dialogs.

Add Child - Create a new child alternative that inherits from the selected alternative. This allows you to automatically share the majority of the records from a parent alternative, while modifying only selected records in the child alternative.

Edit - Open the tabular record editor for the selected alternative. This tabular record contains all the values that are used by the selected alternative.

Merge - Moves all records from the selected child alternative into its parent alternative, and then removes the selected alternative. The records in the selected alternative will replace the corresponding records in the parent. This is helpful when you have been experimenting with changes in a child alternative, and you want to permanently apply those changes to the parent alternative. All other alternatives that inherit data from that parent alternative will reflect these changes.

Rename - Rename an existing alternative. This invokes an in-place editor in the tree view of the available alternatives. Make the desired changes to the existing name and press the Enter key

Duplicate - Create a new alternative filled with records copied from the selected alternative. Use this if you wish to copy the data from an alternative, but not create a child. The two alternatives will be independent.

Delete - Remove the selected alternative and its records. Deleting an alternative will also delete all of the input data associated with that alternative.

Report - Generate a Print Preview of a summary report of the selected alternative, all alternatives, or the selected alternative and all of its children in that hierarchy.

Notes: You will not be allowed to merge or delete an alternative that is referenced by one or more scenarios. When you attempt to perform the operation, you will be provided with a list of the scenarios that reference the alternative.

If you are attempting to merge an alternative that is referenced, you will need to edit the scenario(s) that references the child alternative that you are merging from, and make them reference the parent alternative that you are merging to. Use the Scenario Manager window to edit the scenario(s), and the Alternatives tab to make the scenario point to the parent alternative.


To access the Alternatives Manager, select Analysis\Alternatives from the pull-down menu.

8.2.3 Alternatives Editor The Alternatives Editor displays all of the records held by a single alternative. These records contain the values that are active when a scenario referencing this alternative is active. They allow you to view all of the changes that you have made for a single alternative. They also allow you to eliminate changes that you no longer need.

There is one editor for each alternative type. Each type of editor works basically the same, and allows you to make changes to a different aspect of your system. The first column contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have been changed in this alternative.

• If the box is checked, the record on that line has been modified and the data is local, or specific, to this alternative.

• If the box is not checked, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is changed in the parent, the change will be reflected in the child. The records on these rows reflect the corresponding values in the alternative’s parent.

Notes: As you make changes to records, the check box will automatically become checked. If you want to reset a record to its parent's values, simply uncheck the corresponding check box.

Many columns support Global Editing, allowing you to change all values in a single column. Right-click a column header to access the Global Edit option.

The checkbox column will be disabled when you edit a base alternative.

To access the Alternatives Editor for a particular alternative, select Analysis\Alternatives from the pull-down menu to activate the Alternatives Manager. Select the desired alternative tab, choose the alternative you would like to edit, and click the Edit button.

8.2.4 Physical Alternative One of the most common uses of a water distribution model is the design of new or replacement facilities. During design, it is common to try several physical alternatives in an effort to find the most cost effective solution. For example, when designing a replacement pipeline, it would be beneficial to try several sizes and pipe materials to find the most satisfactory combination. Our powerful Alternative Manager allows you to set up an unlimited number of design alternatives and apply them in different scenarios.

Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored in a physical properties alternative, as listed below:

• Pipe Physical Properties

• Pump Physical Properties

• Valve Physical Properties

• GPV Physical Properties

• Junction Physical Properties

• Reservoir Physical Properties

• Tank Physical Properties


Physical Alternative Editor for Pipes The Physical Alternative editor for pipes is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of pipes. The following columns are available:

• Material - Type of material from which the pipe is constructed (e.g. Ductile Iron, PVC, Steel).

• Diameter - Internal diameter of the pipe. The nominal diameter of the pipe is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact.

• Roughness - A measure of the pipe’s internal roughness, based on the chosen friction method.

• Minor Loss Coefficient -Appurtenances such as valves, bends, and tees contribute to local flow disturbances resulting in energy loss. Click the ellipsis (…) button to edit the composite minor loss element for the pipe.

• Check Valve - True or false status indicating the presence of a check valve.

Physical Alternative Editor for Pumps The Physical Alternative editor for pumps is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of pumps, which consist of the following:

• Label - The label for the pump. This label is not editable in this dialog.

• Elevation - Elevation of the pump, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.

• Pump Type - The attributes that define the pump's operating characteristics. Click this field, then click the ellipsis (…) button to edit the parameters for the active pump type.

• Variable Speed Pump? - This column contains a checkbox for each pump in the model. If the box is checked, the pump is a Variable Speed pump; if the box is unchecked, it is not.

• VSP Type - This column is only editable when the Variable Speed Pump? Box is checked for the pump in question. When the field is activated, it consists of a pulldown menu that allows you to select whether the VSP type is Pattern Based or Fixed Head, and an ellipsis button that allows you change the settings for the variable speed pump.

• Efficiency Type - This field consists of a pulldown menu that allows you to select whether the Efficiency type is Best Efficiency Point, Constant Efficiency, or Multiple Efficiency Point, and an ellipsis button that allows you change the efficiency settings.

Physical Alternative Editor for Valves The Physical Alternative editor for valves used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of valves. The following columns are available for all types of valve:

• Elevation - Elevation of the valve, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.

• Diameter - The internal diameter of the valve. The nominal diameter of the valve is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact.

• Minor Loss Coefficient - The wide-open minor loss coefficient. Click the ellipsis (…) button to edit the Minor Loss Library.

Physical Alternative Editor for GPVs The Physical Alternative editor for GPVs is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of General Purpose Valves. The following columns are available:

• Label - The label for the valve. The Label is not editable in this dialog.


• Elevation - Elevation of the valve, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.

• Diameter - The internal diameter of the valve. The nominal diameter of the valve is commonly used in water distribution modeling with little practical impact.

• Minor Loss Coefficient - The wide-open minor loss coefficient. Click the ellipsis (…) button to edit the Minor Loss Library.

• Headloss Curve - This column contains an Edit button for each GPV in the model. Clicking this button opens the "Curve" dialog, which allows you to input the Headloss-Discharge points for that particular GPV.

Physical Alternative Editor for Junctions The Physical Alternative editor for Pressure Junctions is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of junctions, which consist of the following:

• Elevation - Elevation of the junction, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.

• Zone - Specify the zone the junction belongs to. You may click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Zone Manager, which allows you to edit or add zones.

• Emitter Coefficient - Input the emitter coefficient for the corresponding junction.

Physical Alternative Editor for Reservoirs The Physical Alternative editor for reservoirs is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of reservoirs, which consist of the following:

• Elevation -Elevation of the reservoir, typically measured from the Mean Sea Level.

• HGL Pattern - Displays the hydraulic grade line pattern that is currently in effect (if any- if no pattern is selected, this box will display "Fixed"). This box consists of a pull-down which lists the available patterns, and an ellipsis button which, when clicked, opens the Pattern Manager to allow you to edit or create a pattern.


Physical Alternative Editor for Tanks The Physical Alternative editor for tanks is used to create various data sets for the physical characteristics of tanks. The following columns are available:

• Elevation - Ground elevation of the tank.

• Base Elevation - The vertical distance of the tank’s base above a known datum. Typically, Mean Sea Level is the datum used. The base elevation is the elevation from which all tank levels are computed.

• Minimum Elevation (or Level) - This is the lowest possible water surface elevation for the tank. If the tank drains below this level, it will shut off from the system.

• Maximum Elevation (or Level) - This is the highest possible water surface elevation for the tank. If the tank fills above this level, it will shut off from the system.

• Section - The physical parameters that define the tank cross sectional geometry. There are two (2) types of tank sections, Constant Area and Variable Area. Click this field, then click the ellipsis (…) button to edit the parameters for the active tank section type.



8.2.5 Active Topology Alternative The Active Topology Alternative is a new feature (added in v5) that allows you to temporarily remove areas of the network from the current analysis. This is useful for comparing the effect of proposed construction and to gauge the effectiveness of redundancy that may be present in the system.

The Active Topology dialog is divided into tabs for each element type:

• Pressure Pipe

• Pressure

• Reservoir

• Tank

• Pump

• Valve

For each tab, the same setup applies- the tables are divided into three columns. The first column displays whether the data is Base or Inherited, the second column is the element Label, and the third column allows you to choose whether or not the corresponding element is Active in the current alternative.

To make an element Inactive in the current alternative, simply uncheck the box in the Active? column that corresponds to that element’s Label.

8.2.6 Demand Alternative The Demand Alternative allows you to model the response of the pipe network to different sets of demands, such as the current demand and the year 2010 demand.

The demand alternative table includes the following columns:

• Label - Identifying label of the junction element.

• Type - Demand type, Demand or Inflow. Direct editing of this item is disabled if the junction has multiple demands (see Demand Summary below).

• Base Flow - Hydraulic load attributed to the junction for Steady-State Analysis, or the hydraulic load before applying the Pattern time step multiplier used for Extended Period Analysis. If the junction has multiple demands, this field displays a single "calculated" Baseline Load, and direct editing of the field is disabled (see Demand Summary below).

• Pattern - Name of the Pattern that applies the time-step multiplier to the Baseline Load if the junction has multiple demands. Direct editing is disabled and the pattern name is shown as "Composite."

• Demand Summary - A summary displaying the calculated Baseline Load, the EPS Pattern applied to the Baseline Load, and the calculated demand Type (Demand or Inflow) for the junction. Clicking twice on a Demand Summary opens an editing dialog for working with multiple demands on a junction.

On the right side of this dialog, there is also an Import button. Clicking this button allows you to choose an ASCII tab-delimited text file from which to import demands. More information on this procedure can be found in the Importing Demands topic.


Note: Setting up multiple demand alternatives makes it possible to easily manage different loading conditions for any network. For example, an "Average Day" demand alternative contains the average demands for each junction in the network, and a "Peak Day" demand alternative contains the peak demands for each junction in the network. The Alternative Manager allows you to create any number of demand alternatives.

Tip: This program allows multiple demands to be attributed to a single junction.

8.2.7 Initial Settings Alternative The following types of network elements have initial settings:

• Pipes

• Pumps

• Tanks

• Pressure Valves

• FCVs (Flow Control Valves)

• TCVs (Throttle Control Valves)

• GPV's (General Purpose Vales)

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pipes The Initial Settings Alternative for pipes is used to specify if the pipe status is initially Open or Closed.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pumps The Pump Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for pumps.

The fields for each record are as follows:

• Status - Indicates whether the pump is initially On or Off.

• Relative Speed Factor - Determines the initial speed of the pump impeller relative to the speed at which the pump curve is defined.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Tanks The Tank Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various water surface elevations (hydraulic grades) in your tank at the beginning of the simulation.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for Pressure Valves The Pressure Valve Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for pressure valves (Pressure Breaker, Pressure Reducer, and Pressure Sustaining Valves).


• Valve Status - Indicates whether the pressure valve is initially Active, Inactive (wide-open), or Closed.


• Hydraulic Grade / Pressure - Initial setting for the valve. Depending on the input mode, the setting is entered and displayed in terms of hydraulic grade or pressure.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for FCVs The FCV Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for Flow Control Valves.


• Valve Status - Indicates whether the FCV is initially Active, Inactive, or Closed.

• Discharge - Initial flow setting for the valve.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for TCVs The TCV Initial Settings Alternative editor allows you to analyze various initial settings for Throttle Control Valves.


• Valve Status - Indicates whether the TCV is initially Active, Inactive, or Closed.

• Headloss Coefficient - Initial headloss coefficient for the valve.

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for GPVs The GPV Initial Settings Alternative allows you to choose whether the valve will be initially Active or Closed.

The only available input field for GPVs is as follows:

• Valve Status - Indicates whether the GPV is initially Active or Closed.

Note: There is no Inactive setting for GPVs. When the valve is active, the associated headlosses will be applied as determined by the values entered into the GPV’s Head-Discharge Points Table.

8.2.8 Operational Alternative The Operational Alternative allows you to specify controls on pressure pipes, pumps, as well as valves The Controlled field contains a Boolean (true or false) statement that indicates whether the network element is controlled. Clicking in this field activates a button that allows you to access the Controls dialog and edit the controls for this element.

8.2.9 Logical Control Set Alternative The Logical Control Set Alternative allows you to create, modify and manage both Logical Controls and Logical Control Sets. The following options are available in this dialog:

• Add - Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog. From this window, you can add previously created Logical Controls to the new control set.

• Edit - Opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog, which allows you to Edit the highlighted control set.

• Duplicate - Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.


• Delete - Deletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

• Rename - Allows you to rename the highlighted control set.

• Report - Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID, Conditions, Actions, and elements for all of the Logical Controls contained within the control set.

Note: Logical Controls with identical priorities will be prioritized based on the order they appear in the Logical Control Set alternative. See the Logical Control Dialog topic for more information regarding Priority evaluation.

8.2.10 Age Alternative The Age Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis for modeling the age of the water through the pipe network. This alternative allows you to analyze different scenarios for varying water ages at the network nodes.

8.2.11 Constituent Alternative The Constituent Alternative contains the water quality data used to model a constituent concentration throughout the network when performing a water quality analysis.

Selecting a constituent from the Constituent scroll-down list provides default values for table entries. This software provides a user-editable library of constituents for maintaining these values, which may be accessed by clicking the ellipsis (…) button next to the Constituent scroll-down list.

The tabbed table(s) at the bottom of the dialog includes different columns depending on the type of element(s) populating the table. Columns may include such values as:

• Label - Identifying label of the element represented by the row.

• Initial Constituent - Concentration of the constituent at the beginning of the analysis.

• Bulk Reaction - Reaction rate constant used to model reactions of the constituent within the bulk flow.

• Wall Reaction - Reaction rate constant used to model reactions that occur with the material along the pipe wall.

• Is Constituent Source? - True or false check to determine whether a node is a source of the constituent.

• Constituent Source Type – This column contains a pulldown menu that allows you to select the Constituent Source Type, and an ellipsis button that opens a dialog that allows you to specify the baseline concentration and constituent pattern for the associated Constituent Source. The available Constituent Source Types are as follows:

− Concentration - A Concentration Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any external inflow entering the network at a node, such as flow from a reservoir or from a negative demand placed at a junction. Clicking the ellipsis button (…) opens the Concentration dialog which contains the following fields:

• Constituent Baseline Load - Load attributed to the element before applying the Pattern time step multiplier used for an Extended Period Analysis.

• Constituent Pattern - Name of the Pattern that applies the time step multiplier to the


Baseline Load.

− Flow Paced Booster - A Flow Paced Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed concentration to the flow resulting from the mixing of all inflow to the node from other points in the network. Clicking the ellipsis button (…) opens the Concentration dialog which contains the following fields:


• Constituent Pattern - Name of the Pattern that applies the time step multiplier to the Baseline Load.

− Setpoint Booster - A Setpoint Booster Constituent Source fixes the concentration of any flow leaving the source node, as long as the concentration resulting from the inflow to the node is below the set point. Clicking the ellipsis button (…) opens the Concentration dialog which contains the following fields:



− Mass Booster - A Mass Booster Constituent Source adds a fixed mass flow to the flow entering the node from other points in the network. Clicking the ellipsis button (…) opens the Concentration dialog which contains the following fields:



• Tank Mixing Model - This section allows you to specify the Tank Mixing Model that will be used by the current tank. The mixing model is specified on a tank-by-tank basis, and Completely Mixed is the default model. The following mixing models are available:

− Two Compartment - Under this mixing model, available storage is divided into two completely mixed compartments. Inflow and outflow is assumed to take place in the first compartment. The second compartment receives overflow from the first, and this overflow is completely mixed. When this mixing model is selected, the Two Compartment column becomes available for input.

− Completely Mixed - The default mixing model. Under this model, all inflow and outflow is assumed to have been completely mixed.

− FIFO - First In / First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. Water parcels move through the tank in a segregated fashion where the first parcel to enter is the first parcel to leave.

− LIFO - Last In / First Out Plug Flow model. This mixing model assumes that no water mixing occurs during its residence time in the tank. As in the FIFO mixing model, water parcels are segregated, however in the LIFO mixing model, the parcels stack up on top of each other, and the last parcel to enter is the first to leave.

• Compartment 1 – This column is only available for input when the Two Compartment Tank Mixing Model is selected. This field allows you to enter the percentage of total tank volume that the first compartment occupies. The percentage for Compartment 2 is then initialized for you.

• Constituent Baseline Load - Load attributed to the element before applying the Pattern time step


multiplier used for an Extended Period Analysis.


Depending on the type of highlighted network element in the table, the Use Defaults button will reset the reaction coefficients for that element to the constituent default values as specified in the constituent library, or it will reset the initial constituent concentrations to 0.0.

8.2.12 Trace Alternative The Trace Alternative is used when performing a water quality analysis to determine the percentage of water at each node coming from a specified node. The Trace Alternative data includes a Trace Node, which is the node from which all tracing is computed.

The trace alternative table includes the following columns:

• Label - The identifying label of node elements.

• Initial Trace - A percentage value representing the starting condition at the node.

8.2.13 Fire Flow Alternative The Fire Flow Alternative contains the input data required to perform a fire flow analysis. This data includes the set of junction nodes for which fire flow results are needed, the set of default values for all junctions included in the fire flow set, and a record for each junction node in the fire flow set.

Default Flow and Pressure Constraints Each fire flow alternative has a set of default parameters that are applied to each junction in the fire flow set. When a default value is modified, you will be prompted to decide if the junction records that have been modified from the default should be updated to reflect the new default value.

The default constraints are grouped in the Flow Constraints and Pressure Constraints sections, as follows:

• Needed Fire Flow - Flow rate required at a fire flow junction to satisfy demands.

• Fire Flow Upper Limit - Maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a withdrawal location. It will prevent the software from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have large diameters and high service pressures.

• Apply Fire Flows By - There are two methods for applying fire flow demands. The fire flow demand can be added to the junction’s baseline demand, or it can completely replace the junction’s baseline demand. The junction's baseline demand is defined by the Demand Alternative selected for use in the Scenario along with the fire flow alternative.

• Residual Pressure - Minimum residual pressure to occur at the junction node. The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual pressure at the junction node does not fall below this target pressure.

• Minimum Zone Pressure - Minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes within a zone. The model determines the available fire flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure. Each junction has a zone associated with it, which can be located in the junction’s input data. If you do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction node’s fire flow analysis, move it to another zone.

• Use Minimum System Pressure Constraint - Toggle indicating whether a minimum pressure is to be maintained throughout the entire pipe system.


• Minimum System Pressure - Minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the entire system as a result of the fire flow withdrawal. If the pressure at a node anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will not be satisfied.

Selection Set Set of selected elements where fire flows need to be analyzed. You can choose between ‘All Junctions’ or a ‘Subset of Junctions’ that you can edit by clicking the ellipsis (…) button and accessing the Selection Set editor.

Fire Flow Loads The table on the fire flow alternative editor displays the fire flow loads for the junctions in this set. The values in this table reflect the default values entered, unless a change is made. The columns in the table are as follows:

• Label - Label of the junction whose fire flow record is being displayed.

• Needed Fire Flow - Flow rate required at the junction to meet fire flow demands. This value will be added to the junction’s baseline demand, or it will replace the junction’s baseline demand, depending on the default setting for applying fire flows.

• Fire Flow Upper Limit - Maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a withdrawal location. This value will prevent the software from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have large diameters and high service pressures. This value will be added to the junction’s baseline demand, or it will replace the junction’s baseline demand, depending on the default setting for applying fire flows.

• Residual Pressure, Minimum Zone Pressure, Minimum System Pressure - Set of pressure constraints for each Fire Flow node. See description for each of these parameters in the Default Flow and Pressure Constraints section above.

Use Defaults Click the Use Defaults button to reset the selected row to the default values for the Fire Flow Alternative. This does not cause the record to inherit from its parent. It only causes it to reflect the Default values.

Note: The Defaults for a fire flow alternative can only be set in the root alternative. All child alternatives inherit the Default values from the root. The set of junction nodes is also inherited from the root and cannot be altered in the child alternatives.

8.2.14 Capital Cost Alternative One of the most common uses of the Capital Cost Manager is to compare the cost between several different system configurations. The compartmentalization of the data afforded by the cost alternative makes it easy to develop and subsequently compare various cost data sets. Developing multiple cost alternatives is an effective way to evaluate the cost of several different proposed solutions or to separate the costs associated with several phases of construction.

The cost alternative editor contains a tab for each type of element. Each tab contains the following fields for editing the cost data associated with an element.

• Label - Identifies the element associated with a particular record.

• Include in Cost Calculation - This field allows the user to specify whether or not to include the element in the cost calculation. If this field is checked, the item will be included in the cost


calculation.

• Element Costs - This field is only enabled when the field Include in Cost Calculation has a check mark. If this field is editable, you can click on it to open up a dialog where you can edit the construction and non-construction costs associated with an element. Note that you can Global Edit this field to edit the construction and non-construction costs of all the elements in the alternative.

8.2.15 User Data Alternative The User Data Alternative allows you to edit the data defined in the User Data Extension command for each of the network element types. The User Data Alternative editor contains a tab for each type of network element.

8.2.16 Energy Cost Alternative The Energy Cost Alternative allows you to specify which tanks and pumps will be included in the Energy Cost calculations. For pumps, you can also select which energy pricing pattern will be used, or create a new one. The energy cost alternative editor contains a tab for each type of element. Each tab contains the following fields for editing the cost data associated with an element.

• Label - Identifies the element associated with a particular record.

• Include in Energy Calculation- This field allows the user to specify whether or not to include the element in the energy cost calculation. If this field is checked, the item will be included in the cost calculation.

• Energy Pricing - This field is only available on the Pump tab of the Energy Cost Alternative editor. This column consists of a pulldown menu containing all of the energy pricing patterns that have been created, and an ellipsis (…) button that opens the Energy Pricing Manager.

8.3 Scenarios

8.3.1 Scenarios A Scenario contains all the input data (in the form of Alternatives), calculation options, results, and notes associated with a set of calculations. Scenarios let you set up an unlimited number of "What If?" situations for your model, and then modify, compute, and review your system under those conditions.

You can create scenarios that reuse or share data in existing alternatives, submit multiple scenarios for calculation in a batch run, switch between scenarios, and compare scenario results - all with a few mouse clicks. There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create.

There are three types of scenarios:

• Base scenarios - Contain all of your working data. When you start a new project, you will begin with a default base scenario. As you enter data and calculate your model, you are working with this default base scenario and the alternatives it references.

• Child scenarios - Inherit data from a base scenario, or other child scenarios. Child scenarios allow you to freely change data for one or more elements in your system. Child scenarios can reflect some or all of the values contained in their parent. This is a very powerful concept, giving you the ability to make changes in a parent scenario that will trickle down through child scenarios, while also giving you the ability to override values for some or all of the elements in child scenarios.


Note: The calculation options are not inherited between scenarios, but are duplicated when the scenario is first created. The alternatives and data records, however, are inherited. There is a permanent, dynamic link from a child back to its parent.

• Manual Fire Flow scenarios - Manual Fire Flow scenarios can be generated automatically for any junction or set of junctions in your model. You specify the junction(s) that you want to perform the Fire Flow analysis on, input the fire flow demand at the junction(s), and whether this demand should replace or be added to the other demands at the junction(s) in question. The program then automatically creates a scenario for each junction that was included in the manual fire flow list. These scenarios reflect the changes in the network when the respective fire flow demands are substituted for/added to the normal demands at that junction. An additional benefit of manual fire flow scenarios is the ability to run the newly created scenarios in an extended period simulation, which can help you assess the effects of changing conditions and controls on the availability of the required fire flow at the respective junctions. For specific instructions on implementing this feature, please see the Manual Fire Flow Scenarios topic.

8.3.2 Scenario Selection

You can change the current scenario by simply using the Scenario drop-down list located on the Analysis Toolbar on the main application window. When you select a different scenario, your current input data, calculation options, and calculated results (if available) will reflect the selected scenario and the alternatives it references.

8.3.3 Editing Scenarios Once scenarios and alternatives are created, you do not need to take any special steps to input data into the alternatives referenced by the current scenario. This happens automatically as you make changes to your data. Changes to your data are always applied to the alternatives in your active scenario. For example, consider that a pipe has a 12" diameter in the alternative storing data for the Base scenario. Then you switch to Scenario 2, which references another alternative, and change the pipe diameter to 16". The new value will automatically be associated with the alternative in Scenario 2. If you switch back to the Base scenario, the pipe diameter will revert to 12".

You can also enter data directly into an alternative using the Alternatives Editor. This editor allows you to see all of the changes that you have made in a single alternative. If you make an unintended change to the active child scenario and you wish to remove it, go to the tabular editor for the type of input data you changed, and uncheck the leading check box on the record(s) for the elements you wish to restore.

8.3.4 Scenario Manager The Scenario Manager allows you to create, edit, and manage scenarios. There is one built-in default scenario - the Base scenario. If you wish, you only have to use this one scenario. However, you can save yourself time by creating additional scenarios that reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the results of each of your calculations. There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create.

The Scenario Manager is divided into four sections:

• The three buttons that run across the top of the window:

• Tutorial - Open the tutorials.

• Close - Close the Scenario Manager.


• Help - Open the on-line help.

• The series of five buttons running along the left side of the window:

• Scenario Wizard - Open the Scenario Wizard, which walks you step-by-step through the creation of a new scenario.

• Scenario Management - Offers a menu of options for creating, editing, and managing scenarios:

− Add - Prompts for a name, then creates a new child, base, or Manual Fire Flow scenario. If you create a child scenario, it will be based on the scenario that is currently highlighted.

− Edit - Open the Scenario Editor for the scenario that is currently highlighted.

− Rename - Rename an existing scenario. This invokes an in-place editor in the tree view of the available scenarios. Make the desired changes to the existing name and press Enter.

− Delete - Delete the scenario that is currently highlighted.

− Report - Generate a summary report for the scenario that is highlighted, including alternatives, calculation options, notes, and results.

• Alternatives - Open the Alternatives Manager for creating, editing, and managing alternatives.

• Batch Run - Open the Batch Run dialog for selecting from among the available scenarios and initiating calculations.

• Scenario Comparison - Open the Annotation Comparison Wizard, which allows you to create a drawing displaying the differences in input and output variables between two scenarios.

• The pane in the center of the dialog:

• Scenarios Pane - Available scenarios in a hierarchical tree showing the parent-child relationships. You can right-click any scenario to perform scenario management functions on it. You can double-click parent scenarios to expand or collapse the child scenarios beneath them.

• The pane on the right side of the dialog, which displays a variety of information depending on which of the following tabs is selected:

• Alternatives tab - Alternatives referenced by the highlighted scenario, showing the type and name for each alternative. An icon distinguishes whether the alternative belongs to the scenario or is inherited from its parent scenario . Double-click any alternative to open the Alternatives Editor.

• Summary tab - Summary of the calculation options for the highlighted scenario, and any notes you have associated with it.

• Results tab - Summary of the last calculation performed for the highlighted scenario.

Note: When you delete a scenario, you are not losing data records because scenarios never actually hold calculation data records (alternatives do). The alternatives and data records referenced by that scenario will still exist until you explicitly delete them. By accessing the Alternative Manager, you can delete the referenced alternatives and data records.

To open the Scenario Manager window, select Analysis / Scenarios. Or, click the button next to the scenario drop-down list in the main application window.


Batch Run Performing a batch run allows you to set up and run calculations for multiple scenarios at once. This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations, or simply manage a group of smaller calculations as a set. The list of selected scenarios for the batch run will remain with your project until you change it.

Using the dialog is simple. First, check the scenarios you want to run and click the Batch button. Each scenario will be calculated. You can cancel the batch run between any scenario calculation.

When the batch is completed, the scenario that was current will remain current, even if it was not one that was calculated. Select a calculated scenario from the main window drop-down list to see the results throughout the program, or select it from the Scenario Manager and click the Results tab to preview the results.

The Batch Run dialog contains a Select button that displays options you can use to select all scenarios or clear your selections.

Creating Scenarios to Model "What-if" Situations? The scenario management feature was designed to let you model "what-if" situations by easily switching between different input data sets without having to re-enter data, and by comparing different output results just as easily.

To create a new scenario:

1. Open the Scenario Manager dialog by clicking the Scenario Manager button next to the drop-down scenario list in the main application window.

2. Open the Scenario Wizard by clicking its button in the upper left of the Scenario Manager dialog.

3. Complete each step in the Scenario Wizard - Name the new scenario, choose which scenario to base it on, and choose the alternatives to be included. Click Next between each step, and click Finish when you are done.

4. Close the Scenario Manager dialog. Notice the scenario you have just created is displayed as the current scenario in the Scenario drop-down list in the main application window.

5. Proceed to modify your model with the changes you want recorded in the new scenario.

8.3.5 Scenario Wizard The Scenario Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of creating a new scenario.

These are the basic steps for creating a new scenario:

• Name - Name the scenario and add some comments if you wish.

• Base - Select a scenario on which to base the new scenario.

• Calculation - Choose the type of calculation that you would like to perform, as well as other calculation options.

• Alternatives - Specify the alternative types with which you would like to work.

• New/Existing - Create and/or select alternatives for your new scenario.

• Preview - Preview the scenario, and create it when satisfied.

To access the Scenario Wizard, open the Scenario Manager and click the Scenario Wizard button.


Scenario Wizard - Step 1 Here you can enter a unique name and an optional note for the new scenario that you are creating.

The Name field allows you to input a distinguishing name for this scenario. A default name is provided, but we recommend that you change it to something more descriptive. If the new scenario will be based on another scenario, you may want a name that indicates what will be different about the new scenario. For example: "Post Development".

The next field is optional, and allows you to input free-form text that will be associated with the new scenario. Use it to make detailed notes about the conditions the scenario will model.

Click the Next button to proceed to the next step in defining a new scenario.

Scenario Wizard - Step 2 Click the existing scenario on which you would like to base your new scenario. Your new child scenario will inherit data from this parent scenario, and will be initialized with the same calculation settings and options. The Scenario Wizard, designed to introduce the user to scenarios, does not allow you to create new base scenarios.

Existing scenarios in your project are displayed in a "tree" structure, giving you a graphic depiction of the parent-child relationships.

Click the Next button to proceed to the next step.

Scenario Wizard - Step 3 This step of the Scenario Wizard allows you to specify the type of calculation to be associated with the scenario you are creating.

If you select to be in Steady State mode, you are also given the option to perform an automated fire flow analysis.

If you select to be in Extended Period mode, you are also given the option to perform one of the Water Quality Analysis (Age, Constituent, or Trace analysis).

Scenario Wizard - Step 4 Check the boxes next to the types of alternatives you want to include in the new scenario. The alternatives for boxes you do not check will be inherited from the specified parent scenario. You will be free to add or remove alternatives to the scenario after you create it.

Click the Next button to proceed to the next step in defining a new scenario.

Scenario Wizard - Step 5 Here you are asked to specify the source for each alternative you have requested in the previous tab.

• Create New Alternative - If you choose to create a new alternative, it will inherit from the same type of alternative in the specified or parent scenario. This means it will initially use all the same input data values. Enter a unique and descriptive name for the new alternative.

• Use Existing Alternative - If you choose to use an existing alternative, you will be shown the tree of existing alternatives from which to choose. In this case, you will not be creating a new alternative for use in the scenario, and instead may actually be sharing an alternative with another scenario.

Click the Next button to proceed to the next step.


Scenario Wizard - Step 6 The last step of the Scenario Wizard displays a summary of the scenario you have defined and are about to create.

In the left pane is a preview of the scenario as it relates to its parent and other scenarios. In the right pane is a list of the alternatives it references, showing their labels and types. An icon indicates whether a given alternative is local to the new child scenario, or if it is inherited from the specified or parent scenario.

If you are satisfied, click the Finished button to create the new scenario.

8.3.6 Scenario Editor The Scenario Editor is the control center for each analysis. It is the place where you access or change all the information for performing a single calculation (alternatives, calculation type, calculation options, results, and notes). It is organized by the following tabs:

• Alternatives - Edit or view the alternatives to be used by this scenario.

• Calculation - Specify the type of hydraulic/water quality calculations to be performed, and click the GO button.

• Results - View the hydraulic/water quality calculation results summary.

• Notes - Edit or view notes for this scenario.

To open the Scenario Editor for the active scenario, click the GO button on the toolbar. To open the Scenario Editor for any scenario, select Analysis\Scenarios from the pull-down menu to open the Scenario Manager, right-click the scenario that you wish to edit, and select Edit from the pop-up menu. Or, highlight the scenario you wish to edit, click the Scenario Management button, and select Edit.

Alternatives Tab The Alternatives tab, located in the Scenario Editor, allows you to specify the alternatives that will be used by this scenario. There is one row for each Alternative Type. You need only concern yourself with the rows that correspond to the changes you would like to model using this scenario.

To specify the alternatives you would like to work with, simply click the check box next to the alternative type. For example, if you would like to see how your system behaves by changing the shape or size of a few pipes, then click the check box next to the Physical Properties Alternative row.

If you would like to use an existing alternative that you have already set up, use the drop-down list to choose the desired alternative. If you would like to create a new alternative, click the New button. You will be asked to name the new alternative, and the Alternatives Editor will open.

The Scenario Wizard will walk you through all of the steps required to create a new scenario. If you are unsure how to specify the alternatives that you would like to work with, we recommend that you use this wizard.

Notes: When this scenario is active, the alternatives that you specify here will be active. Changes that you make to your model will be made in these alternatives. When you calculate this scenario, these are the alternatives that will be used.

This tab will take on a different appearance depending on whether you are editing a base scenario or child scenario. When editing a base scenario, the checkbox column described above will not be present. You can use the ellipsis (…) button located to the right of each drop-down list to access the associated Alternatives Manager.


Scenario Editor - Calculation Tab This dialog is the control center for each network analysis. This program is capable of performing both a Hydraulic Analysis and a Water Quality Analysis. Also, Extended Period Analysis, which considers time-variable hydraulic demands and constituent source concentrations, is available. Patterns are used to define the time-variable aspects of these system loads. Also contributing to time-variable hydraulic conditions are tank characteristics and controls associated with Pipes, Pumps, and Valves.

This dialog allows you to specify the following data and calculation modes:

• Steady State/Extended Period Simulation - If you have selected Extended Period calculation, a set of extended period options become available for editing. These are Start Time, Duration, and Hydraulic Time Step.

• Analysis Modes - In addition to performing a standard hydraulic analysis, you are given the option to perform a Water Quality Analysis (in Steady-State mode), or a Fire Flow analysis (in Extended Period Simulation mode).

• Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments - Use this feature to "tweak" junction demands and pipe roughnesses without permanently changing the value of the input data. You can experiment with different adjustment factors until you find the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed field data.

• Check Data/Validate - This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors, hard-to-detect topology problems, and modeling problems. When the Validate box is checked, the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations. It can also be run at any time by clicking the Check Data button. The process will produce either a dialog stating "No Problem Found," or a status log with a list of messages.

• Calculation Options - Use this feature to specify parameters affecting hydraulic and water quality calculations.

Clicking the GO button will perform the calculations.

Notes: Calibration is one of the most important steps in developing a hydraulic and/or water quality model. This program provides an easy-to-use adjustment feature that lets you "tweak" the input data to help you match data observed in the field. In addition, new to WaterCAD v5.0 is the Darwin Calibrator, which allows you to calibrate your model manually or with the assistance of Genetic Algorithms. For more information on this new feature, see the Darwin Calibrator Overview topic.

Each calculation depends upon a number of parameters that can optionally be configured using the Calculation Options dialog box.

Tip: If the model has not been calculated, or if the input data has been changed since the last calculation, the word Compute (displayed in Red) will appear in the status pane in the lower right corner of the main editing window. This is a signal that the model needs to be recalculated.

Notes Tab The memo field on the Notes tab allows you to input paragraph text that will be associated with the new scenario. Use it to make detailed notes about the conditions that the scenario will model.


Results Tab The Results tab contains a summary of the last calculation performed using this scenario. Click the Save button to save the results to an ASCII text file. Click the Print Preview button to preview the Scenario Results Summary Report.

To open the Results tab for the active scenario: Click the GO button on the toolbar, or select Analysis \ Compute from the pull-down menu. In the resulting dialog, click the Results tab.

To open the Results tab for a specific scenario: From the Scenario Manager, right-click the scenario that you wish to edit, and select Edit from the pull down menu that appears. In the resulting dialog, click the Results tab.

Note: Immediately after you run the calculations, the Results tab displays automatically. You will notice a green, yellow, or red light in that tab indicating how successful the computations were.

The light and folder color provides you with the following information:

Green light - Calculations were run successfully, without any warning or error messages being generated.

Yellow light - Calculations were run successfully, without error messages being generated. However, there are one or more warning messages. Warnings are displayed in the results summary in this tab.

Red light - Calculations were not run successfully and error messages were generated, as shown in the results summary of this tab.

In order to generate a Scenario Summary Report, click the Report button. Click the Element Messages button to open up a table that displays all the messages generated during the run.

Double click the folders or click the + sign to open them up and display messages relevant to the folder’s caption. When you click the copy button or save button the exposed text will be stored.


Notes


Chapter 9

Modeling Capabilities

9.1 Overview WaterCAD provides unmatched modeling capabilities, allowing you to model and optimize practically any distribution system aspect, including the following operations:

Hydraulic Analysis

• Perform a Steady-State analysis for a "snapshot" view of the system, or perform an extended-period simulation to see how the system behaves over time.

• Use any common friction method: Hazen-Williams, Darcy-Weisbach, or Manning's

• Take advantage of scenario management to see how your system reacts to different demand and physical conditions, including fire and emergency usage.

• Control pressure and flow completely by using flexible valve configurations. You can automatically control pipe, valve, and pump status based on changes in system pressure (or based on the time of day). Control pumps, pipes, and valves based on any pressure junction or tank in the distribution system.

• Perform automated fire flow analysis for any set of elements and zones in the network.

• Calibrate your model manually, or use the Darwin Calibrator.

• Generate Capital and Energy Cost estimates.

• Compute System Head Curves.

Water Quality Analysis

• Track the growth or decay of substances (such as chlorine) as they travel through the distribution network.

• Determine the age of water anywhere in the network.

• Identify source trends throughout the system.

190 Chapter 9 – Modeling Capabilities

9.2 Steady-State/Extended Period Simulation WaterCAD gives the choice between performing a Steady-State analysis of the system or performing an extended-period simulation over any time period.

Steady-State Simulation Steady-state analyses determine the operating behavior of the system at a specific point in time or under steady-state conditions (flow rates and hydraulic grades remain constant over time). This type of analysis can be useful for determining pressures and flow rates under minimum, average, peak, or short term effects on the system due to fire flows.

For this type of analysis, the network equations are determined and solved with tanks being treated as fixed grade boundaries. The results that are obtained from this type of analysis are instantaneous values and may or may not be representative of the values of the system a few hours, or even a few minutes, later in time.

Extended Period Simulation When the effects on the system over time are important, an extended period simulation is appropriate. This type of analysis allows you to model tanks filling and draining, regulating valves opening and closing, and pressures and flow rates changing throughout the system in response to varying demand conditions and automatic control strategies formulated by the modeler.

While a steady-state model may tell whether the system has the capability to meet a certain average demand, an extended period simulation indicates whether the system has the ability to provide acceptable levels of service over a period of minutes, hours, or days. Extended period simulations can also be used for energy consumption and cost studies, as well as water quality modeling.

Data requirements for extended period simulations are greater than for steady-state runs. In addition to the information required by a steady-state model, you also need to determine water usage patterns, more detailed tank information, and operational rules for pumps and valves. The following additional information is required only when performing Extended Period Simulation, and therefore is not enabled when Steady-State Analysis has been specified.

• Start Time - The start time format is a standard 24-hour clock. The format is Hour:Minute:Second AM or PM. (eg 12:45:30 PM).

• Duration - The duration can be any positive real number.

• Hydraulic Time Step - Enter the time interval between hydraulic solutions for this calculation. The hydraulic time step is the maximum amount of time that the hydraulic conditions of the network are assumed to be constant.

Note: Each of the parameters needed for an extended period analysis has a default value. You will most likely want to change the values to suit your particular analysis.

Tip: Occasionally the numerical engine will not converge during an extended period analysis. This is usually due to controls (typically based on tank elevations) or control valves (typically pressure regulating valves) toggling between two operational modes (on/off for pump controls, open/closed for pipe controls, active/closed for valves). When this occurs, try adjusting the hydraulic time step to a smaller value. This will minimize the differences in boundary conditions between time steps, and may allow for convergence.


Whether the model is run in Steady-State or over an extended period is specified on the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor, which can be accessed by selecting Analysis\Scenarios from the pull-down menu.

9.3 Optional Analysis In addition to performing a standard hydraulic analysis, you are given the option to perform a water quality analysis or a fire flow analysis:

• Water Quality Analysis - This check box configures the calculation to analyze for water quality. When this box is checked, you need to specify the type of water quality analysis to perform. This software is capable of performing three types of water quality analyses:

− Age - Determine how long the water has been in the system.

− Constituent - Determine the concentration of a constituent at all nodes and links in the system.

− Trace - Determine the percentage of the water at all nodes and links in the system. The source is designated as a specific node.

• Fire Flow Analysis - This check box configures WaterCAD to analyze the system for available fire flow.

Notes: Water quality calculations are time variable in nature, and therefore are only available when the calculation is configured for extended period analysis. Be sure that the Extended Period Analysis radio button in the Hydraulic Analysis portion of the Calculation dialog is selected.

Fire Flow calculations are based on a steady-state calculation. Therefore, if the calculation is configured to perform an Extended Period Analysis, the Fire Flow Analysis check box is disabled. Be sure that the Steady State Analysis radio button in the Hydraulic Analysis portion of the dialog is selected.

Tip: Use the Alternatives Manager to set up and maintain multiple Fire Flow data sets.

These optional analyses are specified in the Analysis section in the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor, which can be accessed from the Analysis\Scenarios menu item.

9.4 Global Demand and Roughness Adjustments Demand and Roughness Adjustments based on observed data are an important part of the development of hydraulic and water quality models. It is a powerful feature for "tweaking" the two most commonly used parameters during model calibration: junction demands and pipe roughness.

One of the first steps performed during a calculation is the transformation of the input data into the required format for the numerical analysis engine. If a factor and operator are present in the adjustment fields when the GO button is clicked, the factor is used during this transformation. This does not permanently change the value of the input data, but allows you to experiment with different adjustment factors until you find the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed field data.


The Calibration section contains the following data:

• Demand - Use this adjustment field to temporarily adjust the individual demands at all junction nodes in the system that have demands for the current scenario. For example, assume node J-10 has two demands, a 100 gpm fixed pattern demand, and a 200 gpm residential pattern demand, for a total baseline demand of 300 gpm. If you enter a demand adjustment multiplier of 1.25, the input to the numerical engine will be 125 gpm and 250 gpm respectively, for a total baseline demand of 375 gpm at node J-10. If you use the Set operator to set the demands to 400, the demand will be adjusted proportionally to become 133 and 267 gpm, for a total baseline of 400 gpm. In addition, if a junction has an inflow of 100 gpm (or a demand of -100 gpm), and the adjustment operation is Set demand to 200 gpm, then the inflow at that junction will be -200 gpm (equivalent to a demand of 200 gpm).

• Roughness - Use this adjustment field to temporarily adjust the roughness of all pipes in the distribution network.

• Apply - Click the Apply button to permanently adjust the demands or roughness. Generally, you will use this button after experimenting with the adjustment factors on successive calculations, and comparing the calculation results to observed field data.

The adjustment data is located on the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor, which can be accessed by selecting Analysis\Scenarios from the pull-down menu.

9.5 Check Data/Validate This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors, hard to detect topology problems, and modeling problems. When the Validate box is checked, the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations. It can also be run at any time by clicking the Check Data button. The process will produce either a dialog stating "No Problems Found" or a status log with a list of messages.

The validation process will generate two types of messages. A warning message means that a particular part of the model (i.e. a pipe's roughness) does not conform to the expected value, or is not within the expected range of values. This type of warning is useful but not fatal. Therefore, no corrective action is required to proceed with a calculation. Warning messages are often generated as a result of a topographical or data entry error and should be corrected. An error message, on the other hand, is a fatal error, and the calculation cannot proceed before it is corrected. Typically, error messages are related to problems in the network topology, such as a pump or valve not being connected on both its intake and discharge sides.

The check data algorithm performs the following validations:

• Network topology - Checks that the network contains at least one boundary node, one pipe, and one junction. These are the minimum network requirements. It also checks for fully connected pumps and valves and that every node is reachable from a boundary node through open links.

• Element validation - Checks that every element in the network is valid for the calculation. For example, this validation ensures that all pipes have a non-zero length, a non-zero diameter, a roughness value that is within the expected range, etc. Each type of element has its own checklist. This same validation is performed when you edit an element in a dialog. The dialog will not close until each item on the checklist is satisfied.

Note: In earlier versions of the software, it was possible to create a topological situation that was problematic but was not checked for in the network topology validation. The situation could be created by "morphing" a node element such as a junction, tank, or reservoir into a pump or valve. This situation is now detected and corrected automatically, but it is strongly recommended that you verify the flow direction of the pump or valve in question. If you have further questions or comments related to this, please contact Haestad Methods Support.


Tip: Warning messages related to the value of a particular attribute being outside the accepted range can often be corrected by adjusting the allowable range for that attribute.

The Check Data button and the Validate check box are located on the Calculation tab of the Scenario Editor, which can be accessed by selecting Analysis\Scenarios from the pull-down menu.

9.6 Calculate Network The following needs to be completed before performing hydraulic calculations for a network.

1. Set the Calculation mode to Steady-State or Extended Period. If Extended Period is selected, then specify the starting time, the duration, and the time step to be used.

2. Optionally, in Extended Period mode, you may perform a Water Quality Analysis. Set the Water Quality toggle On and select one of the three available types of calculations: Age, Constituent or Trace.

3. Optionally, in Steady-State mode, you may also perform a Fire Flow Analysis by setting the Fire Flow Analysis toggle.

4. Optionally, in the Calibration section, you may modify the demand or roughness values of your entire network for calibration purposes. If a factor and operator are present in the calibration fields when the GO button is clicked, the factor is used during this calculation. This does not permanently change the value of the input data, but allows you to experiment with different calibration factors until you find the one that causes your calculation results to most closely correspond with your observed field data. To permanently change the value of the input data, select Apply.

5. Optionally, click the Options button to verify general algorithm parameters used to perform Hydraulic and Water Quality calculations.

6. Set the Validate toggle On, or click the Check Data button to ensure that your input data does not contain errors.

7. Click on the GO button to start the calculations.

Tip: The Check Data button performs a quick check of your input data and displays any errors found. It is recommended to run this function before the actual run of the calculations. Note, however, that the data is automatically checked when you perform the calculations if the Validate toggle is On.

9.7 Flow Emitters Flow Emitters are devices associated with junctions that model the flow through a nozzle or orifice. In these situations, the demand (i.e. the flow rate through the emitter) varies in proportion to the pressure at the junction raised to some power. The constant of proportionality is termed the "discharge coefficient". For nozzles and sprinkler heads, the exponent on pressure is 0.5 and the manufacturer usually states the value of the discharge coefficient as the flow rate in gpm through the device at a 1 psi pressure drop.

Emitters are used to model flow through sprinkler systems and irrigation networks. They can also be used to simulate leakage in a pipe connected to the junction (if a discharge coefficient and pressure exponent for the leaking crack or joint can be estimated) and compute a fire flow at the junction (the flow available at some minimum residual pressure). In the latter case, one would use a very high value of the discharge


coefficient (e.g., 100 times the maximum flow expected) and modify the junction's elevation to include the equivalent head of the pressure target.

When both an emitter and a normal demand are specified for a junction, the demand that WaterCAD reports in its output results includes both the normal demand and the flow through the emitter.

9.8 Fire Flow Analysis

9.8.1 Fire Flow Analysis One of the goals of a water distribution system is to provide adequate capacity to fight fires. WaterCAD’s powerful fire flow analysis capabilities can be used to determine if the system can meet the fire flow demands while maintaining various pressure constraints. Fire flows can be computed for a single node, a group of selected nodes, or all nodes in the system. A complete fire flow analysis can comprise hundreds or thousands of individual flow solutions - one for each junction selected for the fire flow analysis.

Fire flows are computed at user-specified locations by iteratively assigning demands and computing system pressures. The program calculates a steady-state analysis for each node in the Fire Flow Alternative. At each node, it begins by running a Steady-State analysis to ensure that the fire flow constraints that have been set can be met without withdrawing Fire Flow from any of the nodes. If the constraints are met in this initial run, the program then begins iteratively assigning the Needed Fire Flow demands at each of the nodes, and checking to ensure that the constraints are met. The program then runs another set of Steady State analyses, this time either adding the Maximum Fire Flow (as set in the Fire Flow Upper Limit input box of the Fire Flow Alternative) to whatever normal demands are required at that node, or replacing the normal demand(s). In either case, the program checks the residual pressure at that node, the Minimum Zone Pressure, and, if applicable, the Minimum System Pressure. If the Fire Flow Upper Limit can be delivered while maintaining the various pressure constraints, that node will satisfy the Fire Flow constraints. If one or more of the pressure constraints is not met while attempting to withdraw the Fire Flow Upper Limit, the program will iteratively assign lesser demands until it finds the maximum flow that can be provided while maintaining the pressure constraints. If a node is not providing the Fire Flow Upper Limit, it is because the Residual Pressure at that node, the Minimum Zone Pressure, or the Minimum System Pressure constraints are not met while attempting to withdraw the Fire Flow Upper Limit (or the maximum number of iterations has been reached). If a node completely fails to meet the Fire Flow constraints, it is because the network is unable to deliver the Needed Fire Flow while still meeting the pressure constraints.

After the program has gone through the above process for each node in the Fire Flow Analysis, it runs a final Steady-State calculation that does not apply Fire Flow demands to any of the junctions. This provides a baseline of calculated results that can then be compared to the Fire Flow conditions, which can be determined by viewing the results presented on the Fire Flow Tab of the individual junction editors, or in the Fire Flow Tabular Report. The baseline pressures are the pressures that are modeled under the standard steady-state demand conditions in which fire flows are not exerted.

Note: Results of fire flow calculations, which are obtained from calculations performed separately for an automatic batch run, are only reported in the Fire Flow tab of the individual element editors and in the Fire Flow Tabular Report (accessed from the Report menu or the Tabular Reports button). Results reported in the other Element Editor tabs do not take into account any fire flow, unless you explicitly entered the fire flow as a demand at a specific junction.


Tip: All parameters defining a fire flow analysis, such as the residual pressure or the minimum zone pressure, are explained in detail in the Fire Flow Alternative and in the Fire Flow tab topics.

An on-line Tutorial on Fire Flow can be found by selecting the Help\Tutorials menu.

• Open the Scenario Dialog.

• Select the Calculation tab.

• Select Steady-State calculation and turn on the Fire Flow checkbox.

9.8.2 Fire Flow Results After performing a fire flow analysis, calculation results are available for each junction node in the fire flow selection set. These results can be viewed in the predefined Fire Flow Report (in tabular format),

accessed by clicking the Tabular Reports button , highlighting Fire Flow Report, and clicking OK. Note that results for the nodes that were not included in the fire flow selection set are reported as N/A.

9.8.3 Not getting Fire Flow at a Junction Node Perform the following checks if you are not getting expected fire flow results:

• Check the Available Fire Flow. If it is lower than the Needed Fire Flow, the fire flow conditions for that node are not satisfied. Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.

• Check the Calculated Residual Pressure. If it is lower than the Residual Pressure Constraint, the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied. Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.

• Check the Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure. If it is lower than the Minimum Zone Pressure Constraint, the fire flow condition for that node is not satisfied. Therefore, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is false.

Note: If you are not concerned about the pressure of a node that is NOT meeting the Minimum Zone Pressure constraint, move this node to another zone. Now, the node will not be analyzed as part of the same zone.

• If you checked the box for Minimum System Pressure Constraint in the Fire Flow Alternative dialog, check to see if the Calculated Minimum System Pressure is lower than the set constraint. If it is, Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints is False.

9.8.4 Manual Fire Flow Scenarios The Manual Fire Flow Scenarios feature will quickly and easily create scenarios in which user-specified Fire Flow Demands are applied to specified junctions. By entering a small amount of input data, you can have the program automatically create a scenario for each individual node. You can then perform a batch run on these scenarios for further comparison or computational analysis.

To set up a Manual Fire Flow Scenario: 1. Click the Analysis pull-down menu, select Scenarios.


2. Highlight the Scenario from which you want the new scenarios to inherit their data. (See the Scenarios topic for more information on scenarios and alternatives.) Click the Scenario Management button, select Add…Manual Fire Flow Scenarios. This opens the Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog.

3. In the Apply Fire Flows By section of the dialog, choose whether the fire flow demands will replace or be added to the existing demands by clicking the corresponding radio button.

4. Click the Select button to choose the junctions for which you want the Fire Flow scenarios to be created. When you are finished, click OK.

5. Enter the fire flow demand for each junction in the Needed Fire Flow column. If all of the junctions require the same fire flow demand, you can perform a Global Edit to change them all at once.

6. Once the above steps have been completed, click OK in the Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog. The program will automatically create a scenario for each junction that was selected in Step 4.

Manual Fire Flow Scenarios Dialog The Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog is separated into three areas:

• Apply Fire Flows By - This area provides you with the following two radio buttons:

− Adding To Baseline Demand - Choosing this option will cause the Manual Fire Flow Demands to be added to the normal demands at the Manual Fire Flow Nodes

− Replacing Baseline Demand. - Choosing this option will cause the Manual Fire Flow Demands to replace the normal demands at the Manual Fire Flow Nodes.

• Manual Fire Flow Nodes - This section of the dialog comprised of a two column table and a Select button.

− Label Column - This column displays the nodes for which a Manual Fire Flow Scenario will be created.

− Needed Fire Flow Column - This column displays the Needed Fire Flow for the corresponding nodes.

− Select Button - Opens the Selection Set dialog, allowing you to add or remove nodes from the table.

• Button Section - The four buttons in this section are:

− OK - Closes the dialog and creates a new scenario for each node that was selected in the Manual Fire Flow Nodes section.

− Cancel - Closes the dialog without saving changes.

− Initialize - After at least one normal Fire Flow Analysis has been calculated, this button will open the Fire Flow dialog. This dialog contains a pulldown menu which displays a list of the Scenarios that have been calculated using a Fire Flow Analysis. The junctions that were included in the initial Fire Flow Analysis will be entered in the Label column, and the calculated Available Fire Flows from the scenario chosen in the Fire Flow dialog will be entered in the Needed Fire Flow column.

− Help - Opens the online help.

Fire Flow Dialog From within the Manual Fire Flow Scenarios dialog, click the Initialize button to open this dialog. This dialog contains a pulldown menu, which displays a list of the Scenarios that have been calculated using a


Fire Flow Analysis. To choose the scenario to initialize from, simply highlight the desired scenario in the pulldown and click the OK button.

9.9 Water Quality Analysis

9.9.1 Age Analysis An age analysis determines how long the water has been in the system and is more of a general water quality indicator than a measurement of any specific quality. To configure for an age analysis:

1. Choose Compute from the Analysis menu or click the GO button.

1 Activate the Extended Period radio button.

2 Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis.

3 Select the Age radio button.

4 Assuming you have not already set up an Age alternative for this scenario (including defining the trace node), go to the Alternatives tab, click the ellipsis (…) or New button next to the Age choice list, and add or edit an Age alternative. To edit an existing alternative, click the Edit button. Enter the appropriate data, and click Close. Rename the alternative to give it a descriptive name. To add a new alternative, click the Add button. Enter a descriptive name into the New Alternative dialog, and click OK. Enter the appropriate data into the Age Alternative Editor, and click Close. Back in the Alternatives tab, choose the desired alternative from the Age Alternative choice list.

5 Return to the Calculation tab and click the GO button.

Note: Water quality analysis can only be performed for extended period simulations.

9.9.2 Constituent Analysis A constituent is any substance, such as chlorine and fluoride, for which the growth or decay can be adequately described through the use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a wall reaction coefficient. A constituent analysis determines the concentration of a constituent at all nodes and links in the system. Constituent analyses can be used to determine chlorine residuals throughout the system under present chlorination schedules, or can be used to determine probable behavior of the system under proposed chlorination schedules. To configure for a constituent analysis:

1. Choose Compute from the Analysis menu or click the GO button.

2. Activate the Extended Period radio button.

3. Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis.

4. Select the Constituent radio button.

5. Assuming you have not already set up a Constituent alternative for this scenario (including the selection of the constituent), go to the Alternatives tab, click the ellipsis (…) or New button next to the Constituent scroll-down list, and add or edit a Constituent alternative. To edit an existing alternative, click the Edit button. Enter the appropriate data, and click Close. Rename the alternative to give it a descriptive name. To add a new alternative, click the Add button. Enter a descriptive name into the New Alternative dialog, and click OK. Enter the appropriate data into the Constituent Alternative Editor, and click Close. Specify the Constituent, which is defined in the Constituent Library and


accessed by clicking the ellipsis (…) button. Back in the Alternatives tab, choose the desired alternative from the Constituent Alternative choice list.

6. Return to the Calculation tab and Click the GO button.


9.9.3 Trace Analysis A trace analysis determines the percentage of the water at all nodes and links in the system. The source is designated as a specific node in the system and is called the trace node. In systems with more than one source, it is common to perform multiple trace analyses using the various trace nodes in successive analyses. The source node and initial traces are specified in the Trace Alternative dialog. To configure for a trace analysis:

1. Choose Compute from the Analysis menu, or click the GO button.

2. Activate the Extended Period radio button.

3. Check the box labeled Water Quality Analysis.

4. Select the Trace radio button.

5. Assuming you have not already set up a Trace alternative for this scenario (including defining the trace node), go to the Alternatives tab, click the ellipsis (…) or New button next to the Trace choice list, and add or edit a trace alternative. Specify the trace node to be used for this analysis and provide the appropriate data. Back in the Alternatives tab, choose the desired alternative from the Trace Alternative choice list.

6. Return to the Calculation tab and click the GO button.


9.10 Calculation Options

9.10.1 Calculation Options Calculations depend on a variety of parameters that may be configured by you.

This program provides defaults for each of the calculation options. If you make changes to the calculation options and decide that you would like to return to the default settings, use the Reset button on the Calculation Options dialog.

The dialog is divided into two groups:

• Hydraulics

• Water Quality

To access the Calculation Options dialog, click the Options button on the Calculation tab of the

Scenario Editor, or select the button and click Options.


9.10.2 Hydraulic Analysis Options The following hydraulic analysis parameters are available for user configuration:

• Use Controls In Steady State Analysis - When the box is checked, Simple Controls will be active during Steady State Analyses.

Note: Logical Controls are not executed during Steady-State Analyses.

• Use Linear Interpolation for Multipoint Pumps -

• Trials - Unitless number that defines the maximum number of iterations to be performed for each hydraulic solution. The default value is 40.

• Accuracy - Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for the iterative solution of the network hydraulic equations. When the sum of the absolute flow changes between successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the absolute flows in all links, and is less than the Accuracy, the solution is said to have converged. The default value is 0.001 and the minimum allowed value for Accuracy is 1.0e-5.

• Emitter Exponent - Emitters are devices associated with junctions that model the flow through a nozzle or orifice. In these situations, the demand (i.e. the flow rate through the emitter) varies in proportion to the pressure at the junction raised to some power. The constant of proportionality is termed the "discharge coefficient". For nozzles and sprinkler heads the exponent on pressure is 0.5 and the manufacturer usually states the value of the discharge coefficient as the flow rate in gpm through the device at a 1 psi pressure drop.

Note: The number of trials specifies the maximum number of iterations to be performed for each time step in an extended period simulation, not the total number of iterations for the entire analysis.

Tip: In most cases, the default values are adequate for the hydraulic analysis. Under special circumstances, the accuracy may need to be adjusted downward. This is necessary when the model converges, yet there are larger than acceptable discrepancies between the total inflow and outflow at individual nodes.

9.10.3 Water Quality Analysis Options The following water quality analysis parameters are available for user configuration:

• Age Tolerance - If the difference between two parcels of water is equal to or less than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to be of equal age.

• Constituent Tolerance - If the difference between two parcels of water is equal to or less than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to possess an equal concentration of the associated constituent.

• Trace Tolerance - If the difference between two parcels of water is equal to or less than the value specified in this field, the parcels are considered to be within the same percentile.

• Set Quality Time Step - Check this box if you want to manually set the water quality time step. By default, this box is not checked and the water quality time step is computed internally by the numerical engine.


• Quality Time Step - Time interval used to track water quality changes throughout the network. By default, this value is computed by the numerical engine and is equivalent to the smallest travel time through any pipe in the system.

9.11 Patterns

9.11.1 Patterns The extended period analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses run against time-variable loads such as sewer inflows, demands, or chemical constituents. Patterns allow you to apply automatic time-variable changes within the system. The most common application of patterns is for residential or industrial loads. Diurnal curves are patterns that relate to the changes in loads over the course of the day, reflecting times when people are using more or less water than average. Most patterns are based on a multiplication factor versus time relationship, whereby a multiplication factor of one represents the base value (which is often the average value).

Using a representative diurnal curve for a residence as illustrated below, we see that there is a peak in the diurnal curve in the morning as people take showers and prepare breakfast, another slight peak around noon, and a third peak in the evening as people arrive home from work and prepare dinner. Throughout the night, the pattern reflects the relative inactivity of the system, with very low flows compared to the average.

Typical Diurnal Curve

Note: This curve is conceptual and should not be construed as representative of any particular network.

There are two basic forms for representing a pattern: stepwise and continuous. A stepwise pattern is one that assumes a constant level of usage over a period of time, and then jumps instantaneously to another level where it remains steady until the next jump. A continuous pattern is one for which several points in the pattern are known and sections in between are transitional, resulting in a smoother pattern. For the continuous pattern in the figure above, the multiplication factor and slope at the start time and end times are the same. This is a continuity that is recommended for patterns that repeat.

Because of the finite time steps used for calculations, this software converts continuous patterns into stepwise patterns for use by the algorithms. In other words for a time step a multiplier is interpolated from


the pattern curve. That multiplier is then used for the duration of the time step, until a new multiplier is selected for the next time step.

Patterns provide a convenient way to define the time variable aspects of system loads.

9.11.2 Pattern Manager Patterns provide an effective means of applying time-variable system demands to the distribution model. The Pattern Manager is split into two windows: The left window displays the 4 types of patterns:

• Hydraulic - This type of pattern can be applied to Junctions or Tanks. Use this pattern type to describe demand or inflow patterns over time.

• Constituent - This type of pattern can be applied to Reservoirs, Tanks, or Junctions. Use this pattern type to describe changes in Constituent Baseline Loads over time.

• Reservoir - This type of pattern can be applied to Reservoirs. Use this pattern type to describe changes in HGL over time, such as that caused by tidal activity or when the reservoir represents a connection to another system where the pressure changes over time.

• Pump - This type of pattern can be applied to Pumps. Use this pattern type to describe changes in the pump’s Relative Speed Factor.

The right window displays all of the patterns for the selected (highlighted) type. The Pattern Manager allows you to do the following:

• Add - Click the Add button. This action opens the Pattern Editor where the specifics of the pattern can be entered.

• Edit - Select the label of the pattern you wish to edit, and click the Edit button. The Fixed pattern cannot be edited.

• Duplicate - Select the label of the pattern you wish to duplicate, and press the Duplicate button. The Fixed pattern cannot be duplicated.

• Delete - Select the label of the pattern you wish to delete, and click the Delete button. The Fixed pattern cannot be deleted.

• Import - Allows you to import a pattern from a text file. Details regarding the necessary format and the import process can be found in the Importing Patterns topic.

Note: In this program, an individual demand node can support multiple demands. Furthermore, each demand can be assigned any hydraulic pattern. This powerful functionality makes it possible to model any type of extended period simulation.

To access the Pattern Manager select Analysis / Patterns from the pull-down menus, or click the ellipsis (…) button next to any pattern choice list.

9.11.3 Pattern Editor A pattern is a series of time step values, each having an associated multiplier value. During an extended period analysis, each time step of the simulation uses the multiplier from the pattern corresponding to that time. If the duration of the simulation is longer than the pattern, the pattern is repeated. The selected multiplier is applied to any baseline load that is associated with the pattern.

Defining Patterns • Label - A required name to uniquely identify the pattern. This name appears in the choice list when


applying patterns to hydraulic demands or constituent source loads.

• Start Time - The first time step in the pattern. The start time format is a standard 24-hour clock. The format is Hour:Minute:Second AM or PM. (eg 12:45:30 PM).

• Starting Multiplier - The multiplier value of the first time step point in your pattern. Any real number can be used for this multiplier (it does not have to be 1.0).

Time Step Points • Time From Start - The amount of time from the Start Time of the pattern to the time step point

being defined.

• Multiplier - The multiplier value associated with the time step point.

Format • Stepwise - The multiplier values are considered to be the average value for the interval between the

specified time and the next time. Patterns using this format will have a "staircase" appearance. Multipliers are set at the specified time and held constant until the next point in the pattern.

• Continuous - The multipliers are considered to be the instantaneous values at a particular time. Patterns using this format will have a "curvilinear" appearance. Multipliers are set at the specified time, and are linearly increased or decreased to the next point in the pattern.

Notes: Patterns must begin and end with the same multiplier value. This is because patterns will be repeated if the duration of the Extended Period Analysis is longer than the pattern duration. In other words, the last point in the pattern is really the start point of the pattern's next cycle.

An Extended Period Analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses for which the boundary conditions of the current time step are calculated from the conditions at the previous time step. This software will automatically convert a continuous pattern format to a stepwise format so that the demands and source concentrations remain constant during a time step.

An individual node can support multiple hydraulic demands. Furthermore, each load can be assigned any hydraulic demand pattern. This powerful functionality makes it easy to combine two or more types of demand patterns (such as residential and institutional) at a single loading node.

Tip: Use the Report button to view or print a graph or detailed report of your pattern.

9.11.4 Importing Patterns New in WaterCAD v5.0 is the ability to import Hydraulic, Constituent, Reservoir, and Pump pattern information from an ASCII tab delimited text file. The file to be imported must be in the following format:

Hour Multiplier (Pattern 1) Multiplier (Pattern 2) Multiplier (Pattern 3) etc. Press the Tab key once between each column. An unlimited number of patterns (of a single type) can be imported from a single text file by simply adding additional columns, following the same format. The first row of the text file is used exclusively for labeling purposes. The first column of the first row is ignored. The value contained in the second column of the first row will be used as the pattern label for the first


pattern, the value contained in the third column of the first row will be used as the pattern label for the second pattern, and so on.

Notes: The time steps do not need to be in chronological order in the text file to be imported. WaterCAD will organize the time steps properly during the import process.

The lowest numbered (earliest) time step will be inserted at hour zero in the newly created pattern. The other time steps will be inserted at the appropriate increment starting from the zero based start time.

The pattern’s starting multiplier and ending multiplier must be identical.

Example: - Pat1 Pat2

0 1.1 1.2

4 1.2 1.3

8 1.3 1.4

12 1.4 1.5

16 1.3 1.4

20 1.2 1.3

24 1.1 1.2

9.12 Logical Controls

9.12.1 Logical Controls Overview • IF Condition 1 AND Condition 2 OR Condition 3 AND Condition 4, etc. where

Condition X is a condition clause

• THEN Action 1 AND Action 2, etc. where Action X is an action clause

• ELSE (Optional) Action 3 AND Action 4, etc. where Action X is an action clause

Note: Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.

9.12.2 Creating a new Logical Control Logical controls greatly increase the amount of control you have over the behavior of the elements in the model.

To create a new Logical Control: 1. Open the Logical Controls Manager window. This manager is accessed by clicking on the Analysis

pulldown and selecting Logical Controls.


2. In the Logical Controls Manager window, click the Control Management button, and select New. This will open the Logical Controls editor window.

3. Now we must define the condition(s) that will trigger the control, and the action(s) that will be performed when the control is triggered. To add a condition to the control, click on the New button. This opens the New Logical Condition dialog.

4. In the New Logical Condition window, you can specify whether the condition will be Simple (single condition) or Composite (multiple conditions). Then, define the condition type: element demand, element hydraulic grade, element pressure, system demand, clock time, or time from start. The input data requirements change depending on the condition type that is chosen. Click OK when you are finished. This will return you to the Logical Controls editor. (See the New Logical Condition Dialog topic for more details.)

5. Now that the condition has been set, it needs to be linked to an action. To add an action, click the New button to open the New Logical Action Dialog.

6. In the New Logical Action dialog, you can specify whether the action will be Simple (single action) or Composite (multiple actions). Then, define the element you want the action to apply to. The input data requirements change depending on the action type that is chosen. Click OK when you are finished. This will return you to the Logical Controls editor.

Tip: Use the optional ELSE field to cause actions to be performed when the conditions in the control are not being met. For example, if you are creating a control that states, "If the level in Tank 1 is less than 5 ft., Then turn Pump 1 On", use an ELSE action to turn the pump off if the tank level is above 5 ft.

Notes: Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.

When defining a logical control, you have the option to share conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect all controls that reference that condition or action.

Example To create a logical control in which a pump (PMP-1) is turned on when the level in a tank (T-1) falls below a specified value (5 ft.) or when the system demands exceed a certain level (5,000 gpm):

• Conditions - Because this control needs to be triggered by multiple conditions, a Composite Condition is chosen. In this instance, the Operator OR is chosen to link the Conditions, because the pump should be turned on if either condition is true.

− IF Condition - {"T-1" Level < 5 ft.}

− OR Condition - {"System Demand" > 5,000 gpm}

• Actions - Because this control has a single desired outcome if one of the conditions is met, a Simple Action is chosen. The first action in a Logical Control is always linked to the Condition(s) by a logical THEN statement. In this instance, an ELSE action will also be used, to keep the pump off if neither of the conditions is true.

− THEN Action - {"PMP-1" Status = On}


− ELSE Action - {"PMP-1" Status = Off}

The finished logical control looks like this:

IF {"T-1" Level < 5 ft.} OR {"System Demand" > 5,000 gpm} THEN {"PMP-1" Status = On} ELSE {"PMP-1" Status = Off}

This example illustrates the power of using Logical Controls. To achieve the same functionality using Simple Controls, you would need to create four separate controls - one to turn the pump on if the tank level is below the specified value, one to turn the pump off if the tank level is above a specified value, one to turn the pump on if the system demand is greater than the specified value, and one to turn the pump off if the system demand is less than the specified value.

9.12.3 Logical Controls Operation Logical Controls are applied after the initial hydraulic state of the network has been computed (i.e., after time zero). The controls are evaluated over the course of a hydraulic simulation as follows:

1. The rules are evaluated at a sub-hydraulic time step equal to 1/10 of the normal hydraulic time step (e.g., if hydraulics are updated every hour, then rules are evaluated every 6 minutes).

2. Over this sub-hydraulic time step, clock time and water levels in storage tanks are updated, based on the last set of pipe flows computed.

3. If a rule's conditions are satisfied, then its actions are added to a list. If an action conflicts with one for the same element already on the list, then the action from the rule with the higher priority stays on the list and the other is removed. If the priorities are the same then the original action stays on the list.

4. If the action list is not empty, then those actions are taken. If this causes the status or settings of one or more elements to change, then a new hydraulic solution is computed.

5. The action list is cleared and the next sub-hydraulic time step is checked.

Notes: Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.


9.12.4 Logical Control Manager The Logical Control Manager is the main work center for Logical Controls. The Logical Control Manager manages all Logical Controls, Logical Conditions, and Logical Actions in the system. The Logical Control Manager allows you to define controls using advanced IF, AND, and OR condition logic, which can trigger any number of THEN or optional ELSE actions.

The Logical Control Manager dialog consists of the following three tabs:

• Controls Tab - The Controls tab allows the user to manage all Logical Controls defined in the system.

• Conditions Tab - Conditions allow you to define the condition that must be met prior to taking an action.

• Actions Tab - Actions allow you to define what should be done to an element in the system in response to an associated control condition.


Note: Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a tooltip which displays the condition(s) and action(s) that make up that control.

Controls Tab The Controls tab allows the user to manage all Logical Controls defined in the system. Logical Controls are made up of an IF Condition, a THEN Action, and an optional ELSE Action. Controls have a non-editable application-provided ID (e.g. "LC01") and an optional Priority for resolving potential conflicts between logical controls. The Controls Tab is divided into 4 sections:

• The pane in the center of the dialog is the Controls List. This list displays a list of all Logical Controls defined in the system.

• Located above the Controls List is a toolbar with the following buttons:

− New - Opens the Logical Control dialog, which allows you to create a new Logical Control.

− Edit - Opens the Logical Control dialog, which allows you to Edit the highlighted Control.

− Delete - Deletes the highlighted Control. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

− Find - Opens the Find Control Dialog, which allows you to find a particular Control based on a variety of criteria.

− Report - Generates a summary of the highlighted control, listing the ID, Conditions, Actions, and elements incorporated into the control.

• Located along the left of the Controls List are two command buttons:

− Control Management - Offers a menu of options for creating, editing, and managing Logical Controls. Provides the same functionality as the toolbar, as described above.

− Control Sets - Opens the Logical Control Sets Alternative dialog, which lists the various Control Sets you have created. In addition to listing the control sets by name, the number of controls in each set is also displayed. The following options are available in this dialog:

• Add - Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set Editor dialog. From this window, you can add previously created Logical Controls to the new control set.

• Edit - Opens the Logical Control Set Editor dialog, which allows you to Edit the highlighted control set.

• Duplicate - Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set Editor to allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.

• Delete - Deletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

• Rename - Allows you to rename the highlighted control set.

• Report - Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID, Conditions, Actions, and elements for all of the Logical Controls contained within the control set.

• Located below the Controls List is a Summary pane that provides a description of the highlighted control.



Conditions Tab Conditions allow you to define the condition that must be met prior to taking an action. The Conditions tab provides a list of all Conditions defined in the system. There are two types of conditions: Simple Conditions and Composite Conditions. The Conditions Tab is divided into 3 sections:

• The pane in the middle of the dialog is the Conditions List. The Conditions List displays a list of all Logical Conditions defined in the system. The list contains four columns: ID (the application defined id, e.g. "C01" for Simple, "CC01" for Composite), Type (Simple or Composite), Description, and References (Logical Control references).

• Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:

− New - Opens the New Logical Condition dialog, which allows you to create a new Logical Condition.

− Edit - Depending on whether a Simple or Composite condition is highlighted, this button opens the Simple Logical Condition or Composite Logical Condition dialog, which allows you to Edit the highlighted Condition.

− Delete - Deletes the highlighted Condition. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

− Find - Opens the Find Logical Condition dialog, which allows you to find a particular Action based on a variety of criteria.

− Report - Generates a summary of the highlighted condition.

• Located below the Conditions List is a Summary pane that provides a description of the highlighted condition.


Actions Tab Actions allow you to define what should be done to an element in the system in response to an associated control condition. The Actions tab provides a list of all Actions defined in the system. There are two types of Actions: Simple Actions and Composite Actions. Actions have an application-provided non-editable ID (e.g. "A01" for Simple, "AA01" for Composite). The Actions Tab is divided into three sections:

• The Actions List displays a list of all Logical Actions defined in the system. The list contains four columns: ID (the application defined ID, e.g. "A01" for Simple, "AA01" for Composite), Type (Simple or Composite), Description, and References (Logical Control references).

• Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:

− New - Opens the New Logical Action dialog, which allows you to create a new Logical Action.

− Edit - Depending on whether a Simple or Composite Action is highlighted, this button opens the Simple Logical Action or Composite Logical Action dialog, which allows you to Edit the highlighted Action.

− Delete - Deletes the highlighted Action. You will be prompted to confirm this action.


− Find - Opens the Find Logical Action dialog, which allows you to find a particular Action based on a variety of criteria.

− Report - Generates a summary of the highlighted Action.

• Located below the Actions List is a Summary pane that provides a description of the highlighted action.

9.12.5 Control Dialogs

Logical Control Dialog This dialog allows you to edit or create a Logical Control consisting of an IF Condition, a THEN Action, and an optional ELSE Action. The Logical Control dialog is split into four areas:

• Control Logic - This area of the dialog is where you specify the condition(s) and action(s) to create a Logical Control. It consists of a pulldown bar and three buttons for each of the three components of a logical control:

− IF Condition - The pulldown list allows you to create a new condition (<NEW>), find an existing condition (<FIND>), or choose from a list of conditions that have already been created.

− THEN Action - The pulldown list allows you to create a new action (<NEW>), find an existing action (<FIND>), or choose from a list of actions that have already been created.

− ELSE Action (optional) - The ELSE Action is used when the conditions for the control are not met. To specify an ELSE Action, click the checkbox to activate the pulldown list. The pulldown menu allows you to create a new action (<NEW>), find an existing action (<FIND>), or choose from a list of actions that have already been created.

In addition, there are three buttons next to each pulldown menu:

− New - Opens the New Logical Condition dialog or the New Logical Action dialog.

− Properties - Opens the corresponding editor for the control component that is selected in the pulldown bar. (Depending on the highlighted control, this button will open the Simple Logical Condition editor, Composite Logical Condition editor, Simple Logical Action editor, or the Composite Logical Action editor)

− Find - Opens the Find Condition or Find Action dialog.

• Priority - This area of the dialog is optional. To set a priority for the control being created, click the checkbox to activate the priority pulldown. You can set a priority of 1-5, 1 being the highest priority. If multiple controls meet a certain condition and they have conflicting actions, the control with the highest priority will be used.

Notes: At calculation time, the priority is used to determine the Logical Control to apply when multiple controls require that conflicting actions be taken. Logical Controls with identical priorities will be prioritized based on the order they appear in the Logical Control Set alternative. A rule without a priority value always has a lower priority than one with a value. For two rules with the same priority value, the rule that appears first is given the higher priority.


Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a tooltip which displays the condition(s) and action(s) that make up that control.


Note: When creating a new condition or action for a new control, the condition and action input fields will be initialized with the data used in the last condition or action that was created.

• Description - This area of the dialog is preset with a default description. There is an option to change the default description. To do so, click the checkbox to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box.

• Summary - This area of the dialog displays a verbose description of the control.

Note: Once created, the Logical Control will be assigned an application generated ID (e.g. "LC04").

9.12.6 Condition Dialogs

New Logical Condition Dialog • Simple Condition

• Composite Condition

Note: When defining a logical control, you have the option to share conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect all controls that reference that condition or action.

Simple Logical Condition Dialog The Simple Logical Condition dialog is split into three areas:

• Simple Condition - The input fields for a simple condition change depending on the condition type that is selected in the condition Type field. The Simple Condition Types and the corresponding input data are as follows:

− Element - This will create a condition based on specified attributes at a selected element. The fields available when this condition type is selected are as follows:

• Element - The Element field allows you to specify which element the condition will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this element. The pulldown displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the Ellipsis (…) button, which opens the Single Element Selection Dialog, and the Select From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical Drawing view.

• Attribute - This field displays the available attributes for the element type currently specified in the Element field.

− Pressure Junctions – The following attributes are available for use when a Junction is chosen in the Element field:

• Demand – This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified demand at the corresponding junction. (Eg. If J-1 has a demand…)

• Hydraulic Grade – : This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding junction.


(Eg. If J-1 has a hydraulic grade of…)

• Pressure - This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified pressure at the corresponding junction. (Eg If J-1 has a pressure of…)

− Pumps – The following attributes are available for use when a Pump is chosen in the Element field:

• Discharge – This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the corresponding pump. (Eg. If PMP-1 has a discharge of…)

• Setting – This attribute is used to create a condition based on the Relative Speed Factor of the corresponding pump. (Eg. If PMP-1 has a relative speed factor of 1.5…)

• Status - This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (On or Off) of the corresponding pump. (Eg If PMP-1 is On…)

Note: Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump.

− Tanks – The following attributes are available for use when a Tank is chosen in the Element field:

• Demand – This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified demand at the corresponding tank. For tanks, this demand can represent an inflow or outflow. (Eg. If T-1 has a demand…)

• Hydraulic Grade – : This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding tank. (Eg. If T-1 has a hydraulic grade of…)

• Pressure – This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified pressure at the corresponding tank. (Eg. If T-1 has a pressure of…)

• Level – This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified water level at the corresponding tank. (Eg. If the water in T-1 is at a level of…)

• Time to Drain – This attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of time required for the tank to drain. (Eg. If T-1 drains in X hours…)

• Time to Fill - This attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of time required for the tank to fill. (Eg. If T-1 fills in X hours…)

− Reservoirs – The following attributes are available for use when a Reservoir is chosen in the Element field:

• Demand – This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified demand at the corresponding reservoir. For reservoirs, this demand can represent an inflow or outflow. (Eg. If R-1 has a demand…)


• Hydraulic Grade – : This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding Reservoir. (Eg. If R-1 has a hydraulic grade of…)

• Pressure - This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified pressure at the corresponding reservoir. (Eg. If R-1 has a pressure of…)

− Pipes - The following attributes are available for use when a Pipe is chosen in the Element field:

• Discharge – This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the corresponding pipe. (Eg. If P-1 has a discharge of…)

• Status - This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Open or Closed) of the corresponding pipe. (Eg. If P-1 is Open…)

− Valves - The following attributes are available for use when a Valve is chosen in the Element field:

• Discharge – This attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the corresponding valve. (Eg. If PRV-1 has a discharge of…)

• Setting – This attribute is used to create a condition based on the setting of the corresponding valve. The type of setting will change depending on the type of valve that is chosen. The valves and their associated setting types are as follows:

− PRV – Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV. (Eg. If PRV-1 has a pressure of…)

− PSV – Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV. (Eg. If PSV-1 has a pressure of…)

− PBV – Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV. (Eg. If PBV-1 has a pressure of…)

− FCV – Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the PRV. (Eg. If FCV-1 has a discharge of…)

− TCV - Choosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a condition based on a specified headloss coefficient at the PRV. (Eg. If TCV-1 has a headloss of…)

• Status – This attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Closed or Inactive) of the corresponding valve. (Eg. If PRV-1 is Inactive…)

Note: The Setting attribute is not available when a GPV is selected in the Element field.

− System Demand - This will create a condition based on the demands for the entire system. The fields available when this condition type is selected are as follows:


− Clock Time - This will create a condition based on the clock time during an Extended period Simulation. If the Extended Period Simulation is for a period longer than 24 hours, this condition will be triggered every day at the specified time.

− Time From Start - This will create a condition based on the amount of time that has passed since the beginning of an Extended Period Simulation. The following fields are available when this condition type is selected:

• Operator - This field allows you to specify the relationship between the Attribute and the target value for that attribute. The choices include Greater Than (>), Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=), Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).

• Target Value - This field’s label will change depending on the Attribute that is chosen. The value entered here is used in conjunction with the operator that is chosen to determine if the condition has been met.

• Description - This area of the dialog is preset with a default description. There is an option to change the default description. To do so, click the checkbox to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the description field supports the following "expandable masks":

%# ID

%e Element

%a Attribute

%o Operator

%v Value

%u Unit

Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various condition components.

Note: Click on the description combobox to select one of the predefined masks.

• Summary - This area of the dialog displays an automatically updated preview of the expanded description.

Composite Logical Condition Dialog The Composite Logical Condition dialog is divided into three areas:

• Composite Condition - The Composite Condition area of the dialog is comprised of a two column table and two buttons. The buttons are as follows:

− Insert - Adds a new row to the Condition list

− Delete - Deletes the highlighted row from the Condition list

The table contains two columns, as follows:

− Operator - This column allows you to choose the way in which the related Condition logic will be evaluated. The available choices are If, And, and Or.


Notes: The first condition in the list will use the If Operator. Any additional conditions will allow you to choose between And and Or.

Any combination of AND and OR clauses can be used in a rule. When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher precedence than AND. Therefore, "IF A or B and C" is equivalent to "IF (A or B) and C". If the interpretation was meant to be IF A or (B and C), this can be expressed using two Logical Controls: Logical Control 1: "IF A THEN ..." and Logical Control 2: " IF B AND C THEN ..."

− Condition - The pulldown list allows you to create a new condition (<NEW>), find an existing condition (<FIND>), or choose a condition that was already created beforehand. Choosing New will open the Simple Logical Condition dialog, and choosing Find will open the Find Logical Condition dialog.


%# ID

%v Value

Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various condition components.



9.12.7 Action Dialogs

New Logical Action Dialog The New Logical Action dialog allows you to define the type of Action to be created. The two radio buttons at the top of the dialog are used to specify whether the Action to be created is a Simple Action or a Composite Action.

The appearance of this dialog will change depending on which action type is selected.

• Simple Action

• Composite Action

Note: When defining a logical control, you have the option to share conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect all controls that reference that condition or action.


Simple Logical Action Dialog The Simple Logical Action dialog is divided into three areas:

• Simple Action - This area of the dialog displays the following fields:

− Element - The Element field allows you to specify which element the action will be based upon and provides three methods of choosing this element. The pulldown displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the Ellipsis (…) button, which opens the Single Element Selection Dialog, and the Select From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical Drawing view.

− Attribute - This field displays the available attributes for the element type specified in the Element field. Not all attributes are available for all element types. The available attributes include:

• Status – This attribute is used to change the status of a pipe, pump, or valve when the related condition(s) is (are) met. The available choices are dependant on the element type.

• Setting - This attribute is used to change the settings of a pump or valve when the related condition(s) is (are) met. The setting type varies depending on the type of element.

Notes: Pipes can only utilize the Status Attribute, Pumps and all Valves except for the GPV can utilize either the Status or Setting Attribute. GPVs can only use the Status Attribute.

For all valves except for the GPV, there is no explicit "Active" status with which to base a control upon- the status choices are "Inactive" or "Closed". After a control sets a valve to "Inactive" or "Closed", to reactivate the valve another control must be created with a "Setting" attribute. This is because a valve cannot simply be set to "Active", but must have specific input data to work with.

For GPVs, there is no "Inactive" setting. GPVs can only be set to "Active" or "Closed". If the GPV is not closed, the valve will always produce the headlosses associated with it through the Head-Discharge Points table.

− Operator - The operator for Logical Actions is always Equal To (=).

− Attribute Value - This field’s label will change depending on the Attribute that is chosen. Depending on the element type and the Attribute that was chosen, the input field may also change to a pulldown list, which contains the possible settings for that element. Not all settings are available for all element types.

Note: Pipes can be set to Open or Closed, Pumps can be set to On, Off, or have their relative speed factors increase or decrease. GPVs can be set to Active or Closed. All other valves can be set to Inactive, Closed, or have their respective settings changed, depending on the Valve type.


%# ID

%e Element


%a Attribute

%o Operator

%v Value (and Unit, if applicable)

Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various control components.



Composite Logical Action Dialog The composite Logical Action dialog is separated into three areas:

• Composite Action - The Composite Action area of the dialog is comprised of a single column table and two buttons. The Table contains a list of the Actions to be used. Each row is a pulldown list that allows you to create a new action (<NEW>), find an existing action (<FIND>), or choose an action that was already created beforehand. Selecting <NEW> will open the Simple Action dialog, and selecting <FIND> will open the Find Action dialog.

− Insert - Adds a new row to the Action list

− Delete - Deletes the highlighted row from the Action list.


%# ID

%v Value

Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various control components.



Note: Composite Logical Actions consist of multiple Simple Logical Actions. These actions are linked with an AND statement.

9.12.8 Finding Controls and Control Components

Find Logical Control Dialog • Filter Controls By - This area of the dialog contains four combo boxes that allow you to filter the


list of Logical Controls that is displayed in the Controls area of the dialog.

− Condition - This pulldown allows you to display only the Logical Controls that reference the condition that is chosen here. In addition, you have two additional choices: <any>, which is the default setting and applies no Condition filters, and <Find>, which opens the Find Condition dialog.

− Condition Element - This pulldown lists the Elements that are referenced in all of the Conditions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog will cause only the controls that contain a condition that references the selected element to appear in the Controls area of the dialog. Choosing <any>, the default setting, will apply no Condition Element filters.

− Action - Allows you to display only the Logical Controls that reference the action that is chosen here. In addition, you have two additional choices: <any>, which is the default setting and applies no Action filters, and <Find>, which opens the Find Action dialog.

− Action Element - This pulldown lists the Elements that are referenced by Actions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog will cause only the controls that contain an Action that references the selected element to appear in the Controls area of the dialog. Choosing <any>, the default setting, will apply no Action Element filters.

• Controls - This area of the dialog displays all of the Logical Controls that match the current filter logic in the current project.

Find Logical Condition Dialog • Filter Controls By - This area of the dialog contains two combo boxes, which allow you to filter the

list of Conditions that is displayed in the Conditions area of the dialog.

− Type - This pulldown allows you to filter by Simple Conditions, Composite Conditions, or no Type filter (<any>).

− Element- This pulldown lists the Elements that are referenced in all of the Conditions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog will cause only the Conditions that reference the selected element to appear in the Conditions area of the dialog. Choosing <any>, the default setting, will apply no Condition Element filters. Choosing <System> will cause only the system type conditions to be displayed.

• Conditions - This area of the dialog displays all of the Logical Conditions that match the current filter logic in the current project.

Find Logical Action Dialog • Filter Controls By - This area of the dialog contains two pulldowns that allow you to filter the list of

Actions that is displayed in the Actions area of the dialog.

− Type - This pulldown allows you to filter by Simple Actions, Composite Actions, or no Type filter (<any>).

− Element- This pulldown lists the Elements that are referenced in all of the Actions in the current project. Choosing an element in this dialog will cause only the Actions that reference the selected element to appear in the Actions area of the dialog. Choosing <any>, the default setting, will apply no Action Element filters.

• Actions - This area of the dialog displays all of the Logical Actions that match the current filter logic in the current project.


9.12.9 Logical Control Sets

Logical Control Sets Alternative The Logical Control Sets Dialog allows you to create, modify and manage Logical Control Sets. Logical Control Sets are a way to organize your logical controls, and also provide the means to use different logical controls in different scenarios. The following options are available in this dialog:

− Add - Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog. From this window, you can add previously created Logical Controls to the new control set.

− Edit - Opens the Logical Control Set editor dialog, which allows you to Edit the highlighted control set.

− Duplicate - Prompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.

− Delete - Deletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

− Rename - Allows you to rename the highlighted control set.

− Report - Generates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID, Conditions, Actions, and elements for all of the Logical Controls contained within the control set.

Notes: Priority is based upon the order that the controls appear in this dialog. The first control in the control set has the highest priority, and so on. Any control with a set priority will overrule any control with no set priority.

Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a tooltip which displays the condition(s) and action(s) that make up that control.

9.13 Active Topology

9.13.1 Active Topology WaterCAD v5’s new Active Topology feature allows you to create alternatives in which selected elements are removed from the drawing view. While these elements are in the Inactive state, they are not evaluated in network calculations. This ability allows you to easily create before and after scenarios for proposed construction projects and test the redundancy of existing networks.

While elements are Inactive, they are not included in any hydraulic equations. Inactive elements are also not evaluated when generating Contour Plots, and are not available for inclusion while generating Profiles. Inactive elements do not appear in the main drawing pane, in the Aerial View window, or in either of the Plan View types. When generating Project Inventory reports, Element Details reports, or Element Results reports, Inactive Elements are not included.

Inactive Elements will not appear in the corresponding Tabular Reports, unless the Include Inactive Topology option is toggled on. The default setting does not Include Inactive Elements. Inactive Elements are still available for inclusion in Selection Sets.

Any changes made to the Active Topology are applied to the Active Topology Alternative associated with the current scenario, and an unlimited number of Active Topology Alternatives can be created. See the Active Topology Alternative topic for more information.


9.13.2 Active Topology Selection Dialog • Inactive Elements Pane - This pane displays a list of the elements, which are inactive for the

current scenario. Elements in this list are not visible in the drawing view and are not included in calculations.

• Button Section - The button section of the dialog consists of three buttons which allow you to choose which elements are included in the Inactive Elements Pane:

− Select From Drawing - Clicking this button brings you back to the drawing view to allow you to graphically choose the elements that you want to deactivate. While in this mode, clicking the right mouse button opens a menu with the following options:

• Done - Select Done when you are finished selecting elements to bring you back to the Active Topology Selection Dialog.

• Add - This option is the default mode when you click the Select From Drawing button. Left-clicking elements while in this mode selects (highlights) elements. Selected (Highlighted) elements will be added to the Inactive Elements list.

• Remove - While in this mode, left-clicking elements de-selects them. Elements that are not selected will not be added to the Inactive Elements list.

Notes: Selecting a node element to become Inactive will also select all adjacent pipes to become Inactive. This is because all pipes must end at a node.

In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu command "Repeat" to re-open the Active Topology Selection Dialog.

− Select Custom - Clicking this button opens a Selection Set-type dialog. Elements in the left pane are Active, and elements in the right pane are Inactive. All of the normal Selection Set functionality is available, including Filtering and Element Type sorting.

− Clear Selection - Removes all elements from the Inactive Elements Pane, thereby causing all elements to become Active in the current scenario.

To access the Active Topology Selection Dialog, click the Active Topology button. Alternatively, select Analysis / Active Topology from the pull-down menus.


Chapter 10

GA Optimization and Calibration

10.1 Darwin Calibration Overview The WaterCAD Darwin Calibrator provides a history of your calibration attempts, lets you use a manual approach to calibration, supports multiple field data sets, brings the speed and efficiency of genetic algorithms to calibrating your water system, and presents several calibration candidates for you to consider, rather than just one solution. Darwin Calibrator lets you set up a series of Base Calibrations, which can have numerous Child Calibrations that inherit settings from their parent Base Calibrations.

Note: Inheritance is not persistent. If you change the Base Calibration, the change does not ripple down to the Child Calibrations.

Use Base and Child Calibrations to establish a history of your calibration trials to help you derive a list of optimized solutions for your water system.

To use calibration manager, click Analysis\Darwin Calibrator.

1. Enter field data. Click the Field Data button to view, add, edit, and delete sets of field data that you use to calibrate your water model.

2. Create groups that define what attributes of your model you want to adjust. Click Groups.

3. Choose the options that define how you are evaluating your model. Click Options.

4. Right-click in the calibrations area to add a Base Calibration, or click New Base Calibration.

10.2 Darwin Calibrator

10.2.1 Darwin Calibrator Darwin Calibrator lets you adjust your model to better match the actual behavior of the water distribution system. This feature lets you make manual adjustments on the model as well as adjustments using genetic algorithm optimization.

220 Chapter 10 – GA Optimization and Calibration

Before you can run the Darwin Calibrator, you must set up your calibration parameters (Darwin Calibrator Overview).

After you define the parameters of your calibration, the Darwin Calibrator can be used to calibrate your water model manually and/or by using genetic algorithm optimization.

The Darwin Calibrator dialog box has three distinct components:

− The Calibrations area, which contains the list of base and child calibrations you have tried.

− The Calibration Groups area, which contains tabs containing the groups you set up, including Roughness, Demand, Status, and Field data tabs.

− The Calibration Solutions area, which contains the solutions calculated by your Manual or Optimized calibrations.

To open the Darwin Calibrator, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator.

10.2.2 New Calibration To start a new calibration trial, click the New or New Base buttons. If a Base Calibration already exists, you can also choose to add a new Child Calibration.

− Base/Child Calibration – Base and Child Calibrations record a history of the calibrations you try. The Base and Child relationship work to help you remember the workflow or route you have used to test your calibrations.

− Optimized Calibration – Use a GA (Genetic Algorithm) Optimized Calibration if you want WaterCAD to efficiently process and evaluate numerous trial calibrations of your water system. You can set the Optimized Calibration to deliver several solutions for you to review.

− Manual Calibration – Use a Manual Calibration if you want to test fitness by adjusting Roughness, Demand, or Status manually. If you have specific solutions in mind, Manual Calibration might let you quickly narrow-down or refine the number and measure of adjustments before you use the Genetic Algorithm.

− Label – Enter a label for the calibration you are setting up.

− OK/Cancel – Click OK to Add the new calibration or Cancel to exit without adding the new Calibration.

To create a new calibration, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator and click the New or New Base/Child Calibration buttons.

10.2.3 Optimized Calibration Genetic-Algorithm Optimized Calibration provides the following tabs:

− Roughness

− Demand

− Status

− Field Data


− Options

− Notes

Roughness/Demand Tabs The Roughness, Demand, and Status tabs display the groups you added when setting up your Calibration Adjustment Groups (Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog). If a tab is empty, then you did not create a group for the condition represented by that tab.

− Group – Displays the name of the group.

− Operation – From, the drop-down list, select the operation you want the calibration to perform.

Note: Try to choose an increment that gives the least number of possible alternatives. You may need to decrease the range between your upper and lower limits to do this.

− Minimum/Maximum/Increment – Enter the minimum and maximum values that you want the Genetic Algorithm to use as boundaries when calculating fitness solutions. Set the increment as the intervals at which you want the GA to test.

Status Tab Use the status tab to see the Initial Status of the Elements listed, whether pipes are open or closed.

Field Data The Field Data tab displays all the Field Data Sets you have entered for the calibration. Check the box next to the name of the Field Data Sets you want to use for the calibration trial. Field Data Sets that have unchecked boxes next to them will not be used to test fitness when you click Go or Compute.

Options Use the Options tab to refine how WaterCAD applies the Genetic Algorithm (GA) to your Optimized calibration trials.

Note: Larger values for maximum trials and non-improvement generations will make the optimization run longer. You may want to start with fairly low numbers and then gradually increase the numbers in subsequent runs as you want to ensure better solutions. If a run seems to be taking long time, you may click the Stop button to stop the optimization.

− Reset – Click Reset to restore the software default values for the Darwin Calibration Options

− Advanced – Click Advanced to access more Optimized Calibration options.

− Fitness Tolerance – Set the precision with which you want the Optimized Calibration to calculate fitness. As with many of these settings, you should determine a tolerance that balances accuracy and speed for your water models. Fitness Tolerance works in conjunction with Non-improvement Generations.

− Maximum Trials – Set the maximum number of calibration trials you want the Optimized Calibration to process before stopping.


− Non-improvement Generations – Set the number of maximum number of generations you want the GA to process without calculating an improved fitness. If the Optimized Calibration makes this number of calculations without finding an improvement in fitness that is better than the defined Fitness Tolerance, the calibration will stop. Non-improvement Generations works in conjunction with Fitness Tolerance.

− Solutions to Keep – Set the number of fitness solutions that you want to keep. Rather than presenting you with only one solution, WaterCAD presents you with a customizable number of solutions, so you can review them manually.

Notes Type any notes that you want associated with the calibration.

10.2.4 Manual Calibration Manual Calibration provides the following tabs:

− Roughness

− Demand

− Status

− Field Data

− Notes

Roughness/Demand/Status Tabs The Roughness, Demand, and Status tabs display the groups you added when setting up your Calibration Adjustment Groups (Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog). If a tab is empty, then you did not create a group for the condition represented by that tab.

− Group – Displays the name of the group.

− Operation – From, the drop-down list, select the operation you want the calibration to perform.

− Value – Enter the value you want to use with the Operation you select for the Group.

Field Data The Field Data tab displays all the Field Data Sets you have entered for the calibration. Check the box next to the name of the Field Data Sets you want to use for the calibration trial. Field Data Sets that have unchecked boxes next to them will not be used to test fitness when you click Go or Compute.

Notes Type any notes that you want associated with the calibration.

10.2.5 Calibrations The calibrations data window shows all the Base and Child Calibrations you have tried. The Name of the calibration displays along with the fitness calculated for that calibration. 0 is an ideal, perfect fitness and lower numbers indicate fitnesses that rank better than higher numbers.


Note: After you make changes to a calibration, you need to click Go or right-click and select Compute to recalculate the Fitness.

If you change any calibration options, the fitness values will be different and should not be directly compared to calibration runs that used different options.

Right-click to Add a new Base or Child calibration or to Compute, Rename, or Delete an existing calibration.

10.2.6 Calibration Solutions The solutions data window shows solutions for the Optimized or Manual calibration you select in the Calibrations data window.

Note: A green square displays next to solutions created with the current Calibration Options. You can compare the results for solutions marked with green squares. If you change the Calibration Options, previously calculated solutions display with a gray square. Solutions with a gray square cannot be directly compared to solutions with a green square.

− Solution Drop-down List – For Manual Optimizations, this drop-down list contains one solution based on your Calibration. For Darwin Calibrations, the solution drop-down list displays the most favorable number of solutions, based on fitness, for the selected Calibration. The number of solutions that display here depends on what you set in the Solutions to Keep field of the Options tab (Optimized Calibration ). Select the Solution you want to see from the drop-down list and it displays in the data window.

Note: Any settings you made in the solution tree-view remain when you switch solutions, which better enables you to compare solutions.

− Roughness/Demand/Status Adjustments – Expand the tree-view to display the adjustments for any Roughness or Demand Groups, or the Status of any pipes you set up in your Adjustment Groups (Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog). Original values and values adjusted by the Manual or Optimized Calibration are displayed.

− HGL/Flow Observations – Expand the tree-view to display the simulated HGL/flow against the observations you recorded in your Field Data, and the difference between the observed and simulated values.

− Export to Scenario – Click the Export to Scenario button to export the currently selected Calibration to the water flow model. This opens the Export Calibration to Scenario dialog box (Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog).

− Copy to Clipboard – Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents of the Solutions data window to the clipboard. From the Windows Clipboard, you can paste the solution data into other Windows programs, like a word processor or text editor.

− Report – Click the Report button to display a print preview of the solutions data window.

− Plot – Click Plot button to see a graph of your observed data sets versus the HGL correlation between the Simulated and Observed HGL.


10.2.7 Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog Use the Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog to apply the results of your Optimized Calibration or Manual Calibration to your water model.

To use the Selection Set dialog box, after you have calculated calibrations for your model, click the Export to Scenario button in the solutions data window of the Darwin Calibrator dialog box.

10.2.8 GA-Optimized Calibration Tips Darwin Calibrator employs a powerful competent genetic algorithm search method based on the principles of natural evolution and biological reproduction. This kind of search algorithm is well suited to optimization of problems of a non-convex and multiple local-optimal solution nature. Calibration of a hydraulic model falls into this problem category and, as a result, a GA optimization based search tool such as Darwin Calibrator is a sound choice for hydraulic model calibration.

Despite all the good features of GA there are, however, some issues to consider:

• A solution is fitter only in relation to other known solutions and, consequently, a GA has no test for true optimality. As a GA only knows the best solution relative to others, a GA has no precise rule for when to stop. This means that heuristic methods must be used to determine whether to stop a GA run. In Darwin Calibrator you can set a GA run to stop either by: • Clicking Stop

• Setting a maximum number of trial solutions

• Setting a maximum number of non-improvement generations, whereby if the fitness of the best solution does not improve by more than a specified tolerance in a set number of generations, then the GA stops

• A GA is a non-deterministic method that relies to a certain extent on its initial random population (starting locations in the solution space). Thus, each GA run performed may produce different solutions. (If the user keeps all GA parameters and fitness settings the same, the method is deterministic and will produce identical solutions every time.) Given the fact that a GA has no true test for optimality, after stopping a GA and producing a particular result, there is always the possibility that if you run the GA again you may find a better solution. In fact, it is good practice to run a GA a number of times, each time modifying something about the GA run (e.g., GA parameters, fitness weightings, or adjustment group settings), in order to produce another set of potentially better results. At a minimum, the random number seed should be changed for each individual run so that the GA search initiates differently and therefore concludes differently.

• The GA calculates fitness of each trial solution according to the defined objectives for the optimization problem. GA only uses objective means to decide what constitutes a fit solution, and what constitutes a less fit solution. The GA has no way of subjectively assessing a solution other than the methods (weightings) built into the definition of the fitness calculation. The best solution found by a GA shouldn’t be blindly accepted as being correct. To any single optimization problem there are likely to be many solutions that closely match the required objectives. Due to the fact that the GA has no concept of what constitutes a fit solution, other than its performance against the defined objectives, the GA may produce solutions that are in practical terms nonsense, and therein subsists a very important point: The GA cannot think for the engineer, it can only search the combination of choices that are presented to it. If the engineer doesn’t provide the GA with high quality data and enough or sufficiently flexible options to consider, then the GA may not be able to find a satisfactory solution. Conversely if the GA is presented with too many possibilities to try (e.g., in Darwin Calibrator, if the user defines an excessively large adjustment group ranges combined with a small adjustment increments and a large number of adjustment groups), then the efficiency of the GA search is reduced, and the likelihood that the GA will find the "correct" answer is also greatly reduced. GA is a highly sophisticated search technique, but despite all of its great features, GA still must be used with a degree


of engineering judgment and skill. Only then can the engineer expect the GA to find solutions that are not only fit, but are practical and likely to represent the real life situation as accurately as possible.

• Uncertainty in field observations should be assessed before these observations are used in an optimization. It is not uncommon for errors in measurement of head loss to be on the same order of magnitude or larger that the actual head loss (Walski, 2000). Such values should not be used in calibration because the calibration algorithm will dutifully try to match the field observations even if they are erroneous. To insure that head loss is adequate to exceed measurement error, it is helpful to collect data when velocities in pipes are appreciable. In some systems sized for fire protection, demands (and velocities and head losses) are so low most of the time that head loss measurements are meaningless other that to check pressure gage elevations. Another problem that occurs when calibrating a model is that some of the parameters determined are fixed and knowable at the time the data were taken (roughness, valve status), while others are merely a random observation from a stochastic process (water use). If a C-factor is determined as 90, then that value will be true in the not to distant future. If a water use during a pressure observation is determined to be 100 gpm (6.3 l/s), is that value the demand that should be used in modeling given that it is only one observation from a distribution? The actual water determined from calibration may not be the best value to use for representing the current year status of the system. The user needs to decide if the water use observed during calibration is the water use that should be used as a basis for future modeling.

10.2.9 Calibration Results Statistics After a Calibration has been calculated, this dialog displays a summary of the Calibration Statistics. The information displayed includes the Fitness Rating, the number of Generations, and number of trials. It also reports the status of the calibration calculations.

10.3 Field Data Sets

10.3.1 Field Data Set Dialog Use the Field Data Set dialog box to define the field data you have collected. This dialog box comprises three tabs:

− Observations

− Demand Adjustments

− Notes

Observations Tab

− Date – Set the date of the observations and field tests.

Note: The time is important because it is used within any patterns or diurnal curves you are using to track your water demand. The time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers (from hydraulic patterns), which are used to calculate the junction demands that will be simulated in (GA) Optimized Calibration.

− Time – Set the time of the observations and field tests.


Note: You must enter a time. You cannot leave the Observations tab or click OK until you set a time.

− Time from Start – Displays the time difference from the time you set for the field data set to the time defined as the start of the scenario.

− Observations – Click Insert to add observed data. Click Delete to remove the selected row of observed data.

Note: Valve and pump flows are used as calibration targets, not boundary conditions. Valve and pump flows are calculated by using the valve setting and pump speed, which are used as boundary conditions if observed. Tanks levels are also used as boundary conditions.

− Element Type – From the drop-down list, select the type of element for which you want to enter data.

Note: Using the two buttons next to the Element drop-down list, you can use the Select Element dialog box or select your element directly from your drawing.

− Element – Select the element for which you want to enter observed data.

− Attribute – Select the attribute for which you have observed data. Different attributes are available for each element, including: Hydraulic Grade, Pressure, Discharge, and Status. Enter the observed value for the attribute.

− Value – Select a value from the drop-down list or type in a value.

− Import – This allows you to Import field data from a tab-delimited ASCII text file. See the Field Data Import topic for more information.

Demand Adjustments Tab

Note: The Demand Adjustments all relate to the particular field data set you are editing. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire flow tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from pattern multipliers.

Use the Demand Adjustments tab to adjust demand for the element. Select the element for which you want to add an additional demand, such as flow from a hydrant, and enter the value of that demand.

− Override Scenario Demand Alternative – Check this box to override the displayed Demand Alternative and to use the Demand Multiplier. Clear this check box if you do not want to use the Demand Multiplier.

− Demand Alternative – Displays the Demand Alternative associated with the selected set of observations.

− Demand Multiplier – Set a demand multiplier that is applied to your water model. For example, if you have knowledge that your demand is higher or lower by a specific percentage, you can set that value here.


− Junction –Select the Junction to which you want to apply Demand Adjustments. You can select a junction from a drop-down list, Select Element dialog box, or by clicking the junction to select it from the drawing.

− Additional Demand – Set the additional demand at the selected junction.

Notes Tab Use the notes tab to enter any comments you want saved with the adjustments.

To use the New Field Data Set, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator, click the Field Data button, and, in the Field Data Sets dialog box, click Add. Then, after you set the Field Data Set Name, click OK.

10.3.2 Field Data Sets Dialog

Note: Field data taken at times of peak usage, in high-flow pipes, and/or where there is significant head loss, will be more useful when calibrating your model than data taken in low-usage, low-flow areas, where there is little head loss.

The Field Data Sets dialog box lets you enter a variety of test data against which you will calibrate your water model. WaterCAD lets you use more than one field data set in your calculations.

Note: When entering fire flow test results, consider: Entering Fire Flow Test Results.

− Representative Scenario – Select the Scenario you want to use for the calibration. For setting up scenarios, see: Scenarios.

− Field Data Set – Displays the field data sets.

Notes: The time is important because it is used within any patterns or diurnal curves you are using to track your water demand.

The time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers (from hydraulic patterns), which are used to calculate the junction demands that will be simulated in (GA) Optimized Calibration.

(The demand at a junction during a GA Calibration run is the product of its baseline demands and the demand factors at the time specified for the field data set.)

Pump settings and control settings, etc., are also determined from the time setting you specify. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire flow tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from pattern multipliers.

Also, a steady state run in WaterCAD will run with only junction baseline demands applied, whereas an Optimized Calibration run based on a steady state scenario that uses pattern multipliers for the specified time.

− Date/Time – Displays the date and time that was entered for the field data set. The date field is purely a label that can be used to record when field measurements were taken.

− Add – Click Add to add a new field data set.


− Edit – Click Edit to modify the selected field data set.

− Duplicate – Click Duplicate to copy the selected field data set. This can save you some time in entering new field data as a new set, but make sure all entered data is correct.

− Delete – Click Delete to delete the selected field data set.

− Rename – Click Rename to rename the selected field data set.

To use the Field Data Sets dialog box, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator and click the Field Data button.

10.3.3 New Field Data Set Enter the name of the field data set, or use the default name, and click OK.

To use the New Field Data Set, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator, click the Field Data button, and, in the Field Data Sets dialog box, click Add.

10.3.4 Field Data Observation Dialog The Observation dialog box lets you select elements in your model and enter observed data regarding those elements, such as observed pressures, discharges, statuses, or hydraulic grade.

− Element – Select the element for which you want to enter observed data.

− Attribute – Select the attribute for which you have observed data. Different attributes are available for each element, including: Hydraulic Grade, Pressure, Discharge, and Status. Enter the observed value for the attribute.

Note: Using the two buttons next to the Element drop-down list, you can use the Select Element dialog box or select your element directly from your drawing.

To use the Observation dialog box, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator, click the Field Data button, and, in the Field Data Sets dialog box, click Add. Then, after you set the Field Data Set Name, click OK. Select the Observations tab and click Add.

10.3.5 Entering Fire Flow Test Results When entering fire flows, there are two issues to consider:

• How to enter the fire flows.

• How to adjust demands at other nodes during fire flow test.

To enter a fire flow test: 1. In Darwin Calibrator, select Field Data\Add.

2. Name that Data Set (something like Fire flow at J-129).

3. Enter the observations as you would for any other condition ( Calibration Field Data Set Dialog ).

4. To enter the fire flow, select the Demand Adjustments tab.

5. Enter the Junction label where the fire flow occurred.


6. Enter and the additional fire flow as Additional Demand.

7. The additional flow is added to the normal demand at that node.

There are several ways to adjust the flows at the non-fire flow node. Only use one of them:

• If you want to use your EPS demand patterns, specify the correct time for the fire flow test and the demand will be adjusted with the multipliers.

• If you don't have EPS demand patterns or don't want to use them, set the first flow time to the some time when the demand multiplier is one (or any time, if there are no demand patterns). Then you have two ways to adjust background demands.

• You can specify a Demand Multiplier to use.

Note: Do not pick a demand alternative with fire flows because the fire flows will be double counted.

• Or, you can specify some alternative demand other than the one corresponding to the Representative Scenario.

• You can let the Darwin Calibrator identify the demand multiplier. To do that, use a time corresponding to a multiplier of 1, don't override the Scenario Demand Alternative from the Representative Scenario, and let the Demand Multiplier be one. In this way, the Calibrator will pick the demand multiplier.

10.3.6 Select Element Use the Select Element dialog box to select an element from your model.

− Elements – Use the Elements drop-down list to display all elements of one type, from which you can select the element you want. From the drop-down list, select <all> if you want WaterCAD to display all element types.

− Select From Drawing – Click Select From Drawing if you want to select the element by clicking on it in your model.

To use Select Element, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator, click the Field Data button, and, in the Field Data Sets dialog box, click Add. Then, after you set the Field Data Set Name, click OK. In the Observations tab, click the Elements field. Then, click the Ellipses button.

10.3.7 Field Data Import You can import Field Data from a tab-delimited ASCII text file. The text file to be imported must be in the following format:

Element Type Element Label Attribute Value Press the Tab key once between each column. One attribute and value can be entered per line, so to import multiple attributes and values for a single element, multiple lines must be entered. There is no limit to the number of individual Field Data input items that can be imported from a single text file, although all items contained in the text file will be imported to the same Field Data Set. Imported data is appended to any input data that has already been entered. In other words, importing field data information will not overwrite existing input data, even when data for a particular element is already present.


The types of data and the corresponding values that can be imported for each element type are as follows:

*Whether this value represents Hydraulic Grade or Pressure is determined by the Global Project Option Input Mode.

Example: Pressure Junction J-1 Hydraulic Grade 65.3

Pressure Pipe P-1 Status Open

Pressure Pipe P-1 Discharge 100

Pump PMP-1 Hydraulic Grade Out 125

Pump PMP-1 Hydraulic Grade In 37

Pump PMP-1 Status On

Tank T-1 Level 12


To import field data from a tab-delimited text file in the format shown above, click the Analysis pulldown menu and select Darwin Calibrator. Click the Field Data button, and then click the Add button in the Field Data Sets window. Name the new field data set and then click the Import button on the Observations tab of the Field Data Set dialog.

10.4 Adjustment Groups

10.4.1 New Adjustment Group Dialog Type the name of your Adjustment Group, or accept the default name, and click OK.

To use the New Adjustment Group dialog box, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator, click the Groups button. Select Roughness, Demand, or Status, and click Add.

10.4.2 Rename Adjustment Group Dialog Type the name of your Adjustment Group, and click OK.

To use the Rename Adjustment Group dialog box, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator, click the Groups button. Select Roughness, Demand, or Status and click Rename.

10.4.3 Calibration Groups The calibration groups data window displays a series of tabs that let you adjust the conditions for the calibration trial. The tabs and options that are available depend on whether you selected Manual or Optimized Calibration.

10.4.4 Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog

Note: Generally, you should not use one element per group but to do a pipe-by-pipe calibration, or something similar, you must create a group for each pipe.

Adjustment groups are used in the calibration process. You can create Adjustment Groups for Roughness, Demand, and Status. Select the kind of group you want to create and click Add to add elements to it. Or, select an existing group and Edit, Delete, or Rename it.

Notes: Adjustment Groups are a key component of the calibration. You must be careful to group similar elements and not dissimilar ones. You can adjust the properties for a group as a whole but not for individual members of the group. A good practice is to decide on your Adjustment Groups first and then collect the Field Data to support the number or groups, rather than letting available data determine how many Adjustment Groups you have.

− Roughness – Click Roughness to view any existing Roughness Adjustment Groups and to Add, Edit, Delete, or Rename such groups. Each Roughness group should comprise elements that have similar attributes, such as pipes in a location of a similar material and age.


− Demand – Click Demand to view any existing Demand Adjustment Groups and to Add, Edit, Delete, or Rename such groups. Adding Demand Calibration Adjustment Groups introduces more unknowns into a calibration problem. If available, you should enter more accurate Demand data into your WaterCAD model, rather than adding Demand Adjustment Groups. Consider creating Demand Groups based on usage patterns.

− Status – Click Status to view any existing Status Adjustment Groups and to Add, Edit, Delete, or Rename such groups. Status indicates whether a pipe is open or closed. If you set up Status groups, GA-optimized calibration will test each pipe in each group for open and closed status. We recommend that Status Groups comprise at most only a few pipes, or one pipe.

− Label – Displays the names of the adjustment groups you have created.

− Elements – Lists the number of elements in the groups you have created.

To use the Adjustment Groups dialog box, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator, click the Groups button.

10.4.5 Selection Set Dialog The Selection Set Dialog lets you add or edit items in your Roughness, Demand, or Status group. The Selection Set dialog box comprises two data windows: Available Items and Selected Items. The items listed are those that appear in your water model.

Select – Click the Select button to select items by Filter, Element, Selection Set, or by clicking the items you want from your drawing. After selecting the items you want from the drawing, right-click and select Done.

Filter—Filter lets you select members of your group by similar properties (Filtering Tables).

Element—Element lets you select members of your group that are like elements, for example, pressure pipes.

Selection Set—Selection Set lets you choose pre-defined selection sets to include in the group (Selection Sets).

From Drawing—From Drawing lets you select the elements you want in your group by clicking them in the drawing. Right-click and select Done after you finish selecting elements by clicking.

Select\Invert Selection – Use Invert Selection to de-select all highlighted items and select all unselected items.

Select\Clear Selection – Use Clear Selection to de-select all highlighted items.

Add – To include items in your group, click, ctrl-click, or shift-click them and use the single-arrow Add button to move the selected files to the Selected Items data window. Instead, you can move all items by clicking the double-arrow Add button.

Remove – To remove items from your group, click, ctrl-click, or shift-click them and use the single-arrow Remove button to move the selected files to the Available Items data window. Instead, you can move all items by clicking the double-arrow Remove button.

OK/Cancel – Click OK to accept the items you have included in your group or click Cancel to exit the Selection Set dialog without making any changes or additions to the group. A Selection Set must have at least one Selected Item when you click OK.

To use the Selection Set dialog box, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator, click the Groups button. Select Roughness, Demand, or Status and click Add or Edit. If you added a new group, the Selection Set dialog box opens after you set the name of your new group.


10.5 Calibration Options

10.5.1 Calibration Options

Note: If you change the Calibration Options, any fitness values you get are not comparable to fitness values obtained using different Calibration Options settings.

Use the Calibration Options dialog box to set up how the calibrations are evaluated. The options you specify are applied to every calibration trial.

− Fitness Type – Select the Fitness Type you want to use from the drop-down list. In general, regardless of the fitness type you select, a lower fitness indicates better calibration. Fitness Types include: Minimize Difference Squares, Minimize Difference Absolute Values, and Minimize Maximum Difference. See Calibration Options Formulae for formulae that describe these settings.

− Minimize Difference Squares uses a calibration designed to minimize the sum of squares of the discrepancy between the observed data and the model simulated values. (Model simulated values include hydraulic grades and pipe discharges.) This calibration favors solutions that minimize the overall sum of the squares of discrepancies between observed and simulated data.

− Minimize Difference Absolute Values uses a calibration designed to minimize the sum of absolute discrepancy between the observed data and the model simulated values. This calibration favors solutions that minimize the overall sum of discrepancies between observed and simulated data.

Note: The Minimize Maximum Difference Fitness Type is more sensitive to the accuracy of your data than other Fitness Types.

− Minimize Maximum Difference uses a calibration designed to minimize the maximum of all the discrepancies between the observed data and the model simulated values. This calibration favors solutions that minimize the worst single discrepancy between observed and simulated data.

Note: You can give higher importance to Head or Flow by setting a smaller number for its Per Fitness Point Value.

− Head/Flow per Fitness Point – Head and Flow per Fitness Type provide a way for you to weigh the importance of head and flow in your calibration. Set these values such that the head and flow have unit equivalence.

− Flow Weight Type – Select the type of weight used: None, Linear, Square, Square Root, and Log. The weighting type you use can provide a greater or lesser fitness penalty.

In general, measurements with larger Flow carry more weight in the optimization calibrations than those with less Flow. You can exaggerate or reduce the effect larger measurements have on your calibration by selecting different weight types. For example, using no weighting (None) provides no penalty for measurements with lesser Flow versus those with greater Flow. Using Log and Square Root reduces the fitness penalty for measurements with lesser flow, and using Linear or Square increases the fitness penalty for measurements with less Flow.

− OK/Cancel – Click OK to accept the changes you made and apply them to all future calibrations. Click Cancel to close the dialog box without making or saving any changes.

− Reset – Click Reset to restore the software default values for the Calibration Options.


To use the Calibration Options dialog box, select Analysis\Darwin Calibrator and click the Options button.

10.5.2 Optimized Calibration Advanced Options The Advanced Options dialog box lets you customize how the WaterCAD Genetic Algorithm (GA) performs. Since Genetic-Algorithm Optimization is a randomly guided search algorithm, different parameter values may yield a slightly different set of solutions, which can used for a sensitivity study of your model calibration.

Note: All values must be positive, not negative. Recommended values are based on maximizing speed and efficiency.

− Reset – Click Reset to restore the software default values for the Optimized Calibration Advanced Options.

− Maximum Era Number – Lets you controls the number of outer loops the Genetic-Algorithm Optimized Calibration uses. Each outer loop runs over the number of generations with the same population size. A large value for maximum era number will make the optimization run longer than a smaller number would. You might want to start with a low number and increase the number in subsequent runs.

The allowable range for values is greater than or equal to 1. I you use 0 or less, the Optimized Calibration uses values based on what is set for Maximum Trials and Non-improvement Generations (Optimized Calibration).

− Era Generation Number – Sets the number of generations of each inner loop the GA uses.

The allowable range for values is greater than or equal to 1. I you use 0 or less, the Optimized Calibration uses values based on what is set for Maximum Trials and Non-improvement Generations (Optimized Calibration).

− Population Size – Sets the number of GA solutions in each generation. Increasing Population Size results in a longer time for each generation and more solutions to be evaluated.

The allowable range for values is from 50 to 500. We recommend you use a range of 50 to 150.

− Cut Probability – Sets the probability that a GA solution will be split into two pieces. Setting this value closer to 100% increases the number of cuts made and reduces the average string (chromosome) length. Increasing Cut Probability causes solutions to vary more widely from one generation to the next, whereas decreasing this results in more marginal changes.

The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a value less than 10%.

Note: Setting the Splice probability closer to 100% increases the demand on system RAM. If you are getting out-of-memory errors when using GA Optimization, try reducing the Splice Probability closer to 0% and try increasing the Cut Probability away from 0%.

− Splice Probability – Sets the probability that two GA solutions will be joined together. A Splice Probability set close to 100% results in long solution strings, which increases the mixing of alleles (genes) and improves the variety of solutions.


The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a range from 50% to 90%.

− Mutation Probability – Sets the probability that a GA solution is randomly altered. A value closer to 100% causes the solutions to contain more randomization than values closer to 0%.

The allowable range for values is between 0% and 100%, not inclusive. We recommend you use a value less than 10%.

− Random Seed – Lets you set the random number generator to a new point. Changing this value and leaving all other parameters as-is will yield a different solution set.

The allowable range for values is from 0 to 1, inclusive.

In the Calibrations area, select an existing Base or Child Darwin Calibration. Click the Options tab in the Calibration Groups area and click the Advanced button.

10.5.3 Calibration Options Formulae The following formulae are used for Minimize Difference Squares, Minimize Difference Absolute Values, and Minimize Maximum Difference.

Minimize Difference Squares:

NFNHFpnt

FobsFsimw

HpntHobsHsim

wNF

nf

nfnfnf

NH

np

nhnhnh

+

−+

− ∑∑== 1

2

1

2

Minimize Difference Absolute Values:

NFNHFpnt

FobsFsimw

HpntHobsHsim

wNF

nf

nfnfnf

NH

np

nhnhnh

+

−+

− ∑∑== 11

Minimize Maximum Difference:

−−

== FpntFobsFsim

wHpnt

HobsHsimw nfnf

nf

NF

nf

nhnhnh

NH

nh 11max,maxmax

where Wnh and Wnf represent a normalized weighting factor for observed hydraulic grades and flows respectively. They are given as:

∑=

nh

nhnh Hobs

HobsW

∑=

nf

nfnf Fobs

FobsW


The weighting factors may also take many other forms, such as no weight (equal to 1), linear, square, square root and log functions. Other variables include:

− Hobsnh designates the nh-th observed hydraulic grade.

− Hsimnh is the nh-th model simulated hydraulic grade.

− Fobsnf is the observed flow.

− Fsimnf is the model simulated flow.

− Hpnt notes the hydraulic head per fitness point.

− Fpnt is the flow per fitness point.

− NH is the number of observed hydraulic grades.

− NF is the number of observed pipe discharges.


Chapter 11

Cost Estimating

11.1 Overview The Capital Cost Manager allows you to calculate a planning level estimate of the capital costs associated with an entire system or any portion of a system. This makes it easy to compare the costs associated with various scenarios, thus helping to ensure that the most cost-effective design is chosen.

The costs associated with a particular element are broken down into two categories: construction costs and non-construction costs. The total cost for each element is simply the sum of the total construction and non-construction costs. The total cost for a scenario is computed by summing the total cost for every element selected to be included in the cost analysis, and then applying any global cost adjustments that you have defined.

Each construction cost item is expressed as a combination of a quantity, unit, and unit cost. The total cost associated with a single construction cost item is the quantity multiplied by the unit cost. The unit cost for each construction cost item can either be entered directly by you, or if the element is a pipe or gravity structure (e.g. inlet, manhole, junction, junction chamber) it can be calculated based on a Unit Cost Function. A Unit Cost Function is a way to relate a property of the element, such as the diameter of a pipe, to the unit cost. This makes it easy to assign a Unit Cost Function to an element. The cost of the element is then automatically updated when you modify the physical characteristics of the system.

The other type of cost is non-construction. Non-construction cost items are specified either as a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs. This type of cost can be useful when trying to explicitly account for items like omissions and contingencies.

In addition to specifying the costs for each element in the system, you can also make adjustments on a system level to the total cost of all the elements included in the cost analysis. This makes it easy to account automatically for contingencies and adjustments on a scenario level.

Tip: You do not need to have a hydraulically valid network to perform a cost analysis. You can quickly calculate the cost associated with a system at any time through the Capital Cost Manager.

238 Chapter 11 – Cost Estimating

11.2 Capital Cost Manager

11.2.1 Capital Cost Manager The Capital Cost Manager allows you to quickly compute and compare the costs associated with your different scenarios. This dialog provides you with a convenient place to view, edit, and calculate project level cost data. This dialog is divided into three sections that are described below:

• Button Section - This column of buttons provides access to the key pieces of data involved in a cost analysis.

• Center Pane - This pane displays an explorer view of the cost information for various scenarios.

• Left Pane - This pane displays the contents of the item selected in the center pane.

To open the Capital Cost Manager, select Analysis / Capital Costs from the pull-down menus, or click

the button on the Analysis toolbar.

11.2.2 Capital Cost Manager - Button Section On the right side of the Capital Cost Manager is a column of buttons that provide access to the key pieces of data involved in a cost analysis. Each of these buttons is described as follows:

• Unit Cost Functions - Opens the Unit Cost Function Manager, which is the place to add new or edit existing functions describing the relationship between a model attribute and the unit price for the element. For pipes, this might be a table of data relating the pipe material to the cost per unit length.

• Cost Alternatives - Opens the Capital Cost Alternatives Manager where you can quickly create different cost alternatives. For example, you may wish to compare the cost associated with different cost functions, or to separately calculate the cost of different phases of construction.

• Cost Adjustments - Opens the System Cost Adjustments Table for the selected scenario. This is the location where you enter adjustments that you wish to make on a scenario level.

• Active Scenarios - Opens the Active Cost Scenarios dialog where you can select which scenarios will appear in the Capital Cost Manager.

• Cost Reports - Opens a menu that provides access to one of the predefined cost reports detailing the costs associated with a particular scenario. The reports that can be opened through this button include: detailed report , element summary report, project summary report, pipe costs report, and warnings report.



11.2.3 Capital Cost Manager - Center Pane When you open the Capital Cost Manager, this pane will contain an explorer view of all the scenarios in the file. The total cost of each scenario is displayed to the right of the scenario label. If cost data was specified for a scenario, you will see a small ‘+’ symbol to the left of the folder icon. You can click this symbol to get an expanded view of the costs associated with a scenario.

In the first level of the expanded view, you will see the subtotal for each type of element included in the cost analysis, as well as the total cost adjustments made to the scenario. If you expand any of these items, you will get a view of the costs of each individual element. If you expand the view, one more level you will


be able to see the construction and non-construction costs associated with an element. The contents of any component that is selected will be displayed in the table on the pane to the left of this one.

Just above the right side of this pane is a row of three buttons, which access the following functionality:

• Properties - Opens the System Cost Adjustments Table for the currently selected scenario.

• Graph - Opens a pie chart of the items comprising the total cost of the scenario.

• Report - Opens a tabular report on any component selected in this pane.



11.2.4 Capital Cost Manager - Left Pane This pane on the left side of the Capital Cost Manager is used to display an expanded view of the contents of the item selected in the center pane.



11.2.5 System Cost Adjustments Table The System Cost Adjustments Table allows you to make adjustments to the total cost calculated for all the elements included in the cost analysis. This may include items such as omissions and contingencies that might be represented as a percentage of the total construction costs, or land acquisition costs that are represented as a lump sum. Each cost adjustment consists of the following items:

• Label - A unique name that identifies each cost adjustment.

• Operation - The mathematical operation that should be used with the factor to compute the cost adjustment.

• Factor - A numeric value that is used with the operation and the total scenario cost to compute the cost adjustment.

The types of operations that are supported are described below:

• % of Construction - Computes the cost of the adjustment as a percentage of the total construction costs for the scenario. For example, if the total construction cost for a scenario is $100,000 and the numeric value in the factor field is 10, the cost adjustment is $10,000.

• % of Total Cost - Computes the cost of the adjustment as a percentage of the total construction and non-construction costs for a scenario. For example, if the total cost for all the elements in a scenario is $200,000 and the numeric value of the factor is 15, the cost adjustment is $30,000.

• Add - Adds the numeric value specified for the factor to the other costs computed for a scenario.

• Lump Sum - The numeric value specified is a lump sum that is added to the other costs for the scenario.

• Multiply - Multiplies the numeric value in the factor field by the total construction and non-construction costs for a scenario.

• Subtract - Subtracts the numeric value in the factor field from the other costs computed for the scenario.


To open the System Cost Adjustments Table, select Analysis / Compute Costs from the pull-down

menus, or click the button on the Analysis toolbar. In the Capital Cost Manager, click the button labeled Cost Adjustments.

11.2.6 Active Cost Scenarios The active scenarios dialog allows you to select, which scenarios you would like to appear in the Capital Cost Manager. If there is check in the box to the left of the scenario name then that scenario will appear in the Capital Cost Manager.

To open the Active Cost Scenarios dialog, select Analysis/Capital Costs from the pull-down menu, or

click the button on the analysis toolbar and select Capital Cost. In the Capital Cost Manager click the button labeled Active Scenarios.

11.3 Energy Cost Manager

11.3.1 Energy Cost Analysis WaterCAD’s new Energy Cost Analysis feature allows you to estimate the cost of operating the pumps during an Extended Period Simulation.

This cost analysis not only calculates the cost of the energy being used by the pump, it also adjusts the reported daily cost based on the effects of storage within the network. To illustrate this, let’s say you have a tank in the network that has an initial level of 10 ft, and during the course of the extended period simulation this level falls to 5 ft. Realistically, this translates to an energy loss because at some point the pump will have to expend energy to fill the tank back up to its original level. Conversely, if the water level in the tank at the end of the simulation is greater than the initial level, the cost associated with the additional energy expenditure will be subtracted from the final daily cost.

The effect of this additional consideration in the cost analysis is that the estimate provided by WaterCAD will be much more realistic than an estimate based solely on the cost of running the pump. For instance: If you ran an extended period simulation in which the tank was able to meet the demands of the network for a 24 hour period without requiring additional water, and ran a cost analysis without accounting for storage gains/losses for this 24 hour period, the program would calculate that the daily energy cost for this network is zero - the pumps did not run, so no energy was consumed. This is obviously incorrect, as energy will be required to fill the tank again to recoup the losses of the previous day.

11.3.2 Energy Cost Manager • Button Section - This section contains three buttons:

− Prices - Opens the Energy Pricing Manager.

− Close - Exits the Energy Cost Manager.

− Help - Opens the On-Line Help.

• Analysis Control Pane - This section of the dialog consists of a pulldown menu which allows you to select the scenario to be calculated, a Go button which begins the calculation, and a pane that allows you to control what results will be displayed in the Detailed Results Pane. Highlighting one of the calculation components will cause the detailed results of the cost calculation to be displayed in the Detailed Results Pane. This section also displays a breakdown of the calculated costs associated with the various components of the energy cost analysis.


• Detailed Results Pane - This section of the dialog is comprised of three tabs and a tabular report pane. This pane displays the detailed results associated with the currently highlighted item in the Analysis Control pane. The available Tabs change depending on which row is selected there.

− When the green folder representing the scenario to be calculated is highlighted, the following tabs are available:

• Pump - Displays a three column table listing all of the pumps in the current scenario. The three columns are Label, Include In Cost Calculation?, and Energy Pricing. To exclude pumps from the analysis, uncheck the box in the Include In Cost Calculation? column for the corresponding pump(s). The Energy Pricing column allows you to choose which energy pricing definition is to be used when calculating the corresponding pump, or to create a new one. Click the Ellipsis(…) button to open the Energy Pricing Manager .

• Tank - Displays a two column table listing all of the tanks in the current scenario. The two columns are Label and Include in Cost Calculation?. To exclude tanks from the analysis, uncheck the box in the Include In Cost Calculation? column for the corresponding tank(s).

• Summary - Displays a summary of the calculated results for the cost analysis.

− When the page entitled Pump Usage is highlighted, only a Results tab is available.

• Results - The Results tab consists of a pulldown menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the results pane. The pulldown allows you to choose whether the Daily Energy Usage or the Total Energy Usage results are displayed. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog.

− When the page entitled Time Detail is highlighted, the following tabs are available:

• Results - The Results tab consists of a pulldown menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the results pane. The pulldown for this tab has only a single option, Time Details. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog.

• Graph - - The Graph tab consists of a pulldown menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the plot pane. The pulldown for this tab allows you to choose which attribute is to be graphed. The Copy button copies the plot to the clipboard, and the Report button opens the Print Preview dialog containing the graph as displayed in the plot pane. To change the graph options, right click in the graph display pane and select Options.

− When the page entitled Storage is highlighted, only a Results tab is available.

• Results - The Results tab consists of a pulldown menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the results pane. The pulldown allows you to choose whether the Daily or the Storage results are displayed. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog.

− When the page entitled Peak Demands is highlighted, only a Results tab is available.

• Results - The Results tab consists of a pulldown menu, a Copy button, a Report button, and the results pane. The pulldown allows you to choose whether the Peak Demand Daily Summary or the Peak Demand results are displayed. The Copy button copies the results table to the clipboard, and the Report button generates a report containing the calculated results that are displayed in the results pane and opens the Print Preview dialog.


To open the Energy Cost Manager, open the Analysis pulldown menu, and select Energy Costs. Alternatively, click the Cost Management button and select Energy Cost.

11.3.3 Energy Pricing Manager • Add - Prompts for a name, then opens the Energy Pricing Editor.

• Edit - Opens the Energy Pricing Editor for the currently highlighted definition.

• Duplicate - Prompts for a name, then opens the Energy Pricing Editor, which is pre-set with the input data from the currently highlighted definition.

• Delete - Verifies the action, then deletes the highlighted definition.

• Rename - Allows you to rename the currently highlighted definition.

11.3.4 Energy Pricing Editor • Energy Pricing - This tab is divided into two sections. The upper section contains a required input

box:

− Start Time - A value between 0 and 24 that specifies the first time step point in the definition.

The lower part of the dialog is comprised of a two column table and three buttons. The columns in the table are as follows:

− Time From Start - The time at which the value entered into the corresponding Energy Price field will take effect.

− Energy Price - The Energy Price at the time specified in the corresponding Time From Start field.

The buttons to the right of the table include:

− Insert - Creates a new row in the definition table.

− Duplicate - Duplicates the highlighted row in the definition table.

− Delete - Deletes the highlighted row in the definition table. You will be prompted to confirm this action.

In addition, in the upper right-hand side of the dialog, there is a Plot button.

− Plot - Creates a price-vs.-time graph for the current pricing definition.

• Peak Demand Charge - This tab consists of the following fields:

− Include Peak Demand Charge? - This checkbox activates and deactivates the input fields. When the box is checked, a Peak Demand Charge will be applied as determined by the Peak Demand Charge and Billing Period input fields.

− Peak Demand Charge - The charge applied per kW at the time of greatest power usage.

− Billing Period - The Billing Period is the length of time over which the peak demand is considered. An equivalent daily cost is found by dividing the peak cost by this period of time.

• Notes - Allows you to enter descriptive text concerning the pricing definition being created.


11.4 Cost Alternatives Manager

11.4.1 Capital Cost Alternatives Manager The Capital Cost Alternatives Manager allows you to edit, create, and manage your capital cost alternatives. It also gives you more advanced capabilities, such as merging alternatives and creating child alternatives.

On the right side of the dialog are a number of buttons that provide functions for managing the alternatives. These buttons are identical to the buttons found in the Alternatives Manager. See the Alternatives Manager topic in the Scenarios and Alternatives chapter for a description of the function of these buttons.

To access the Capital Cost Alternatives Manager, select Analysis / Alternatives from the pull-down menu and select the Capital Cost tab, or click the Cost Alternatives button in the Capital Cost Manager.

11.5 Unit Cost Functions

11.5.1 Unit Cost Functions A Unit Cost Function is a description of the relationship between an element attribute and the unit cost for that element. For example, it might describe the relationship between pipe diameter and the cost per unit length or it could relate the depth of a gravity structure to the unit cost for that structure. You can specify the relationship between the unit cost and the value of the attribute as either tabular data or as a formula.

Tabular Unit Cost Function - Relates attribute values to unit costs as a series of data points. This is the only way to enter unit cost data for non-numeric attributes such as material. If the attribute for which you are supplying the cost data is numeric then values between the data points that you enter will be linearly interpolated. If the unit cost is requested for an attribute value that falls outside of the range of data that you supplied in the table, the model will assume that the unit cost is equal to the unit cost at the most extreme point closest to the value that was requested. For example if the following points had been entered (8 in, 30$/ft) and (12 in, 40 $/ft) and the unit cost was requested for a 16 in diameter pipe the value returned would be 40 $/ft. The warnings report available from the cost manager will list the elements and construction cost items for which this is true.

Formula Unit Cost Function - Represents the unit cost as a function of the selected numeric attribute of the following form:

( )bcxadCost −+=

Where: Cost= Linear cost of the pipe (local currency/m, local currency/ft) x = Selected attribute (unit depends on the type of attribute)

a,b,c,d = Parameters you specify (units depend on local currency and the type of attribute)

Note: For certain values, such as when x is less than c and b is not an integer, this equation will be invalid. Under these conditions, the unit cost returned by the function will be zero.


11.5.2 Unit Cost Functions Manager You can add, delete, and edit the Unit Cost Functions for your project through this manager. You will be able to assign the cost functions defined here to one or more of the elements of the appropriate type in your system. For example, if you define a cost function for pipes, you will be able to select this cost function from the choice list on the Cost tab of the Pipe Element Editor.

Use the Save command to save the Unit Cost Functions listed in the Unit Cost Functions Manager. You can then import them into another project using the Import command. The Save and Import commands are accessed from the File button in this dialog.

11.5.3 New Unit Cost Functions Dialog When you add a new Unit Cost Function, you will be prompted with this dialog containing two fields, Unit Cost Function Type and Unit Cost Function Attribute. This is the information that is needed to initialize the new Unit Cost Function that you are about to create.

The Unit Cost Function Type field allows you to select whether you would like to enter your cost function data in tabular or formula format. We recommend that you quickly familiarize yourself with both formats to see which is most convenient for you. If you wish to base your unit cost on an attribute that is not numeric, such as material, you must choose a tabular format.

The Unit Cost Function Attribute field is for selecting the attribute for which your unit costs are functions. For example, the unit cost of a pipe might be based upon its diameter or its material. Attributes that are not numeric can only be selected if the Unit Cost Function type is tabular.

11.5.4 Unit Cost Function Notes In this section, you can enter optional notes related to the Unit Cost Function.

11.5.5 Tabular Unit Cost Function

Tabular Unit Cost Function This tab contains the data for Unit Cost Functions defined with tabular data. The information is defined in the following fields:

• General - Contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function.

• Attribute Value Range - Displays the range of the selected attribute in the current scenario. This information can be useful for specifying cost data for the entire range of values in the model.

• Unit Cost Data - Specifies the tabular data relating unit cost to the value of the selected attribute.

In order to help you enter and visualize the function, use one of the following buttons at the bottom of the dialog:

• Plot - Plots the tabular data relating cost to the value of the selected attribute.

• Initialize Range - Initializes the minimum and maximum values in the Attribute Value Range section, based on all the elements present in your project for the current scenario.

Note: If the attribute you have selected to define the Unit Cost Function is outside the defined range for some elements in your network, the unit cost used will be the cost of the minimum or maximum value of the attribute you defined in the table.


General Section

This section contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function, as follows: • Label - Unique name that identifies your Unit Cost Function.

• Element Type - Displays the type of element to which the function applies, which is always pressure pipe in WaterCAD, but could also be gravity pipe, junction, inlet, manhole, or junction chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD.

• Attribute Label - Element attribute that controls the unit cost, such as pipe diameter. This attribute is selected when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Function Manager.

Attribute Value Range Section This section displays the minimum and maximum values for the attribute that controls the unit cost in your current network. Click the Initialize Range button to have these values calculated.

Unit Cost Data Table This allows you to define the Unit Cost Function in a tabular format, preferably defining the costs associated with the entire range of values present in your network. To display the current range of values in your model, initialize the Attribute Value Range section by clicking the Initialize Range button.

11.5.6 Formula Unit Cost Function The data defining formula-based Unit Cost Functions is grouped as follows:

• General - General information identifying the Unit Cost Function.

• Valid Cost Data Range - The range for which the function is valid for the attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function.

• Coefficients - Coefficients defining the formula relating the unit cost to the attribute value.

In order to help you enter and visualize the function, use one of the following buttons at the bottom of the dialog:

• Plot - A graph of the Unit Cost Function.

• Initialize Range - The minimum and maximum values of the attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function based on all the elements in your project.

Note: If the function is invalid for any interval within the Valid Cost Data Range, it is set to 0.0 in that interval. Click the Plot button to see if there are any problems with the function.

If the attribute you have selected to define the Unit Cost Function is outside the Valid Cost Data Range for any element in the network, the formula will still be applied to calculate that element unit cost. However, an error message for that element will be reported when computing the cost for the system.

General Section This section contains general information identifying the Unit Cost Function, as follows:

• Label - Unique name that identifies your Unit Cost Function.

• Element Type - Displays the type of element to which the function applies, which is always pressure


pipe in WaterCAD, but could also be gravity pipe, junction, inlet, manhole, or junction chamber in SewerCAD or StormCAD.

• Attribute Label - Element attribute that controls the unit cost, such as pipe diameter. This attribute is selected when you add a new function in the Unit Cost Function Manager.

• Local Unit - Unit of the attribute that controls the unit cost. This unit is used for defining the formula coefficients.

Valid Cost Data Range Section This section specifies the range of values for which the function is valid for the attribute used to define the Unit Cost Function. Clicking the Initialize Range button accesses the two values based on the range of values present in your current network.

Coefficients Section In this section, you can enter the coefficients defining the Unit Cost Function. The x-parameter, which represents the value of the attribute on which the Unit Cost Function is based, is expressed by the unit specified in the Local Unit field on this tab.

11.6 Cost Reports

11.6.1 Cost Reports In addition to the standard reporting capabilities, the cost analysis feature provides a number of specialized reports for presenting results. These reports include:

• Element Detailed Cost Report - Presents a detailed view of all the cost information entered for a single element.

• Project Detailed Cost Report - Provides a detailed view of calculated cost data for every element included in the cost analysis.

• Project Element Summary Cost Report - Returns a summary of the costs for every element included in the cost report.

• Project Summary Cost Report - Provides an overview of all the costs in the system.

• Pipe Costs Report - Provides an overview of the costs associated with the pipes in the project, grouping them by material and section size.

• Cost Warnings Report - Provides a list of warnings for a particular Cost Scenario.

Each of these tabular reports can be sent directly to the printer, or copied and pasted into your favorite spreadsheet program for further refinement.

11.6.2 Element Detailed Cost Report This tabular report contains a detailed view of all the cost information entered for a single element. It includes an itemized list of all the construction and non-construction costs for an element, as well as the subtotals and total cost of the element. This report is only available for elements that have been selected for inclusion in the cost calculation.

See the Tabular Report Window for information about exporting and printing the data in this report.


To access the field Element Detailed Cost Report:

Stand-Alone: Double-click the element for which you wish to see the report, or right-click the element and select Edit from the drop-down menu. In the dialog that appears, click the Report button and select Cost Report from the menu.

AutoCAD 2000 /2002: Pick the Select tool and click the element you wish to edit, or select the element and choose Edit from the drop-down menu. In the dialog that appears, click the Report button and select Cost Report from the menu.

AutoCAD 2000i: Double-click the element for which you wish to see the report, or right-click the element and select Edit from the drop-down menu. In the dialog that appears, click the Report button and select Cost Report from the menu.

11.6.3 Project Detailed Cost Report This tabular report contains a detailed view of all the cost information entered for every element included in the cost analysis. It includes an itemized list of all the construction and non-construction costs for each element, as well as the cost adjustments made to the total cost of the project. This report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario.


11.6.4 Project Element Summary Cost Report This tabular report provides a summary view of all the cost information entered for each element selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. It contains an overview of the costs assigned to each element, and an itemized list of the cost adjustments. This report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario.


11.6.5 Project Summary Cost Report This tabular report provides a summary view of all the cost information entered for the elements selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. This report contains an overview of the costs assigned to each element type and an itemized list of the cost adjustments. This report is only available after the costs have been computed for the scenario.


11.6.6 Pipe Costs Report This printed report provides a summary of the cost of all the pipes included in the cost analysis. The pipes are broken down by material and section size. The total length of pipe for each size and material are reported along with the total cost associated with that group of pipes.

11.6.7 Cost Warnings Report This report provides a list of all the cost warnings for the selected scenario. You will receive warnings when you have assigned a Unit Cost Function to a particular element but the attribute value for that element lies outside of the valid range of data you set for the Unit Cost Function. You need to check these elements and make sure that the cost data supplied to these elements is applicable.


To open the Cost Warnings Report, open the Capital Cost Manager by selecting Analysis / Compute

Costs from the pull-down menu, or click the button on the Analysis toolbar. In the dialog that appears, click the Cost Reports button and select Warnings from the drop-down menu.


Chapter 12

Presenting your Results

12.1 Overview This chapter covers the various methods that are provided for viewing, annotating, graphing, and reporting your data. It also presents the tools available for generating contours, generating profiles, and color coding elements based on any attribute.

12.2 Element Annotation

12.2.1 Element Annotation Element annotations allow you to display detailed information such as pipe lengths or node ground elevations, as well as calculated values such as velocity, in your drawing. You can add one or more annotations for any type of element in the system. Annotations update automatically. For example, annotations will display newly calculated values and will be refreshed as you change scenarios.

Notes: The annotations and their format are defined by using the Annotation Wizard. In Stand-Alone mode, the annotation format can also be easily modified in the Attribute Annotation dialog, which opens when you double-click the handle of the annotation text in the drawing, or if you right click on the annotation and select Edit <Attribute> from the pop-up menu.

Pipe annotations can be aligned with the pipes or displayed horizontally, depending on the Pipe Text alignment setting specified in the Drawing Options dialog.

You can flip the text from one side of the pipe to the other (reading in the opposite direction) to maintain readability when the pipe direction on a plot is nearly vertical. By default, the text flips direction when the pipe direction is 1.5 degrees measured counter-clockwise from the vertical. You can modify this value by inserting a TextFlipAngle variable in the Haestad.ini file, located in the Haestad directory. The angle is measured in degrees, counter-clockwise from the vertical.

250 Chapter 12 – Presenting your Results

For instance if you want the text to flip when the pipe direction is vertical, you should add the following line to the Haestad.ini file:

TextFlipAngle=0.0

Reasonable values fall in the range from 15.0 degrees to -15.0 degrees.

The TextFlipAngle is only applicable to annotations on the plan view.

12.2.2 Attribute Annotation Dialog To access the Attribute Annotation dialog right click on the annotation and select <Attribute Name> Annotation from the pull-down menu. Alternatively, in the main view in Stand-Alone mode, double-click the handle of the annotation text to display the corresponding Attribute Annotation dialog. Here you can easily modify the format of that attribute annotation without going through the Annotation Wizard again. The replaceable parameters "%v" and "%u" represent the attribute’s value and unit respectively.

12.2.3 The Annotation Wizard You can use the Annotation Wizard to add annotations to the drawing, as well as to remove or modify existing annotations in the drawing. You can annotate all elements or any subset of elements.

The wizard is divided into three steps:

• Select Elements - Select the types of elements to annotate.

• Specify Annotations - Specify the set of elements to annotate, the attributes you would like to annotate, and the format of your notations.

• Summary - Summary of the selected annotation settings.

To access the Annotation Wizard, click the Annotation Tool on the toolbar, or select Tools / Element Annotation from the pull-down menu.

Annotation Wizard - Select Elements This step allows you to specify the types of elements you wish to annotate by checking the appropriate boxes. You may annotate more than one type of element at a time by checking all the desired element types. If you have already annotated your drawing, you can remove annotations for a particular type of element by unchecking the corresponding box.

Tip: If you decide to turn off the annotations for a particular element type, your annotation settings will be retained, allowing you to easily toggle annotation back on.

Annotation Wizard - Specify Annotation The next step(s) allows you to specify the subset of elements and the attributes you wish to annotate for each element type. For each element type, you will be presented with a table where you can specify the attributes you wish to annotate, and the mask for each attribute.

• Specify the set of elements… - Choose All Elements from the choice list for annotation to be applied to all elements in the network, or choose a selection set. Click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Selection Set Manager to edit or add selection sets.

• Attributes - Select from a list of all available attributes for the current element type including calculated values. Click this field, and choose the attributes you wish to annotate by selecting from


the list that appears. Clicking the sideways triangle button will open the categorized Quick Attribute Selector.

• Mask - Customize the way the annotation is displayed. The replaceable parameters "%v" and "%u" represent the attribute’s value and unit respectively. By default, the mask is set up as follows: <attribute name>: %v %u.

• Initial Placement (Available for profile annotations only) - Specify how the annotation will be offset relative to the label of the element it is referring to. If the <default> is selected then the annotation will be placed under the label. To specify a custom offset select Offset… from the pull-down menu and click the ellipses (…) button to bring up the Offset dialog. In this dialog you can specify the x and y offsets. Click OK when completed.

Tip: When annotating, for example, pipe diameters, the default mask is "Diameter: %v %u". The default annotation for a 150 millimeter pipe would be "Diameter: 150 mm". By changing the mask to "%v %u", the resulting annotation would be "150 mm".

Annotation Wizard - Summary The last step of annotating your drawing is reviewing the choices you have made. If you would like to make changes at this time, simply click the Back button to return to previous windows in the wizard. When you are satisfied, click the Finished button to apply the annotations to the drawing.

Tips: You can turn annotation visibility on or off by editing the Drawing Options. Your annotation settings will be retained.

If the Drawing Options are set so that element annotations will not be displayed, clicking the Finished button in the Annotation Wizard will automatically turn annotations on.

In Stand-Alone mode, you can double-click an annotation element in the drawing to edit the associated mask.

The Annotation Text Height can be adjusted from the Drawing tab of the Options dialog, accessed by selecting Tools / Options from the pull-down menus.

12.3 Color Coding

12.3.1 Color Coding Color Coding allows you to assign colors to elements in the drawing based on a variety of input and output attributes. For any attribute, you can supply a color scheme or have the application generate one for you. For example, you can supply a color scheme to display all pipes sizes between 2" and 8" in green, those between 10" and 24" in blue, and those between 27" and 48" in red. To access Color Coding, select Tools / Color Coding... from the pull-down menus, click the Color Coding

button on the main toolbar, or double-click a color coding legend figure in the drawing.


12.3.2 Color Coding Dialog At the top of the Color Coding dialog are two tabs, Link and Node. You can set up color coding for both links and nodes, or just one of the two. The following fields are available:

• Attribute - Select the attribute by which you would like to color code, or select <None> to turn color coding off. By clicking the sideways triangle button, you can access the categorized Quick Attribute Selector.

• Selection Set - Choose All Elements from the pull-down list to apply color coding to be applied to all elements in the network, or choose a selection set to apply color coding to a subset. Click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Selection Set Manager to edit or add selection sets.

• Calculate Range - Automatically determine the minimum and maximum for the specified attribute and selection set.

• Minimum / Maximum - Displays the calculated minimum and maximum values for the specified attribute in the selection set.

• Initialize - Automatically calculate a default color coding range for the specified attribute, based on the values in your project.

• Ramp – Automatically generate a gradient range between two colors that you specify. Pick the color for the first and last values in the list and the program will select colors for the other values. For instance, picking Red as the first color and Blue as the last color will produce varying shades of purple for the other values.

Use the Initialize and/or the Insert buttons to define your color coding map. Then click OK to apply the specified colors to the appropriate elements.

Notes: Color coding legends can be added to any location in the drawing by clicking the Legend

button on the Tool Palette.

Color coding will automatically update as input or results change. For example, after performing a calculation, colors will update to reflect the newly calculated values.

If the results for the selected attribute are not available, or if all values for that attribute are the same, automatic range initialization will not be performed. You can enter your own custom range in this case.

A schematic can have any number of color assignments.

Tip: The Quick View window can be used to display a summary of the active link or node color coding parameters.


12.4 Reports

12.4.1 Predefined Reports This application provides several predefined reports that can be used in your projects. This feature makes report generation a simple point-and-click exercise. Simply select the elements for which you want a report and send them to your printer.

The following types of Predefined Reports are available:

• Element Details Reports

• Element Results Reports

• Tabular Reports

• Scenario Summary Reports

• Project Inventory Reports

• Plan View Reports

Note: Detailed reports can be copied to the Windows clipboard in RTF format for use in your favorite word processing program. Refer to the Print Preview window for more information.

To access the Predefined Reports, select Report from the pull-down menus and select the report of your choice.

12.4.2 Element Details Report The Detailed Reports dialog allows you to print detailed reports for all elements or any subset of elements in the system.

In Stand-Alone mode, from the Detailed Reports dialog, select multiple elements to be printed by holding down the Shift key or the Control key while clicking with the mouse. Holding down the Shift key will provide group selection behavior. Alternately, use the Select button to open the Selection Set dialog. This provides more powerful selection functions. When you are satisfied, click the Print button to output the selected reports.

Notes: You can graphically select elements that you would like to print before opening the Detailed Reports dialog. This is done by holding down the Shift key and selecting elements, or by dragging a window around the area of interest. The selected elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print when you open the dialog.

You can print a detailed report for a single element without using the Detailed Reports dialog. Simply open the element editor for the desired element and click the Report button.

In AutoCAD mode, to activate the Detailed Reports dialog, select Report / Element Details from the pull-down menus. The cursor will change to a pick box, signaling you to choose the elements for which you would like to view reports. Select elements as you normally would in AutoCAD. Press the Enter key, and the dialog will appear. While all of the elements in the project are listed, the ones you have selected are highlighted. You can use the Select button to further edit this list. Click the Print button to output the selected reports when you are satisfied.

To access the Detailed Reports dialog, select Report / Element Details from the pull-down menus.


12.4.3 Element Results Report The Element Results dialog allows you to print or preview a single report containing the results for any number of elements in the system.

From the Element Results dialog, you can select elements to be printed by holding down the Shift key or the Control key when clicking with the mouse. Holding down the Shift key will provide group selection behavior. Alternately, use the Select button to open the Selection Set dialog. This provides more powerful selection functions. When you are satisfied, click the Preview button to view the selected reports, or click the Print button to print the selected reports.

Notes: You can graphically select elements that you would like to print before opening the Element Results dialog. This is done by holding down the Shift key and selecting multiple elements, or by dragging a window around the area of interest. The selected elements will be highlighted in the list of elements to print when you open the dialog.

When working with large systems, the preview option can require a great deal of system resources. You can reduce resource requirements by selecting a small subset of elements with which to work. The print option has lower system resource requirements than the preview option.

In AutoCAD mode, to activate the Element Results dialog, select Report / Element Results from the pull-down menus. The cursor will change to a pick box, signaling you to choose the elements for which you would like to view reports. Select elements as you normally would select them in AutoCAD. Press the Enter key, and the dialog will appear. While all of the elements in the project are listed, the ones you have selected are highlighted. You can use the Select button to further edit this list. Click the Print button to output the selected reports when you are satisfied.

To access the Element Results dialog, select Report / Element Results from the pull-down menus.

12.4.4 Tabular Reports Using the powerful FlexTables feature you can very quickly generate a tabular report containing any attribute and any network element.

Tip: All tabular data in this program can be copied to the Windows Clipboard by right-clicking the desired table and selecting Copy from the pop-up menu. You can then paste this data into your favorite spreadsheet or word processor to generate custom reports and graphs.

Note: The predefined tables may need to be modified in certain situations to have them properly display the desired data. For instance, if you set up a project and choose the Mannings friction method, the default Pipe Report will still display a Hazen Williams C column, which will contain no data. The proper column must be added by Editing the table.

To access the Table Manager, click the Tabular Reports button on the main toolbar or choose Report / Tables from the pull-down menus.


12.4.5 Scenario Summary Report The Scenario Summary provides a detailed report of the active scenario, including alternatives, and a brief summary of the calculation options.

To access the Scenario Summary Report, select Report / Scenario Summary from the pull-down menus.

12.4.6 Project Inventory Report The Project Inventory report provides a detailed report that includes a summary of the active scenario, a network inventory, and a detailed pipe inventory (grouped by pipe section).

To access the Project Inventory Report, select Report / Project Inventory from the pull-down menus.

12.4.7 Calculation Results Table The calculation results for each element in a network can be viewed in a table format. This table is predefined and you cannot change it. It displays the set of the most commonly desired output attributes for the type of element for each reporting time step in the hydraulic analysis. The contents of the table can be copied to the Windows clipboard to transfer the data to another application such as a spreadsheet or word processing document.

To copy the data to the Windows clipboard, right-click the table and select Copy from the context menu.

Tip: You can change the reporting time step increment on the Analysis Toolbar.

To view the Calculation Results Table for a particular element, select Table from the Report button on the editor dialog for the desired element.

12.4.8 Plan View Report Generate reports for the plan view of the network, for either the current drawing display (Current View) or the entire drawing extents (Full View).

To generate a preview of the report for the current view or the entire network, choose either Report / Plan View / Current View or Report / Plan View / Full View, respectively, from the pull-down menus.

12.4.9 Calculation / Problem Summary Report After running hydraulic calculations, the Results tab of the Scenario Editor is displayed. This tab contains a summary of the calculation results. To view any problems or warnings encountered during the simulation click the Element Messages button.

Tip: Holding the mouse cursor over a message in the Element Calculation Message Browser report will open up a pop-up message box that displays further information on the message.

The report consists of a series of folders that represent different stages of the calculation process. Double click a folder or click the + sign to view information related to the folder’s caption. The color of the folder will indicate if any problems occurred during that portion of the analysis.

The colors indicate the following:

• Green light - Calculations were run successfully, without any warning or error messages being


generated.

• Yellow light - Calculations were run successfully, without error messages being generated. However, there are one or more warning messages. Warnings are displayed in the results summary in this tab.

• Red light - Calculations were not run successfully and error messages were generated, as shown in the results summary of this tab.

This report can be previewed before being printed or copied to the clipboard by clicking the Printer button on the Results tab. It can also be exported to a text file by clicking the Save button on the Results tab. Only the exposed text will be exported, copied or printed.

The Results tab is accessed from the Scenario Manager, reporting the results corresponding to the highlighted scenario in the scenario tree view. It can also be accessed for the currently active scenario by clicking the GO button, which opens the Scenario Editor.

12.4.10 Contour Plan View A preview of the Contour Plan View Report, showing all contours as displayed in the Contour Plot window, can be obtained by clicking on the Print Preview button in the Contour Plot window.

12.4.11 Totalizing Flow Meters • Times - The Times section allows you to specify the time period for which the meter will calculate

flows. This section consists of two pull-down menus:

− Start - The time when the meter begins calculating flow passing through the corresponding element.

− Stop - The time when the meter stops calculating flow passing through the corresponding element.

• Volumes - The Volumes section displays the results of the meter calculations in the following four result fields:

− Net Volume - The value reported in this field is the Negative Volume subtracted from the Positive Volume.

− Positive Volume - The amount of flow passing through the meter from the element upstream (From Node) to the element downstream (To Node).

− Negative Volume - The amount of flow passing through the meter from the element downstream (To Node) to the element upstream (From Node).

− Total Volume - The total amount of flow passing through the meter in either direction.

12.4.12 Tabular Report Window This window is used to display data in a tabular format. At the top of the window are five buttons that provide the following functionality:

• File - Export the data in the report to either a comma or tab delimited text file.

• Copy - Copy the data in the report to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into another program such as a spreadsheet or word processor.

• Print Preview - Open a print preview of the report, from which the report can be sent directly to the printer.


• Close - Close the report.

• Help - Access the online help for this report.

12.4.13 System Head Curve Dialog • Pump - The Pump field allows you to specify which pump the system head curve will be based

upon, and provides three methods of choosing this pump. The pulldown menu, which lists all of the pumps in the network, the Ellipsis (…) button which opens the Single Element Selection Dialog, and the Select From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical Drawing view.

• Maximum Flow - This field is automatically supplied with the Maximum Operating Discharge value for the selected pump.

• Number of Intervals - This field determines the number of Head / Discharge points that will be used to create the system head curve. The higher the number of intervals used, the smoother the curve will be.

12.5 Graphs

12.5.1 Pump Curve To generate a pump curve, open the Pump Editor for the pump of interest, click the Report button, and choose the Pump Curve menu item.

12.5.2 Tank Storage Curve To generate a plot of the tank storage volume versus the elevation, open the Tank Editor for the tank of interest, click the Report button, and choose the Tank Curve menu item.

12.5.3 Junction Demand Graph To generate a graph of the total demand at a junction over time, open the Junction Editor for the junction of interest, select the Demand tab and click the Graph button.

12.5.4 Pattern Graph and Report You can generate a graph or a full report of a pattern that represents the multiplier variable of the pattern over time. To do so, open the appropriate Pattern Manager dialog and access the pattern for which you would like to generate output. From the Pattern Editor dialog, click the Report button, and select Graph or Detailed Report.

12.5.5 Plotting a Variable vs Time

Graph Setup The Graph Setup dialog allows you to graph calculated results for any element in the system. The dialog is divided into three tabs:

• Graph Setup - This tab contains the Dependant pulldown menu. This menu lists the attributes that


can be graphed for the current element type. The attribute range is automatically initialized by the program depending on the calculated values for the elements that are being graphed.

• Elements- This dialog consists of a pane that lists the elements available for graphing and a Select button. Click the checkboxes next to each of the elements that you want to graph. The Select button opens the Selection Set dialog, which allows you to choose the elements will be displayed in the graph.

• Scenarios - Select and compare various scenario computations.

Note: The Graph Setup option is only available for Extended Period Analysis.

Tip: When the Plot Window is open, click the Options button to graph other dependent variables or to change the graph options. Clicking Options / Graph Setup opens the Graph Setup dialog. Clicking Options / Graph Options opens the Graph Options dialog.

Click the Report pulldown, select Element Graphs. Then choose the element type you would like to graph. The Graph Setup dialog can also be accessed for any element in the system. For the element you would like to graph, open its Element Editor by double-clicking the element in the main window, then click the Report button and select the Graph menu item.

Available Scenarios This feature allows you to select which scenario(s) you wish to view and compare on the current graph. Place a check mark by the scenario(s) you wish to display.

Note: The only scenarios that will be available to graph are scenarios for which an Extended Period Simulation have been calculated.

Graph Window The Graph window is divided into two tabs: Graph and Data. The Graph tab displays a plot of the selected dependent variable vs. time. The Data tab will display the data under the Graph tab in a tabular format.

The following functions will either be formed on the plot or the tabular data depending on which tab is selected.

• Copy - Copies the graph / data onto the Windows Clipboard for use in other applications.

• Print - Outputs the contents of the Graph/Data tab to the printer.

• Options / Graph Options - Allows you to customize the plot by changing the graph’s axes, fonts, titles, etc. This is only available when the Graph tab is selected.

• Options / Graph Setup - Allows you to rebuild the graph with different data and parameters.

• Close - Close the Graph window.

• Help - Provides access to help for the Graph window.

The graph window is accessible whenever you plot time-based data through the Graph Setup dialog.


12.6 Contours

12.6.1 Contour Map Manager The Contour Map Manager contains the information required to generate contours for a calculated network, organized as follows:

• Contour - Choice list used to select the attribute that is to be contoured. Clicking the sideways triangle button will open the categorized Quick Attribute Selector.

• Selection Set - Contours can be generated using all elements in the network or a subset of elements, defined in the Selection Set Manager. Click the ellipsis (…) button to access the Selection Set Manager.

Notes: In addition to using selection sets. You can also add nodes to a special zone that will ensure that they are excluded from the contouring point set. Cybernet 2 users might recall that Zone number 99 was reserved for this purpose. You should create a zone named 'Do not contour'. You can then add the nodes that you do not want to be included in the contour set. You can change the name of the contour exclusion zone by editing the file, haestad.ini, and setting the variable, ‘ExcludeFromContouringTag’ equal to any string label. The exclusion label is not case-sensitive.

If you want to exclude some spot elevations from the contouring point set, set their Description field to 'Do not contour' (or whatever value is set in the haestad.ini 'ExcludeFromContouringTag' variable).

• Minimum - Lowest value to be included in the contour map. It may be desirable to use a minimum that is above the absolute minimum value in the system to avoid creating excessive lines near a pump or other high-differential portions of the system.

• Maximum - Highest value for which contours will be generated.

• Increment - Step by which the contours increase. The contours created will be evenly divisible by the increment, and are not directly related to the minimum and maximum values. For example, a contour set with 10 minimum, 20 maximum, and an increment of 3 would result in the following set: [ 12, 15, 18 ] not [ 10, 13, 16, 19 ]

• Index Increment - Value for which contours will be highlighted and labeled. The index increment should be an even multiple of the standard increment.

• Initialize - This button, located to the right of the Contour section, will initialize the Minimum, Maximum, Increment, and Index Increment values based on the actual values observed for the elements in the selection set.

• Ramp – Automatically generate a gradient range between two colors that you specify. Pick the color for the first and last values in the list and the program will select colors for the other values. For instance, picking Red as the first color and Blue as the last color will produce varying shades of purple for the other values.

• Color by Range - Contours are colored based on attribute ranges. Use the Initialize button to create five evenly spaced ranges and associated colors.

• Color by Index - The standard contours and index contours have separately controlled colors so you can make the index contours more apparent.


Tip: Initialization can be accomplished by clicking the Initialize button. This program will then automatically generate values for the minimum, maximum, and so on, to create an evenly spaced contour set. These values may or may not be the desired range for your purposes, but should at least give you a better concept of the range of values with which you are dealing.

To access the Contour Map Manager, click the Contour button on the main toolbar or select Tools\Contouring from the pull-down menu.

12.6.2 Contour Plot The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accurate, straight-line contours.

View the changes in the mapped attribute over time by using WaterCAD’s new animation feature. Click the Play button to automatically advance through the time step increments selected in the Increment pull-down bar.

The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file using the File button at the top of the window. In AutoCAD mode, you can export the contours directly to your AutoCAD drawing by clicking File\Export to AutoCAD.

Note: Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot Status Pane displays the "Z" coordinate at the mouse cursor.

Tip: Although the straight-line contours generated by this program are accurate, "smooth contours" are often more desirable for presentation purposes. You can smooth the contours by clicking Options, and selecting Smooth Contours.

12.6.3 Contour Smoothing The Contour Smoothing option displays the results of a contour map specification as smooth, curved contours.

The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file using the command buttons at the top of the window.

Note: Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot Status Pane displays the "Z" coordinate at the mouse cursor.

12.6.4 Enhanced Pressure Contours Normal contouring routines only include model nodes, such as junctions, tanks and reservoirs. When spot elevations are added to the drawing, however, you can create more detailed elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours.

These enhanced contours include not only the model nodes, but also the interpolated and calculated results for the spot elevations. Enhanced pressure contours can help the modeler to understand the behavior of the system even in areas that have not been included directly in the model.


12.6.5 Contour Labeling New to version 5 is the ability to apply contour labels after the contour plot has been exported to the AutoCAD drawing. The labeling commands are accessed from the Tools menu. The following options are available:

• End - Allows you to apply labels to one end, both ends, or any number of selected insertion points. After selecting this labeling option, AutoCAD will prompt you to Select Contour to label. After selecting the contour to label, AutoCAD prompts for an Insertion point. Click in the drawing view to place labels at specified points along the contour. When prompted for an Insertion point, clicking the Enter key once will prompt you to select point nearest the contour endpoint. Doing so will apply a label to the end of the contour closest to the area where you clicked. Clicking the Enter key twice when prompted for an Insertion point will apply labels to both ends of the contour.

• Group End - Choosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog. The value entered in this dialog determines which of the contours selected will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog, you will be prompted to select the Start point for a line. Contours intersected by the line drawn thusly will have a label applied to both ends, as modified by the Elevation Increment that was selected.

• Interior - This option applies labels to the interior of a contour line. You will be prompted to select the contour to be labeled, then to select the point(s) along the contour line where you want the label to be placed. Any number of labels can be placed inside the contour in this way. Clicking the label grip and dragging will move the label along the contour line.

• Group Interior - Choosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog. The value entered in this dialog determines which of the contours selected will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog, you will be prompted to select the Start point for a line.

• Change Settings – Allows you to change the Style, Display Precision, and Font Height of the contour labels.

• Delete Label - Prompts to select the contour from which labels will be deleted, then prompts to select the label(s) to be removed.

• Delete All Labels - Prompts to select which contour(s) the labels will be removed from, then removes all labels for the specified contour(s).

12.6.6 Spot Elevations In addition to the elevations at junction nodes and other network elements, supplemental spot elevations can be entered throughout the model without adding unnecessary model nodes.

Note: These spot elevations have no effect on the network model, but can better define the terrain surface throughout the drawing. The result is that elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours can be generated with more detail. This gives the modeler a better prediction of the system's behavior, even in areas where the model has been skeletonized.

Because spot elevations are not included in the actual piping network, there is very little information in the spot elevation editor. The data consists of the following:

• Spot Elevation Input Data - General characteristics defined by the user.


• Spot Elevation Calculated Results - Values calculated from the model results.

To access the Spot Elevation editor:

Stand-Alone: Double-click the spot elevation you wish to edit or right-click the element and select Edit from the drop-down menu.

AutoCAD 2000 /2002: Pick the select tool and click the spot elevation you wish to edit or select the element and select Edit from the drop-down menu, or double-click the spot elevation..

Spot Elevation Input Data Spot Elevations have user-defined characteristics, including:

• Label - Unique "name" by which a spot elevation element will be referenced in reports, error messages, and tables.

• X-Coordinate (Easting) - The location may be presented as an X-value or defined as an Easting value, depending on individual preferences.

• Y-Coordinate (Northing) - The location may be presented as a Y-value or defined as a Northing value, depending on individual preferences.

• Elevation - Elevation of the spot elevation.

• Description - Optional notes describing the spot elevation.

Spot Elevation Calculated Results Because spot elevations are not directly tied to the hydraulic network model, there are only a few values that are calculated from the model results:

• Enhanced Hydraulic Grade - Interpolated hydraulic grade at this location.

• Enhanced Pressure - Pressure based on the interpolated hydraulic grade.

Notes: These values are obtained by interpolating between three adjacent model nodes. The enhanced hydraulic grade is determined from this interpolation, and the enhanced pressure is then computed as a function of the interpolated hydraulic grade and the elevation.

For spot elevations that are outside the model bounds, there may not be three adjacent model nodes. If this is the case, the enhanced hydraulic grade will be determined to be zero, which may result in negative pressures. This does not necessarily demonstrate that there are poor conditions in the system. It simply indicates that the spot elevations may cover a wider area than the model itself.

12.7 Profile

12.7.1 Profile A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground elevation along a section of piping. As well as these "side" or "sectional" views of the ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such as hydraulic grade, pressure, and constituent concentration.


Although profiles in general are not limited to a specific alignment, piping network models are usually concerned with a specific profile alignment type called a network walk.

12.7.2 Profile Setup Setting up a profile is a matter of simply selecting the walk and the attribute on which the profile is to be based. The Profile Setup dialog includes:

• Attribute - Parameter to be plotted on the vertical axis of the profile.

• Elements - List of elements that define the walk to be profiled.

In addition, the network walk can be manipulated by using some of the associated options:

• Select From Drawing - Return to the drawing in a protected mode to select and deselect elements for inclusion in the walk.

Note: In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu command "Repeat" to re-open the Profile Setup dialog.

• Reverse - Reverse the order of the walk. The first node in the list becomes the last, and the last node becomes the first.

• Remove All - Remove all elements from the current walk.

• Remove All Previous - Remove all elements that appear before the selected element in the list. If the selected element is a pipe, the associated node will not be removed.

• Remove All Following - Remove all elements that appear after the selected element in the list. If the selected element is a pipe, the associated node will not be removed.

When everything is set up to your satisfaction, click the Profile button to generate the graph.

To open the Profile Setup dialog:

Click on the Profile button on the toolbar of the main window.

- or -

Select Tools\Profiling from the main menu.

12.7.3 Profile Plot The Profile Plot window displays the results of an analysis in a profile format. The plot can be copied to the Windows clipboard or printed out directly. By selecting the Options\Graph Options menu button, you can also adjust the titles, axes, colors, and other characteristics of the graph.

There is also a time toolbar on the Profile Plot window that allows you to follow the profile through extended period simulation results.

Note: For an extended period simulation, the extents of the axes are determined based on the minimum and maximum attribute values for the entire time step, not just the current time step. This is done so that stepping through the time steps gives a more accurate portrayal of the system behavior without rescaling.


12.7.4 Export Profiles (in AutoCAD Mode) Profiles can be exported to the AutoCAD drawing using the File menu on the Profile Plot dialog. Profiles will be exported to an insertion point below the current drawing extents.

12.7.5 Walk A walk is a collection of nodes and pipes that follows a specific path through the network. It can include any type of network element, but cannot include annotations or spot elevations.

Notes: A walk is a non-branching path through the network, and can only be extended at either end. Pipes cannot be added along the midsection of the walk. Likewise, elements in the midsection of the walk cannot be deselected without first deselecting all of the elements between one end and the undesired element.

A walk cannot double back on itself, so once a pipe has been selected it cannot be included elsewhere in the walk.

12.7.6 Walk Selection After clicking the Select From Drawing button to define a walk, you will be returned to the drawing editor. If there are already elements in the current walk, they will be displayed in a highlighted mode. Otherwise, you need to begin a new walk by simply clicking any pipe. The pipe and its end nodes will then be highlighted. Continue clicking pipes to add them to the walk, or click highlighted end pipes to remove them from the current walk.

Once you have selected a walk, press the Escape button on your keyboard, or right-click with the mouse and select Done.

12.8 Scenario Comparison

12.8.1 Scenario Comparison The data calculated in different scenarios can be compared through the use of the Scenario Comparison window. This allows you to create an annotated drawing to display the differences in the values for any two scenarios.

Note: The active topology that is displayed is based on the current scenario. Any elements that are inactive in the current scenario will not be displayed, even if the elements are active in other scenario.

12.8.2 Annotation Comparison Wizard The Annotation Comparison Wizard is used to create a drawing that contains text elements displaying the differences between specific attributes of two scenarios. The Annotation Comparison Wizard is identical to the Annotation Wizard except it has one additional step. This step involves selecting the two scenarios you wish to compare.

• Scenario 1 - Choose the baseline scenario.


• Scenario 2 - Choose the scenario you wish to compare to Scenario 1.

The value in Scenario 1 is subtracted from the value of Scenario 2, and the difference is displayed. Therefore, if any specified attribute’s value is greater in Scenario 2 than it is in Scenario 1, the difference is displayed as a positive number. If the value is smaller in Scenario 2 than in Scenario 1, it is displayed as a negative number.

For example, suppose your model contains two scenarios. One is named 2002 Conditions, and the other is named 2010 Conditions. To create a drawing that displays the difference in velocity in a pipe between the 2002 scenario and the 2010 scenario, you would use the Annotation Comparison Wizard. You could choose the 2002 scenario as Scenario 1, and the 2010 scenario as Scenario 2. You would then complete the rest of the steps in the wizard. The drawing produced would show positive values where the velocity increased under 2010 conditions and negative values where the velocity decreased under 2010 conditions.

Tip: For applications that support extended period simulations, you can choose the same scenario for Scenario 1 and Scenario 2 to annotate the differences between two time steps of that scenario.

Note: The active topology that is displayed is based on the current scenario. Any elements that are inactive in the current scenario will not be displayed, even if the elements are active in other scenario.

To access the Annotation Comparison Wizard, open the Scenario Manager and click the Scenario Comparison button.

12.8.3 Scenario Comparison Window The Scenario Comparison window allows you to view, print, export, and modify scenario comparison annotations.

Along the top of the window is a row of buttons that perform the various functions listed below:

• File / Export To DXF - Exports the drawing in the standard .DXF file format.

• File / Export To AutoCAD (available only in AutoCAD mode) - Export the drawing to the current AutoCAD drawing.

• Zoom Tools - Provides standard zoom capabilities for navigating within the drawing.

• Options / Annotation Manager - Opens the Annotation Comparison Wizard to add, delete, or modify the scenario comparison annotations.

• Options / Annotation Height Multiplier - Modifies the text height for the scenario comparison annotations.

• Options / Find Element - Allows you to locate an element by its label.

• Print Preview - Opens the Print Preview window to view how the printed page(s) will look.

• Close - Closes the Scenario Comparison window.

• Help - Get quick access to this Help topic.

Several user interface elements are available to let you modify the scenarios that are being compared, and to control when the scenario comparison annotations are updated. These interface elements are described in more detail below.


• Scenario 1 - This row of controls is similar to the Analysis Toolbar on the main window. This field allows you to choose, from the list of available scenarios, the one that will be the baseline in the comparison.

• Scenario 2 - This row of controls is identical to those described above in Scenario 1, but instead of defining the baseline for the comparison, the scenario you pick here will be compared to the baseline.

• Update - Click this button to refresh the scenario comparison annotations. This button is used when Auto Update (described below) is off, and you have changed either Scenario 1 or Scenario 2.

• Auto Update - A check in this box indicates that Auto Update is on, and that the scenario comparison annotations will be refreshed whenever Scenario 1 or Scenario 2 is changed. With Auto Update off, you can select the desired combination of Scenario 1 and Scenario 2, then click the Update button. With Auto Update on, the annotations will refresh automatically to every scenario or time step change.

The Scenario Comparison window is accessed by clicking the Scenario Comparison button in the Scenario Manager, and then completing the Annotation Comparison Wizard.

12.9 Graphic Annotation

12.9.1 Graphic Annotation In Stand-Alone mode, several Graphic Annotation tools are provided for enhancing the appearance of your drawing. Graphic annotations can be manipulated like any other element in the Graphical Editor. You can add, move, and delete them just as you would with any network elements.

To add graphic annotation to your drawing, use the Tools\Layout / Graphic Annotation menu item, or use the tool-palette located along the left side of the main window. The available tools are:

• Line Tool - Add polylines or polygons such as drawing roads or catchment outlines.

• Border Tool - Add rectangles to your drawing for creating borders such as property lines.

• Text Tool - Add text to your drawing for adding explanatory notes, titles, or labels for non-network elements.

Tips: The program will calculate the area of a closed polyline. Right-click the polyline for which you wish to determine the area and select Enclosed Area.

To open or close a polyline, right-click the polyline and select Close. A check will appear next to the menu item to indicate that the polyline is closed.

To add bends or vertices to a polyline, right-click the polyline at the location you would like to add a bend and select Bend/Add Bend.

To remove bends or vertices from a polyline, select the polyline, right-click the bend you would like to remove, and select Bend/Remove Bend.

Note: To turn off Graphic Annotation, uncheck the corresponding box in the Symbol Visibility section of the Drawing Options tab in the Global Options dialog.


12.9.2 Legend Legends are used to display the ranges of the active link and node color coding. The legend tool adds a color coding legend to the drawing. This legend is automatically updated as the color coding is modified.

Editing of the legend figure is not required. In Stand-Alone mode, multiple legends may be placed in the drawing to assist you when printing specified regions within the drawing.

Tip: You can double-click a color coding legend in the drawing to edit the associated color coding parameters.

12.10 Preview Windows

12.10.1 Plot Window The Plot window provides the following functionality:

• Copy - Copies the plot onto the Windows Clipboard for use in other applications.

• Print - Outputs the contents of the Plot window to the printer.

• Options \ Graph Options - Allows you to customize the plot by changing the graph’s axes, fonts, titles, etc.

• Close - Close the Plot window.

• Help - Provides access to help for the Plot window.

The plot window is accessed whenever you generate non-time based plots such as cost function curves or pump curves, or whenever you plot input data such as loading patterns.

12.10.2 Print Preview Window This window provides you with a preview of what will be printed. The window contains the following buttons:

• Pg Up / Pg Dn - Navigate between pages of the report.

• Copy - Copy the report(s) to the Windows Clipboard.

• Print - Output the report to the printer.

• Options

− Print Setup- Change printer options, such as portrait or landscape page layout.

− Fit to Page - The Fit to Page check box will not appear if the Print Preview window does not contain a drawing, or if the drawing is in schematic mode. When checked, the drawing will be scaled to fit within a single page. When not checked, the drawing will be output using the drawing scale.

• Close - Close the Print Preview window.

• Help - Provides access to help for the Print Preview window.


12.10.3 Graph Options These features allow you to customize the way a graph or pie chart looks. The dialog is divided into several tabs:

Titles • Titles - There are three sets of titles for a graph: Graph title, X-Axis title and Y-Axis title. Each title

set contains two levels: title and subtitle. A pie chart simply has a title and a subtitle.

• Title Font - This feature allows you to select and change the text font type for specific items on the graph or pie chart. Use the selection list to choose the item for which to change the font, then click the ellipsis (…) button to select the desired font type from the list of available fonts currently installed on your PC.

Axis (for graphs only) • Automatic Scaling - By default, the program uses the Automatic Scaling options for setting the X

and Y-axis minimum, maximum, and increment values. To customize an axis, turn the check mark off and enter the desired values for the minimum, maximum, and increment. If desired, you can customize a single axis while leaving the other in the Automatic Scaling mode.

• Log Scale - Place a check mark in this box to use a log scale for this axis. You can use a log scale for one or both axes.

Grid (for graphs only) • X-Axis - Place a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the X-Axis labels.

• Y-Axis - Place a check mark in this box to view grid lines corresponding to the Y-Axis labels.

• Line Color - Use this selection list to define the color to use for both axes grid lines.

• Line Style - Use this selection list to define the line type (solid, dashed, etc) to use for both axes grid lines.

• Fill Color - Use this selection list to define the color to use for background fill within the plotting boundaries of the graph.

• Save as Default - Place a check mark in this box to save the current grid settings as the default for subsequent graphs.

Note: You can specify to use grid lines for one or both axes.

Display (for pie charts only) • Data Labels - Allows you to annotate pie charts with percentages, labels, or both.

• Percentages - Indicates how many decimals are to be displayed for the percentage figures.

• Legend Location - Allows you to place the legend (if any) on the left, right, top, or bottom of the pie chart.

• Chart View - Allows you to generate a 3D-view pie chart.

Legend • Show Legend - A check mark designates that the legend will be included on the graph or pie chart.


Turn the check mark off if you do not wish to show the legend.

• Series - Each series represents a different curve on the graph or a slice on the pie chart. If the graph contains only one curve, or the pie chart contains only one slice, then it is designated as Series 1. Scroll through the list and select the desired curve or slice (series number). Then, use one of the options below to customize it:

− Label - Name for the selected curve (series).

− Line Color - Color for the selected curve (series).

− Line Style (for graphs only) - Style for the selected curve (series).

− Line Width (for graphs only) - Width for the selected curve (series).

− Symbol (for graphs only) - Data point symbol to use for the selected curve (series).

• Save as Default - Place a check mark in this box to save the current legend settings as the default for subsequent graphs.

Access the Graph Options by clicking the Options button at the top of a Plot or a Graph Window.

12.11 Status Log

12.11.1 Status Log Several commands generate a status log showing the results of that command. For instance, a status log is displayed when you calculate a scenario using the GO button. The status information is displayed at the top of the dialog. The dialog contains the following buttons:

• Save - Export the status log results as an ASCII file.

• Print or Print Preview - Print or preview the status log results.

• Close - Close the status log dialog after design calculations.

• Help - Access context-sensitive online help.


Notes


Chapter 13

Engineering Libraries

13.1 Engineering Libraries Overview The Haestad Methods' Engineering Libraries and Library Managers are powerful and flexible facilities for managing specifications of common materials, objects, or components that are shared across projects. Some examples of objects that are specified through engineering libraries include pipe materials, pipe sections (in StormCAD and SewerCAD), and sanitary loads (in SewerCAD only). You can modify engineering libraries and the objects they contain by using the Tools / Engineering Libraries option, or by clicking the ellipsis (…) buttons available next to the fields in dialog boxes that make use of library objects.

The data for each engineering library is stored in a tabular ASCII file with the extension .HLB.

Tip: We strongly recommend that you only edit these files using the built-in facilities available by selecting Tools / Engineering Libraries. If absolutely necessary, these library files may be edited or repaired using any ASCII editor.

The standard set of engineering libraries shipped with your Haestad Methods product reside in the product’s program directory. By default, each project you create will use the objects in these default libraries. In special circumstances, you may wish to create custom libraries to use with one or more projects. You can do this by copying a standard library or creating a new library, and setting the path in the Engineering Library Manager to the path for the custom library.

When you change the properties for an object in an engineering library, those changes will affect all projects that use that library object. At the time a project is loaded, all of its engineering library objects are synchronized to the current library. Objects are synchronized based on their label. If the label is the same, then the object’s values will be made the same. If any library referenced in a Library Manager path cannot be found at the location specified, then the standard library in the program directory will be used. Once a project is created, it is not necessary to have access to the engineering library in order for that project to be edited or analyzed.

272 Chapter 13 – Engineering Libraries

13.2 Engineering Library Manager

13.2.1 Engineering Library Manager The Engineering Library Manager dialog consists of a table of two columns and three buttons. In the table section, there is one row for each kind of engineering library used in your project. You cannot create library types other than the types found in the set of standard libraries shipped with the product. The columns in the table are as follows:

• Library - This column lists the kind of object stored in the referenced library.

• Path - This column lists the path to the library to be used for objects of a certain kind within the current project. By default, the path will reference the standard library shipped with your Haestad Methods product. To browse for other libraries of the same type that you may have already created, click the Browse column.

The buttons will perform their respective actions for the row that is currently highlighted. These buttons are as follows:

• Browse - Click this button if you wish to search your computer or network and locate other engineering libraries. To reference a library in the path field, the library must already exist. To create it you may copy a standard library using Windows File Manager or Explorer, or click New as described below.

• Edit - Click this button if you wish to add, delete, or edit the objects within a specific kind of engineering library.

• New - Click this button if you wish to create a new library.

Note: Most users do not need to create custom libraries or edit the library paths. You only need to change path values if you wish to create and use custom libraries.

The Engineering Library Manager can be accessed by selecting Tools / \Engineering Libraries from the pull-down menus.

13.2.2 WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules WaterCAD makes use of the following library modules: • Material Library

• Minor Loss Library

• Liquid Library

• Constituent Library

13.2.3 Engineering Library Editor The Engineering Library dialogs consist of a table with two columns:

• Label - This column contains a textual description of the object. In general, objects are considered to be the same if their labels are the same. For example, when a project is loaded, the engineering library objects are synchronized to the current library based on label.

• Available in ... - This column contains a checkbox indicating whether the library object on the given row is enabled for use by this application. If an object is enabled, it will appear in choice lists as a


candidate for use in the project. If an object is disabled, it will remain in the library and be editable, but it will not be offered as a candidate for any operations in the program. If a disabled object has already been used in a project, then it will remain in use. Disabling it will not affect the existing project in any way.

The following command buttons appear on the Engineering Library dialog:

• Insert - Insert a new, unlabeled object into the current library. You must then click the Edit button to edit the label and add the appropriate values before the library will be valid. Library objects will be sorted by label in ascending alphabetical order the next time you open the Engineering Library dialog.

• Duplicate - Create a copy of the currently highlighted object at the bottom of the list.

• Delete - Delete the object represented by the highlighted row. Note that this command always deletes objects from the library, but never deletes an object from your current project if it is in use. To change the library object that is currently in use by a project, proceed to the dialog containing the field where the library object is referenced and select a different library object.

• Edit - Access the object properties editor.

• Usage - Only applies to the material engineering library. Use this button to specify specific uses for the material.

The Engineering Library Editors can be accessed by selecting Tools\Engineering Libraries from the pull-down menus, highlighting the library you would like to access, and clicking the Edit button.

13.2.4 Material Properties A customizable library of materials is provided. Pipes are constructed from various materials. It is often useful to specify the material of the pipes and channels/ditches in your hydraulic and hydrologic models. Materials provide the pipe or channel with a default value for the roughness coefficient used in the friction equations. Therefore, a material must be defined with the following properties:

• Label - Name of the material as it will appear in material selection lists.

• Culvert Inlet Material Type - Limits the type of culvert inlets that are available when the material is used as the culvert material (used in CulvertMaster). The inclusion of this property allows the sharing of libraries among Haestad Methods' products.

• Manning's Coefficient - Default value for Manning's n. This is a number generally between 0.009 and 0.300.

• Roughness Height - Default value for absolute roughness height. This will be used in conjunction with the Darcy-Weisbach friction equation. The roughness height has units of length, typically mm or ft.

• Kutter's n Coefficient (StormCAD and SewerCAD) - Default value for Kutter’s formula. This is a unitless number generally between 0.009 and 0.300.

• C Coefficient - Default value for Hazen William's C. This is a unitless number generally between 60 and 150.

The check boxes next to each item specify whether the friction method will be available for the material. For example, some materials, such as asphalt, only have Manning’s n values defined.


Usage This dialog only applies to the Material Library. Usage is what specifies the type of section or pipe that will be available for each material. Use the following commands to select which sections you would like to be available for each material:

• [ > ] Adds the selected item(s) from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.

• [ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.

• [ < ] Removes the selected item(s) from the Selected Items list.

• [ << ] Removes all items from the Selected Items list.

13.2.5 Minor Loss Properties An editable library of minor losses is provided. Minor losses are used on pressure pipes and valves to model headlosses due to pipe fittings or obstructions to the flow. A minor loss is defined with the following properties:

• Label - Name of the minor loss as it will appear in choice lists.

• Type - General type of fitting or loss element. This field is used to limit the number of minor loss elements available in choice lists. For example, the minor loss choice list on the valve dialog only includes minor losses of type valve. You cannot add or delete types.

• K Coefficient - Headloss coefficient for the minor loss. This unitless number represents the ratio of the headloss across the minor loss element to the velocity head of the flow through the element.

13.2.6 Liquid Properties An editable library of liquids is provided. All hydraulic or hydrologic networks transport a particular liquid. Liquids are defined with the following properties:

• Liquid Label - Name of the liquid as it will appear in choice lists.

• Kinematic Viscosity - Ratio of the liquid's dynamic, or absolute, viscosity to its mass density. This is a common parameter in fluid mechanics. The units of kinematic viscosity are length squared per unit time (typically m2/sec or ft2/sec).

• Specific Gravity - Ratio of the specific weight of the liquid to the specific weight of water at 4°C(39°F). Specific gravity is a unitless number.

• Temperature - Reference temperature for the liquid. This is required because the two parameters listed above are generally a function of the temperature. The default temperature for new liquids is room temperature (20°C / 68°F).

Notes: Certain friction methods (i.e. Manning's, Hazen William's) were developed experimentally, and are only applicable to water at room temperature (20°C / 68°F). This program will ask you to confirm a liquid choice that is inconsistent with the chosen friction method, but it will not prevent you from using it.

Specify the liquid to be modeled in the Project Options dialog.


13.2.7 Constituent Properties • General Tab – This tab allows you to input general constituent properties, such as the name of the

constituent, diffusivity and concentration.

• Reaction Rates Tab – This tab allows you to input the reaction order and reaction rate for Bulk and Wall reactions.

Notes: The constituent library shipped by Haestad Methods includes a single constituent labeled "Constituent". The values for this constituent do not correspond to anything in particular. It is not intended that you use this constituent for an actual analysis, but it was provided simply as a starting point for the library.

A negative value for the reaction rate constants indicates constituent decay, and a positive value indicates constituent growth.

General Tab Constituents are defined with the following general properties:

• Label - Name of the constituent as it will appear in choice lists.

• Diffusivity - Molecular diffusivity of the constituent. This value is only used when pipe wall reactions are considered in the water quality analysis. Diffusivity has units of length squared per unit time (typically m2/s or ft2/s).

• Unlimited Concentration - Check this box if the constituent does not have a limiting concentration or potential. If this box is checked, the Concentration Limit field will not be available for editing. If it is not checked, the Concentration Limit field is applicable. This box will typically be checked, but certain constituents, such as trihalomethanes (THM's), have a limiting concentration or formation potential that needs to be modeled.

• Concentration Limit - Limiting concentration or potential for the constituent. When a concentration limit is given, reaction rates will be proportional to the difference of the current concentration and the concentration limit. Concentration limit has units of mass per unit volume (typically mg/l or lbs/million gal.)

Reaction Rates Tab The water quality module of WaterCAD can track the growth or decay of a substance by reaction as it travels through a distribution system. In order to do this it needs to know the rate at which the substance reacts and how this rate might depend on substance concentration. Reactions can occur both within the bulk flow and with material along the pipe wall. Bulk fluid reactions can also occur within tanks. WaterCAD allows a modeler to use different reaction rates for the two zones of reaction. This tab allows you to input the reaction order and reaction rate for Bulk and Wall reactions. This tab is divided into two sections:

• Bulk Reaction Section - Bulk flow reactions are reactions that occur in the main flow stream of a pipe or in a storage tank, unaffected by any processes that might involve the pipe wall. The following input fields are available in this section:

− Order – This value is used to set the order of reactions occurring in the bulk fluid.

− Bulk Reaction Rate - Default bulk reaction rate coefficient assigned to all pipes. Use a positive number for growth, a negative number for decay, or 0 if no bulk reaction occurs.

• Wall Reaction Section – Wall Reactions are reactions that occur with material on or near the pipe wall. The rate of this reaction can be considered to be dependent on the concentration in the bulk


flow. The following components comprise this section:

− Order – This value is used to set the order of reactions occurring at the pipe wall. The value can be 0 or 1.

− Roughness Correlated –This checkbox will make all pipe wall reaction coefficients dependent on pipe roughness.

− Wall Reaction Rate – This input field is active when the Roughness Correlated box is unchecked. This value indicates the wall reaction rate coefficient assigned to all pipes. Use a positive number for growth, a negative number for decay, or 0 if no wall reaction occurs. The units used by this field will change depending on the Order that is specified.

− Correlation Factor – This input field is active when the Roughness Correlated Box is checked. The Correlation Factor is a unitless value that represents the factor correlating wall reaction coefficient to pipe roughness.


Chapter 14

GIS and Database Connections

14.1 Overview Haestad Methods’ GIS/Database Connection feature provides the modeler with the ability to dynamically exchange data with a variety of applications. You can establish a "connection" between your hydraulic model and relational and non-relational database management systems (RDBMS and DBMS), spreadsheets, and ESRI Shapefiles. Throughout the rest of this chapter, the term "external file" will be used to generically refer to any one of these types of files. Where information pertains to a specific type of external file, that type will be used.

The GIS/Database Connection system is extremely powerful. It can be used to update hundreds or thousands of database records with a few clicks of the mouse. This chapter provides detailed information on the structure and behavior of the system so that it can be used more effectively.

The purpose of the GIS/Database Connection system is to provide you with a safe and convenient means of exchanging data with external files. This system has several advantages over simply providing an open file format for direct manipulation by the end user.

Generality - Open file formats have a specific form that must be adhered to. This restrictiveness is problematic for both the developer and the end user. Developers are now under additional constraints when modifying the software. They must be cognizant of the fact that users may depend on this format, and are therefore less free to modify it. The end user, on the other hand, has no control over this format, and is at the mercy of the developer. A new version may change the format completely, and all of your existing data must be converted. In addition, the file format is rarely convenient for an end user since it is typically chosen for efficient processing by the program. The GIS/Database Connection system allows you to exchange data between the model and any arbitrarily defined external files. This flexibility allows you to set up a database or spreadsheet, and it frees the developer to use a file format that is most efficient for the program.

Data Protection - Open file formats can typically be modified by anyone, often without the knowledge of the modeler. By providing an interface to exchange data, the model is protected from inadvertent changes. The modeler is in complete control of when and how the model or external files are updated.

Type Coercion - Quite often the external files do not store the data using the format expected by the hydraulic model. For example, a database may store the length of a pipe using single precision floating point numbers, whereas the model works with double precision floating point numbers. When exchanging data between the model and the external file using the GIS/Database Connection system, the data is coerced from one type to the other automatically.

278 Chapter 14 – GIS and Database Connections

Unit Conversion -The quantities used in hydraulic models almost always have some unit associated with them. For example, pipe lengths are typically expressed in meters or feet. General purpose database and spreadsheet applications do not support the concept of unitized numbers. A pipe length, for example, is simply represented as 100.0. Is that 100.0 meters or 100.0 feet? The GIS/Database Connection interface allows you to specify the database unit so the numbers can be converted from the model unit to the database unit and vice versa.

Virtually all model inputs and calculated results can be exchanged through the GIS/Database Connection system. The system not only supports the update of existing model elements and external file records, but also the creation and deletion of these elements and records. For example, by performing a Sync In operation (explained in detail below), an entire hydraulic model can be built from data stored in a spreadsheet. Likewise, an empty spreadsheet can be completely populated with data from an existing hydraulic model by performing a Sync Out operation. The spreadsheet can be kept synchronized with the hydraulic model over the course of a project as new elements are added or deleted, and the input and output data is modified.

The GIS/Database Connection system has a three-tiered architecture:

• Connections

• Table or Shapefile Links

• Field Links

The first tier is the Connection. Connections are organized and managed by Connection Managers. There are two types of Connection Managers: a Database Connection Manager and a Shapefile Connection Manager. As the names imply, the first manages connections to databases and spreadsheets, and the second manages connections to ESRI Shapefiles. The Connection Managers are similar, and provide an interface for adding, editing, deleting, duplicating, and synchronizing Connections.

To exchange data between the model and external files, a Connection must be created and then synchronized. The two synchronization operations that can be performed on a Connection are Sync In and Sync Out. Sync In synchronizes the model to the data contained in external files. In this case, the model acts as a "consumer" of the data, and external files act as the data "provider". Sync Out synchronizes external files to the data contained in the model. Thus, for Sync Out, the model is the data provider and external files are the consumers. Exactly what data is exchanged during synchronization depends on how the Connection is defined. Intuitively, a Connection must specify which files are to be connected to the model, and what data in each file is to be exchanged.

The second tier is the Table or Shapefile Link. A Database Connection uses these links to gather and store information. Each Connection can contain one or more Table or Shapefile Links. Each of these links specifies the type of external file with which to exchange data (implied with Shapefile links), the name of the file, and, if the file contains multiple tables, which table within the file is of interest.

The third tier of the system is the Field Link. Each Table or Shapefile Link uses one or more Field Links to specify exactly what data in the external file is going to be exchanged. A Field Link defines the fundamental mapping between a field in an external file and a field in the model. For example, a field link may be used to "map" the GRND_FT field of an external database file to the Ground Elevation attribute of the model.

In summary, a Connection defines a link between the model and external files. Table or Shapefile Links and Field Links are used to specify files, tables, and fields to be linked. Once a Connection is created, it can be synchronized in or out. The synchronization action will update models ("in" direction) or the external files ("out" direction).

The rest of this chapter provides details on the dialogs and windows used to interact with the GIS/Database Connection system. Although Database Connections and Shapefile Connections are similar in concept, there are differences in the interfaces and options. Therefore, they will be discussed in separate sections.


14.2 Database Connections

14.2.1 Database Connection Manager This manager, accessed by selecting File / Synchronize / Database Connections from the pull-down menu, helps you track and work with database connections. On the left side of this dialog is a list of the current database connections.

There are several options available in the Database Connection Manager, including:

• Add - Creates a new database connection using the Database Connection Editor.

• Edit - Changes the configuration of the currently selected connection. This will open the Database Connection Editor, where you can rename the connection, change the associated database files, and perform other changes to the connection configuration.

• Duplicate - Creates a connection identical to the selected one. This feature is very helpful when defining two or more connections with many similar attributes.

• Delete - Removes the selected connection from the list.

• Synchronize In - Updates the network attributes from the databases defined in the selected connection.

• Synchronize Out - Updates all databases in the connection from the current status of the model.

• Reset - Returns the highlighted standard database import or export connection to default settings.

When synchronizing in, output fields such as hydraulic grade line or computed pipe flow will not be updated. If an attempt is made to update an output field during a Synchronize In operation, a "Read Only Warning" will be issued in the status log, indicating which attribute could not be updated.

When synchronizing out, all mapped information will be overwritten in the database files, including input and output conditions.

Tips: If you do not want your input values overwritten upon synchronizing out, simply duplicate the connection. Then, edit one connection such that it includes only the values you want to synchronize in, and one that includes only the values you want to synchronize out.

When synchronizing out, be sure that the model element labels are of the same data type as the database column to which you are mapping. Otherwise, synchronizing out to the database will yield erroneous results. For example, if you were to synchronize in from a database where your pipe identifier was numeric, then any changes or additions to the pipes in the model should also use a numeric-labeling scheme. To assure the consistency in type in this case, select Element Labeling from the Tools menu and remove the appropriate element prefixes before any changes are made to the model.

To access the Database Connection Manager, select File / Synchronize / Database Connections. From this dialog, there are two ways to get to the Database Connection Editor. You can click Add to create a new connection, or select Edit to change an existing connection.

14.2.2 Standard Database Import/Export The Database Connection Manager is initialized with four standard database connections for importing and exporting model data using simple File menu commands. These standard connections are as follows:

• [Project Export - SI] - Used for the File / Export / Database command when the global unit system


is set to System International.

• [Project Export - US] - Used for the File / Export / Database command when the global unit system is set to US Customary.

• [Project Import - SI] - Used for the File / Import / Database command when the global unit system is set to System International.

• [Project Import - US] - Used for the File / Import / Database command when the global unit system is set to US Customary.

The purpose of the standard database connections is to provide a powerful yet easy-to-use method of exposing the model data to external applications using a standard database format, Microsoft Access database (.mdb). This method is powerful because it provides you with all the flexibility and functionality of a user-defined database connection, such as unit conversion and type coercion. It is easy to use because it is predefined with all of the standard model data, and requires nothing more than a file name to execute.

The standard database connections are almost identical to user-defined database connections with the following exceptions:

• Standard connections cannot be deleted.

• The label of a standard database connection cannot be changed.

• The target database for a standard database connection is determined at the time it is synchronized. During a Synchronize In operation, you will be prompted to choose an existing Microsoft Access Database (.mdb). During a Synchronize Out, you will be prompted for the name of a new Access database. If an existing filename is chosen, a warning will indicate that the existing file will be overwritten.

• The field names of the external database tables are editable from within the Table Link Editor.

• The Database Type on the Table Link Editor cannot be changed.

• Standard connections can be reset to their factory default values. To do this, select a standard connection from the list in the Database Connection Manager, and click the Reset button.

By default, the standard database connections include a table link for each element type, and field links for all the attributes related to that element type, with some minor exceptions. The default units for the specified unit system (SI or US) are used for unitized attributes. The Key Label field is designated as the key field for each of the table links, and it is created as an index for the table during database creation. No duplicates are allowed.

As noted above, the field links external field names can be edited directly within the Table Link Editor. It is valid to have more than one internal attribute "mapped" to a single external field name. Although this is not the case for the standard connections in their factory default state, you can create this condition. Under this condition, the following behaviors will be observed:

• Import (Synchronize In) - All of the attributes will be populated with the value of the database field if it is a valid value for the specified attributes.

• Export (Synchronize Out) - The database field will be populated with the last non-blank attribute value.

Note: If an existing filename is chosen during export, the existing database file will be overwritten. Therefore, any custom tables, queries, or forms present in that database will be lost.


Note: Model data that are typically a collection of data (e.g. SewerCAD unit sanitary loads, StormCAD watershed areas and rational C coefficients, and WaterCAD junction demands) cannot be written to a single record, and are therefore not exported to the database. However, if these collections only contain a single item, that single item will be transferred to and from the database during export and import.

By default, the Standard Database Export creates Microsoft Office 2000 Access files. These files cannot be read with Office 97. If you want to use Office 97, you need to use a text editor to edit the HAESTAD.INI file located in your HAESTAD directory, and replace the line:

ConnectionDatabaseFormat=0 with:

ConnectionDatabaseFormat=3 Basically, a value of 3 results in the program creating an Office 97 Access file, whereas a value of 0 will have the program generate an Office 2000 Access file.

Use the File / Import / Database menu item to import data using the standard database connections.

Use the File / Export / Database menu item to export data using the standard database connections.

Use the File / Synchronize / Database Connections menu item to view or edit the standard database connections.

14.2.3 Database Connection Editor The Database Connection Editor is used for defining the group of table links to be included in the connection. The Database Connection Editor has tabs for Database Connection and Synchronization Options.

There are three standard operation buttons at the bottom of the dialog:

• OK - Accepts the current condition of the connection, including any changes that have been made.

• Cancel - Closes the Database Connection Editor without saving any changes.

• Help - Opens the context-sensitive Help system.

To access the Database Connection Editor, select File / Synchronize / Database Connections from the pull-down menu. This will open the Database Connection Manager. From this dialog, there are two ways to get to the Database Connection Editor. You can click Add to create a new connection, or select Edit to change an existing connection.

Database Connection Tab The Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor provides an interface for the standard attributes of a connection. It contains the following:

• Connection Label - A required unique alphanumeric identification for the connection. This is the label that appears in the list on the Database Connection Manager dialog.

• Table Links - Provide basic information about each table link, such as the referenced database file, the specific table within the database, and the type of table that is referenced. A table link can be highlighted from the list, at which point the following commands can be performed using the buttons on the right side of the dialog:

− Add - Adds a new table link. If there are no table links currently defined for this connection, this will be the only button available.


− Edit - Changes the characteristics of the selected table link, such as the referenced file or table, or the mapping of the table’s field links.

− Duplicate - Duplicates the selected table. This command is very helpful when defining two or more table links with similar attributes.

− Delete - Deletes the selected table link from the connection.

Synchronization Options Tab The Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection Editor provides an interface for some of the behaviors of the connection. These options cannot be accessed until the Table Links are defined, and are as follows:

• Add objects to destination if present in source - If this option is selected, when performing a Synchronize Out for example, elements that are present in the model but are not found in the database file will be created in the database. If this is not checked, only the elements that are present in both the model and the database will be updated.

• Prompt before adding object - If this is checked, you will get a dialog notifying you of each unmapped element in the source, and asking if you would like to create a new element in the destination. If this is not checked, the additional elements will be automatically created in the database.

• Remove objects from destination if missing from source - If this is checked when synchronizing out, elements that are present in the database but not in the model will be deleted from the database. If this is not checked, the unmapped elements will be ignored.

• Prompt before remove - When this box is checked a dialog will appear notifying you of each unmapped element in the destination and asking if you would like to remove that element. If the box is not checked, the additional elements will be automatically removed from the database.

Notes: In order to be successfully created from the database, pipe elements must have a Start and Stop node associated with them. This association can be established by mapping the ‘+ Start Node’ and ‘+ Stop Node’ attributes in the pipe table link, or by the ‘+ In Link’ or ‘+ Out Link’ of a node table link. Mapping both the pipe table and node table attributes may result in the reading of redundant data causing the connection to fail.

By default, elements created from a database are located at coordinate (0,0). This behavior can be overridden by mapping the X and Y or Northing and Easting attributes of the node elements.

Database Table Link Editor The Table Link Editor is a tool for defining or modifying a table link. This dialog is separated into two groups, one dealing with the file and table information, and the other dealing with the field links (attribute mapping).

The general table link information includes:

• Database Type - Type of database to which the link will be made. There are many types of external files that can be linked into the model. Among these are Btrieve, Dbase, Excel, FoxPro, Jet (.mdb files, such as Access), Lotus, and Paradox, as well as Oracle, Sybase, SQL Server, or any other Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) compliant database.

• Database File - File referenced by the table link. To browse directories and specify a file path, click the ellipsis (...) button.

• Database Table - Once the external file has been selected, it will be scanned for tables (or


worksheets), which will then be available for selection from this field. Only one table can be linked for each table link, but table links can be easily duplicated and edited from the Database Connection Editor.

• Table Type - Defines the type of data that can be mapped for this particular table link. For example, a Pipe type of table link means that the available model attributes to be mapped are items such as material, roughness coefficient, flow rate, and velocity.

• Key\Label Field - Key by which the entire database-model mapping is defined. The model references each element by a unique alphanumeric label, and the database must contain the same labels in one of the columns. If the key field for you data type is numeric, you will want to be sure that your model labels include numbers only. Make sure that there are no duplicate element labels/keys within the data source.

The Field Links group is a manager for the attribute mapping. The tabular list in this group has three field columns:

• Model (SewerCAD, StormCAD, WaterCAD) - Each item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being mapped to the database. The list of available attributes depends on the type of the table.

Note: Clicking the button in the Field Links cell will open the Quick Attribute Selector. This will allow you select attributes from organized categories to more easily find needed attributes.

• Database - Each item in this column is a heading from the database table, which correlates to the item in the model being mapped.

• Unit - This column defines the units of the values in the database. During a synchronization operation, the values will automatically be converted to the appropriate units to maintain the desired unit systems in both the model and the database. No conversion on your part is required.

In addition to the standard table operations of Insert, Duplicate, and Delete, the Field Links Manager offers the following additional operation:

• Select - Opens the Select Field Links dialog for an efficient method of selecting the fields of interest from the available model fields.

To access the Table Links Editor, select File / Synchronize / Database Connections from the pull-down menu. This will open the Database Connection Manager. Click Add to create a new connection, or select Edit to change an existing connection. From the Database Connection Tab of the Database Connection Editor, click Add or Edit.

Select Field Links The Select Field Links dialog provides an easy-to-use interface for populating the Field Links group of the Table Link Editor or Shapefile Link Editor.

The dialog contains two lists:

• Available Items - Model attributes that are available for mapping in the current Table or Shapefile Link.

• Selected Items - Model attributes that have been selected for mapping.

The following buttons are provided to move items from one list to the other:

• [>] - Moves the selected item or items from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.


• [>>] - Moves all items from the Available Items list to the Selected Items list.

• [<] - Moves the selected item or items from the Selected Items list to the Available Items list.

• [<<] - Moves all items from the Items Selected list to the Available Items list.

Note: The Select Field Links dialog provides functions similar to the Table Setup dialog. Please refer to Selected Table Columns help for information on topics such as selecting multiple attributes.

14.2.4 ODBC

About ODBC

ODBC, which stands for Open Database Connectivity, is a standard programming interface developed by Microsoft for accessing data in relational and non-relational database management systems (DBMS). Using ODBC, applications such as Haestad Methods’ engineering software can access data stored in many different PC, minicomputer, and mainframe DBMS, even though each uses a different storage format and programming interface. The ODBC architecture conceptually consists of three parts:

• The application program - The Haestad Methods product.

• The Data Source Administrator Program - Embedded in Microsoft Windows.

• The low-level drivers for accessing specific databases - Supplied by your database vendor.

Although most computers with Windows will have ODBC present, the exact databases you can interface via ODBC will depend on the databases and drivers installed on your computer.

ODBC is powerful because it is generic and can access many database systems, including mainframe, GIS, and legacy systems. However, because ODBC must be general, it is slower, more complex, and more difficult to use than working directly with a database. When you have the option to work directly with a database, you will usually find it faster and easier than going through ODBC.

For specific information about ODBC in your environment, see your database vendor’s documentation. For general information on ODBC, see the online Help for the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program. To find the Administrator Program, go to the Control Panel of your computer and double-click the ODBC icon. Choose the Help button on the dialog that appears, and go to the Help Contents.

ODBC Database Type The first field of the database connection Table Link Editor is the Database Type. The list box displays the external databases and versions supported by the Database Connection feature. One of the Database Types you can select is ODBC. This does not refer to a specific database or version. It is actually a link to the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program running on your computer. This link will provide an interface between the Haestad Methods’ Database Connection and a specific DBMS and source database file.

ODBC Database File If you have selected ODBC as the Database Type, when you click the ellipsis (...) button next to the Database File field the ODBC Data Source Administrator Program will take over and offer a list of the ODBC data sources installed on your computer. Depending on how your computer is configured, you may see database systems or actual database files from which to choose.


Note: You will also see database systems such as Microsoft Jet or Excel that are supported directly via choices in the Database Type list. In general, the Database Connection feature will work faster by choosing these database systems directly rather than going through ODBC.

If you choose a data source from the Administrator Program, upon returning to the Table Link Editor you will see an ODBC "connect string" in the Database File field, rather than a file path. This connect string is a series of key = value pairs, separated by semicolons. It specifies the database location, security parameters, and access options needed by the particular ODBC driver you are using. In general, you should not edit this string in any way as you could introduce an error that would prevent the ODBC driver from accessing the data source you have selected.

Note: If you are unable to successfully synchronize to the data source using the default form of the ODBC string, it is possible that you may need to add some parameters to the string that are specific to your environment. See your database vendor’s ODBC documentation for details.

Synchronizing Via ODBC Once you have successfully created and entered the data for a database connection that uses ODBC, the Synchronize In and Synchronize Out operations perform as they do for any other database format. However, ODBC databases are accessed with slightly different internal mechanisms, and thus may generate different error conditions. If synchronization fails to complete, see the status log for error messages. Note the project or database object the program was processing when the error occurred. Refer to your database vendor’s documentation for detailed information on any errors reported.

Using ODBC to access SQL Server databases will result in an error #3197 if the synchronization attempts to delete a database record. To avoid this error uncheck Remove Objects on the Synchronization Options tab of the Database Connection Editor.

ODBC Database Tables and Fields There are many complexities in successfully accessing ODBC databases. You will know if there are problems on your machine because the Database Table or other database-related fields will not have any entries in the associated drop-down lists.

If this happens, confirm that ODBC is installed and operating correctly on your computer. Double-check that the ODBC data source you are trying to reference actually exists and is accessible by other programs in your environment. Check the HAESTAD.LOG file for error messages pertaining to ODBC. If none of these steps helps you correct the problem, please call Haestad Methods' Technical Support.

Given the diversity of ODBC database drivers and the difficulty of reproducing your networked computing environment, we cannot guarantee that the Database Connection feature will function with all ODBC databases. However, we will try to determine the source of your problem and offer a fix or workaround if possible.

If you edit the connect string manually, you will need to re-enter the dependent fields such as Database Table and Field Links.

14.2.5 Sharing Database Connections between Projects When WaterCAD works with database connections, it is using a file with an .HDC extension, which stores the information regarding database files, table links, and field mapping.

When you open a WaterCAD project file (.WCD), WaterCAD first looks for a file in the same directory and with the same filename but with the .HDC extension. If it finds this file, it uses the database


connectivity information contained therein. If it does not find this file, then it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called WTRC.HDC.

Sharing Database Connections between Projects If you are working on a local drive and you have several project files, all of which reference common Connection information, let your project files automatically default to the WTRC.HDC file. Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will be automatically reflected when you open any other project.

If there are several people working on different projects on different computers, but they still wish to have common connectivity information, the appropriate .HDC file can be copied (and renamed if necessary) to the individual local drives.

Preventing Database Connectivity Sharing between Projects There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful, such as when there are many projects, each with different database connectivity. At these times, it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project rather than with all projects. To do this, simply copy the WTRC.HDC file from the installed WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file, and rename it to the same name as your .WCD file.

For example, if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1.WCD, rename WTRC.HDC to PROJECT1.HDC. The connections in PROJECT1.WCD can then be modified without the effects being reflected in any other projects.

14.2.6 Database Connection Example To connect your model to an external file, take the following steps:

From the File menu, select Synchronize \ Database Connections to open the Database Connection Manager. Click Add.

• In the Database Connection Editor, type a label for your Connection.

• Click Add to create a new table link. This will take you to the Table Link Editor.

• Select the type of file to which you would like to link, and then click the ellipsis (…) button to browse for and select your database file.

• Choose the table to which you would like to link, and the type of table.

• Choose the Key / Label Field to define the column in the database that contains the labels of the elements to be synchronized.

• Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and the associated database column and unit.

• Click OK to exit the Table Link Editor.

• Click OK again to exit the Database Connection Editor.

• You should be back at the Database Connection Manager. You can leave this dialog and return to the model, or you can choose to Synchronize In to the model from the database, or Synchronize Out to the database from the model. Click OK to save changes and exit back to the model. Click Cancel exit back to the model without saving changes.


14.3 Shapefile Connections

14.3.1 Shapefile Connection Manager This manager is identical to the Database Connection Manager, except that it helps you to track and work with Shapefile connections rather than database connections. Only a brief description of each dialog control is presented here. Please refer to the Database Connection Manager topic for a more detailed explanation.

• Add - Creates a new Shapefile connection. This will open the Shapefile Connection Wizard.

• Edit - Changes the configuration of the currently selected connection. This will open the Shapefile Connection Editor.

• Duplicate - Duplicates the selected connection.

• Delete - Deletes the selected connection from the list.

• Synchronize In - Updates the network attributes from the Shapefiles linked to the selected connection.

• Synchronize Out - Updates all Shapefiles within the connection from the current status of the model.

Note: See the Overview at the beginning of this chapter for a general discussion of Shapefile Connections.

To open the Shapefile Connection Manager, select the File / Synchronize / Shapefile Connections menu item. If there are no existing Shapefile Connections you will be prompted to create a new Shapefile. Click No if you wish to continue on to the Shapefile Connection Manager.

Shapefile Connection Wizard The Shapefile Connection Wizard provides an easy-to-use interface for defining a new Shapefile Connection. It is similar to the Shapefile Import Wizard, but has a few additional steps. The major steps in the wizard are as follows:

• Label - Enters an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify the Shapefile Connection.

• Select Element Types - Chooses the types of network elements you wish to connect to Shapefiles.

• Shapefile Synchronization Options - Specifies the spatial data unit, and configures other options.

• Import Shapefile Link Editor - Chooses the Shapefile to which you want to connect and specifies the details of the link.

• Synchronize Now - Choose whether you want to synchronize the Shapefile Connection when finished with the wizard. You can choose to synchronize in either direction.

Shapefile Connection Label The Shapefile Connection Label window allows you to enter a unique alphanumeric label for your Shapefile Connection. This window is presented in the Import and Export Shapefile Connection Wizards, as well as the Shapefile Connection Wizard.


Synchronize Now? The last step in the Shapefile Connection Wizard, the Synchronize Now? Window, allows you to specify whether you wish to synchronize the Shapefile Connection immediately after editing it in the wizard. The following options are available:

• Synchronize Shapefile Connection - Check this box if you wish to synchronize the connection immediately upon clicking the Finished button. By default this box is checked. If you uncheck it, you will return to the Shapefile Connection Manager after clicking the Finished button.

• In - Select this radio button if you wish to synchronize the connection in to the model. This will update the model data from the Shapefiles linked to the connection.

• Out - Select this radio button if you wish to synchronize the connection out to the Shapefiles linked to the connection. This will update the Shapefiles from the model.

14.3.2 Shapefile Connection Editor The Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the Database Connection Editor. It offers the tabs for Shapefile Connection and Synchronization Options.

To use the Shapefile Connection Editor, do the following:

1. Select Synchronize / Shapefile Connections from the File menu.

2. If you do not currently have any Shapefile connections defined, you will be prompted to indicate if you wish to create one now. If you answer Yes, you will be automatically taken to the Shapefile Connection Wizard.

3. If there are connections already defined, or if you answer No to the prompt to create one now, you will be taken to the Shapefile Connection Manager. Select Edit to open the Shapefile Connection Editor.

Shapefile Connection The Shapefile Connection tab of the Shapefile Connection Editor is similar to the Database Connection tab of the Database Connection Editor. It contains the following:

• Connection Label - A unique alphanumeric identification for the connection. This is the label that appears in the list on the Shapefile Connection Manager dialog.

• Table Links - List that provides basic information about each Shapefile link, such as the referenced Shapefile, the feature type of the Shapefile, and the type of element that is referenced. As with the other managers, a Shapefile link can be highlighted from the list, at which point the following commands can be performed using the buttons on the right side of the dialog:

− Add - Defines a new Shapefile link. If there are no table links currently defined for this connection, this will be the only button available. Clicking this button invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard.

− Edit - Changes the characteristics of the selected Shapefile link, such as the referenced file or the mapping of the Shapefile’s field links. Clicking this button also invokes the Shapefile Link Wizard.

− Duplicate - Creates an identical Shapefile link to the selected one. This is very helpful when defining two or more Shapefile links with similar attributes.

− Delete - Removes the selected Shapefile link from the connection.


14.3.3 Shapefile Link Wizard The Shapefile Link Wizard is used when adding new Shapefile Links to a Shapefile Connection, or when editing the existing links of a Shapefile Connection. The first step of the wizard is bypassed when editing an existing link. The basic steps of the wizard are as follows:

• Select Element Type - Similar to the Select Element Types window for importing Shapefiles, except that radio buttons are used rather than check boxes. This is because a Shapefile Connection represents a single element type.

• Import Shapefile - Choose the Shapefile to which you would like to connect, and the Key/Label Field to specify the column in the Shapefile that contains the matching element labels in the network. Define as many field links as necessary. For each link, specify the model attribute, the associated Shapefile column, and the Unit in which the Shapefile attribute is stored.

• Shapefile Link Summary - Quick review of the details specified in the wizard.

As with all wizards, you can move forward or backward through the process to make changes. Click the Finished button when you are done making changes to the Shapefile Link.

Shapefile Link Summary The Shapefile Link Summary window provides an opportunity to review the details of the Shapefile Link before completing the editing process. The following information is provided in the summary window:

• Type - Type of element represented by this Shapefile Link.

• Shapefile - Full path and file name of the Shapefile referenced by this Shapefile Link.

• Key/Label Field - Shapefile field used to map Shapefile records to their corresponding network elements in the model.

• Attributes Mapped - Number of Field Links mapped in this Shapefile Link.

14.3.4 Import Shapefile Wizard The Import Shapefile Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of importing ESRI Shapefiles. These are the basic steps for importing Shapefiles:

• Select Element Types - Select the type of network elements you wish to import.

• Shapefile Synchronization Options - Specify the spatial data unit and configure other options.

• Import Shapefile - Browse to and select the Shapefiles you would like to import, and select the Key/Label Field to specify the column in the Shapefile that contains the matching element labels in the network. Define as many field links as necessary. For each link, specify the network attribute, the associated Shapefile column, and the Unit in which the Shapefile attribute is stored.

• Create Shapefile Connection - Select whether you want to establish a Shapefile Connection. The Shapefile Connection allows you to update the Shapefile with values from your model, or to update your model from the Shapefile.

While using the wizard, you can move forward or backward through the process to make changes by clicking the Next and Back buttons. Click the Finished button when you are done making changes to import Shapefiles.

To access the Import Shapefile Wizard, select File / Import / Shapefile from the pull-down menus.


Select Element Types The Select Element Types window is used for selecting the types of network elements that are of interest when importing and exporting Shapefiles, or when creating a Shapefile Connection. The window contains a list of network element types with a check box preceding each type.

To select an element type for Shapefile Import, Export, or Connection, put a check mark in the corresponding box.

Shapefile Synchronization Options Several options are available to customize the Shapefile synchronization process. The Shapefile Synchronization Options are available for editing in the Import Shapefile Wizard or through the Shapefile Connection Editor.

The first group of options is only available when editing a Shapefile Connection. These options are exactly the same as their counterparts in Database Synchronization Options, and are as follows:

• Prompt before adding object

• Prompt before removing object

Unlike the Database Synchronization Options, the Shapefile Synchronization Options do not allow for optionally adding or removing elements. When synchronized, Shapefiles and the model will contain exactly the same number of records for the specified element type. For example, suppose a Shapefile contains a record for the junction labeled J-1. When this Shapefile is synchronized into the model, the model will automatically add a junction labeled J-1 if none currently exists. Likewise, if J-1 is removed from the model and then synchronized out to the Shapefile, the record for J-1 will automatically be removed from the Shapefile. You have no control over this.

The rest of the options are available during the Shapefile Import Wizard or through the Shapefile Connection Editor.

Shapefile Unit - Choose a unit from the available list. This is the unit of the spatial data in the Shapefile. For example, if the X and Y coordinates of the Shapefile represent feet, choose feet from the list. If they represent meters, select meters. This unit must be the same for every Shapefile in the Shapefile Connection. If you wish to import Shapefiles that have different spatial data units, create a separate connection for each unit.

When Missing Connectivity Data As noted in the Table Link Editor topic, to create a pipe from an external file it is necessary for a pipe to have a start node and stop node associated with it. Typically, these "connectivity" associations are created by synchronizing the ‘+ Start Node’ and ‘+ Stop Node’ attributes of the pipe. Since a Shapefile contains spatial data, it is also possible to establish these associations based on the location of nodes relative to the end points of the pipe. The following options allow you to customize this behavior:

• Establish By Spatial Data - Check this box to configure the synchronization so that any missing connectivity data (start node, stop node, or both) for a pipe will be established from the spatial data if possible.

• Tolerance - This value represents the distance to be searched when trying to locate nodes for establishing connectivity for a pipe. All nodes within the tolerance of a pipe’s end point will be collected, and the closest node will be selected for connection.

• Create Nodes if None Found - Check this box if you would like nodes to be created during the synchronization when no nodes are found within the specified tolerance of a pipe’s end point. If this box is not checked, and no nodes are found within the tolerance, the pipe will not be created because it has insufficient connectivity data.


Import Shapefile Link Editor The Import Shapefile Link Editor is similar to the Database Table Link Editor. Refer to that topic for detailed information on the following Shapefile Link parameters:

• Shapefile - Location of the file that is being referenced by the Shapefile link. This is identical to the Database File parameter of the Table Link Editor.

• Key/Label Field - Key by which the entire Shapefile/model mapping is defined.

• Field Links - Identical to the Field Links group of the Database Table Link Editor.

Create Shapefile Connection The Create Shapefile Connection window provides an opportunity during a Shapefile Import or Export to specify that a persistent connection containing the Shapefile Links and Synchronization Options be created. This connection can be used at a later time to synchronize the model and the Shapefiles. The Create Shapefile Connection window has the following parameters:

• Add Shapefile Connection - Check this box if you wish to add a persistent Shapefile Connection to the Shapefile Connection Manager. By default, this box is checked.

• Label - Specify an alphanumeric label for the connection. This field is only editable when the Add Shapefile Connection box is checked.

To access the Shapefile Import Wizard, select File\Import\Shapefile from the pull-down menu.

Shapefile Import Example Follow these steps to import one or more Shapefiles into a new or existing model:

From the File menu, select Import\Shapefile to access the Import Shapefile Wizard.

• Choose the element types that you wish to import by selecting one or more of the check boxes in the list, and then click the Next button.

• Configure the options for this import. First, select the unit for the spatial data of the Shapefile. Then, if appropriate for your situation, click the Establish by Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group, and enter a value in the Tolerance field. For more information regarding these options, refer to the section on Shapefile Synchronization Options. Click the Next button to proceed to the Shapefile Link Editors.

• You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor for each element type you choose to import. Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor:

a. Enter the name of the Shapefile you wish to import for the specified element type. Click the ellipsis (…) button to interactively browse for and select your Shapefile.

b. Choose the Key/Label field to define the column in the Shapefile that maps to the element labels in the model.

c. Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and the associated Shapefile column and unit. Use the Select button for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button.

• Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persistent link between the Shapefile(s) you are importing and the model. If you choose to create a Shapefile Connection, enter an alphanumeric label to identify the connection. Click the Finished button to import the Shapefiles.


14.3.5 Export Shapefile Wizard This program has the capability of exporting network elements in the ESRI Shapefile Format. The ESRI Shapefile is actually three files that together define the spatial and non-spatial attributes of a map feature. In the case of Haestad Methods hydraulic models, map features are network elements (e.g. pipes, junctions). Exporting Shapefiles creates brand new files. If you are exporting a Shapefile to a directory that already contains a Shapefile of the same name, the existing Shapefile will be completely overwritten. If you wish to update the Shapefile rather than overwriting it, use the Shapefile Connection feature.

The major components of the Wizard are as follows:

• Select Element Types - Choose the type of network elements you wish to export. Each type of network element will have its own Shapefile associated with it. This component is identical to the Import Wizard’s Select Element Types component.

• Export Shapefile Link Editor - Enter a name for each Shapefile you wish to create. Each Shapefile name must be no more than eight characters in length, and should not be duplicated. Define as many field links as necessary. For each link, specify the network attribute. The Shapefile variable will default to a preset value, which can be edited.

• Create Shapefile Connection - Choose whether you want to establish a Shapefile Connection for this Shapefile. The Shapefile Connection allows you to update the Shapefile with values from your model, or to update your model from the Shapefile. This component is identical to the Import Wizard’s Create Shapefile Connection component.

While using the Wizard, you can move forward or backward through the process by clicking the Next and Back buttons. When you are finished defining it, click the Finished button to create the Shapefile.

To export a specific network element type as a Shapefile, choose File / Export / Shapefile from the pull-down menus. This opens the Export Shapefile Wizard.

Export Shapefile Link Editor The Export Shapefile Link Editor is similar to the Database Table Link Editor, with the following differences:

• Shapefile - The name and location for the file that is being exported. The Shapefile name is limited to eight characters.

The Field Links group is used to specify the attributes and Shapefile column headings that you wish to export, as follows:

• Model - Each item in this column is an attribute in the model that is being exported to the Shapefile. The list of available attributes depends on the type of table.

• Shapefile - Each item in this column is a column heading in the Shapefile being created, which correlates to the item in the model being mapped. By default, the headings are set to an all-capitals abbreviation of the attribute name, with spaces and periods replaced by the underscore character. The column heading can be changed, but must be less than ten characters long and cannot contain periods.

Notes: The spatial data in the Shapefiles being created will be in the current display unit for map coordinates. For example, if the X and Y or Northing and Easting values in the model are displayed in meters at the time of the export, then the spatial data in the Shapefiles created will also be in meters.

The values for the exported attributes will be in the current display units for that attribute. For example, if a junction elevation attribute is displayed in feet at the time of the export, the Shapefile will contain that value in feet.


Shapefile Export Example

Follow these steps to export one or more Shapefiles from the model: From the File menu, select Export / Shapefile to access the Export Shapefile Wizard.

• Select the element types that you wish to export by selecting one or more of the check boxes in the list, then click the Next button.

• You will be presented with an Export Shapefile Link Editor for each element type you choose to export. Perform the following steps for each Export Shapefile Link Editor:

− Enter the name of the Shapefile you wish to create for the specified element type. Click the ellipsis (...) button to interactively browse for a directory in which to store the Shapefile.

− Define as many field links as necessary by selecting the model attribute and providing a name for the associated Shapefile column. Use the Select button for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button to continue.

− Click the Add Shapefile Connection check box if you wish to create a persistent link between the Shapefile(s) you are exporting and the model. If you choose to create a Shapefile Connection, enter an alphanumeric label to identify the connection. Click the Finished button to export Shapefiles.

14.3.6 Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects When WaterCAD works with shapefile connections, it is using a file with an .HSC extension, which stores the information regarding the shapefiles and field mapping for each element type.

When you open a WaterCAD project file (.WCD), WaterCAD first looks for a file in the same directory and with the same filename but with the .HSC extension. If it finds this file, it uses the shapefile connectivity information contained therein. If it does not find this file, it defaults to a file in the installed WaterCAD directory called WTRC.HSC.

Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects If you are working on a local drive, and you have several project files that all reference common Connection information, let your project files automatically default to the WTRC.HSC file. Any connectivity changes that you work on in one project will be automatically reflected when you open any other project.

If there are several people working on different projects on different computers, but they still wish to have common connectivity information, the appropriate .HSC file can be copied (and renamed if necessary) to the individual local drives.

Preventing Shapefile Connectivity Sharing between Projects There are times when shared connectivity can be more cumbersome than helpful such as when there are many projects, each with different database connectivity. At these times, it is more useful to have the connectivity associated with one specific project, rather than with all projects. To do this, simply copy the WTRC.HSC file from the installed WaterCAD directory to the same location as your project file, and rename it to the same name as your .WCD file.

For example, if your WaterCAD project file is PROJECT1.WCD, rename WTRC.HSC to PROJECT1.HSC. The connections in PROJECT1.WCD can then be modified without the effects being reflected in any other projects.


14.3.7 Shapefile Format An ESRI Shapefile actually consists of three separate files that combine to define the spatial and non-spatial attributes of a map feature. The three required files are as follows:

• Main File - A binary file with an extension of .SHP. It contains the spatial attributes associated with the map features. For example, a polyline record contains a series of points, and a point record contains X and Y coordinates.

• Index File - A binary file with an extension of .SHX. It contains the byte position of each record in the main file.

• Database File - A dBase III file with an extension of .DBF. It contains the non-spatial data associated with the map features.

All three files must have the same file name with the exception of the extension, and be located in the same directory.

14.3.8 Shapefile Connection Example Follow these steps to connect one or more Shapefiles to the model:

• From the File menu, select Synchronize / Shapefile Connections.

• If you do not have any connections currently defined, you will be asked if you want to create a new one now. Select Yes. If you already have one or more connections defined, you will go to the Shapefile Connection Manager. Click Add to access the Shapefile Connection Wizard.

• Provide an alphanumeric label to uniquely identify this new connection. Click the Next button.

• Choose the element types that you wish to import by clicking one or more of the check boxes in the list, and click the Next button.

• Configure the options for this connection. First select the unit for the spatial data of the Shapefile. Then, if appropriate for your situation, click the Establish by Spatial Data check box in the When Missing Connectivity Data group, and enter a value in the Tolerance field. For more information regarding these options, refer to the section on Shapefile Synchronization Options. Click the Next button to proceed to the Shapefile Link Editors.

• You will be presented with an Import Shapefile Link Editor for each element type you chose to import. Perform the following steps for each Import Shapefile Link Editor:

− Enter the name of the Shapefile to which you wish to connect for the specified element type. Click the ellipsis (…) button to interactively browse for and select your Shapefile.

− Choose the Key/Label field to define the column in the Shapefile that maps to the element labels in the model.

− Define as many field links as you want by selecting the model attribute and the associated Shapefile column and unit if appropriate. Use the Select button for making the selection process more efficient. Click the Next button.

• Check the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box if you wish to synchronize the connection immediately upon clicking the Finished button.

• If the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box is checked, choose whether you want to Synchronize In to the model from a Shapefile, or Synchronize Out to the Shapefile from the model.

• Click the Finished button to synchronize the connection if the Synchronize Shapefile Connection box is checked, or to return to the Shapefile Connection Manager.


Chapter 15

Exchanging Data with CAD Software

15.1 AutoCAD Polyline to Pipe Conversion

15.1.1 Polyline to Pipe Conversion Overview This feature allows you to quickly construct a network based on the entities contained in an AutoCAD drawing. Although this feature is called Polyline to Pipe, Line and Block entities can be converted as well. Polylines and Lines can be converted to pipes and Blocks can be converted to any available node type.

Building a model based on graphical elements can be an error-prone process. This is due to the fact that a drawing can appear to be correct visually, but may contain problems that are not readily apparent. For example, what appears to be a single line in a drawing could in fact be made up of many line segments, or it could be made up of two lines, one directly on top of another.

To help alleviate some of the problems that you may encounter during the import process, a comprehensive drawing review is also performed. During the conversion process, the network is analyzed and potential problems are flagged for review. After performing the conversion, the Drawing Review window will allow you to navigate to and fix any problems that are encountered.

Tips: The Polyline to Pipe conversion cannot be undone. Be sure to save your project before you begin.

You can import entities into an existing project. Polylines will automatically be connected to nodes within the specified Tolerance. You can add nodes to your project prior to performing the import.

Stand-Alone mode - You should take some time to clean up your AutoCAD drawing prior to performing the conversion. Look for entities that should not be converted, such as leader lines, and move them to their own layer. Turn off layers that you do not wish to convert. Do a quick review of your drawing and correct any potential conversion problems that you may find.

296 Chapter 15 – Exchanging Data with CAD Software

Tips: After performing the conversion, we recommend that you use the converted file as a DXF Background. This will greatly enhance your review process. If you change the entities in your background drawing to a gray color from within AutoCAD, it will make it easier to distinguish between foreground elements and background entities.

AutoCAD mode - You can interactively convert individual entities to pipes by using the Layout Tool.

SewerCAD only - When importing a drawing that contains both pressure and gravity pipes you should import your system in two passes. First, import the layer(s) that contain Gravity pipes, then import the layer(s) that contain Pressure pipes. On the first pass create Manholes at pipe endpoints, and on the second pass create Pressure Junctions at pipe endpoints. This will ensure that the correct element will be added where your system transitions from gravity to pressure. Refer to the related information section on "Converting your drawing in multiple passes" for more information.

15.1.2 Converting your Drawing in Multiple Passes Depending on how your drawing layers are set up, you may be able to save yourself a considerable amount of data entry time by converting your drawing in multiple passes.

For example, if your 12-inch pipes are located on a "12InchPipes" layer, 18-inch pipes are on a "18InchPipes" layer, etc., you can import layers one at a time. Just set up your prototypes prior to importing that layer.

To assist you in this process, your conversion settings will be retained between imports. Therefore, on subsequent passes you will simply need to revise your prototypes and specify the next layer to be imported.

This same technique can be used when importing blocks.

15.1.3 Polyline to Pipe Wizard The Polyline to Pipe Wizard will guide you step-by-step through the process of converting your entities to elements.

• Step 1 - The import behavior depends on the mode in which you are working:

− Stand-Alone - Specify the .DXF file that you would like to import.

− AutoCAD - This step is skipped. You will be asked to select the entities to convert before accessing the Wizard.

• Step 2 - Specify the polyline to pipe conversion options.

• Step 3 - Specify how T-intersections are to be handled.

• Step 4 - Specify how blocks should be converted (for .DXF files that contain blocks).

• Step 5 - Configure prototypes.

• Step 6 - Specify the layers to be imported.


To access the Polyline to Pipe Wizard:

• Stand-Alone Select File / Import / Polyline to Pipe from the main menu.

• AutoCAD Select Edit / Change Entities to Pipes from the main menu.

Polyline to Pipe Wizard - Step 1 (Stand-Alone mode only) This step allows you to specify the .DXF file to be imported.

Note: If you are running in AutoCAD mode, this step will be skipped. AutoCAD mode users will be asked to select the entities to be converted before accessing the Polyline to Pipe wizard.

• DXF Filename - Specify the name of the .DXF file you would like to import. Use the Browse button to select the file interactively.

• DXF Unit - Specify the .DXF conversion unit (the unit that your .DXF file is in). For example, if your drawing is in SI units, specify meters (m). If your drawing is in architectural units, specify inches (in).

Polyline to Pipe Wizard - Step 2 This step allows you to specify the following Polyline to Pipe conversion options:

• Connectivity tolerance - Polylines whose endpoints fall within the specified tolerance will be connected to the same node. A default tolerance is supplied based on the current scale. This is generally a good starting point, but you may wish to increase or decrease this default tolerance depending on your particular drawing. If you complete the conversion process and find that the tolerance was not correct (pipes that should be connected were not, or vise versa), you may wish to repeat the conversion process using a new tolerance.

• Specifying which entities to convert - You can optionally convert Polylines, Lines, or both. You generally want to convert both Polylines and Lines. However, if your drawing is set up so that Polylines are always used to represent pipes and Lines are used for annotation purposes, you may wish to convert only Polylines.

• Handling missing nodes at polyline endpoints - A pipe can only be created if there is a node at both endpoints. If a node cannot be found at a polyline endpoint, a node must be added. Otherwise, the pipe cannot be converted. This option allows you to specify whether a node is created, and, if so, the default type of element to create.

In general, you will want to create a default node at polyline endpoints. However, if your network already contains nodes at polyline endpoints, or if your drawing contains blocks at polyline endpoints that are to be converted to nodes, you may wish to specify that the polyline not be converted. Polylines that cannot be converted, because one or both end nodes are missing, will be flagged for review at the end of the conversion process.

Tip: If the conversion does not yield the desired results, you can repeat the conversion process using different settings. Be sure to save your project before performing the conversion.

Polyline to Pipe Wizard - Step 3 This step allows you to specify how T-intersections (pipe split candidates) should be handled.

Nodes that fall within the specified tolerance of a pipe are referred to as pipe-split candidates. There are two ways to handle these:


• Join the pipes at the intersection - The pipe-split candidate will be used to split the intersecting pipe.

• Do not join the intersecting pipes - Pipe-split candidates will be flagged for later review using the Drawing Review window.

Note: The tolerance that you specify in Step 2 will also be used for T-intersection processing.

Polyline to Pipe Wizard - Step 4 (for .DXF files that contain blocks) If your AutoCAD drawing contains blocks, this step will appear, allowing you to convert AutoCAD blocks, if desired.

If you would like to convert blocks to nodes, activate the Yes toggle. A table with two columns will appear, allowing you to map the AutoCAD blocks you would like to convert to any of the available node element types. The AutoCAD block column provides you with a list of available blocks to convert. The Element column provides you with a list of available node element types.

For each AutoCAD block you would like to convert, specify the type of node element you would like to create.

Tip: When you select an AutoCAD block, the preview pane will display the graphical representation of that block. This step will be skipped if there are no AutoCAD Blocks in your drawing.

Polyline to Pipe Wizard - Step 5 Before performing the conversion, you may wish to configure your prototypes with default data. During the conversion process, elements will be created using the specified defaults.

Click a button to configure the defaults for the associated element.

Polyline to Pipe Wizard - Step 6 Specify the layers that contain the entities you would like to convert. Use the Preview Drawing button to preview the elements on the selected layers. This step can be used in conjunction with the Prototype step to allow you to convert your drawing in multiple passes.

Tip: It is recommended that you process your drawing prior to performing the import. If your drawing contains layers that you do not wish to import, turn them off from within AutoCAD and elements on those layers will be ignored during the import process.

Polyline Conversion Problem Dialog This feature is present in Stand-Alone mode only. This dialog displays the reason that a polyline was not converted after running the Polyline to Pipe Wizard.

Drawing Preview Use the Preview Drawing button to view the elements in the .DFX file that will be converted.

Next to the Preview Drawing button is a checkbox labeled Only include elements that will be converted.


Turn the toggle on to preview the entities that will be converted. The entities to be converted are based on the settings you specified in the Polyline to Pipe Wizard, such as type of line entities, blocks, and layers to be converted.

Turn the toggle off to preview all entities.

15.2 Import/Export of DXF Files

15.2.1 Import a DXF from AutoCAD or MicroStation To import background graphics in Stand-Alone mode from another drafting program, you must first export a .DXF file from your CAD program. This step is usually as simple as selecting an item from a pull-down menu in that program, such as File / Export / As DXF, or similar command. Once the .DXF file has been created, it can be imported into this program as follows:

1. Select the File / Import / DXF Background command from the pull-down menu to access the Import DXF File dialog.

2. Select the .DXF file you wish to import, and click the Open button.

15.2.2 Exporting a DXF file To export the drawing plan view, select File\Export\DXF file from the pull-down menu.

Note: You will be able to redefine all elements, except pipes, as blocks in AutoCAD. Pipes will be exported as polylines, so you will be able to set their line weight in AutoCAD.

15.2.3 Redefining WaterCAD Blocks in AutoCAD If you would like to change the appearance of these blocks in your AutoCAD drawing, you can redefine them as follows:

To begin, start AutoCAD and create thirteen separate drawing files named HMI_CKV.DWG, HMI_CSRC.DWG, HMI_FARW.DWG, HMI_PS.DWG, JUNCTION.DWG, TANK.DWG, RESERVOIR.DWG, PUMP.DWG, PRV.DWG, PBV.DWG, PSV.DWG, FCV.DWG and TCV.DWG. Save these drawings in your AutoCAD directory. Open the existing drawing that contains the network blocks.

1. At the AutoCAD "Command:" prompt, type INSERT and press enter.

1 At the "Block Name:" prompt, type JUNCTION=C: JUNCTION.DWG and press enter.

2 At this point, the block has been redefined and you can cancel this command.

3 Repeat these steps for the other named blocks.

Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on Redefining Blocks.

15.2.4 Advanced DXF Import Techniques 1 In your existing drawing, at the AutoCAD "Command:" prompt, type (regapp "WTRC") and press

Enter. This will register the program application ID. Be sure to include the parenthesis.


2 Define blocks named HMI_CKV, HMI_CSRC, HMI_FARW, HMI_PS, JUNCTION, TANK, RESERVOIR, PUMP, PRV, PBV, PSV, FCV and TCV.

You are now ready to import a WaterCAD .DXF file into your existing AutoCAD drawing.

Tip: To save time, you can perform the above steps in a new AutoCAD drawing file and save it with the name WaterCAD.DWG. Now, instead of performing the above steps, simply insert this new drawing into your existing drawing file immediately before importing a network .DXF file.

Note: Refer to your AutoCAD documentation for more information on Importing .DXF files.


Chapter 16

Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version

16.1 Overview WaterCAD features optional support for AutoCAD integration. You can determine if you have purchased AutoCAD functionality for your WaterCAD by using the Help\About menu option. Click the Registration button to view the feature options that have been purchased with your application license. If AutoCAD support is enabled then you will be able to run your WaterCAD application in both AutoCAD and Stand-Alone mode.

The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented so as to be essentially identical to that offered with the Stand-Alone base product. Once you obtain familiarity with the Stand-Alone mode, you will not have any difficulty utilizing the product in AutoCAD mode.

In AutoCAD mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available in the AutoCAD design and drafting environment. The standard environment is extended and enhanced by an AutoCAD ObjectARX WaterCAD client layer that allows you to create, view, and edit the native WaterCAD network model while in AutoCAD.

Some of the advantages of working in AutoCAD mode include:

• Layout network pipes and structures in fully scaled mode in the same design and drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans. You will have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along with any custom LISP, ARX, or VBA applications that you have developed.

• Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position WaterCAD elements with respect to other entities in the AutoCAD drawing.

• Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE, MOVE, and ROTATE on WaterCAD model entities with automatic update and synchronization with the model database.

• Output contours to your AutoCAD drawing, and interactively label them.

• Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.

302 Chapter 16 – Additional Features of the AutoCAD Version

Note: AutoCAD R14 is no longer supported in WaterCAD.

16.2 AutoCAD Environment

16.2.1 AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout In AutoCAD mode, Haestad Methods' products provide a set of extended options and functionality beyond those available in Stand-Alone mode. This additional functionality provides enhanced user control over general application settings and options and extends the command set, giving the user control over the display of model elements within AutoCAD.

Key differences between AutoCAD and Stand-Alone mode include:

• Element editing functionality has been extended by adding the Scale Elements and Rotate Labels commands, accessible under the Edit / Modify Elements pull-down menu, and the Change Widths command under the Edit / Pipes pull-down menu.

• You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the Element Properties command under the Tools pull-down menu. For example, you can assign a specific layer for all outlets, as well as assign the label and annotation text style to be applied.

16.2.2 Toolbars In AutoCAD mode, the following toolbars are available:

• Command Tools - Enables the Command Toolbar for quick access to the main commands, including computations, tables, graphic reports, Quick View, and direct access to the Haestad Methods Web Site.

• Layout Tools - Enables the Layout Toolbar for access to the Tool Palette.

• Analysis Toolbar - Enables the Analysis Toolbar to control the current scenario and provide quick access to the Scenario Manager , the Active Topology Selection Dialog, the Darwin Calibrator, and the Capital and Energy Cost Managers, as well as time and animation controls.

To toggle the display of the Haestad Methods command and layout toolbars, select View / Toolbars from the pull-down menu.

16.2.3 Drawing Setup When working in the AutoCAD mode, you may work with Haestad Methods’ products in many different AutoCAD scales and settings. However, Haestad Methods’ product elements can only be created and edited in model space.

16.2.4 Symbol Visibility In AutoCAD mode, you can control display of element labels using the checkbox in the Drawing Options dialog.


The following commands allow you to customize the drawing by turning the visibility of flow arrows and labels on or off:

• To turn on the element labels, type: WTRCLABELSON

• To turn them off, type: WTRCLABELSOFF

Notes: In AutoCAD, it is possible to delete element label text using the ERASE command. You should not use ERASE to control visibility of labels. If you desire to control the visibility of a selected group of element labels, you should move them to another layer that can be frozen or turned off.

See Rebuild Figure Labels for more information on restoring labels that have been erased using the native AutoCAD command.

16.2.5 Rebuild Figure Labels When running WaterCAD in the AutoCAD mode, it is possible to delete associated element label text entities. Element labels which have been erased can be selectively undeleted using the command WTRCREBUILDLABELS.

16.3 AutoCAD Project Files

16.3.1 AutoCAD Project Files When using WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, there are two files that fundamentally define a WaterCAD model project:

• Drawing File (.DWG) - The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that serves as the model background.

• Model File (.WCD) - The native WaterCAD model database file that contains all the element properties, along with other important model data. WaterCAD .WCD files can be loaded and run using the Stand-alone mode. These files may be copied and sent to other WaterCAD users who are interested in running your project. This is the most important file for the WaterCAD model.

The two files will have the same base name. It is important to understand that simply archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the associated .WCD file.

Since the .WCD file can be run and modified separately from the .DWG file using Stand-Alone mode, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you ever modify the model in Stand-Alone mode and then later load the AutoCAD .DWG file, the WaterCAD program will compare file dates, and automatically invoke its built-in AutoCAD Synchronization routine.

16.3.2 Drawing Synchronization Whenever you open a WaterCAD-based drawing file in AutoCAD, the WaterCAD model server will start. The first thing that the application will do is load the associated WaterCAD database (.WCD) file. If the time stamps of the drawing and database file are different, WaterCAD will automatically invoke its synchronization check. This protects against corruption that might otherwise occur from separately editing the WaterCAD database file in Stand-Alone mode, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station where the WaterCAD application is not loaded.


The synchronization check will occur in two stages:

• First, WaterCAD will iterate across all the drawing model elements and compare their state with that held in the server model. Any differences it discovers will be listed. WaterCAD enforces network topological consistency between the server and the drawing state. If model elements have been deleted or added in the .WCD file during a Stand-Alone session, or if proxy elements have been deleted, the application will force the drawing to be consistent with the native database by restoring or removing any missing or excess drawing custom entities.

• After network topology has been synchronized, the application will compare other model and drawing states such as location, labels, and flow directions. Again, it will list any differences between the drawing client and server data, and a message box will pop up giving you an opportunity to indicate which state, drawing or model server, should be adopted during the second stage of synchronization.

You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the command WTRCSYNCSERVER.

16.3.3 Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg AutoCAD uses Drawing*.dwg as its default drawing name. Saving your drawing as the default AutoCAD drawing name (for instance Drawing1.dwg) should be avoided, as it makes overwriting model data very likely. When you first start AutoCAD, the new empty drawing is titled Drawing*.dwg, regardless of whether one exists in the default directory. Since Haestad Methods’ modeling products create model databases associated with the AutoCAD drawing, the use of Drawing*.dwg as the saved name puts you at risk of causing synchronization problems between the AutoCAD drawing and the Haestad Methods modeling files.

Tip: If this situation inadvertently occurs (save on quit for example), simply restart AutoCAD, use the Open command to open the Drawing*.dwg file from its saved location, and use the Save As command to save the drawing and model data to a different name.

16.4 WaterCAD Element Properties

16.4.1 Element Properties When working in the AutoCAD mode, this feature will display a tabbed dialog with tables containing different model element types and their associated properties, along with the properties of the element’s layer, label, and annotation. To modify an attribute, double-click each associated grid cell. Setting changes made in this dialog will be used for any newly created elements. Property changes will be performed on all elements of the given type. If the Apply to Existing Object box is checked, modifications made in this dialog are performed on a global basis. To restrict global changes to a certain layer for a particular element type, use the "*current*" option setting for the attribute of interest.

To change the layer, label, or annotation of an element, select Tools / Element Properties from the pull-down menu.

16.4.2 Select Layer When running in AutoCAD mode, this dialog appears when you double-click the layer name ("*current*" by default) in the Layer column of the Element Properties dialog. This is accessed by selecting Tools \ Element Properties from the pull-down menu. It displays a list of the available layers and their properties


from the current AutoCAD drawing. Click the appropriate field to select a layer. The "*current*" option will use whatever layer is set to current in your AutoCAD drawing.

16.4.3 Select Text Style When running in AutoCAD mode, this dialog appears when you double-click the text style name ("*current*" by default) in the Text Style column of the Labels and Annotation tabs of the Element Properties dialog. This is accessed by selecting Tools / Element Properties from the pull-down menu. It displays a list of the available text styles and their properties from the current AutoCAD drawing. Click the appropriate field to select a text style. The "*current*" option will use whatever text style is set to current in your AutoCAD drawing.

16.5 Working with Elements

16.5.1 Edit Element In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection will open an element editor for any specific element. Select Edit / Edit Element, then select an element. This command is also available by choosing the Select tool, then clicking an element in the drawing pane. In addition, double-clicking an element will open the element editor for that element.

Note: Double-clicking an element when other elements are selected will open the AutoCAD Properties dialog rather than the element editor.

The Edit Element command works with the current selection to allow you to generate filtered reports. Refer to Selecting Elements (AutoCAD Mode) for more information on working with selections.

16.5.2 Deleting Elements In AutoCAD mode, this command removes all elements in the current selection. Refer to Selecting Elements (AutoCAD Mode) for more information on working with selections.

16.5.3 Modifying Elements

Modify Elements In AutoCAD mode, these commands are selected from the Edit pull-down menu. They are used for scaling and rotating model entities.

Scale Elements In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection resizes an element based upon a scale factor. After choosing this command, select an element or group of elements, and enter the scale factor to be applied.

To access the Scale Elements command, select Modify Elements from the Edit pull-down menu.

Rotate Labels In AutoCAD mode, this menu selection rotates the figure label. After choosing this command, select an element or group of elements, and enter the desired rotation in degrees.


To access the Rotate Labels command, select Modify Elements from the Edit pull-down menu.

Modify Pipes Pipes may follow a non-linear alignment, since in pressure systems minor losses can be safely lumped with friction losses without significantly affecting model accuracy. WaterCAD uses the following specialized commands for editing pipes in AutoCAD:

• Insert Bend - Use this command to add a bend to a pipe. In AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe to bend. Select the pipe and the location you want the bend to appear. The pipe alignment will automatically conform to this location.

• Remove Bend - Use this command to remove a specific bend from a pipe. In AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe and the specific bend to remove.

• Remove All Bends - Use this command to completely straighten a pipe that contains bends. In AutoCAD, you will be prompted to select a pipe, and all bends will disappear.

• Change Widths - Use this command to change pipe widths. After choosing this command, select a pipe or group of pipes and enter the desired width. Note that the width entered is equivalent to the AutoCAD polyline width.

Change Pipe Widths In AutoCAD mode, this menu option is used to change the thickness of the pipe width. When selected, the user is first prompted to select pipes, and is then prompted to enter a new pipe width to be assigned to the pipe figures.

Edit Elements In AutoCAD mode, this menu command is used to open a spreadsheet FlexTable editor or a selection of one or more network figures. You are prompted to select figures on which to build a table.

16.6 Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands

16.6.1 WaterCAD Custom AutoCAD Entities The primary AutoCAD-based WaterCAD element entities - pipes, tanks, reservoirs, pumps and valves - are all implemented using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they are vested with a specialized "model awareness" that ensures that any editing actions you perform will result in an appropriate update of the model database.

This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands as you normally would, and the model database will be updated automatically to reflect these changes.

It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state. Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes.

Using ObjectARX enables the implementation of highly specialized editing actions that are not available with standard AutoCAD entities. Two examples of this specialized behavior are element morphs and pipe splits. Again, these modifications will trigger an automatic update of the model network topology and associated element properties.

Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained during Undo and Redo transactions.


A custom model element has certain native text entities associated with it for displaying label and annotated property values. These associated label and annotation entities may be edited separately from the model element itself. However, most drawing edits made directly to a model element will be applied in the appropriate fashion against its associated label and annotation entities. Thus, if you drag an element to a new location, the annotation and label locations will update as well.

16.6.2 AutoCAD Commands When running in AutoCAD mode, Haestad Methods’ products make use of all the advantages that AutoCAD has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features. Additionally, AutoCAD commands can be used as you would with any design project. For example, Haestad Methods’ elements and annotation can be manipulated using common AutoCAD commands.

16.6.3 Explode Elements In AutoCAD mode, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all Haestad Methods custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities. When a Haestad Methods custom entity is exploded, all associated database information is lost. Be certain to save the exploded drawing under a separate filename.

Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the model network. You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals who do not own a Haestad Methods Product license, since a fully exploded drawing will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects. See Working with Proxies for more information on this topic.

16.6.4 Moving Elements When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror, and Array can be used to move elements. Refer to Selecting Elements for more details on this topic.

To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command prompt or selecting it from the pull-down menu. Follow the AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the new location of the node.

16.6.5 Moving Element Labels When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror, and Array can be used to move element text labels. Refer to the help topics Selecting Elements and Working with Selections in AutoCAD.

To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the AutoCAD command either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the AutoCAD prompt, and the label will be moved without the element.

16.6.6 Snap Menu When using AutoCAD mode, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu that provides options for picking an exact location of an object. Refer to the standard AutoCAD help documentation for more information.


16.7 Undo / Redo

16.7.1 Undo / Redo Operations in AutoCAD In AutoCAD mode, you have two types of Undo/Redo available to you. From the Edit menu, you have access to WaterCAD Undo and Redo. Alternatively, you can perform the native AutoCAD Undo and Redo by typing at the AutoCAD command line. The implementations of the two different operation types are quite distinct.

The menu-based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on WaterCAD elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server. The main advantage of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited undo and redo levels. This is an important difference, since in layout or editing it is quite useful to be able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions.

Note: If you use the native AutoCAD undo, you are limited to a single redo level. The WaterCAD undo/redo is also faster than the native undo/redo. If you are rolling back WaterCAD model edits, it is recommended that you use the menu-based undo/redo implementation.

Whenever you invoke a native AutoCAD undo, the server model will be notified when any WaterCAD entities are affected by the operation. WaterCAD will then synchronize the model to the drawing state. Wherever possible, the model will seek to map the undo/redo invocation onto the model server’s managed command history. If the drawing’s state is not consistent with any pending undo or redo transactions held by the server, WaterCAD will flush the command history. In this case, the model will synchronize the drawing and server models.

Note: If you undo using the AutoCAD command and you end up restoring WaterCAD elements that have been previously deleted, morphed, or split, some model state attributes such as diameters or elevations may be lost, even though the locational and topological state is fully consistent. This will only happen in situations where the WaterCAD command history has been flushed. In such cases, you will be warned to check your data carefully.

16.8 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities to WaterCAD Elements

16.8.1 Converting Native AutoCAD Entities WaterCAD features powerful tools dedicated to assisting you in building WaterCAD models from existing AutoCAD drawing information. In addition to the standard GIS shapefile conversion options, there are two specific commands available in the AutoCAD platform that will be especially useful to the AutoCAD modeler:

• Layout Pipe Using Entity

• Change Entities to Pipe


16.8.2 Layout Pipe Using Entity In addition to the standard options available under the Pipe layout command (accessed by clicking the

button in the WaterCAD Tools toolbar, or by selecting the Tools\Layout\Pipe menu option), you may elect to use an existing AutoCAD line, polyline, or arc as a template to define an equivalent WaterCAD pipe or series of pipes.

While you are in the Pipe Layout command, you may invoke the Entity conversion option by using the ‘Entity’ keyword, or by selecting ‘Entity’ from the right-mouse button context menu. Once selected, you will be prompted to choose an entity to use as a basis for a new pipe, and conditionally specify the type of nodal WaterCAD element(s) to use at each end of the pipe.

Note: This command is extremely useful for constructing pipes that follow a curved alignment. In these cases, use an arc as the defining template entity for the pipe creation.

16.8.3 Change AutoCAD Entities to Pipes When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, this special AutoCAD command allows you to use a selection of AutoCAD entities - arcs, lines, polylines, and blocks - as a defining template set for the creation of equivalent WaterCAD elements. This command performs the element generation in batch fashion. You are prompted for the selection of entities to convert, and the selection is followed by the Polyline to Pipe Conversion Wizard that leads you through a sequence of steps defining the basis of the batch conversion. The actual steps to be followed in the Wizard are fully described in the AutoCAD Polyline to Pipe Conversion topic.

Note: This is an automated batch process that requires some care and attention with respect to the selection set that is going to be used as a basis for generating actual WaterCAD model elements. For instance, it may be desirable to select like-sized pipe elements during each pass. This way, you can use the prototyping capabilities to their greatest advantage. A little time spent in planning and strategizing a series of individual conversion steps will go a long way toward preventing confusion, which could necessitate later re-conversions.

The Change Entities to Pipes command is accessed from the Edit\Change Entities to Pipes pull-down menu.

16.9 Special Considerations

16.9.1 Import WaterCAD When running WaterCAD in AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected WaterCAD data (.WCD) file for use in the current drawing. The new project file will now correspond to the drawing name, i.e. CurrentDrawingName.WCD. Whenever you save changes to the network model through WaterCAD, the associated .WCD data file is updated and can be loaded into WaterCAD 4.0 or higher.

To import a WaterCAD model into AutoCAD, select File\Import\WaterCAD.

16.9.2 Working with Proxies If you open a WaterCAD drawing file on an AutoCAD workstation that does not have the WaterCAD application installed, you will get an AutoCAD Proxy Information message box. This is because the


executable logic for managing the AutoCAD entities is not available, and the WaterCAD modeling elements are not associated with the WaterCAD native database.

WaterCAD proxy objects can be moved and erased. However, doing so will put the drawing state out of sync with the model database if the drawing is saved with its original name. If this happens, and you later reload the drawing on an AutoCAD station that is running a WaterCAD application, the application will automatically load and will attempt to reconcile any differences it finds by automatically loading its Database Synchronization routine.


Appendix A:

Frequently Asked Questions

A.1. Overview: "How Do I" "How Do I" tips are available in the following categories:

• Importing/Exporting

• Modeling

• Display

• Editing

Tips: Extensive, up-to-date tips are available at your fingertips by clicking the button. This will take you to the ClientCare area of Haestad Methods’ web site, where you will be able to look up Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), modeling tips, and other useful information in our KnowledgeBase and do a search on any keyword(s). This area of the website is only available if you are participating in the ClientCare program.

If the information you need is not available in this section, click the Search tab at the top of the Help window for an index. To make your work easier, WaterCAD and the Help system are designed to be used together. If you have a high-resolution display monitor, you will probably find it helpful to size the frames of both the program and the Help windows so that they fit side by side. Then, while using the program, you can use the right mouse button or the Help button in any dialog box to update the Help window with context-sensitive Help.

A.2. Import/Export Tips

A.2.1. Import/Export Tips The following tips will be covered in this section:

• Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions

312 Appendix A: Frequently Asked Questions

• Transitioning from Cybernet v2

• Importing EPANET

• Importing KYPIPE Data

• Importing Spot Elevations

• Exporting Spot Elevations

Tip: You can import data from virtually any model using our intuitive and powerful Database and Shapefile Connections feature.

A.2.2. Importing Data from Previous WaterCAD/Cybernet Versions

Cybernet v1 drawing No support is available for importing a Cybernet v1 drawing directly into WaterCAD v5. If you want to import a Cybernet v1 drawing, load it into Cybernet v2 (for DOS) and re-save the data as a Cybernet v2 drawing. The data can then be imported into WaterCAD v5 following the procedure described below.

Cybernet v2 drawing If you are running WaterCAD v5 in AutoCAD mode, simply open the drawing that contains the Cybernet v2 data. The import Wizard of WaterCAD v5 will automatically begin importing the data.

If you are running WaterCAD v5 in Stand-Alone mode, you must first convert the Cybernet v2 drawing into a special C2W file format that can then be imported into WaterCAD v5. This is accomplished by using one of the C2W utilities inside any of the following AutoCAD versions: AutoCAD 12, 13 Dos, 13 Windows, 14, 2000, or 2002. Consult the C2W utilities Help for specifics on its use.

Notes: Because the color coding legend is comprised of native entities, the built-in conversion is unable to automatically remove these elements. In WaterCAD v3.0 and up in AutoCAD mode, color coding legends are block inserts. If your Cybernet v2 drawing contains legends, you must manually edit these out of the drawing.

When using the C2W utility in AutoCAD 12 or 13, there are certain limitations to the amount of data imported:

- Only Cybernet v2 base data is imported. No change records in Cybernet scenarios are supported.

- Cybernet multi-point pump curves are not supported. The C2W utility converts the pump to a standard three-point curve pump. This may not be the optimum solution for the multi-point curve. Validate the points chosen, and consider manually entering the multi-point data.

- Cybernet demand patterns are not imported. However, junction node demand type data is imported. Use the Pattern Manager to enter the Cybernet Extended Period Simulation GDF curves.


WaterCAD/Cybernet v3 and v4 Files Simply open the WaterCAD v3 or v4 file, or import the .WCD file as you normally would in WaterCAD/Cybernet v3. The .WCD file will be automatically converted to the WaterCAD v5 format. Once you save this file in WaterCAD v5, it can no longer be opened in WaterCAD/Cybernet v3/ v4.

A.2.3. Transitioning from Cybernet v2 This section is intended to offer you some insight about the tools in this version of WaterCAD that are different from Cybernet v2 methods.

We have seen the questions that arise in technical support. We designed WaterCAD v3, v4, and v5 specifically to help our users avoid many of these problems, while offering even more flexibility and a much friendlier interface.

Working with the Graphical Editor One of the first differences is the interface, aside from just the difference of it being a Windows application. WaterCAD v5 actually has two interfaces, one for AutoCAD (called WaterCAD’s AutoCAD mode), and our own CAD-style Stand-Alone interface (called WaterCAD’s Stand-Alone Mode).

This offers an amazing amount of flexibility, especially since both interfaces can be used with the exact same hydraulic model. Organizations now have the flexibility to allow AutoCAD users and non-AutoCAD users to work with the same model, without struggling through any type of intermediate conversion. Even the style of the two interfaces is similar with identical toolbars and menus.

Where is the Modeling Control Center (MCC)? The Modeling Control Center in Cybernet v2 served two purposes: tabular reporting and scenario management (including calculation). In WaterCAD v5, these same purposes are served by two separate objects, which are each orders of magnitude better than anything that has come before: FlexTables and Scenario Management.

Report Tables (Flex Tables) In Cybernet v2, you were provided with a tabular view of the network that was a bit inflexible and tedious at times. WaterCAD v5's FlexTables provide tabular reporting tools that are so powerful and flexible that you can perform your typical tasks in less time than it used to take you just to enter the MCC.

With features like sorting, filtering, and global editing, you can review and adjust your data in a fraction of the time it used to take, and with none of the hassle. Even the variables and sequences that are presented in tabular form are totally customizable to fit your needs.

Links to Graphical Information Systems (GIS) and Databases One of the most exciting developments of the software industry in the 1990's has been the push for data reuse. Constantly improving database capabilities, published file formats (such as the Shapefile format), and even tools as simple as the Windows clipboard are all contributing to a level of data sharing that has never been seen before. WaterCAD v5 is right there on the leading edge.

With WaterCAD v5’s database connectivity, your hydraulic model can easily be linked to virtually any major database, spreadsheet, or GIS product currently in use today. Shapefile wizards and flexible database linking tools make the process simple and straightforward, without anchoring you to a specific database layout or units system.


Scenario Management Cybernet v2 had two levels of definition: the base data as entered in the AutoCAD interface or through the Edit menu in the MCC, and scenario changes as entered through the Setup Analysis menu. Although this was far better than any competing scenario management, it was very limited and certainly not oriented toward data-reuse.

WaterCAD v5 has a whole new outlook on scenarios, stemming from the basic principle that every system has unknowns. If there is only one unknown, such as junction demand, for example, the options are quite simple. With the addition of more unknowns, the options quickly become difficult to manage. How can a modeler keep track of so many unknowns? Through alternatives and inheritance.

Alternatives are collections of very specific data, such as junction demands, or pump and valve operational settings. A scenario references a certain combination of these alternatives, similar to a slot machine rolling different symbols in and out of each position. Rather than several similar scenarios each holding onto individually adjusted data, they can instead each reference some of the same alternatives (just as several slot machine combinations can show the same symbol). This not only allows for far more flexibility, it also greatly reduces the amount of data that is handled. This greatly reduces the chance of that data being mishandled.

Inheritance is another attribute of WaterCAD v5’s scenario management that adds a level of functionality that has never existed before. In Cybernet v2, each scenario essentially "inherited" data from the base model, unless a specific change was made. As mentioned above, this is fine for individual changes, but it falls apart for subsequent changes. Consider, for example, a system that is to have pipes replaced in phases. Phase I changes inherit from the base model, but then what happens for Phase II? Repeat all of the changes from Phase I, and add the changes for Phase II? And then again for Phase III? It is too easy to overlook a change and make simple typographical errors.

In WaterCAD v5, there is no limit to the extent of inheritance that could exist. To follow the example given above, Phase II simply inherits its data from Phase I, and then has whatever changes are specific to Phase II rehabilitation. Likewise, Phase III inherits from Phase II, and so on. Best of all, if something changes in Phase I, that change is inherited through the hierarchy such that all of the children (Phase II, Phase III, etc.) reflect the new data.

There is a scenario tutorial for the Stand-Alone editor, and there is a scenario Wizard to help you through your first few scenario creations. Once you have seen what alternatives and inheritance can do for your model, you will be glad that you spent a few minutes getting familiar with them.

Using the Scenario Manager Scenario functionality is extended even further by the presence of comparative tools, such as graphing. Scenario results can be directly compared graphically, plotting all of the scenarios on the same axes. This means that determining the effects of things such as system expansion, future demand increases, and pipe deterioration can all be seen within seconds of running the models.

Combined with batch runs, which is running several scenarios in sequence, scenario management has reached a level that most modelers have only dreamed of until now.

Demand Alternatives With the new scenario management, demand loading also has all new flexibility. Rather than being limited to Avg. Day, Max Day, Peak Hr., User 1 and User 2, there are an unlimited number of demand alternatives available in WaterCAD v5. You can still have global demand and global roughness factors for your WaterCAD v5 model, so you can make minor adjustments during calibration without having to generate new alternatives.


Composite Demands As well as having an unlimited number of demand alternatives, there is also no limit to the number of different demand types you can have. Cybernet v2 was limited to five demand types (1, 2, 3, 4, and Fixed), but WaterCAD v5 allows as many different types necessary. Also, they can have alpha-numeric labels, such as "Residential", "Commercial", and "Industry XYZ." This enables you to model service connections with much more detail, because you can specify diurnal demand patterns for any number of special individual customers.

In addition to demands, WaterCAD v5 also provides inflow, or flows that are introduced into the system.

Perhaps the best improvement for demands, however, is the ability to attribute more than one type of demand to a given junction node. An unlimited number of different customer types can all contribute to the total demand at a single junction, so there is no need to estimate an equivalent demand type or add another demand type to a "fake" junction immediately adjacent to another node.

Control Valves Cybernet v2 provided you with three types of controlling valves: Pressure Reducing Valves (PRV's), Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSV's), and Flow Control Valves (FCV’s).

WaterCAD v5 also provides them, plus two additional types: Pressure Breaker Valves (PBV's) that create a constant headloss across the valve, and Throttle Control Valves (TCV's) that allow you to adjust minor loss coefficients based on system pressures, HGL's, or time.

Cybernet v2 also allowed a valve setting of "Maintain Always" for PRV's and FCV's. These settings were primarily used to simulate a pump for preliminary design work. Through numerous support calls and dozens of inaccurate models, however, we found that this feature was often misused, resulting in frustration. These "Maintain Always" settings are no longer supported in WaterCAD v5. Instead, we offer a wider variety of pump options to encourage modelers to make better educated guesses and better preliminary design decisions.

Pumps and Pump Curves Cybernet v2 pumps can be categorized as one of three types: constant horsepower, three-point, and multi-point (up to eleven points).

In WaterCAD v5, three-point pump curves are still fully supported, as are multi-point pump curves. In fact, there is no limit to the number of points you can enter to approximate the pump's exponential curve.

Although we continue to discourage the use of constant horsepower pumps (for many of the same reasons we discouraged the use of "Maintain Always" setting for valves), this type of pump is still available in WaterCAD v5. However, do not use one unless you have actually looked at a constant horsepower curve. It only resembles the shape of a typical pump curve over a very short range near the best efficiency point, and diverges from this curve rapidly as the curve becomes asymptotic to both the head and discharge axes.

If you are performing a preliminary design or if you have another purpose that requires you to estimate pump characteristics based on insufficient data, consider using a one-point pump curve. This allows you to enter the design point and approximate a curve based on a typical pump curve. Of course, nothing beats having actual pump test data so you can generate a truly accurate representation of your pump, and, subsequently, an accurate representation of the remainder of your system.

In Summary There are many more features and enhancements in WaterCAD v5, and they appear in every dialog and button. The following are a two very important points that we would like to emphasize as you prepare to use WaterCAD v5 for the first time:

• Tutorials are available in the Stand-Alone editor for a deeper introduction to nearly every topic, and there is context-sensitive on-line Help available from anywhere in the program by pressing the F1


key, or by clicking a Help button.

• Don't be afraid to explore. Some of the neatest features can be easy to overlook. Remember, whenever you see an Ellipsis (…) button it means that a special feature is available. Play with the model, and most importantly, start to enjoy modeling again.

A.2.4. Importing EPANET Files From the pull-down menu, select File\Import\Network and choose EPANet (inp). Then, from the File Open dialog, select the file you would like to import. During the import procedure, you will be prompted for a map scale factor. You may also be asked to specify the Unit of Concentration.

Notes: In EPANET, pumps and valves are modeled as links. In this program, they are graphically modeled as node elements. Hence, during an import, each EPANET valve and pump link is replaced by two pipes and one pump or valve element. This will not affect the behavior of these elements in your system.

In EPANET, tanks can have an optional inactive volume parameter. If this parameter is omitted from the input file or a zero is entered for this parameter, the EPANET numerical engine will compute an inactive volume based on the tank's diameter and the minimum level. To mimic this behavior, this software will calculate the inactive volume and display it in the tank data upon import of the file. When using this software, it is important to remember that zero inactive volume means zero inactive volume, and not some internally computed value.

A.2.5. Importing KYpipe Data This program supports the import of KYpipe 1.0, 2.0 and 3.0 data sets. If the data set does not include geometry data, all nodes will be assigned a coordinate of (0,0). This has no effect on the hydraulic state of the model. Pipe lengths will not be computed based on the coordinates of the end nodes, but will be taken directly from the KYpipe data set.

This program only supports the import of the pipes and nodes of a KYpipe model. You must insert pumps, valves, and tanks into the current project.

A.2.6. Importing Spot Elevations A series of spot elevations can be imported from an ASCII text file, which might be generated from a survey data recorder or another software program. These ASCII files can contain a combination of the information that is required for spot elevations, such as the label, coordinates, and elevation. The fields in the text file are usually separated by either blank spaces or commas.

A.2.7. Exporting Spot Elevations All of the spot elevations in the current project can be exported to an ASCII text file, from which they can be brought into a spreadsheet, word processor, or other program. These ASCII files can contain a combination of the information that is required for spot elevations, such as the label, coordinates, and elevation. The fields in the text file are usually separated by either blank spaces or commas.


A.2.8. Importing Database and Shapefile data created with WaterCAD v3 As a result of overwhelming user feedback, as well as through a review of common technical support questions, Haestad Methods has decided to make a fundamental change in the way pump/valve connectivity is modeled. These elements are now handled as nodes, whereas they were previously represented as links in database and GIS connections prior to release of WaterCAD v5. Unfortunately, this change will impact existing users who have built database connections using WaterCAD Version 3.5 and earlier. However, a survey of our customers has shown that nodes are the natural and preferred way to represent a pump or valve in a database. The change is driven by the desire to improve and enhance the mapping of these elements onto GIS and enterprise data. Haestad Methods has invested significant effort to separate the model representation of pumps and valves from the user view of these elements.

Specific changes are as follows:

• Pumps and valves used to be represented in the model as links, and had To and From Node attributes. Now pumps and valves are represented as nodes, and have To and From Pipe attributes.

• Pumps and valves exported to the Links Table will not be restored to the model. If the user tries to import a Link Table with pumps and valves, they will be created as new pipes of zero length and at coordinates of (0,0).

• The import of pump and valve tables will work as expected, with the exception of the items listed above.

A.3. Modeling Tips

A.3.1. Modeling Tips The paragraph presents some FAQ's related to modeling water distribution networks with WaterCAD. Also, please keep in mind that Haestad Methods offers workshops in North America and abroad throughout the year. These workshops cover these modeling topics in depths and many more in a very effective manner. The following modeling tips are presented in this chapter:

• Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank

• Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well

• Parallel Pipes

• Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series

• Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks

• Modeling Fire Hydrants

• Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main

• Creating a System Head Curve

• Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank

• Variable Speed Pump Maintaining a Constant Downstream Pressure


A.3.2. Modeling a Hydropneumatic Tank Hydropneumatic tanks can be modeled using a regular tank element and converting the tank pressures into equivalent water surface elevations. Based on the elevation differences, the tank's cross-sectional area can then be determined.

For example, consider a hydropneumatic tank that operates between 50 psig and 60 psig. The tank’s storage volume is approximately 50 cubic feet.

The tank base elevation is chosen to be equal to the ground elevation, and the pressures are converted into feet of water (1 psi = 2.31 feet). It is apparent that the tank operates between levels of 115.5 feet and 138.6 feet. The difference between the levels is 23.1 feet, which brings us to a needed cross-section of 2.16 square feet.

A.3.3. Modeling a Pumped Groundwater Well A groundwater well is modeled using a combination of a reservoir and a pump. Set the hydraulic grade line of the reservoir at the static groundwater elevation. The hydraulic grade line can be entered on the reservoir tab of the reservoir editor dialog box, or under the Reservoir Surface Elevation column heading in the Reservoir Report.

Pump curve data can be entered on the Pump Tab of the Pump Editor. The following example will demonstrate how to adjust the manufacturer’s pump curve to account for drawdown at higher pumping rates. Drawdown occurs when the well is not able to recharge quickly enough to maintain the static groundwater elevation at high pumping rates.

Pump Curve Accounting for Drawdown

Example: The pump manufacturer provides the following data in a pump catalog:

Head (ft) Discharge (gpm)

1260 0

1180 8300

1030 12400

Based on field conditions and test results, the following drawdown data is known:

Drawdown (ft) Discharge (gpm)

40 8300

72 12400

To account for the drawdown, the pump curves should be offset by the difference between the static and pumped groundwater elevations. Subtract the drawdown amount from the pump head, and use these new values for your pump curve head data.


The following adjusted pump curve data is based on the drawdown and the manufacturers pump data.


1260 0

1140 8300

958 12400

A.3.4. Modeling Parallel Pipes With some water distribution models, parallel pipes are not allowed. This forces you to create an equivalent pipe with the same characteristics.

With this program, however, you can create parallel pipes simply by drawing the pipes with the same end nodes. To avoid having pipes drawn exactly on top of one another, it is recommended that the pipes have at least one vertex, or bend, inserted into them.

Pipe Bends

A.3.5. Modeling Pumps in Parallel and Series Parallel pumps can be modeled by inserting a pump on different pipes that have the same From and To Nodes. Pumps in series (one pump discharges directly into another pump’s intake) can be modeled by having the pumps located on the same pipe. The following figure illustrates this concept:

Pumps in Parallel and Series

If the pumps are identical, the system may also be modeled as a single, composite pump that has a characteristic curve equivalent to the two individual pumps. For pumps in parallel, the discharge is multiplied by the number of pumps, and used against the same head value. Two pumps in series result in an effective pump with twice the head at the same discharge.

For example, two pumps that can individually operate at 150 gpm at a head of 80 feet connected in parallel will have a combined discharge of 2•150 = 300 gpm at 80 feet. The same two pumps in series would pump 150 gpm at 2•80 = 160 feet of head. This is illustrated as follows:


Pumps Curves of Pumps in Series and Parallel

Note: With pumps in series, it is actually more desirable to use a composite pump than to use multiple pumps in the network. When pumps shut off, it is easier to control one pump. Several pumps in series can even cause disconnections by checking if upstream grades are greater than the downstream grade plus the pump heads.

A.3.6. Modeling Hydraulically Close Tanks If tanks are hydraulically close, as in the case of several tanks adjacent to each other, it is better to model these tanks as one composite tank with the equivalent total surface area of the individual tanks.

This process can help to avoid fluctuation that may occur in cases where the tanks are modeled individually. This fluctuation is caused by small differences in flow rates to or from the adjacent tanks, which offset the water surface elevations enough over time to become a significant fluctuation. This results in inaccurate hydraulic grades.

A.3.7. Modeling Fire Hydrants Fire Hydrant flow can be modeled by using a short, small diameter pipe with large minor loss, in accordance with the hydrant's manufacturer. Alternatively, hydrants can be modeled using Flow Emitters. See the Estimating Hydrant Discharge using Flow Emitters topic for more information.

A.3.8. Modeling a Connection to an Existing Water Main If you are unable to model an existing system back to the source, but would still like to model a connection to this system, a reservoir and a pump with a three-point pump curve may be used instead. This is shown below:

Approximating a Connection to a Water Main with a Pump and a Reservoir

The reservoir simulates the supply of water from the system. The elevation of the reservoir should be equal to the elevation at the connection point.

The pump and the pump curve will simulate the pressure drops and the available flow from the existing water system. The points for the pump curve are generated using a mathematical formula (given below),


and data from a fire flow test. The pipe should be smooth, short and wide. For example, a Roughness of 140, length of 1 foot, and diameter of 48 inches are appropriate numbers.

Please note that it is ALWAYS best to model the entire system back to the source. This method is only an approximation, and may not represent the water system under all flow conditions.

Qr = Qf * [(Hr/Hf)^.54]

Where: Qr = Flow available at the desired fire flow residual pressure. Qf = Flow during test. Hr = Pressure drop to desired residual pressure (Static Pressure minus Chosen

Design Pressure) Hf = Pressure drop during fire flow test (Static Pressure minus Residual

Pressure)

Example: Determining the Three-Point Pump Curve

First point: This point is generated by measuring the static pressure at the hydrant when the flow ( Q ) is equal to zero.

Q = 0 gpm H = 90psi or 207.9 feet of head (90 * 2.31) (2.31 is the conversion factor used to convert psi to feet of head).

Second point: The engineer chooses a pressure for this point, and the flow is calculated using the Formula below. The value for Q should lie somewhere between the data collected from the test.

Q = ? H = 55 psi or 127.05 feet (55 * 2.31) (chosen value)

Formula:

Qr = Qf * (Hr/Hf)^.54 Qr = 800 * [((90 - 55) / (90 - 22))^.54] Qr = 800 * [(35 / 68)^.54] Qr = 800 * [.514^.54] Qr = 800 * .69 Qr = 558

Therefore,

Q = 558 gpm

Third point: This point is generated by measuring the flow ( Q ) at the residual pressure of the hydrant.

Q = 800 gpm H = 22 psi or 50.82 ft. of head (22 * 2.31)


Pump curve values for this example:


207.9 0 127.05 558 50.82800

A.3.9. Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank A tank element in WaterCAD is modeled as a bottom feed tank. Some tanks, however, are fed from the top, which is different hydraulically and should be modeled as such.

Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Tank

To model a top feed tank, start by placing a pressure sustaining valve (PSV) at the end of the tank inlet pipe. Set the elevation of the PSV to the elevation of the inlet to the tank. The pressure setting of the PSV should be set to zero to simulate the pressure at the outfall of the pipe.

Next, connect the downstream end of the PSV to the tank with a short, smooth, large diameter pipe. The pipe must have these properties so that the headloss through it will be minimal.

The tank attributes can be entered normally using the actual diameter and water elevations.

The outlet of the tank can then proceed to the distribution system.

Example Layout


A.3.10. Estimating Hydrant Discharge Using Flow Emitters Another way to model the discharge from a hydrant is to use "flow emitters". A flow emitter relates the discharge to pressure immediately upstream of the emitter using:

nKPQ =

where Q = flow through hydrant (gpm, l/s)

K = overall emitter coefficient (gpm/psin, l/s/mn)

P = pressure upstream of hydrant (psi, m)

n = pressure exponent (0.5 for hydrant outlets)

The pressure exponent, n, is a variable that can be set in the Hydraulic Analysis Options section of the Calculation Options dialog. The default value is 0.5, which should be used when using flow emitters to model hydrant outlets.

You should be able to simply model a hydrant as a flow emitter and enter the appropriate value for K. Not all of the energy available immediately upstream of the hydrant is lost, however. Instead, some of the energy is converted into increased velocity head, especially for the smaller (2.5 in, 63 mm) hydrant outlet.

In order to accurately model a hydrant, the model must be given an overall K value, which includes head loss through a hydrant and conversion of pressure head to velocity head. AWWA Standards C502 and C503 govern the allowable pressure drop through a hydrant. For example, the standards state that the 2.5 in. outlet must have a pressure drop less than 2.0 psi (1.46 m) when passing 500 gpm (31.5 l/s).

The energy equation can be written between a pressure gage immediately upstream of the hydrant and the hydrant outlet:

21

2442

1)11(2

1

1

+−

=

kDDcgC

K

POFF where v = velocity (ft/s, m/s)

FC = unit conversion factor (2.31 for pressure in psi, 1 for pressure in m)

Fc = unit conversion factor (2.44 for flow in gpm, diameter in inches, 0.0785 for flow in l/s, diameter in mm)

g = gravitation acceleration (ft/s2, m/s2)

k = pressure drop coefficient for hydrant

K = overall emitter coefficient

The difference between K and k is that K includes the terms for conversion of velocity head to pressure head. k is known but K is the value needed for modeling.


A typical hydrant lateral in North America is 6 in. (150 mm) and typical outlet sizes are 2.5 in. (63 mm) and 4.5 in. (115 mm). Values for k vary from minimum values, which can be back calculated from AWWA standards, to much higher values actually delivered by hydrants. Values for K for a range of k values for 6 in. (150 mm) pipes are given below.

Emitter K Values for Hydrants

Outlet

Nominal (in.)

k

gpm, psi

k

l/s, m

K

gpm, psi

K

l/s, m

2.5 250-600 18-45 150-180 11-14

2 – 2.5 350-700 26-52 167-185 13-15

4.5 447-720 33-54 380-510 30-40

The coefficients given are based on a 5 ft (1.5 m) burial depth and a 5.5 in. (140 mm) hydrant barrel. A range of values is given because each manufacturer has a different configuration for hydrant barrels and valving. The lowest value is the minimum AWWA standard.

A.3.11. Modeling Variable Speed Pumps With WaterCAD, it is possible to model the behavior of variable speed pumps (VSP), whether they are controlled by variable frequency drives, hydraulic couplings or some other variable speed drive. "Work arounds" that were previously used, such as pumping through a pressure-reducing valve, are no longer needed.

The parameter that is used to adjust pump speeds is the relative speed. The relative speed is the ratio of the pump’s actual speed to some reference speed. The reference speed generally used is the full speed of the motor. For example, if the pump speed is 1558 rpm while the motor is a 1750-rpm motor, the relative speed is 0.89. This relative speed is used with the pump affinity laws to adjust the pump head characteristic curve to model the pump.

If only a steady state run is being made and the pump relative speed is known, the speed of the variable speed pump can simply be set in the General tab of the pump dialog. However, if the conditions that control the pump are not known at the start or an EPS run is being made, then variable speed behavior must be described in more detail.

Types of Variable Speed Pumps The behavior of the VSP is set under the VSP tab within the pump dialog. There are two ways to control a variable speed pump. One is to provide a Pattern of pump relative speeds. This is best used for cases where you are trying to model some past event where the pump speeds are known exactly or where the pump is not being controlled by some target head. This would be the case where human operators set speed based on a combination of time of day, weather and other factors.

The second type of control is Fixed Head control where the pump speed is adjusted to maintain a head somewhere in the system. For water distribution pumping into a pressure zone with no storage this is usually some pressure sensor on the downstream side of the pump. For wastewater pumping, the pump may be operated to maintain a constant wet well level on the suction side (i.e. flow matching).

To indicate that a pump is behaving as a VSP, first check the box next to "Variable Speed Pump?" at the top of the VSP tab. This will change the remaining boxes on the tab from gray to white.


Pattern Based If you want to provide the actual pump relative speeds, "Pattern Based" should be selected from the "VSP Type" pull-down menu. The default pattern is "Fixed" which corresponds to constant speed performance at a speed from the General tab.

Usually, you will want to specify a series of pump relative speeds. To do this, click the ellipsis (…) button next to Pump Speed Pattern. This will open the Pattern Manager dialog. Click the Add button, and the Pattern Editor dialog will appear. From this dialog, you can assign a label (name) to the new Pattern and complete the series of multipliers (i.e. relative speeds) vs. time. Clicking OK twice will return you to the VSP tab.

A difficulty in using Pattern Based speeds is that the pattern that would work well for one scenario may not work well for other scenarios such that tanks will run dry or fill and shut off for a slightly different scenario than the one for which the pattern was created.

Fixed Head Fixed head control is achieved by selecting "Fixed Head" from the "VSP Type?" pull down menu. Once Fixed Head is selected, you must describe how the control is implemented.

You must identify a node that controls the pump. This is the node where some type of pressure or water level sensor is located. This can be done by:

• Using the pull-down menu and picking the node from the list,

• Clicking the ellipsis (…) button and using the Select Element dialog.

• Clicking the Select From Drawing button and picking the node from the drawing.

In selecting the control node, you must choose a node that is actually controlled by the VSP. For example, the selected node must be in the same pressure zone (i.e. one that is not separated from the pump by another pump or PRV) and should not have a tank directly between the node and the pump.

The user must then select the head to be maintained at that node. If the node selected for control is a tank, then the Target Head is set as the initial head in the tank. If a junction node is selected, the head must be a feasible head. If a physically infeasible head is given, the problem may not be solved or some unrealistic flow may be forced to meet this head (e.g. backward flow through pump).

You also have the option of setting the maximum relative speed of the pump, which would usually correspond to the rated speed of the motor. The default value for this is 1.0. You can have the model ignore this limit by simply placing a large value in the field for maximum speed.

Controls with Fixed Head Operation When the relative pump speed reaches maximum speed (usually 1.0), the model treats the pump essentially as a constant speed pump. In the case of pumps controlled by a junction node, when the conditions warrant, the pump will once again behave as a VSP.

However, for pumps controlled by tanks, the pump will run at a maximum speed for the remainder of the EPS run, once they reach maximum speed. To get the pump to switch back to variable speed operation, you need to insert a control statement that switches the pump back to variable speed. Consider the example below:

PMP-1 tries to maintain 280 ft discharge at node T-1 on the discharge side of the pump but pump (PMP-1) switches to full speed when the flow is so great that it cannot maintain 280 ft. In that case the water level


drops below 280 ft. As demand decreases, the level increases until it reaches 280 ft, at which time variable speed operation begins again. To make this occur in the model, the user must use a logical control :

IF (HGL T-1 >= 280 ft) THEN (PMP-1 = ON)

to restore variable speed operation.

Note: There should only be a single VSP serving a given pressure zone. If more than one VPS tries to use the same node as a control node, then the model will issue an error message and not solve. If the user tries to use two different nodes that very close hydraulically, an error will also result.

A.3.12. Creating Scenarios to Model "What If?" Situations The scenario management feature was designed to let you model "What If?" situations by easily switching between different input data sets without having to re-enter data. Comparing different output results is just as simple.

To create a new scenario:

1. Open the Scenario Manager dialog by clicking the Scenario Manager button next to the drop-down scenario list in the main application window.

2. Click the Scenario Wizard button in the upper left of the Scenario Manager dialog.

3. Complete each step in the Scenario Wizard - Name the new scenario, choose which scenario to base it on, and choose the alternatives to be included. Click Next between each step, and click Finish when you are done.

4. Close the Scenario Manager dialog. Notice the scenario you have just created is displayed as the current scenario in the Scenario choice list in the main application window.

5. Proceed to modify your model with the changes you want recorded in the new scenario.

A.3.13. How Do I Access the Haestad Methods Knowledge Base? You can access of hundreds of commonly asked questions at our online Knowledge Base.

The quickest way to access the Knowledge Base is to click the Globe Icon in the product toolbars. This will automatically log you on to our website. Simply click the Knowledge Base icon next to the Haestad product of interest.

If the computer you are using does not have internet access, you can log on to Knowledge Base at an alternate computer by going to "http://www.haestad.com" and entering the ClientCare portion of the website. You can then logon with the Product ID located in the back of the User’s Manual or your PID number.

A.3.14. Darwin Calibrator Troubleshooting Tips If you’ve found your way to this section then you are probably looking for an answer to a problem that you cannot find elsewhere. Please refer to the list below if you are having problems running Darwin Calibrator


(you keep getting unsatisfactory solutions) or if you receive the "The calibration engine was unsuccessful. See the help system for troubleshooting tips." message while running a calibration.

If you are receiving the "engine unsuccessful" message then try the following: • Take note of the error message that is provided along with the "calibration engine was unsuccessful"

message. It may provide a clue as to why your calibration didn’t run and save you having to go any further through this list!

• Ensure that the scenario model upon which the calibration is based will run properly in WaterCAD 5. Select Analysis/Compute from the WaterCAD 5 menu, select the steady state radio button and click GO. If the run obtains either a yellow or green light then the hydraulic model runs Ok and this is not the problem.

• Ensure that all your roughness and demand group settings are valid and reasonable. For example, ensure that roughness adjustments and/or demand adjustments are not such that your hydraulic model might have difficulty converging. e.g., make sure that you are not allowing demands to be set too high or pipes too rough, causing excessive amounts of head loss.

• If you have a large number of pipes assigned to status groups, review the need to include all of those pipes as status decisions and try to minimize the number of pipes in status groups.

• You may be experiencing low system memory. When running Darwin Calibrator be sure to close any other unused applications and if adjusting advanced GA parameters ensure that you are using a cut probability of more than a few percent, and a splice probability of less than 90 percent. If your system doesn’t have much RAM (<128Mb) you may also wish to increase the amount of allocated virtual memory that your system is using. Windows 95/98/ME users should let Windows Manage virtual memory, however, Windows NT4/2000/XP users may wish to increase the size of their system paging file. Please consult Windows help to access information on virtual memory settings specific to your operating system.

Note: Virtual memory settings should only be adjusted by advanced users or system administrators.

If you are having problems getting reasonable calibration solutions then try the following: • Ensure that the Time field for each of your field data measurement sets corresponds to the time of day

that your measurements were taken. The reason being that the time entered in your field data set is used to determine demand multipliers (from hydraulic patterns) which are in turn used to calculate the junction demands that will be simulated within the GA Calibration engine. (i.e., the demand at a junction during a GA Calibration run is the product of its baseline demand(s) and the demand factor(s) at the time specified for the field data set.) Pump settings and control settings etc., are also determined from the time setting you specify. Demand multiplier adjustments and additional junction demands (e.g., fire flow tests) are in addition to, not in lieu of, junction demands already calculated from pattern multipliers. Also note that a steady state run in WaterCAD will run with only junction baseline demands applied, whereas a GA calibration run based on a steady state scenario will still use pattern multipliers for the specified time.

• Modifying the status of a link can have significant effects on hydraulic results and thus on your chances of finding good calibration solutions. If you are using a number of status group adjustments, you should review why you need those adjustment groups. It may be better to experiment with these kinds of adjustments manually, or get somebody to find out whether that valve really is closed and remove the status decision from the GA calibration. In general, try to keep status adjustment decisions to a minimum.


• Make sure that your adjustment groupings are logical. e.g., junctions are grouped by similar pattern or demands for demand groups and pipes are grouped by similar size, age and location for roughness groups.

• Ensure that you do not have too many adjustment groups or the allowable ranges and increments for those groups do not allow too many choices for each group. For example, a roughness group allowed to vary between a Hazen-Williams C of 80 and a Hazen-Williams C of 130, with an increment of 0.1 equates to 500 different possible roughness settings for one group. This is far too high! Try to choose lower and upper bounds, and an increment that will give you no more than 10-12 possible values. If need be, you can start off with course settings (say 80 to 130 with an increment of 5) initially, and gradually refine the allowable range and increment to refine your calibration solutions. This applies to both roughness adjustment groups and also to demand adjustment groups.

• Make sure that you have sufficient and quality field data and that it has been entered correctly. In general it is a good idea to have as many (or more) field data measurements as adjustment groups for the calibration, else your calibration problem is under-specified. This means that there is likely to be multiple calibration solutions that produce the same or very similar hydraulic results. (e.g., solutions that exhibit compensating errors). In theory, there is only one correct solution, however, due to limited observed for many practical model calibrations, the more quality field data you can provide, the better chance you have of finding a solution that is close to the real situation. When assessing the number of field observations that you have, consider that each individual observation should contribute unique and accurate information to the calibration. For example, pressure measurements made at two junctions in different parts of the distribution system are likely to be more valuable than two measurements made at locations close to each other in the distribution system. In fact, the two measurements taken at points close together may only be as good as one measurement. That is, both measurements "say the same thing" about the system. Simply, the field data you collect and enter into Darwin Calibrator should be data that represents times when your system is experiencing high demand, even if it is only the result of such activities as fire flow tests. The reason for this is that during times of normal demands, the head loss across the system is usually on the same order of magnitude as the error in measuring head loss. Therefore, small errors in measurement can lead to huge errors in roughness coefficient or demand.

• Make sure that you haven’t entered field data observations that are made impossible to achieve by any observed boundary conditions, such as an observed grade out for a PRV set to a different grade.

Note: Tank levels, pump speed settings, and valve settings are all used by the calibration engine as boundary conditions and as such these field data entries will not appear in the calibration report summary. That is, these quantities are set as fixed in the calibration simulations and the calibration does not try to match these data. All other quantities are used as observed quantities that the calibration engine tries to match by adjusting parameters defined in your adjustment groups.

• Make sure you are using the correct boundary conditions. If you have entered observations for tank levels etc, ensure that you have not made any errors in entering the data.

If after following the tips in this check list you are still experiencing problems, or just to learn more about the GA or Darwin Calibrator itself, please consult the Darwin Calibrator Methodology topic for more information.

A.4. Display Tips

A.4.1. Display Tips The following display tips will be discussed in this section:


• Changing Units in a Column

• Controlling Element and Label Sizing

• Color Coding Elements

• Reusing Deleted Element Labels

A.4.2. How Do I Change Units in a Column? In a Table you may change the units of all the data within any column. To change the units:

• Select Use Local Units from the Options menu in the Tabular Report dialog.

• Right-click the column heading, or any data item within a column.

• Select Properties from the pop-up menu.

• Change the units and select OK. All data items in that column will change to the selected units.

Note: The change of units affects only the data in the Table. It DOES NOT change the units within your network design.

A.4.3. How Do I Control Element and Label Sizing? To change the size of element symbols and labels:

• Select Tools / Options from the pull-down menus, and select the Drawing tab.

• In the Annotation Multipliers group, change the Symbol Size Multiplier to modify the element size, and the Text Height Multiplier to modify the label size. Smaller numbers will make the element symbols and text decrease in size.

These changes will affect all symbols and text, including color coding legends, but will not have any effect on pipe lengths.

A.4.4. How Do I Color Code Elements? To color code elements:

• Select Tools/Color Coding... from the pull-down menu, or click the Color Coding (rainbow) button on the toolbar.

• In the Color Coding dialog, select the attribute you would like to color code.

• Click the Initialize button to automatically build a range of colors. You may decide to modify these default ranges. Alternatively, pick a color for the first and last values in the list and click the Ramp button. This will automatically generate a gradient range based on a combination of the specified colors.

• Click OK to color code the drawing.

All link or node elements and their labels will be colored based on the specified ranges. You can also use the Initialize button to quickly set up and modify Color Coding Options. A Color Coding Legend may be inserted into the drawing by using the Legend tool located on the Tool Palette.


A.4.5. How Do I remove Color Coding from Labels Imported from Pre-v3.5 AutoCAD Files? Due to popular request, Haestad Methods has implemented the separation of elements and their labels. This gives you much more control over the placement and formatting of the labels, in addition to resolving the problem of color coding labels with elements. However, if you open an old drawing (version 3.1 or earlier) with existing color coding on the labels, this color coding will not dynamically update.

The solution to this problem is to move the labels to a different layer, and assign a neutral color to them. To do this, select Tools / Element Properties from the pull-down menus, and choose the Labels tab. Assign a new layer to the labels for all the elements, and check Apply to Existing Objects.

A.4.6. How Do I Reuse Deleted Element Labels? To make the program reuse the label for a deleted element:

1 Select Tools / Element Labeling from the pull-down menus.

2 Enter the ID number for the deleted element in the Next field for the appropriate type of element.

3 Click OK.

4 Add a new element to the drawing.

A.5. Editing Tips

A.5.1. Editing Tips The following tips will be discussed in this section:

• Special Mouse Tips

• Lay out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline

• Make a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline

A.5.2. Mouse Tips The right mouse button can be used to:

• Select units and precision for displaying data.

• Get context-sensitive Help for dialog boxes and data entry fields.

• Open a pop-up context menu of command options for an element.

The mouse wheel can be used in a few different ways:

• Click and hold the mouse wheel while moving to pan the drawing view.

• Scroll the drawing view horizontally by rolling the mouse wheel.

• Hold down the Ctrl button while scrolling with the mouse wheel to zoom in and out in the drawing view.


A.5.3. Laying out a Pipe as a Multi-segmented Polyline When laying out pipes using the Pipe Layout tool, this program will allow you to draw pipes with multiple bends by using the Control key on your keyboard.

To draw a pipe with bends: 1. Click the Pipe Layout tool to begin laying out your network.

1 Move the mouse to the desired location, and click to insert the first element.

2 The layout tool will rubber-band, indicating that a pipe will be inserted when the next element is added.

In Stand-Alone mode: 1 At this point, hold down the Control key. The cursor appearance will change to a crosshair to indicate

that pipe bends will be added.

2 While holding the Control key down, click to insert any number of pipe bends.

3 When you are through adding pipe bends, release the Control key.

4 The appearance of the cursor will change to reflect the next element to be added.

5 Click with the mouse to terminate the pipe and add the next element.

In AutoCAD mode: 4. Select Bend from the right-click menu.

1 Draw the pipe as you would draw a polyline.

2 Right-click and select the end node of the pipe.

A.5.4. Changing a Pipe into a Multi-segmented Polyline

WaterCAD Stand-Alone Mode To make a straight pipe into a multi-segmented polyline:

1. Right-click the pipe to which you would like to add a vertex.

1 From the context menu, select the Bend\Add Bend menu item.

2 A vertex will be added to the pipe. You may then move the vertex by dragging with the mouse.

WaterCAD in AutoCAD Mode 1. Select Edit from the Main Menu.

1 Select Modify Pipe.

2 Select Insert Bend.

3 Click the location in the pipe where you want the bend.

4 Use the AutoCAD Move command to move the bend in the pipe.


Note: There is no limit on the number of vertices that a pipe may have.

Tips: In Stand-Alone mode, you can remove vertices by selecting the pipe. Right-click the vertex you wish to remove, and select the Bend\Remove Bend menu item.

In AutoCAD mode, you can remove vertices by selecting Edit\ Modify Pipes\Remove Bends from the pull-down menu. Select the pipe and the location of the bend that you would like removed.


Appendix B:

WaterCAD Theory

B.1. Overview WaterCAD is a state-of-the-art software tool primarily for use in the modeling and analysis of water distribution systems. However, the methodology is applicable to any fluid system with the following characteristics:

• Steady or gradually-varying turbulent flow.

• Incompressible, Newtonian, single phase fluids.

• Full, closed conduits (pressure systems).

Examples of systems with these characteristics include potable water systems, sewage forcemains, fire protection systems, well pumps, and raw water pumping.

The WaterCAD algorithms are anticipated to grow and evolve to keep pace with the state of the practice in water distribution and water quality modeling. Because the mathematical solution methods are being continually extended, this manual deals primarily with the fundamental principles underlying these algorithms, and focuses less on the details of the implementation of the algorithms.

Acknowledgements WaterCAD was designed, developed and programmed by Haestad Methods’ staff of Software Engineers and Civil Engineers. This program is intended to represent the latest technology in Windows-based Water Distribution Analysis and Design.

WaterCAD’s numerical computations are based on research conducted by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Drinking Water Research Division, Risk Reduction Engineering Laboratory, its employees and consultants. As a result, WaterCAD will generate results consistent with the EPA computer program "EPANET 2."

334 Appendix B: WaterCAD Theory

B.2. Pressure Network Hydraulics

B.2.1. Network Hydraulics Theory In practice, pipe networks consist not only of pipes, but of miscellaneous fittings, services, storage tanks and reservoirs, meters, regulating valves, pumps, and electronic and mechanical controls. For modeling purposes, these system elements are organized into the following categories:

• Pipes - Tranport water from one location (or node) to another.

• Junctions Nodes - Specific points, or nodes, in the system at which an event of interest is occurring. This includes points where pipes intersect, where there are major demands on the system such as a large industry, a cluster of houses, or a fire hydrant, or critical points in the system where pressures are important for analysis purposes.

• Reservoirs and Tanks - Boundary nodes with a known hydraulic grade that define the initial hydraulic grades for any computational cycle. They form the baseline hydraulic constraints used to determine the condition of all other nodes during system operation. Boundary nodes are elements such as tanks, reservoirs, and pressure sources.

• Pumps - Represented as nodes. Their purpose is to provide energy to the system and raise the water pressure.

• Valves - Mechanical devices used to stop or control the flow through a pipe, or to control the pressure in the pipe upstream or downstream of the valve. They result in a loss of energy in the system.

An event or condition at one point in the system can affect all other parts of the system. While this complicates the approach that the engineer must take to find a solution, there are some governing principles that drive the behavior of the network, including the Conservation of Mass and Energy Principle, and the Energy Principle.

The two modes of analysis are Steady-State Network Hydraulics and Extended Period Simulation. This program solves for the distributions of flows and hydraulic grades using the Gradient Algorithm.

B.2.2. The Energy Principle The first law of thermodynamics states that for any given system, the change in energy is equal to the difference between the heat transferred to the system and the work done by the system on its surroundings during a given time interval.

The energy referred to in this principle represents the total energy of the system minus the sum of the potential, kinetic, and internal (molecular) forms of energy, such as electrical and chemical energy. The internal energy changes are commonly disregarded in water distribution analysis because of their relatively small magnitude.

In hydraulic applications, energy is often represented as energy per unit weight, resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equivalents, the state of the system is expressed in terms of head. The energy at any point within a hydraulic system is often represented in three parts:

• Pressure Head: p/γ

• Elevation Head: z

• Velocity Head: V2/2g

Where: p = Pressure (N/m2, lb/ft2)


γ = Specific weight (N/m3, lb/ft3) z = Elevation (m, ft) V = Velocity (m/s, ft/s) g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft/s2)

These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two locations using the energy equation.

B.2.3. The Energy Equation In addition to pressure head, elevation head, and velocity head, there may also be head added to the system, by a pump for instance, and head removed from the system due to friction. These changes in head are referred to as head gains and headlosses, respectively. Balancing the energy across two points in the system, we then obtain the energy equation:

L

22

22

p

21

11 h

2gV

zγ

ph

2gV

zγ

p+++=+++

Where: p = Pressure (N/m2, lb/ft2) γ = Specific weight (N/m3, lb/ft3) z = Elevation at the centroid (m, ft) V = Velocity (m/s, ft/s) g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft/s2) hp = Head gain from a pump (m, ft) hL = Combined headloss (m, ft)

The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quantities, which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade.

B.2.4. Hydraulic and Energy Grades

Hydraulic Grade The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head ( p/γ ) and elevation head ( z ). The hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezometer. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the hydraulic grade line, or HGL.

Energy Grade The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head ( V2/2g ). This is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line, or EGL. At a lake or reservoir, where the velocity is essentially zero, the EGL is equal to the HGL, as can be seen in the following figure.


EGL and HGL

B.2.5. Conservation of Mass and Energy

Conservation of Mass At any node in a system containing incompressible fluid, the total volumetric or mass flows in must equal the flows out, less the change in storage. Separating these into flows from connecting pipes, demands, and storage, we obtain:

SOUTIN VtQtQ ∆+∆=∆∑ ∑

Where: QIN= Total flow into the node (m3/s, cfs) QOUT = Total demand at the node (m3/s, cfs) ∆VS= Change in storage volume (m3, ft3) ∆t = Change in time (s)

Conservation of Energy The conservation of energy principle states that the headlosses through the system must balance at each point. For pressure networks, this means that the total headloss between any two nodes in the system must be the same regardless of what path is taken between the two points. The headloss must be sign consistent with the assumed flow direction (i.e. gain head when proceeding opposite the flow and lose head when proceeding with the flow).

Conservation of Energy


The same basic principle can be applied to any path between two points. As shown in the figure above, the combined headloss around a loop must equal zero in order to achieve the same hydraulic grade as at the beginning.

B.2.6. The Gradient Algorithm The gradient algorithm for the solution of pipe networks is formulated upon the full set of system equations that model both heads and flows. Since both continuity and energy are balanced and solved with each iteration, the method is theoretically guaranteed to deliver the same level of accuracy observed and expected in other well-known algorithms such as the Simultaneous Path Adjustment Method (Fowler) and the Linear Theory Method (Wood).

In addition, there are a number of other advantages that this method has over other algorithms for the solution of pipe network systems:

• The method can directly solve both looped and partly branched networks. This gives it a computational advantage over some loop-based algorithms, such as Simultaneous Path, which require the reformulation of the network into equivalent looped networks or pseudo-loops.

• Using the method avoids the post-computation step of loop and path definition, which adds significantly to the overhead of system computation.

• The method is numerically stable when the system becomes disconnected by check valves, pressure regulating valves, or modeler’s error. The loop and path methods fail in these situations.

• The structure of the generated system of equations allows the use of extremely fast and reliable sparse matrix solvers.

The derivation of the Gradient Algorithm starts with two matrices and ends as a working system of equations.

B.2.7. Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm Given a network defined by N unknown head nodes, P links of unknown flow, and B boundary or fixed head nodes, the network topology can be expressed in two incidence matrices:

T2112 AA = (P x N) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix

and

T0110 AA = (P x B) Fixed head nodes incidence matrix

The following convention is used to assign matrix values:

=j)(i,A12 1, 0, or -1 if flow of pipe i enters, is not connected, or leaves node j, respectively.

Assigned nodal demands are given by:

]q,...,q,[qq N21T = (1 x N) nodal demand vector

Assigned boundary nodal heads are given by:


],...HH,[HH Bf2f1fT

f = (1 x B) fixed nodal head vector

The headloss or gain transform is expressed in the matrix:

]f,...,f,[f(Q)F P21T = (1 x P) non-linear laws expressing headlosses in links

)(Qff iii =

These matrix elements that define known or iterative network state can be used to compute the final steady-state network represented by the matrix quantities for unknown flow and unknown nodal head.

Unknown link flow quantities are defined by:

]Q,...,Q,[QQ P21T = (1 x P) unknown link flow rate vector

Unknown nodal heads are defined by:

]H,...,H,[HH N21T = (1 x N) unknown nodal head vector

These topologic and quantity matrices can be formulated into the generalized matrix expression using the laws of energy and mass conservation:

f1012 HAF(Q)HA −=+

qQA12 =

A second diagonal matrix that implements the vectorized head change coefficients is introduced. It is generalized for Hazen-Williams friction losses in this case:

=

−

−

−

1nPP

1n22

1n11

11

P

2

1

QR...

...QR

QR

A

This yields the full expression of the network response in matrix form:

−=

q

HAHQ

0AAA f10

21

1211

To solve the system of non-linear equations, the Newton-Raphson iterative scheme can be obtained by differentiating both sides of the equation with respect to Q and H to get:

−=

dqdE

dHdQ

0AANA

21

1211


with

=

P

2

1

n...

nn

N

The final recursive form of the Newton-Raphson algorithm can now be derived after matrix inversion and various algebraic manipulations and substitutions (not presented here). The working system of equations for each solution iteration, k, is given by:

{ })QA(q)HAA(QNA)AAN(AH k21f10

111

k121

112

111

121

1k −++−= −−−−−+

)HAH(AAN)QN(1Q f101k

121

111k11k +−−= +−−−+

The solution for each unknown nodal head for each time iteration is computationally intensive. This high-speed solution utilizes a highly optimized sparse matrix solver that is specifically tailored to the structure of this matrix system of equations.

Sources: Todini, E. and S. Pilati, "A gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks", Computer Applications in Water Supply, Vol. 1 - Systems Analysis and Simulation, ed. By Bryan Coulbeck and Chun-Hou Orr, Research Studies Press LTD, Letchworth, Hertfordshire, England.

B.2.8. The Linear System Equation Solver The Conjugate Gradient method is one method that, in theory, converges to an exact solution in a limited number of steps. The Gradient working equation can be expressed for the pressure network system of equations as:

bAx =

where:

1kHx +=

{ })QA(q)HAA(QNAb k21f10

111

k121 −++−= −−

The structure of the system matrix A at the point of solution is:

1221121

1121 DAAA)(NAAA == −

and it can be seen that the nature of the topological matrix components yield a total working matrix A that is:

• Symmetric

• Positive definite


• Stieltjes type

Because of the symmetry, the number of non-zero elements to be retained in the matrix equals the number of nodes plus the number of links. This results in a low density, highly sparse matrix form. It follows that an iterative solution scheme would be preferred over direct matrix inversion, in order to avoid matrix fill-in, which serves to increase the computational effort.

Because the system is symmetric and positive definite, a Cholesky factorization can be performed to give:

TLLA =

where L is lower triangular with positive diagonal elements. Making the Cholesky factorization allows the system to be solved in two steps:

bLy 1−=

y)(Lx 1T −=

The use of this approach over more general sparse matrix solvers that implement traditional Gaussian elimination methods without consideration to matrix symmetry is preferred, since performance gains are considerable. The algorithm utilized in this software solves the system of equations using a variant of Cholesky’s method which has been optimized to reduce fill-in of the factorization matrix, thus minimizing storage and reducing overall computational effort.

B.2.9. Pump Theory Pumps are an integral part of many pressure systems. Pumps add energy, or head gains, to the flow to counteract headlosses and hydraulic grade differentials within the system.

A pump is defined by its characteristic curve, which relates the pump head, or the head added to the system, to the flow rate. This curve is indicative of the ability of the pump to add head at different flow rates. To model behavior of the pump system, additional information is needed to ascertain the actual point at which the pump will be operating.

The system operating point is based on the point at which the pump curve crosses the system curve representing the static lift and headlosses due to friction and minor losses. When these curves are superimposed, the operating point can easily be found. This is shown in the figure below.


System Operating Point

As water surface elevations and demands throughout the system change, the static head (Hs) and headlosses (HL) vary. This changes the location of the system curve, while the pump characteristic curve remains constant. These shifts in the system curve result in a shifting operating point over time.

Variable Speed Pumps A pump’s characteristic curve is fixed for a given motor speed and impeller diameter, but can be determined for any speed and any diameter by applying the affinity laws. For variable speed pumps, these affinity laws are presented as:

2

1

2

1nn

QQ

= and

2

2

1

2

1nn

hh

=

Where: Q = Pump flowrate (m3/s, cfs)

h = Pump head (m, ft) n = Pump speed (rpm)

Effect of Relative Speed on Pump Curve


Constant Horsepower Pumps During preliminary studies, the exact characteristics of the constant horsepower pump may not be known. In these cases, the assumption is often made that the pump is adding energy to the water at a constant rate. Based on power-head-flowrate relationships for pumps, the operating point of the pump can then be determined. Although this assumption is useful for some applications, a constant horsepower pump should only be used for preliminary studies.

B.2.10. Pump Type This software currently models six different types of pumps:

• Design Point (One-Point) - A pump can be defined by a single design point (Hd @ Qd). From this point, the curve's interception with the head and discharge axes is computed as Ho = 1.33•Hd and Qo = 2.00•Qd. This type of pump is useful for preliminary designs, but should not be used for final analysis.

• Standard (Three-Point) - This pump curve is defined by three points - the shutoff head (pump head at zero discharge), the design point (as with the single-point pump), and the maximum operating point (the highest discharge at which the pump performs predictably).

• Standard Extended - The same as the standard three-point pump, but with an extended point at the zero pump head point. This is automatically calculated by the program.

• Custom Extended - The custom extended pump is similar to the standard extended pump, but allows you to enter the discharge at zero pump head.

• Multiple Point - This option allows you to define a custom rating curve for a pump. The pump curve is defined by entering points for discharge rates at various heads. Since the general pump equation, shown below, is used to simulate the pump during the network computations, the user-defined pump curve points are used to solve for coefficients in the general pump equation:

)QB(AY C×−=

)( CQBAY ×−=

Where: Y = Head (m, ft)

Q = Discharge (m3/s, cfs) A,B,C = Pump curve coefficients

The Levenberg-Marquardt Method is used to solve for A, B and C based on the given multiple-point rating curve.

• Constant Power - These pumps may be useful for preliminary designs and estimating pump size, but should not be used for any analysis for which more accurate results are desired.

Tip: Whenever possible, avoid using constant power or design point pumps. They are often enticing because they require less work on behalf of the engineer, but they are much less accurate than a pump curve based on several representative points.


Note: It is not necessary to place a check valve on the pipe immediately downstream of a pump, because pumps have built in check valves that prevent reverse flow.

B.2.11. Valve Theory There are several types of valves that may be present in a pressurized system. These valves have different behaviors and different responsibilities, but all valves are used for automatically controlling parts of the system. They can be opened, closed, or throttled to achieve the desired result.

Check Valves (CV’s) Check valves are used to maintain flow in only one direction by closing when the flow begins to reverse. When the flow is in the specified direction of the check valve, it is considered to be fully open. Check valves are added to the network on a pipe element.

Flow Control Valves (FCV’s) FCVs are used to limit the maximum flow rate through the valve from upstream to downstream. FCVs do not limit the minimum flow rate or negative flow rate (flow from the To Pipe to the From Pipe). These valves are commonly found in areas where a water district has contracted with another district or a private developer to limit the maximum demand to a value that will not adversely affect the provider’s system.

Pressure Reducing Valves (PRV’s) Pressure reducing valves are often used for separate pressure zones in water distribution networks. These valves prevent the pressure downstream from exceeding a specified level in order to avoid pressures that could have damaging effects on the system.

Pressure Sustaining Valves (PSV’s) Pressure sustaining valves maintain a specified pressure upstream from the valve. Similar to the other regulating valves, these are often used to ensure that pressures in the system (upstream, in this case) will not drop to unacceptable levels.

Pressure Breaker Valves (PBV’s) Pressure breaker valves create a specified headloss across the valve, and are often used for model components that cannot be easily modeled using standard minor loss elements.

Throttle Control Valves (TCV’s) Throttle control valves simulate minor loss elements whose headloss characteristics change over time.

General Purpose Valves (GPVs) GPVs are used to model situations and devices where the flow - headloss relationship is specified by the user rather than utilizing the standard hydraulic formulas. GPVs can be used to represent reduced pressure backflow prevention valves, well draw-down behavior, and turbines.


B.3. Friction and Minor Losses

B.3.1. Friction Loss Methods

Hazen-Williams Equation The Hazen-Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe systems (such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains). The formula is as follows:

54.063.0 SRACkQ ⋅⋅⋅⋅=

Where: Q = Discharge in the section (m³/s, cfs) C = Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless) A = Flow area (m², ft²) R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft) S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft) k = Constant (0.85 for SI, 1.32 for US).

Darcy-Weisbach Equation Because of non-empirical origins, the Darcy-Weisbach equation is viewed by many engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses. It most commonly takes the following form:

g2V

DLfh

2f ⋅=

Where: hf = Headloss (m, ft) f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless) D = Pipe diameter (m, ft) L = Pipe length (m, ft) V = Flow velocity (m/s, ft/s) g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s², ft/s²)

For section geometries that are not circular, this equation is adapted by relating a circular section’s full-flow hydraulic radius to its diameter:

D = 4R

Where: R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft) D = Diameter (m, ft)

This can then be rearranged to the form:

fSRg8AQ ⋅

⋅⋅=

Where: Q = Discharge (m³/s, cfs) A = Flow area (m², ft²)


R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft) S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft) f = Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless) g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s², ft/s²)

The Swamme and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor.

Swamme and Jain Equation:

2

0.9eR

5.743.7D

kln

1.325f

+

=

Where: f = Friction factor (unitless) k = Roughness height (m, ft) D = Pipe diameter (m, ft) Re = Reynolds number (unitless)

The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow, which is dependent on the flow velocity, which is dependent on the discharge. As you can see, this process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor.

Note: The Kinematic Viscosity is used in determining the friction coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method. The default units are initially set by Haestad Methods.

Manning's Equation

Manning's equation is one of the most popular methods in use today for free surface flow (and, like Kutter’s equation, is based on Chezy’s equation). For Manning’s equation, the roughness coefficient in Chezy’s equation is calculated as:

nRkC

6/1⋅=

Where: C = Chezy’s roughness coefficient ( s/m 2/1 , sft /2/1)

R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft) n = Manning’s roughness ( 3/1/ ms ) k = Constant (1.00 3/13/1 / mm , 1.49

3/13/1 / mft )

Substituting this roughness into Chezy’s equation, we obtain the well-known Manning’s equation:

2/13/2 SRAnkQ ⋅⋅⋅=

Where: Q = Discharge (m³/s, cfs)

k = Constant(1.00 sm /3/1 , 1.49 sft /3/1)


n = Manning’s roughness (unitless) A = Flow area (m², ft²) R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft) S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)

Note: Manning’s roughness coefficients are the same as the roughness coefficients used in Kutter’s equation.

Colebrook-White Equation The Colebrook-White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy-Weisbach friction factor:

Free Surface

)fR

51.2R8.14

klog(2f

1

e+−=

Full Flow (Closed Conduit)

)fR

51.2R0.12

klog(2f

1

e+−=

Where: Re = Reynolds Number (unitless) k = Darcy-Weisbach roughness height (m, ft) f = Friction factor (unitless) R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft)

Chezy's Equation Chezy’s equation is rarely used directly, but it is the basis for several other methods, including Manning’s equation and Kutter’s equation. Chezy’s equation is:

SRACQ ⋅⋅⋅=

Where: Q = Discharge in the section (m³/s, cfs) C = Chezy’s roughness coefficient (m1/2/s, ft1/2/s) A = Flow area (m², ft²) R = Hydraulic radius (m, ft) S = Friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)

B.3.2. Minor Losses Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence that create a drop in the energy and hydraulic grades at that point in the system. The magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the fitting, which directly affects the flow lines in the pipe.


The equation most commonly used for determining the loss in a fitting, valve, meter, or other localized component is:

2gVKh

2m =

Where: hm= Loss due to the minor loss element (m, ft) V = Velocity (m/s, ft/s) g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft/s2) K = Loss coefficient for the specific fitting

Typical values for the fitting loss coefficient are included in the Fittings Table at the end of this chapter.

Generally speaking, more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller headlosses. For example, the figure below shows the effects of a radius on typical pipe entrance flow lines.

Flow Lines at Entrance

B.4. Water Quality Analysis

B.4.1. Water Quality Theory The governing equations for WaterCAD’s water quality solver are based on the principles of conservation of mass coupled with reaction kinetics. The following phenomena are represented (Rossman et al., 1993; Rossman and Boulos, 1996):

Advective Transport in Pipes A dissolved substance will travel down the length of a pipe with the same average velocity as the carrier fluid while at the same time reacting (either growing or decaying) at some given rate. Longitudinal dispersion is usually not an important transport mechanism under most operating conditions. This means there is no intermixing of mass between adjacent parcels of water traveling down a pipe.

Advective transport within a pipe is represented with the following equation:


where Ci = concentration (mass/volume) in pipe i as a function of distance x and time t

ui = flow velocity (length/time) in pipe i

r = rate of reaction (mass/volume/time) as a function of concentration

Mixing at Pipe Junctions At junctions receiving inflow from two or more pipes, the mixing of fluid is taken to be complete and instantaneous. Thus the concentration of a substance in water leaving the junction is simply the flow-weighted sum of the concentrations from the inflowing pipes.

For a specific node k one can write:

where I = link with flow leaving node k

Ik = set of links with flow into k

Lj = lengthof link j

Qj = flow (volume/time) in link j

Qk,ext = external source flow entering the network at node k

Ck,ext = concentration of the external flow entering at node k

The notation Ci|x=0 represents the concentration at the start of link i, while Ci|x=L is the

concentration at the end of the link.

Mixing in Storage Facilities

It is convenient to assume that the contents of storage facilities (tanks and reservoirs) are completely mixed. This is a reasonable assumption for many tanks operating under fill-and-draw conditions providing that sufficient momentum flux is imparted to the inflow (Rossman and Grayman, 1999). Under completely mixed conditions the concentration throughout the tank is a blend of the current contents and that of any entering water. At the same time, the internal concentration could be changing due to reactions. The following equation expresses these phenomena:

where Vs = volume in storage at time t

Cs = concentration within the storage facility

Is = set of links providing flow into the facility


Os = set of links withdrawing flow from the facility

Bulk Flow Reactions

While a substance moves down a pipe or resides in storage it can undergo reaction with constituents in the water column. The rate of reaction can generally be described as a power function of concentration:

where k = a reaction constant

n = the reaction order

When a limiting concentration exists on the ultimate growth or loss of a substance then the rate expression becomes:

where CL = the limiting concentration

Some examples of different reaction rate expressions are:

Simple First-Order Decay (CL = 0, Kb < 0, n = 1)

The decay of many substances, such as chlorine, can be modeled adequately as a simple first-order reaction.

First-Order Saturation Growth (CL > 0, Kb > 0, n = 1):

This model can be applied to the growth of disinfection by-products, such as trihalomethanes, where the ultimate formation of by-product (CL) is limited by the amount of reactive precursor present.

Two-Component, Second Order Decay (CL ¹ 0, Kb < 0, n = 2):

This model assumes that substance A reacts with substance B in some unknown ratio to produce a product P. The rate of disappearance of A is proportional to the product of A and B remaining. CL can be either positive or negative, depending on whether either component A or B is in excess, respectively. Clark (1998) has had success in applying this model to chlorine decay data that did not conform to the simple first-order model.


Michaelis-Menton Decay Kinetics (CL > 0, Kb < 0, n < 0):

As a special case, when a negative reaction order n is specified, WaterCAD will utilize the Michaelis-Menton rate equation, shown above for a decay reaction. (For growth reactions the denominator becomes CL + C.) This rate equation is often used to describe enzyme-catalyzed reactions and microbial growth. It produces first- order behavior at low concentrations and zero-order behavior at higher concentrations. Note that for decay reactions, CL must be set higher than the initial concentration present.

Koechling (1998) has applied Michaelis-Menton kinetics to model chlorine decay in a number of different waters and found that both Kb and CL could be related to the water’s organic content and its ultraviolet absorbance as follows:

where UVA = ultraviolet absorbance at 254 nm (1/cm)

DOC = dissolved organic carbon concentration (mg/L)

Note: These expressions apply only for values of Kb and CL used with Michaelis-Menton kinetics.

Zero-Order growth (CL = 0, Kb = 1, n = 0)

This special case can be used to model water age, where with each unit of time the "concentration" (i.e., age) increases by one unit.

The relationship between the bulk rate constant seen at one temperature (T1) to that at another temperature (T2) is often expressed using a van’t Hoff – Arrehnius equation of the form:

where θ is a constant.

In one investigation for chlorine, θ was estimated to be 1.1 when T1 was 20 deg. C (Koechling, 1998).


Pipe Wall Reactions While flowing through pipes, dissolved substances can be transported to the pipe wall and react with material such as corrosion products or biofilm that are on or close to the wall. The amount of wall area available for reaction and the rate of mass transfer between the bulk fluid and the wall will also influence the overall rate of this reaction. The surface area per unit volume, which for a pipe equals 2 divided by the radius, determines the former factor. The latter factor can be represented by a mass transfer coefficient whose value depends on the molecular diffusivity of the reactive species and on the Reynolds number of the flow (Rossman et. al, 1994).

For first-order kinetics, the rate of a pipe wall reaction can be expressed as:

where kw = wall reaction rate constant (length/time)

kf = mass transfer coefficient (length/time)

R = pipe radius

For zero-order kinetics the reaction rate cannot be any higher than the rate of mass transfer, so:

where kw now has units of mass/area/time.

Mass transfer coefficients are usually expressed in terms of a dimensionless Sherwood number (Sh):

where D = the molecular diffusivity of the species being transported (length 2 / time)

d = pipe diameter

In fully developed laminar flow, the average Sherwood number along the length of a pipe can be expressed as:

where Re = Reynolds number

Sc = Schmidt number (kinematic viscosity of water divided by the diffusivity of the chemical) (Edwards et.al, 1976).


For turbulent flow the empirical correlation of Notter and Sleicher (1971) can be used:

System of Equations When applied to a network as a whole, Equations 1-3 represent a coupled set of differential/algebraic equations with time-varying coefficients that must be solved for Ci in each pipe i and Cs in each storage facility s. This solution is subject to the following set of externally imposed conditions:

• Initial conditions that specify Ci for all x in each pipe i and Cs in each storage facility s at time 0,

• Boundary conditions that specify values for Ck,ext and Qk,ext for all time t at each node k which has external mass inputs

• Hydraulic conditions which specify the volume Vs in each storage facility s and the flow Qi in each link i at all times t.

Lagrangian Transport Algorithm WaterCAD’s water quality simulator uses a Lagrangian time-based approach to track the fate of discrete parcels of water as they move along pipes and mix together at junctions between fixed-length time steps (Liou and Kroon, 1987). These water quality time steps are typically much shorter than the hydraulic time step (e.g., minutes rather than hours) to accommodate the short times of travel that can occur within pipes. As time progresses, the size of the most upstream segment in a pipe increases as water enters the pipe while an equal loss in size of the most downstream segment occurs as water leaves the link. The size of the segments in between these remains unchanged.

The following steps occur at the end of each such time step:

• The water quality in each segment is updated to reflect any reaction that may have occurred over the time step.

• The water from the leading segments of pipes with flow into each junction is blended together to compute a new water quality value at the junction. The volume contributed from each segment equals the product of its pipe’s flow rate and the time step. If this volume exceeds that of the segment then the segment is destroyed and the next one in line behind it begins to contribute its volume.

• Contributions from outside sources are added to the quality values at the junctions. The quality in storage tanks is updated depending on the method used to model mixing in the tank (see below).

• New segments are created in pipes with flow out of each junction, reservoir, and tank. The segment volume equals the product of the pipe flow and the time step. The segment’s water quality equals the new quality value computed for the node.

To cut down on the number of segments, Step 4 is only carried out if the new node quality differs by a user-specified tolerance from that of the last segment in the outflow pipe. If the difference in quality is below the tolerance then the size of the current last segment in the outflow pipe is simply increased by the volume flowing into the pipe over the time step.

This process is then repeated for the next water-quality time step. At the start of the next hydraulic time step the order of segments in any links that experience a flow reversal is switched. Initially each pipe in the network consists of a single segment whose quality equals the initial quality assigned to the upstream node.


Behavior of Segments in the Lagrangian Solution Method

References Bhave, P.R. 1991. Analysis of Flow in Water Distribution Networks. Technomic Publishing. Lancaster, PA.

Clark, R.M. 1998. "Chlorine demand and Trihalomethane formation kinetics: a second-order model", Jour. Env. Eng., Vol. 124, No. 1, pp. 16-24.

Dunlop, E.J. 1991. WADI Users Manual. Local Government Computer Services Board, Dublin, Ireland.

George, A. & Liu, J. W-H. 1981. Computer Solution of Large Sparse Positive Definite Systems. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.

Hamam, Y.M, & Brameller, A. 1971. "Hybrid method for the solution of piping networks", Proc. IEE, Vol. 113, No. 11, pp. 1607-1612.

Koechling, M.T. 1998. Assessment and Modeling of Chlorine Reactions with Natural Organic Matter: Impact of Source Water Quality and Reaction Conditions, Ph.D. Thesis, Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering, University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio.


Liou, C.P. and Kroon, J.R. 1987. "Modeling the propagation of waterborne substances in distribution networks", J. AWWA, 79(11), 54-58.

Notter, R.H. and Sleicher, C.A. 1971. "The eddy diffusivity in the turbulent boundary layer near a wall", Chem. Eng. Sci., Vol. 26, pp. 161-171.

Osiadacz, A.J. 1987. Simulation and Analysis of Gas Networks. E. & F.N. Spon, London.

Rossman, L.A., Boulos, P.F., and Altman, T. (1993). "Discrete volume-element method for network water-quality models", J. Water Resour. Plng. and Mgmt,, Vol. 119, No. 5, 505-517.

Rossman, L.A., Clark, R.M., and Grayman, W.M. (1994). "Modeling chlorine residuals in drinking-water distribution systems", Jour. Env. Eng., Vol. 120, No. 4, 803-820.

Rossman, L.A. and Boulos, P.F. (1996). "Numerical methods for modeling water quality in distribution systems: A comparison", J. Water Resour. Plng. And Mgmt, Vol. 122, No. 2, 137-146.

Rossman, L.A. and Grayman, W.M. 1999. "Scale-model studies of mixing in drinking water storage tanks", Jour. Env. Eng., Vol. 125, No. 8, pp. 755-761.

Salgado, R., Todini, E., & O'Connell, P.E. 1988. "Extending the gradient method to include pressure regulating valves in pipe networks". Proc. Inter. Symposium on Computer Modeling of Water Distribution Systems, University of Kentucky, May 12-13.

Todini, E. & Pilati, S. 1987. "A gradient method for the analysis of pipe networks".

International Conference on Computer Applications for Water Supply and Distribution, Leicester Polytechnic, UK, September 8-10.

B.5. Engineer's Reference

B.5.1. Engineer's Reference This chapter provides you with tables of commonly used roughness values and fitting loss coefficients

Roughness Values • Roughness Values, Manning's Equation

• Roughness Values, Darcy-Weisbach (Colebrook-White) Equation

• Roughness Values, Hazen-Williams Equation

• Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes


Coefficients • Fitting Loss Coefficient

B.5.2. Roughness Values - Manning's Equation Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:

Manning’s Coefficients n for Closed Metal Conduits Flowing Partly Full Channel Type and Description Minimum Normal Maximum

a. Brass, smooth 0.009 0.010 0.013

b. Steel

1. Lockbar and welded 0.010 0.012 0.014

2. Riveted and spiral 0.013 0.016 0.017

c. Cast iron

1. Coated 0.010 0.013 0.014

2. Uncoated 0.011 0.014 0.016

d. Wrought iron

1. Black 0.012 0.014 0.015

2. Galvanized 0.013 0.016 0.017

e. Corrugated metal

1. Subdrain 0.017 0.019 0.021

2. Storm drain 0.021 0.024 0.030

B.5.3. Roughness Values - Darcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White) Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:

Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Heights k for Closed Conduits Pipe Material k (mm) k (ft)

Glass, drawn brass, copper (new) 0.0015 0.000005

Seamless commercial steel (new) 0.004 0.000013

Commercial steel (enamel coated) 0.0048 0.000016

Commercial steel (new) 0.045 0.00015

Wrought iron (new) 0.045 0.00015

Asphalted cast iron (new) 0.12 0.0004

Galvanized iron 0.15 0.0005


Cast iron (new) 0.26 0.00085

Concrete (steel forms, smooth) 0.18 0.0006

Concrete (good joints, average) 0.36 0.0012

Concrete (rough, visible, form marks) 0.60 0.002

Riveted steel (new) 0.9 ~ 9.0 0.003 - 0.03

Corrugated metal 45 0.15

B.5.4. Roughness Values, Hazen-Williams Formula Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:

Hazen-Williams Roughness Coefficients C Pipe Material C

Asbestos Cement 140

Brass 130-140

Brick sewer 100

Cast-iron

New, unlined 130

10 yr. Old 107-113

20 yr. Old 89-100

30 yr. Old 75-90

40 yr. Old 64-83

Concrete or concrete lined

Steel forms 140

Wooden forms 120

Centrifugally spun 135

Copper 130-140

Galvanized iron 120

Glass 140

Lead 130-140

Plastic 140-150

Steel

Coal-tar enamel, lined 145-150

New unlined 140-150

Riveted 110

Tin 130


Vitrified clay (good condition) 110-140

Wood stave (average condition) 120

B.5.5. Typical Roughness Values for Pressure Pipes Typical pipe roughness values are shown below. These values may vary depending on the manufacturer, workmanship, age, and many other factors.

Comparative Pipe Roughness Values Material Manning’s

Coefficient

n

Hazen William

C

Darcy-Weisbach Roughness Height

k (mm) k (0.001 ft)

Asbestos cement 0.011 140 0.0015 0.005

Brass 0.011 135 0.0015 0.005

Brick 0.015 100 0.6 2

Cast-iron, new 0.012 130 0.26 0.85

Concrete:

Steel forms 0.011 140 0.18 0.6

Wooden forms 0.015 120 0.6 2

Centrifugally spun 0.013 135 0.36 1.2

Copper 0.011 135 0.0015 0.005

Corrugated metal 0.022 --- 45 150

Galvanized iron 0.016 120 0.15 0.5

Glass 0.011 140 0.0015 0.005

Lead 0.011 135 0.0015 0.005

Plastic 0.009 150 0.0015 0.005

Steel

Coal-tar enamel 0.010 148 0.0048 0.016

New unlined 0.011 145 0.045 0.15

Riveted 0.019 110 0.9 3

Wood stave 0.012 120 0.18 0.6

B.5.6. Fitting Loss Coefficients For similar fittings, the K-value is highly dependent on things such as bend radius and contraction ratios.


Typical Fitting K Coefficients

B.6. Genetic Algorithms Methodology

B.6.1. Darwin Calibrator Methodology Computer models have become an essential tool for the management of water distribution systems around the world. There are numerous purposes for use of a computer model to simulate the flow conditions within a system. A model can be employed to ensure the adequate quantity and quality service of the potable water resource to the community, evaluate the planning and design alternatives, assess the system performance and to verify a operating strategy for better management of the water infrastructure system, as well as to be able to perform vulnerability studies to assess risks that may be presented and affect the water supply. For these purposes, a model is constructed in which data describing network elements of pipes, junctions, valves, pumps, tanks, and reservoirs are assembled in a systematic manner to predict pipe flow and junction hydraulic grade lines (HGL) or pressures within a water distribution system.

Computer models that have been established over last twenty years and that are to be constructed in future are significant investments for water companies. To ensure a good investment return or correct usages of the models, the model must be capable of correctly simulating flow conditions encountered at the site. This is achieved by calibrating the models. A calibration involves the process of adjusting model characteristics and parameters so that the model’s predicted flows and pressures match actual observed field data to some desirable or acceptable level. This is described in more detail in Walski, Chase and Savic (2001).

Calibration of a water distribution model is a complicated task. There are many uncertain parameters that need to be adjusted to reduce the discrepancy between the model predictions and field observations of junction HGL and pipe discharges. Pipe roughness coefficients are often considered for calibration. However, there are many other parameters that are uncertain and affect junction HGL and pipe flow rate. To minimize errors in model parameters and eliminate the compensation error of calibration parameters


(Walski 2001), you should consider calibrating all the model parameters, such as junction demand, operation status of pipes and valves, and pipe roughness coefficients.

Calibrating water distribution network models relies upon field measurement data, such as junction pressures, pipe flows, water levels in storage facilities, valve settings, and pump operating status (on/off) and speeds. Among all the possible field observation data, junction HGL and pipe flows are often used to evaluate goodness-of-fit of the model calibration. The other parameters of tank levels, valve settings, and pump operating status/speed are used as boundary conditions that are recorded when collecting a set of calibration observation of junction pressures and pipe flow rates.

Field observation data are measured and collected at different times of the day and at various locations on site, which may correspond to various demand loadings and boundary conditions. In order that that the model simulation results more closely represent the observed data, the simulation results must use the same demand loading and boundary conditions as the observed data. Thus, the calibration process must be conducted under multiple demand loading and operating boundary conditions.

Traditional model calibration of a water distribution model is based on a trial-and-error procedure, by which an engineer or modeler first estimates the values of model parameters, then runs the model to obtain a predicted pressure and flow, and finally compares the simulated values to the observed data. If the predicted data does not compare closely with the observed data, the engineer returns to the model, makes some adjustments to the model parameters, and runs it again to produce a new set of simulation results. This may have to be repeated many times to make sure that the model produces a close-enough prediction of the water distribution network in the real world. The traditional calibration technique is, among other things, quite time consuming.

In addition, a typical network representation of a water network may include hundreds or thousands of links and nodes. Ideally, during a water distribution model calibration process, the roughness coefficient is adjusted for each link and demand is adjusted for each node. However, only a small percentage of representative sample measurements can be made available for the use of model calibration, due to the limited financial and labor requirements for data collection. Therefore, it is of utmost importance to have a comprehensive methodology and efficient tool that can assist the modeler and engineer in achieving a highly accurate model under practical conditions, including various model parameters such as pipe roughness, junction demand, and link status, and also multiple demand and boundary conditions.

Calibration Formulation An optimization calibrator is formulated and developed for facilitating the calibration process of a water distribution model. The parameters are obtained by minimizing the discrepancy between the model-predicted and the field-observed values of junction pressures (hydraulic grades) and pipe flows for given boundary conditions. The optimized calibration is then defined as a nonlinear optimization problem with three different calibration objectives.

Calibration Objectives The goodness-of-fit of model calibration is evaluated by the discrepancy between the model simulated and field measured junction HGL and pipe flow. The goodness-of-fit score is calculated by using a user-specified fitness-point-per-hydraulic head for junctions and fitness-point-per-flow for pipes. This allows a modeler to flexibly weight the evaluation of both pipe flow and junction hydraulic head. Three fitness functions are defined as follows.

Objective Type One: Minimize the sum of difference squares

NFNHFpnt

FobsFsimw

HpntHobsHsimw

minimize

NF

nf

nfnfnf

NH

np

nhnhnh

+

−+

− ∑∑== 1

2

1

2

(1)


Objective Type Two: Minimize the sum of absolute differences

NFNHFpnt

FobsFsimw

HpntHobsHsimw

minimize

NF

nf

nfnfnf

NH

np

nhnhnh

+

−+

− ∑∑== 11

(2)

Objective Type Three: Minimize the maximum absolute difference

−−

== FpntFobsFsim

wHpnt

HobsHsimwminimize nfnfnf

NF

nf

nhnhnh

NH

nh 11max,maxmax

(3)

where Hobsnh designates the nh-th observed hydraulic grade, Hsimnh is the nh-th model simulated hydraulic grade, Hlossnh is the head loss at observation data point nh, Fobsnf is the observed flow, Fsimnf is model simulated flow, Hpnt notes the hydraulic head per fitness point while Fpnt is the flow per fitness point, NH is the number of observed hydraulic grades and NF is the number of observed pipe discharges, Wnh and Wnf represent a normalized weighting factor for observed hydraulic grades and flows respectively. They are given as:

Wnh = f(Hlossnh /∑ Hlossnh ) (4)

Wnf = f(Fobsnf /∑ Fobsnf ) (5)

where f( ) is a function which can be linear, square, square root, log, or constant. An optimized calibration can be conducted by selecting one of three objectives above and the weighting factors between head and flow. The model parameters are calculated by using a genetic algorithm while minimizing the selected objective function and satisfying the calibration constraints.

Calibration Constraints Optimized calibration is conducted by satisfying two type constraints, the hydraulic system constraints and calibration parameter bound constraints. The system constraints are a set of implicit equations that ensure the conservation of flow continuity at nodes and energy for the loops within a water distribution system. Each trial solution generated by the GA is analyzed using WaterCAD hydraulic network solver.

The calibration bound constraints are used to set the minimum and maximum limits for the pipe roughness coefficients and junction demand multiplier. They are given as follows.

nPipeGroupiRFmaxRFRFmin iii ,...,3,2,1=≤≤ (6)

upnDemandGroiDMmaxDMDMmin iii ,...,3,2,1=≤≤ (7)

where RFmini is the minimum roughness coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i; RFmaxi is the maximum roughness coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i; and RFi is the roughness coefficient or multiplier for roughness group i, DMmini is the minimum junction demand multiplier for demand group i; DMmaxi is the maximum demand multiplier for demand group i; and DMi is the demand multiplier for demand group i.

The pipes that have the same physical and hydraulic characteristics are allowed to be grouped as one calibration link, and one new roughness coefficient or one roughness coefficient multiplier is assigned to all the pipes in the same group. The junctions that have the same demand patterns and within a same topological area can also be aggregated as one calibration junction, to which a same demand multiplier is calculated and assigned. Calibration parameters are bounded by prescribed upper and lower limits and


adjusted with a user-prescribed incremental value. For example, a Hazen-Williams C value for a pipe or a group of pipes will be computed within a range of 40 to 140, and by an increment of 5. Demand multipliers may range from 0.8 to 1.2 by 0.1. Parameter aggregation is useful at reducing the calibration dimension, however caution needs to be excised at pipe and junction grouping, which may affect the accuracy of the model calibration.

Genetic Algorithm Optimized Calibration Genetic algorithm (GA) is a robust search paradigm based on the principles of natural evolution and biological reproduction (Goldberg, 1989). For optimizing calibration of a water distribution model, a genetic algorithm program first generates a population of trial solutions of the model parameters. A hydraulic solver then simulates each trial solution. The resulting hydraulic simulation predicts the HGL (junction pressures) and pipe flows at a predetermined number of nodes (or data points) in the network. This information is then passed back to the associated calibration module. The calibration module evaluates how closely the model simulation is to the observed data, the calibration evaluation computes a "goodness-of-fit" value, which is the discrepancy between the observed data and the model predicted pipe flows and junction pressures or HGL, for each solution. This goodness-of-fit value is then assigned as the "fitness" for that solution in the genetic algorithm.

One generation produced by the genetic algorithm is then complete. The fitness measure is taken into account when performing the next generation of the genetic algorithm operations. To find the optimal calibration solutions, fitter solutions will be selected by mimicking Darwin’s natural selection principal of "survival of the fittest." The selected solutions are used to reproduce a next generation of calibration solutions by performing genetic operations. Over many generations, the solutions evolve, and the optimal or near optimal solutions ultimately emerge. There are numerous variations of genetic algorithms over last decade. Many successful applications of GA to solving model calibration have been carried for optimized calibration of water resource systems (Wang 1992; Wu 1994; Babovic etc. 1994; Wu and Larsen 1996). More recently, a competent genetic algorithm (also called fast messy GA), which has been demonstrated the most efficient GA for the optimization of a water distribution system (Wu & Simpson 2001), has been used for the optimized calibration. A brief overview is given in the following section.

Competent Genetic Algorithms The working mechanics of a genetic algorithm is derived from a simple assumption (Holland 1975) that the best solution will be found in the solution region that contains a relatively high proportion of good solutions. A set of strings that represent the good solutions attains certain similarities in bit values. For example, 3-bit binary strings 001, 111, 101 and 011 have a common similarity template of **1, where asterisk (*) denotes a "don’t-care" symbol that takes a value of either 1 or 0. The four strings represent four good solutions and contribute to the fitness values of 10, 12, 11, and 11 to a fitness function of

310),,( 21321xxxxxxf ++= , where x1, x2 and x3 directly takes a bit value as an integer from left to

right. In general, a short similarity template that contributes an above-average fitness is called a "building block." Building blocks are often contained in short strings that represent partial solutions to a specific problem. Thus, searching for good solutions uncovers and juxtaposes the good short strings, which essentially designate a good solution region, and finally leads a search to the best solution.

Goldberg et al. (1989) developed the messy genetic algorithm as one of competent genetic algorithm paradigms by focusing on improving GA’s capability of identifying and exchanging building blocks. The first-generation of the messy GA explicitly initializes all the short strings of a desired length k, where k is referred as to the order of a building block defined by a short string. For a binary string representation, all

the combinations of order-k building blocks requires a number of n l

kk=

2

initial short strings of length k for an l-bit problem. For example, the initial population size of short strings, by completely enumerating the building blocks of order 4 for a 40-bit problem, is more than one million. This made the application of the first-generation messy GA to a large-scale optimization problem impossible. This


bottleneck has been overcome by introducing a building block filter procedure (Goldberg et al. 1993) into the messy GA. The filter procedure speeds up the search process and is called a fast messy GA.

The fast messy GA emulates the powerful genetic-evolutionary process in two nested loops, an outer loop and an inner loop. Each cycle of the outer loop, denoted as an era, invokes an initialization phase and an inner loop that consists of a building block filtering phase and a juxtapositional phase. Like a simple genetic algorithm, the messy GA initialization creates a population of random individuals. The population size has to be large enough to ensure the presence of all possible building blocks. Then a building block filtering procedure is applied to select better-fit short strings and reduce the string length. It works like a filter that "bad" genes not belonging to building blocks are deleted, so that the population contains a high proportion of short strings of "good" genes. The filtering procedure continues until the overall string length is reduced to a desired length k. Finally, a juxtapositional phase follows to produce new strings. During this phase, the processed building blocks are combined and exchanged to form offspring by applying the selection and reproduction operators. The juxtapositional phase terminates when the maximum number of generations is reached, and the cycle of one era iteration completes. The length of short strings that contains desired building blocks is often specified as the same as an era, starting with one to a maximum number of era. Because of this, preferred short strings increase in length over outer iterations. In another words, a messy GA evolves solutions from short strings starting from length one to a maximum desired length. This enables the messy GA to mimic the natural and biological evolution process that a simple or one cell organism evolves into a more sophisticated and intelligent organism. Goldberg et al. (1989, 1993) has given the detail analysis and computation procedure of the messy GA.

References Babovic V., Wu Z. Y. & Larsen L. C. (1994), Calibrating Hydrodynamic Models by Means of Simulated Evolution, in Proceeding of Hydroinformatics’94, Delft, the Netherlands, pp193-200.

Goldberg, D.E. (1989). Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning. Addison Wesley, Reading, MA.

Goldberg, D. E., Korb, B., & Deb, K. (1989). "Messy genetic algorithms: Motivation, analysis, and first results," Complex Systems, 3, 493-530.

Goldberg, D. E., Deb, K., Kargupta, H., & Harik G. (1993). "Rapid, Accurate Optimization of Difficult Problems Using Fast Messy Genetic Algorithms," IlliGAL Report No. 93004, Illinois Genetic Algorithms Laboratory, University of Illinios at Urbana-Champaign, Urbana, IL 61801, USA.

Walski, T.M. (2000) "Model Calibration Data: The Good, The Bad and The Useless," J AWWA, 92(1), p. 94.

Walski, T. M. (2001) "Understanding the adjustments for water distribution system model calibration." Journal of Indian Water Works Association, April-June, 2001, pp151-157.

Walski, T.M., Chase, D.V. and Savic, D.A. (2001) Water Distribution Modeling, Haestad Methods, Inc.

Wang Q.J. (1991), The Genetic Algorithm and its Application to Conceptual Rainfall-Runoff Models, Water Resources Research, Vol.27, No.9, pp2467-2482.

Wu Z.Y. (1994), Automatic Model Calibration by Simulating Evolution, M.Sc. Thesis, H.H. 191, International Institute for Infrastructure, Hydraulic and Environmental Engineering, Delft, the Netherlands.

Wu Z.Y. & Larsen C.L. (1996). "Verification of hydrological and hydrodynamic models calibrated by genetic algorithms." Proc. of the 2nd International Conference on Water Resources & Environmental Research, Vol. 2, Kyoto, Japan, pp175-182.

Wu, Z. Y. and Simpson A. R. (2001) "Competent Genetic Algorithm Optimization of Water Distribution Systems." J. of Computing in Civil Engineering, ASCE, Vol 15, No. 2, pp89-101.


B.7. Energy Cost Theory

B.7.1. Energy Cost Theory The concept behind energy usage for a water distribution system is simple: pumps are used within a system to add energy, counteracting the energy losses that occur due to pipe friction and other losses. The cost of operating these pumps, however, can be one of the largest expenses that a utility incurs during normal operations. An accurate understanding of these energies and the costs associated with them is the key to developing better, more efficient, and more economical pumping strategies.

Pump Powers, Efficiencies, and Energy Power is the rate at which energy can be transferred, and there are several different powers that are associated with the pumping process. In order for power to be transferred to the water, it needs to go through several steps: from the electrical wires into the pump motor, from the motor into the pump, and finally to the water itself. Each transfer results in losses.

Water Power Water power is the power associated with the water itself, and is a function of the fluid characteristics, the gain in head, and the rate of discharge.

PW = ρ · g · ∆H · Q

where PW = Water power

ρ = Fluid density

g = Gravitational acceleration

∆H = Change in head

Q = Discharge rate

Brake Power and Pump Efficiency Brake power is the power at the pump itself, and is related to the water power by:

PW = PB · ep

where PW = Water power

PB = Brake power

ep = Pump efficiency

In other words, the pump efficiency represents the ability of the pump to transfer power from the pump itself to the water. The pump efficiency varies over the operating range of the pump, so it is important to model pump efficiency as closely as possible to ensure an accurate representation of your system.

Motor Power and Motor Efficiency Motor power is the power that the pump's motor receives from the electrical utility, and is related to the pump brake power by:

PB = PM · em

where PB = Brake power

PM = Motor power


em = Motor efficiency

In other words, the motor efficiency represents that ability of the motor to transfer power from the electrical lines to the pump itself. For most pumps, the motor efficiency can be considered to be constant over the whole operating range of the pump.

Note: For variable speed pumps, there is a drive mechanism between the motor and the pump itself. There are also energy losses associated with this drive, which may be significant in some cases.

In the case of variable speed pumps, the efficiency of the variable speed drive needs to be accounted for. This efficiency varies with pump speed among other things. You are encouraged to correct the Motor efficiency to include the variable speed drive efficiency.

For example, if a motor has an efficiency of 90% (0.90) and the variable speed drive has an efficiency of 85% (0.85) at the speeds being used, then the motor efficiency should be entered as 76.5 % (0.765). You are encouraged to find the drive efficiency data for the specific drive that is being used. Below is some typical data for variable speed drive efficiency, found in the report, "Operations and Training Manual on Energy Efficiency in Water and Wastewater Treatment Plants," TREEO Center, University of Florida, 1986.

Percent of Full Speed Variable Frequency Drive

Eddy Current Coupling

Hydraulic Coupling

100 83 85 83

90 82 78 75

70 81 59 56

50 76 43 33

Note: The above data is merely presented as an example and should not be construed as representative of any particular pump.

These corrections should not be made to alternatives with constant speed pumps. If ypu are performing an analysis to compare constant and variable speed pumps, you should should set up two alternatives: one for the constant speed pump and a second for the variable speed pump.

Energy Energy is a representation of the ability to do work, and is related to power by:

E = P · t

Where E = Energy (kW-hours)

P = Power (kW)

t = Time (hours)

Although water energy and pump energy could be calculated, the motor energy is the primary consideration for water distribution systems because this is the energy that the utility is billed for.


Cost There may be several different methods that an electrical provider may use to bill for their energy. The most common bases of billing are:

- Energy Usage

- Peak usage

Energy Usage Cost Energy usage costs are simple: there is a cost associated with a unit of energy. This price may vary for different times of day, different days of the week, different seasons, etc., but the basic concept is still the same.

Peak Usage Cost Some energy providers also charge customers based on peak usage (sometimes also called a "ratchet charge"). This charge is actually based on power rather than energy, with the cost being based on the highest instantaneous power that the customer used during the billing cycle.

Storage Considerations Tank storage can have a considerable effect on the estimated energy costs for a system. As tanks fill or drain, they also act as an energy (and therefore cost) storage element. If a tank is full when a simulation begins and empty when it ends, there is an energy deficit - at some point the pumps will need to operate again in order to replenish the tank. Likewise, if a tank begins empty and fills over the course of a simulation, that represents an energy credit when the total daily cost is calculated.

Daily Cost Equivalents Different scenarios may have different analysis durations, so a direct comparison of costs would not be equitable. To normalize all analyses to a common reference, costs are also converted as daily equivalents.

For energy costs and storage costs, the total computed cost is adjusted according to the ratio of a single day to the analysis duration. For peak usage cost, a daily cost is computed by simply dividing the peak usage cost by the number of days in a billing cycle.

B.8. Variable Speed Pump Theory

B.8.1. Variable Speed Pump Theory The variable speed pump (VSP) model within WaterCAD allows the user to model the performance of pumps equipped with variable frequency drives. Variable frequency drives continually adjust the pump drive shaft rotational speed in order to maintain pressure and flow requirements in a network while improving energy efficiency and other operating characteristics as summarized by Lingireddy and Wood (1998);

• minimization of excess pressures and energy usage,

• leakage control through more precise pressure regulation,

• flexible pump scheduling, improving off peak energy utilization,


• control of tank drain and fill cycles,

• improved system performance during emergency water usage events such as fires and main breaks,

• reduction of transients produced when pumps start and stop,

• simplification of flow control procedures.

Our hope is that WaterCAD's new variable speed pumping feature will allow designers to make better decisions by empowering them to fully evaluate the advantages and disadvantages associated with VSPs for their unique application.

Within WaterCAD there are two different ways to model VSPs depending on the data available to describe pump operations. The relative speed factor is a unitless number that quantifies the rotational speed of the pump drive shaft. 1) If the relative speed factor (or for EPS simulations a series of factors) is known, a pattern based VSP can be used. 2) If the relative speed factor is unknown it can be estimated using the VSP with WaterCAD's new Automatic Parameter Estimation eXtension (APEX).

Pattern Based VSPs – The variable speed pumping model allows the user to adjust pump performance using the relative speed factor. A single relative speed setting, or a pattern of time varying relative speed factors can be applied to the pump. This is especially useful when modeling the operation of existing VSPs in your system.

The Affinity Laws are used to adjust pump performance according to the relative speed factor setting. See the Pump Theory topic for more information regarding Variable Speed Pumps and the Affinity Laws.

VSPs with APEX – APEX can be used in conjunction with the VSP model to estimate an unknown relative speed setting sufficient to maintain an operating objective. APEX uses an explicit algorithm to solve for unknown parameters directly (Boulos and Wood, 1990). This technique has proven to be powerful, robust, and computationally efficient for estimation of network parameters and has been improved to allow use for steady state and extended period simulations.

To use APEX for estimating relative speed factors, the control node and control level setting for the pump must be selected and the pump curve and operating range for the pump must be defined. The following paragraphs provide guidelines for performing these tasks.

Control Node Location – The location of the control node is an important consideration that affects pump operating efficiency, pressure maintenance performance, and, in rare instances, the stability of the parameter estimation calculation. The algorithm has been designed to allow multiple VSPs to operate within one pressure zone of a network; however, the pump and control node pairs should be decoupled from one another. In other words, a control node should be located such that only the pump it controls influences it. If the pressure zone of the model contains a tank or reservoir (hydraulic boundary conditions), consider making the boundary condition the control node as opposed to selecting a pressure junction near the boundary. This will eliminate the possibility of specifying a set of hydraulic conditions that are impossible to maintain, and thus reduce the possibility of computational failure.


Setting the Target Head – The control node target head is the constant elevation of the hydraulic grade line (HGL) that the VSP will attempt to maintain. The target head at the control node must be within the physical limitations of the VSP as it has been defined (pump curve and maximum speed setting). If the target head is greater then the maximum head the pump can generate at the demanded flow rate the pump will automatically revert to fixed speed operation at the maximum relative speed setting, and the target head will not be maintained.

Tip: Navigating to the target head settings – The VSP target head for junction nodes can be set on the "VSP" tab of the "Pump" dialog box, and for tanks on the "Section" tab of the Tank dialog box by adjusting the initial level.

Setting the Maximum Relative Speed Factor – For flexible operation, a variable speed drive and pump should be configured such that it can efficiently operate over a range of speeds to satisfy the pressure and flow requirements it will be subject to. The value selected for the maximum relative speed factor depends on the normal operating range of the drive motor. To set the proper maximum value you must determine the drive motors normal operating speed and maximum operating speed (the maximum speed at which the drive motor normally operates, not the speed at which the drive catastrophically fails). The relative speed factor is defined as the quotient of the current operating speed and the normal operating speed. Thus the maximum relative speed factor is simply the maximum operating speed of the drive divided by the normal operating speed. For example, a maximum relative speed factor of 2.0 means that the maximum speed is two times the normal operating speed, and a maximum relative speed factor of 1.0 means that the maximum operating speed is equal to the normal operating speed.

Defining the Pump Curve – In order to determine the relative speed factor using APEX, the pump curve must be smooth and continuously differentiable; thus a one point or three point power function curve definition must be used. For best results, the curve should be defined for the normal operating speed of the pump (corresponding to a relative speed factor equal to 1.0, regardless of the maximum speed setting).

VSP Interactions with Simple and Logical Controls The VSP model and APEX have been designed to fully integrate with the simple and rule based control framework within WaterCAD 5.0. The user must keep in mind that the definition of controls requires that the state (On, Off, Fixed Speed Override) and speed setting of a VSP be properly managed during the simulation. Therefore, the interactions between VSPs and controls can be rather complex. We have tried to the extent possible to simplify these interactions while maintaining the power and flexibility to model real world behaviors. The paragraphs that follow describe guidelines for defining simple and logical controls with VSPs.

Pattern based VSPs – The pattern of relative speed factors specified for a VSP takes precedence over all simple and logical control commands. Therefore, the use of controls with pattern based VSPs is not recommended. Rather, the pattern of relative speed factors should be defined such that control objectives are implicitly met.


VSP's with APEX – A VSP can be switched into any one of three different states. When the VSP is On, the APEX will estimate the relative speed sufficient to maintain a constant pressure head at the control node. When the VSP is Off, the relative speed factor and flow through the pump are set to zero, and the pressure head at the control node is a function of the prevailing network boundary and demand conditions. When the control state of a VSP is Fixed Speed Override, the pump will operate at the maximum speed setting and the target head will no longer be maintained. The Temporarily Closed state for a VSP indicates that the CV within the pump has closed in response to prevailing hydraulic conditions, and that the target head cannot be maintained. The VSP control node can be specified at any junction node or tank in a network model. As described below, however, the behavior of simple and logical controls depends on the type of control node selected.

Junction Nodes – When the VSP control node type selected is a junction node, the VSP will behave according to some automatic behaviors in addition to the controls defined for the pump. If the head at the control node is above the target head, the pump state will automatically switch to Off. If the head at the control node is less then the target head, the pump state will automatically switch to On. The VSP will automatically switch into and out of the Fixed Speed Override and Temporarily Closed states in order to maintain the fixed head at the control node and prevent reverse flow through the pump. Additional controls can be added to model more complex use cases.

Tanks – When the VSP control node is a tank, the user must manage the state of the pump through control definitions, allowing for flexible modeling of the complex control behaviors that may be desired for tanks. If a VSP has a state of On, the pump will maintain the current level of the tank. For example, at the beginning of a simulation if a VSP has status On it will maintain the initial level of the tank. As the simulation progresses and the Pump happens to turn Off, Temporarily Close, or go into Fixed Speed Override, the level in the tank will be determined in response to the hydraulic conditions prevailing in the network. When the VSP turns On again, it will maintain the current level of the tank, not the initial level. Thus control statements must be written that dictate what state the pump should switch to depending on the level in the tank. A pump station with a VSP and a fixed speed pump operating in a coordinated fashion can be used to model tank drain and fill operations.

Performing Advanced Analyses The VSP model is fully integrated with the energy cost manager for easy estimation of pump operating costs. When comparing the energy efficiency of fixed speed and variable speed pumps, however, it is important to bear in mind that the pumps are not maintaining the same pressures in the network. The performance of the pumps should be compared in such a way that takes this difference into account; otherwise the comparison is of little value. For example, a comparison between a VSP and a fixed speed pump is prepared, but the target head at the control node is greater than the head maintained there by the fixed speed pump. It is no wonder that the VSP energy efficiency numbers will be disappointing – the VSP is maintaining higher pressures.

The concept of a minimum acceptable head (or pressure) can be useful when evaluating the performance of fixed speed and variable speed pumps. Both pumps should be sized and operated such that the pressure is equal to, or greater than, the minimum acceptable head. In this way, the heads maintained by the respective pumps can be used to define equivalency between the respective designs. When the comparison is thoughtfully designed and conducted, it is likely that the energy efficiency improvements possible with VSPs will come to light more clearly.


References Lingireddy, S. and D.J. Wood (1998). Improved Operation of Water Distribution Systems Using Variable Speed Pumps. Journal of Energy Engineering (ASCE). 124(3) 90-103.

Boulos, P. F. and D. J. Wood (1990). Explicit Calculation of Pipe-Network Parameters. Journal of Hydraulic Engineering (ASCE). 116(11) 1329-1344.


Notes


Appendix C:

Scenario Management Guide

C.1. Overview Haestad Methods’ scenario management feature can dramatically increase your productivity in the "What If?" areas of modeling, including calibration, operations analysis, and planning.

By investing a little time now to understand scenario management, you can avoid unnecessary editing and data duplication. Take advantage of scenario management to get a lot more out of your model, with much less work and expense.

In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), automated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:

• A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of "What If?" conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and separate results.

• Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.

• The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.

• With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.

These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore them.

C.2. About this Guide The depth of scenario management as implemented by Haestad Methods is probably far beyond what you have ever seen before. With that in mind, this guide is intended as an introduction to the philosophy and terminology upon which scenario management is based.

372 Appendix C: Scenario Management Guide

This is not intended as a step-by-step guide to using the software. If you are a moderately experienced Windows software user, you should have no difficulty learning and exploring the scenario management interface.

Excellent tutorials and context-sensitive on-line help are also available within the software itself. These learning tools will prove to be of tremendous assistance to you for all aspects of the software, and should certainly not be ignored if you are having difficulty. For more information, just click the Help button, which is available from anywhere within the program. In addition, contact Haestad Methods for the schedule of the workshops that are held around the country.

C.3. Before Haestad Methods: Distributed Scenarios Let us begin by understanding the approaches that have historically been used to attempt "What If?" analyses. Traditionally, there have only been two possible ways of analyzing the effects of change on a software model:

• Change the model, recalculate, and review the results

• Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results

Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the data duplication, editing, and re-editing becomes very time-consuming and error-prone as the size of the system - and the number of possible conditions - increase. Additionally, comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output must be stored in physically separate data files.


Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios

C.4. With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives:

• Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain (one, ideally).

• Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to things such as input and output data, and direct comparisons.

• Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data from existing scenarios (data reuse)

• Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot in common

The scenario management feature developed by Haestad Methods successfully meets all of these objectives. A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited number of "What If?" conditions, edit only the data that needs to be changed, and quickly generate direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.


C.5. The Scenario Cycle The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying and editing data, but without the disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome file management. This process allows you to cycle through any number of changes to the model, without fear of overwriting critical data or duplicating important information. Of course, it is possible to directly change data for any scenario, but an "audit trail" of scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a calibration series or for understanding a group of master plan updates.

With Haestad Methods: Self-contained Scenarios

C.6. Scenario Anatomy: Attributes and Alternatives Before we explore scenario management further, a few key terms should be defined:

Attribute - An attribute is a fundamental property of an object, and is often a single numeric quantity. For example, the attributes of a pipe include diameter, length, and roughness.

Alternative - An alternative holds a family of related attributes so pieces of data that you are most likely to change together are grouped for easy referencing and editing. For example, a physical properties alternative groups physical data for the network’s elements, such as elevations, sizes, and roughness coefficients.

Scenario - A scenario has a list of referenced alternatives (which hold the attributes), and combines these alternatives to form an overall set of system conditions that can be analyzed. This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily generate system conditions that mix and match groups of data that have been previously created. Note that scenarios do not actually hold any attribute data - the referenced alternatives do.


C.7. A Familiar Parallel Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, anyone who has eaten at a restaurant should be able to relate fairly easily. A meal (scenario) is comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an entrée, and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entrée may have a meat, a vegetable, and a starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in the following figure:

A Restaurant Meal "Scenario"

The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combination of courses) that could be ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1, Entrée 1, and Dessert 2 might then be combined to define a complete meal.

Generalizing this concept, we see that any scenario simply references one alternative from each category to create a "big picture" that can be analyzed. Note that different types of alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes, and any category can have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from.

Generic Scenario Anatomy

C.8. Scenario Behavior: Inheritance The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the basic goals of scenario management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two other primary goals have also been addressed: a single project file is used, and


easy access to input data and calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical interface.

But what about the other objective: minimizing the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot of common input? Surely an entire set of pipe diameters should not be re-specified if only one or two change?

The solution is a familiar concept to most people: inheritance.

In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include such traits as eye-color, hair color, and bone structure. There are two significant differences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the way inheritance is implemented in software:

• Overriding inheritance

• Dynamic inheritance

C.9. Overriding Inheritance Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics. A child can override inherited characteristics at any time by specifying a new value for that characteristic. These overriding values do not affect the parent, and are therefore considered "local" to the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the characteristic to its inherited state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes, only in local attributes.

For example, suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent. Now the child puts on a pair of green- tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye color. When the contact lenses are on, we say his natural eye color is "overridden" locally, and his eye color is green. When the child removes the tinted lenses, his eye color instantly reverts to blue, as inherited from his parent.

C.10. Dynamic Inheritance Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parent’s characteristic is changed, existing children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to brown, and the children’s eyes instantly inheriting the brown color also. Of course, if the child has already overridden a characteristic locally, as with the green lenses, his eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed. At this point, his eye color will revert to the inherited color, now brown.

This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide-scale changes to a model, fixing an error, and so on. If rippling changes are not desired, the child can override all of the parent’s values, or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a child.

C.11. When are Values Local, and When are They Inherited? Any changes that are made to the model belong to the currently active scenario and the alternatives that it references. If the alternatives happen to have children, those children will also inherit the changes unless they have specifically overridden that attribute. The following figure demonstrates the effects of a change to a mid-level alternative. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text.


A Mid-level Hierarchy Alternative Change

C.12. Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance Inheritance has an application every time you hear the phrase "just like x except for y". Rather than specifying all of the data from x again to form this new condition, we can simply create a child from x and change y appropriately. Now we have both conditions, with no duplicated effort.

We can even apply this inheritance to our restaurant analogy as follows. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text.

• "Salad 2 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."

• "Salad 3 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."

Note: Salad 3 could inherit from Salad 2, if we prefer: "Salad 3 is just like Salad 2, except for the dressing."

• "Entrée 2 is just like Entrée 1, except for the meat and the starch."

• "Entrée 3 is just like Entrée 2, except for the meat."

Note: If the vegetable of the day changes (say from green beans to peas), only Entrée 1 needs to be updated, and the other entrées will automatically inherit the vegetable attribute of "Peas" instead of "Green Beans".

• "Dessert 2 is just like Dessert 1, except for the topping."


Note: Dessert 3 has nothing in common with the other desserts, so it can be created as a "root" or "base" alternative. It does not inherit its attribute data from any other alternative.

C.13. Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance Just as a child alternative can inherit attributes from its parent, a child scenario can inherit which alternatives it references from its parent. This is essentially still the phrase "just like x except for y", but on a larger scale.

Carrying through on our meal example, consider a situation where you go out to dinner with three friends. The first friend places his order, and the second friend orders the same thing except for the dessert. The third friend orders something totally different, and you order the same meal as hers except for the salad.

The four meal "scenarios" could then be presented as follows (inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text):

• "Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert." The salad and entrée alternatives are inherited from Meal 1.

• "Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2." A totally new "base" or "root" is created.

• "Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad." The entrée and dessert alternatives are inherited from Meal 3.

C.14. A Water Distribution Example Let us consider a fairly simple water distribution system: a single reservoir supplies water by gravity to three junction nodes.

Example Water Distribution System

Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial settings, operational controls, water quality, and fire flow, we are going to focus on the two most commonly changed sets of alternatives: demands and physical properties. Within these alternatives, we are going to concentrate on junction baseline demands and pipe diameters.


C.15. Building the Model (Average Day Conditions) During model construction, probably only one alternative from each category is going to be considered. This model is built with average demand calculations and preliminary pipe diameter estimates. At this point we can name our scenario and alternatives, and the hierarchies look like the following (showing only the items of interest):

C.16. Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions)

In our example, the local planning board also requires analysis of maximum day demands, so a new demand alternative is required. No variation in demand is expected at J-2, which is an industrial site. As a result, the new demand alternative can inherit J-2’s demand from "Average Day" while the other two demands are overridden.

Now we can create a child scenario from "Average Day" that inherits the physical alternative, but overrides the selected demand alternative. As a result, we get the following scenario hierarchy:

Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative hierarchy remains the same as before.

C.17. Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions) Based on pressure requirements, the system is adequate to supply maximum day demands. Another local regulation requires analysis of peak hour demands, with slightly lower allowable pressures. Since the peak hour demands also share the industrial load from the "Average Day" condition, "Peak Hour" can be


inherited from "Average Day". In this instance, "Peak Hour" could inherit just as easily from "Maximum Day".

Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands, as shown below:

Note again that we did not change any physical data, so the physical alternatives remain the same.

C.18. Correcting an Error This analysis results in acceptable pressures, until it is discovered that the industrial demand is not actually 500 gpm - it is 1,500 gpm! Because of the inheritance within the demand alternatives, however, only the "Average Day" demand for J-2 needs to be updated. The changes will ripple through to the children. After the single change is made, the demand hierarchy is as follows:

Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections. The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results.

When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J-2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions.

C.19. Analyzing Improvement Suggestions To counter the headloss from the increased demand load, two possible improvements are suggested:

• A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This physical alternative is created as a child of the "Preliminary Pipes" alternative, inheriting all the diameters except P-1’s, which is overridden.

• Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonalities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives, this can be created as a base (root) alternative.

These changes are then incorporated to arrive at the following hierarchies:


This time, the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were changed. The two new scenarios ("Peak, Big P-1", "Peak, All Big Pipes") can be batch run to provide results for these proposed improvements.

Next, features like Scenario Comparison Annotation (from the Scenario Manager) and comparison Graphs (for extended period simulations, from the element editor dialogs) can be used to directly determine which proposal results in the most improved pressures.

C.20. Finalizing the Project It is decided that enlarging P-1 is the optimum solution, so new scenarios are created to check the results for average day and maximum day demands. Notice that this step does not require handling any new data. All of the information we want to model is present in the alternatives we already have!

Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the "Avg. Day, Big P-1" scenario from "Avg. Day" (changing the physical alternative) or to inherit from "Peak, Big P-1" (changing the demand alternative). Likewise, "Max. Day, Big P-1" could inherit from either "Max. Day" or "Peak, Big P-1".

Neither the demand nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run the last set of scenarios, so they remain as they were.


C.21. Summary In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), automated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:

• A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of "What If?" conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and separate results.

• Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.

• The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.

• With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.

These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore them.

C.22. Conclusion These are the fundamental concepts behind the architecture of Haestad Methods’ scenario management. To learn more about actually using scenario management in Haestad Methods software, start by running the scenario management tutorial from the Help menu or from within the scenario manager itself. Then load one of the SAMPLE projects and explore the scenarios defined there. For context-sensitive help, press F1 or the Help button any time there is a screen or field that puzzles you.

Haestad Methods’ scenario management feature gives you a powerful tool for modeling real-world engineering scenarios when analyzing system response to different demands, reviewing the impacts of future growth, and iterating to find the least expensive design. That means you will be able to finish your projects faster, spend less money, and improve your bottom line.


Appendix D:

Capital Cost Estimating

D.1. Capital Cost Estimating Basics The Cost Manager in WaterCAD, StormCAD, and SewerCAD is a tool for tracking the costs associated with a water distribution, storm sewer, or sanitary sewer construction project. It is set up to mimic the way that a typical engineer would track the costs of a capital improvement project during a planning study. In order to compute the cost of a particular Scenario, you must supply the model with the following information:

1. Elements included in costing. The first step is to select the elements from the model that you want to include in a given Cost Scenario. This set of elements may include all the elements in the model if, for instance, you are modeling a new subdivision, or a subset of the elements if you are simply expanding an existing system.

2. Unit Costs. The second level of data is the costs associated with each element. The costs for each element are broken down into two types, construction and non-construction. Construction costs are specified on a per unit basis where the unit can be either an item (e.g., $/hydrant) or a length unit (e.g., $/ft or $/m). Most unit costs are constants, but unit costs for pipe elements and gravity structures can also be specified as a function of diameter or some other property of the element using a unit cost function. A unit cost function defines the relationship between the unit cost for an element and some attribute of that element. Non-construction costs can be specified as either a percentage of the total construction costs or as a lump sum amount.

3. Quantities. The third level of information is the quantity of each item (e.g., number of service lines, length of pipe, number of valves) associated with a given element. In the case of pipes, the user need not specify the length, as the default value for the quantity is the length of the pipe segment.

4. Adjustments. Finally, the user can enter the adjustments that should be made to the total costs computed for the elements in a Scenario (i.e. project). You can specify these project level cost adjustments as a lump sum or as a percentage of the total cost.

Element cost data vs. Cost Manager The early sections of this appendix describe how to handle cost data for each element. Entering the cost data for individual elements does not involve the use of the Cost Manager portion of the program. The Cost Manager is used to sum the costs of the elements and prepare project cost reports. Left clicking on

384 Appendix D: Capital Cost Estimating

the Cost Manager is accessed by clicking the Cost Manager button , or by selecting Analysis\Compute Costs from the pull-down menu. Costs for individual elements can be calculated without entering the Cost Manager.

Navigating within the Cost Manager There are five selections within the Cost Manager.

• Unit Cost Functions – Use this selection to construct unit cost functions.

• Cost Alternatives – Opens the Cost Alternative dialog where you can edit the element cost data defined in the project.

• Cost Adjustments – This selection enables the user to enter cost adjustments that pertain to the overall Scenario, not just individual elements.

• Active Scenarios – The user can specify which Scenarios will appear in the Cost Manager.

• Cost Reports – View cost reports with varying levels of detail.

The Cost Manager also provides a way of viewing the calculated costs at user-selected levels of detail.

Level of detail The cost analysis feature is extremely flexible with regard to the level of detail in which you can develop cost estimates. At the simplest level, you may want to capture all the costs of a pipe in a single $/ft or $/m unit cost. At the other extreme, you may break down the cost of a pipe into numerous cost items, including materials, installation, repaving, hydrants, services, valves, land, engineering, inspection, legal, permits, and contribution to a capital clearing account, plus an explicit allowance for omissions and contingencies. Either approach can be easily accommodated using the Cost Manager.

Construction vs. overall project cost It is important to understand which costs you are calculating, construction costs or overall capital costs. For example, you must decide if the costs calculated are pure construction costs, or if they include items such as inspection, design, land, easements, etc. There is no single correct way to compute costs, but it is important to realize which costs are included or not included in the totals, and to perform cost evaluations in a consistent manner.

Indirect costs by element or by project Indirect costs such as design and inspection may be assigned to each element individually or to the project as a whole, depending on how you wish to account for the costs in your estimate. For instance, if a pipeline project is made up of five pipe elements, the inspection cost may be added into each element, or calculated after summing the individual costs and added to the overall project cost.

Cost functions vs. fixed unit cost For pipes and gravity node structures, it is possible to specify unit costs as a function of an attribute of the element. For instance, the unit cost of a pipe might be a function of the diameter, or the cost per unit for a gravity structure could be a function of the structure depth. By using a cost function, the unit cost for an element will be automatically updated as the physical characteristics of the element change.

Scenarios vs. Cost Alternatives While cost data are stored in the Cost Alternatives, costs are calculated for individual Scenarios. This distinction is necessary because element properties such as pipe diameter and manhole depth are not stored


with cost data, but rather with the system’s physical data. So, the cost must be based on a Scenario, which includes both a Cost Alternative and a Physical Properties Alternative.

Multiple Scenarios The cost data that you enter is stored in a Cost Alternative, so you can easily change the cost data that is used from Scenario to Scenario. For instance, you may have several phases of construction for which you wish to separately compute the associated costs. You can do this by creating two Cost Alternatives, one containing the cost data for the elements in phase one, and another containing the costs for the elements in phase two. By creating the appropriate Scenarios to reference these Alternatives, you can quickly compute and compare the costs associated with each phase.

D.2. Entering Data for Multiple Elements Thus far, data entry has been described for individual elements. However, in most cases, unit costs are the same for a given type of item regardless of the element with which it is associated. For example, a service line may cost $1200, and you want to use that same unit price for all elements. You can define these costs by either using: prototypes, globally editing the costs, or using unit cost functions. Each method is explained below.

Prototypes If you know that you will be using the Cost Manager before you begin your project, the Prototype feature allows you to easily establish default cost data by using the Cost tab. For instance, if you know that all your pipes are going to have construction cost items for material and installation, valves, and service connections, you can enter these items into the construction cost table, along with their unit costs. Then, when you have finished laying out your system, you can select the Pipe Editor and update the appropriate quantity for each of these items.

For example, the pipe prototype may have an item labeled "Service Connection" with a quantity of "0" and a unit cost of "750". Then, for each element, the labels and unit costs will appear with the default values from the prototype, and you only need to specify the quantity of each item.


Setting the Include in Cost Calculation box In the prototype shown above, cost data has been entered, but the box labeled Include in Cost Calculation has not been checked. When new pipes are created in the graphical editor, their cost data will default to the values shown here, but they will not be selected for inclusion in the cost analysis. If you select Include in Cost Calculation in the prototype, the program will calculate costs for every element subsequently entered into the model. It may be necessary to use the Table Manager or Alternative Manager to ensure that the model is only calculating costs for the elements that the user wants included in the costing. For example, costs should not be calculated for existing pipes. The Pressure Pipe tab in the Cost Alternative Editor below shows how you can specify that only certain pipes are included in the cost calculation.


Entering cost items and unit prices globally If you have already entered a system for which you would like to compute the cost, you can globally edit the cost data either through a FlexTable or the Cost Alternative Editor. Once in the Cost Alternative Editor, select the alternative to be edited, and choose the tab corresponding to the type of element to be edited. There, right-click on the Element Costs column heading and select Global Edit. In this way, it is possible to add a global unit cost for hydrants or service lines. Then, within each element, you need only enter the quantity of these items. If necessary, you can still override the unit cost in an individual Element Editor or delete an item entirely.

Using filters to edit only some elements If you use FlexTables, you can easily select subsets of elements for applying different default cost data. For instance, you may wish to apply a different unit cost function to a material item and an installation item for pipes having different materials. In the FlexTables, you can filter a table to view only the pipes that are made of ductile iron, and then globally edit the cost data for these pipes. You can then repeat the process for your PVC pipes. Combining element prototypes and the global editing capabilities makes it easy for you to quickly enter large amounts of cost data and develop a planning-level estimate of the cost of your system.


D.3. Unit Cost Functions Unit cost functions define a relationship between a unit cost and a certain property of an element. For pipe elements, the unit cost would be in units of $/length and might be related to the diameter of the pipe. In WaterCAD, pipes are the only elements for which unit cost functions can be defined. However, in StormCAD and SewerCAD, you can also define unit cost functions for gravity structures like inlets, junctions, and manholes. Unit cost functions for gravity structures relate the cost of the element to some property, such as structure depth. As with any function, unit cost functions can give the relationship between cost ($/length or $/structure) and an element property (diameter or structure depth) in either a tabular form or an equation.

Form of cost functions Cost functions can be specified in formula (equation) or tabular (table) format as shown below:

• Formula Unit Cost Function

$/ft = 0.4 D1.5

where D = diameter (in.)

Or

• Tabular Unit Cost Function

D (in) 6 8 10 12 14 16

$/ft 5.90 9.00 12.60 16.60 20.90 25.60


The two cost functions are essentially the same at the actual discrete diameters. The format that the user chooses is strictly a matter of individual preference. Graphs of the formula and tabular unit cost functions given above are shown below:


Multiple cost functions Of course, not every pipe of a given size is going to have the same unit cost. Pipes laid in new subdivisions in soil generally have lower costs than pipes laid in congested downtown areas with a great deal of rock and extensive repaving. The user may therefore want to define several different cost functions corresponding to different pipes and different conditions. Each of these cost functions should be given its own unique name or label.

Some typical unit cost functions may be:

• New roads

• Cross country with rock

• Downtown urban area

• Old neighborhood

• Boring under highway

A typical list of cost functions (in this case for pipes) is shown below. Note that you can build a new cost function by adding it or by duplicating and editing an existing function.


Assigning cost functions to elements Once the cost functions have been named and defined, you can assign them to any number of construction cost items for each pipe being included in the cost calculations. This assignment can be made using the Pipe Editor, FlexTables, or the Cost Alternative Editor.

Entering cost function data You can enter data to construct the cost functions by selecting Unit Cost Functions from the Cost Manager, or by clicking the ellipsis (…) button in the Advanced Options dialog located under the Cost tab of any element that supports cost functions. The units of the independent variable will be the units of that variable elsewhere in the model, while the units of the unit cost are $/ft or $/m for pipe and $/unit for non-pipes.

D.3.1. Formula Cost Functions

Defining cost formulas When you decide to use a formula rather than a table to describe unit costs, you need only enter four coefficients to describe the cost function, rather than an entire table of values. With this method, adjusting the costs for a different cost function involves changing only one or two of the coefficients of the equation rather than an entire table. The general form of the cost function is

$/ft = d + a (x-c)b

where x is the value of an element attribute such as diameter, rise, or span (in length units such as inches and millimeters for diameter and feet or meters for depth); and a, b, c, and d are coefficients of the cost equation.


In general, typical ranges for the coefficients for pipe cost functions in $/ft where diameter (span) is expressed in inches are:

0.4 < a < 1.0

1.2 < b < 1.8

0.0 < c < 20

0.0 < d < 6

These coefficients are described in more detail in the following section.

Coefficients in cost formulas Costs are most dependent on b since it is an exponent. It indicates how sensitive costs are to size. If costs are relatively independent of size, b is small, while if they vary dramatically with size, b is larger. The coefficient d represents a minimal cost for something like pavement restoration, which is independent of the size of the pipe. The coefficient a is the best parameter to adjust when converting cost from one laying/excavation condition to another.

The figure below shows the effects of the coefficients on the shape of the cost curve.

If a user has a few data points, it is best to set c and d to zero, b to 1.6, and see what value of the a coefficient best fits the cost data. Try using a spreadsheet graph for this. Then, adjust b to get the curvature of the cost curve, and c and d to get the correct x- and y-axis intercepts.


D.3.2. Tabular Cost Functions

Defining cost tables Setting up a cost table simply involves typing in pairs of values in the Unit Cost Function Editor dialog. While the independent variables for the formula cost functions were required to be numbers, the independent variables for tabular functions can be numeric or text values, as shown below.

D.3.3. Numeric Variables Text Variables Rise Section Size

Structure Depth Material Type

Structure Diameter

Pipe Diameter

Minor Loss Coefficient

Note: In a circular gravity pipe, the rise and span both equal the diameter.

D.3.4. Complex Pipe Elements Sometimes a single pipe may actually have different unit costs along its length. Consider a 500 foot pipe that has an 80 foot stream crossing part way along the pipe, 320 feet of cross country pipe, and 100 feet of pipe laid in an old neighborhood. There are two ways to approach costing this kind of pipe element:

• Set up three separate model elements (i.e., pipes), each with its own cost function. This method is the most straightforward way, even though it increases the number of pipes the hydraulic model must solve.

Or

• Set up one 500 foot pipe with the cost function for cross country pipe and add the following: a cost item for the additional cost of the stream crossing with a quantity of 80 feet and a unit price of, say, $20/ft, and a cost item for the additional cost of laying pipe in the old neighborhood with a quantity of 100 feet and a unit price of $30/ft, where the $20 and $30 represents the incremental costs for the more expensive pipe laying. The difficulty with this approach is that the add-on cost is independent of pipe size. If the add-on costs are a function of pipe size, new cost functions for those items can be defined.


D.4. Building Cost Scenarios Costs are calculated for Scenarios, which are made up of physical data, demands or loads, initial settings, costs, and other Alternatives. The data used in the cost calculations is primarily found in the Cost Alternative, but pipe and manhole sizes are taken from the Physical Alternative and system adjustment data is entered in the Cost Manager under Cost Adjustments on a Scenario basis. Values in the other Alternatives, such as demands and water quality, have no impact on the cost calculations. The relationship between sources of data for cost calculations is shown in the figure below.


Associating costs with scenarios While cost data is entered in the Element Editors, FlexTables, and Cost Alternatives, these costs must be associated with a Scenario. This is done in the Scenario Manager by selecting the Cost Alternative to be used with a Scenario. Each Scenario has a cost associated with it, which means that there may be many Scenarios with the same cost. This occurs when the Cost and Physical Alternatives are the same for a particular Scenario even though the Scenarios may have a different demand alterative or initial condition. However, you can control which Scenarios will appear in the Cost Manager.

Application For example, consider a pipe on Jones Street that is assigned a cost function in a Cost Alternative that is based on the diameter of the pipe. In Physical Properties Alternative 1 the pipe is given a diameter of 12 inches, and in Physical Properties Alternative 2 it is given a diameter of 16 inches. When Physical Properties Alternative 1 is combined in a Scenario with the Cost Alternative it will generate a cost for the 12-inch Jones Street pipe, and when Physical Properties Alternative 2 is combined with the Cost Alternative, it will generate a cost for the 16-inch.

Using Cost Alternatives to segregate multiple projects in a plan Cost Alternatives can also be used to separate costs into distinct projects. A Cost Alternative identifies which elements are included in the cost calculation and summary. For example, you may have ten elements, such as nine pipes and a pump station, that have costs calculated for them in the model. Seven of the pipes will be installed on the north side of town in a single project, while two pipes and a pump station will be installed in the south side under a different project. When defining the Cost Alternative, you set up one Cost Alternative with the seven north side pipes, and another Cost Alternative with the two south side


pipes and the pump station. Checking the Include in Cost Calculation box in the Cost Alternative Editor under the Cost Manager determines which elements are part of the cost analysis for each Scenario.

D.5. Viewing Cost Results You can view cost results on the screen, by exporting them to spreadsheets and other software, and by printing them for use in reports. These reported costs can be given on an element-by-element basis in the element dialogs, aggregated by pipes and nodes in FlexTables, and on a project basis in the Cost Manager. The default display units on cost are dollars ($) with no decimal places, although they can be changed to thousands of dollars (k$), and the display precision can be adjusted.

Active Scenarios The Cost Manager can calculate costs for every Scenario created in the Scenario Manager. However, some Scenarios may share the same Cost Alternative and Physical Alternative, and differ only in the loading (demand) or initial conditions. In these cases, the costs will be the same for the different Scenarios. You may therefore want to view the costs for only a few of the available Scenarios. This can be done by selecting Active Scenarios in the Cost Manager and checking the appropriate boxes. Only those Scenarios that are selected as active in the Cost Manager will have costs calculated for them.

Use of cost FlexTables The cost reports are formatted as FlexTables, so the columns can be adjusted and display properties changed. The tables can also be exported to a tab delimited or comma delimited file, or copied to the Windows Clipboard and pasted into other software. The actual values displayed in the cells, not the formulas, are copied, so the numerical values should not be adjusted once they are exported. That is, if the unit cost or quantity is changed, the totals will not automatically update in the spreadsheet.


Individual element costs For any element, costs can be viewed under the Cost tab of the element dialog. If there are more than three construction or non-construction costs, not all will be visible at once. The costs can be viewed in a report like the one shown below by selecting Report\Cost Report from the pull-down menus. To obtain a printout, select Print Preview and Print.

Node and pipe cost tables Just as the model contains some standard pipe and node tables, they also contain standard cost tables. These can be viewed from the Tabular Reports dialog by selecting Node Cost Report or Pipe Cost Report. In this view, it is possible to sort or filter elements and use all the functionality of FlexTables to customize the look of the table. The table can also be exported, copied, and printed. You can filter out elements not included in the cost calculation by selecting Options\Filter\Custom.

Cost Scenario Tables The costs can be viewed for an entire Scenario (project) in the Cost Manager itself. The costs are presented in a tree structure such that the user can expand or collapse various branches of the tree to suit the level of detail desired.

More attractive tables are available by selecting Cost Reports. There are four levels of detail available, as shown in the examples below:

Detailed tables show all unit costs and quantities.


Element Summary gives construction and non-construction costs for each element.


Project Summary gives totals for each type of element (eg Pipes, Tanks, etc.)

Pipe Costs gives the total length and cost for the pipes included in the cost analysis.


D.6. Assigning Costs to Model Elements

D.6.1. Assigning Costs to Model Elements

Construction vs. non-construction costs The costs for each type of element are divided into two types—construction and non-construction. The definition of each type of cost depends to a certain extent on the user. However, in general, the difference between the two types of costs is that construction costs are based on a unit cost multiplied by a quantity, while non-construction costs are specified as either a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs. The method of specifying non-construction costs is identical for every element. There are slightly different options for specifying construction costs, depending on the type of element to which you are assigning the cost. These nuances will be explained in more detail in the sections that follow.

Cost considerations for different elements While cost management for the various elements shares most features, different types of elements have some special behaviors. The four distinct categories are pipes, nodes with cost functions, nodes without cost functions, and pump stations. Each type is described in more detail in the corresponding topics.

D.6.2. Pipe Costs

Cost per item vs. cost per length The construction costs for pipes are entered into the construction cost table portion of the Cost tab for the element. The table can contain any number of construction cost items. You can specify each pipe construction cost item as either a cost per item or a cost per length. If you specify the cost on a per item basis, then the total construction cost is simply the cost per item multiplied by the quantity or number of objects. The user indicates the type of cost in the Unit column by selecting:

1. each if the costs are calculated per item, or 2. any length unit if the costs are calculated per length.

Items with cost per length If a length unit (e.g., ft or m) is selected in the Unit column, the number in the quantity column is the length by which the unit cost is to be multiplied. The default value in the quantity field is the length of the pipe used in the hydraulic calculations. However, if that particular unit cost only applies to a portion of the pipe, you can enter another value by deselecting Set Quantity Equal to Pipe Length in the Advanced Options dialog for each cost item.

Unit cost functions for pipes The Cost Manager allows you to specify the unit cost as a function of a pipe attribute using a unit cost function. The unit cost function relates the cost per unit length to a pipe property such as diameter. If you specify a unit cost function for a construction cost item, then the program will calculate the unit cost for that item. Creating unit cost functions is described later.

Example Consider a 650 feet of a 10-inch diameter pipe with the following cost data:


Table 1 Unit Cost as a Function of Diameter Diameter (in) Unit Cost ($/ft)

8 45

10 55

12 60

And with the following unit costs and quantities:

• Material and installation $55/ft (calculated based on the above table)

• 7 service connections at $650 each

• Omission and contingency at 15% of construction cost

• Inspection services at 5% of construction cost

• Utility Easement at $350

The Cost tab for this pipe would appear as follows:

Each pipe can have as many construction cost items as you wish, which means that any number of unit cost functions can be used for a single pipe. For instance, you could have unit cost functions for materials, excavation, or resurfacing. The advantage of specifying the costs in terms of unit cost functions is that as the physical characteristics of the pipe change, the cost for the element is automatically updated.


D.6.3. Node Costs

Types of nodes by cost In terms of assigning construction costs, nodal elements can be broken down into two categories: those that support unit cost functions and those that do not support unit cost functions. For the most part, the construction cost items for these two categories of nodal elements are specified in a very similar fashion. The first category includes the gravity structures: manholes, inlets, and junctions. The second category consists of the remaining nodal elements: outlets, pressure junctions, pumps, valves, tanks, and reservoirs.

Cost items for nodes The construction cost items for nodal elements consist of a label, quantity, unit, and unit cost. The unit field contains a user-defined string and is primarily used for bookkeeping, since it does not affect the total cost of the item. The total cost for the construction cost item is simply the quantity multiplied by the unit cost, which are parameters defined by the user.

For elements that support unit cost functions (manholes, inlets, and junctions), the function can be defined in the Cost Manager and assigned to the construction cost item. As with pipes, if a unit cost function is assigned to a construction cost item, then the unit cost is computed based on some attribute. The difference is that for pipes the unit cost function computes a cost per length (e.g., ft or m), while for nodal elements the unit cost function computes a cost for the item (e.g., structure). So if a unit cost function is assigned to a construction cost item, the quantity will default to "1", and the unit will default to "each". A quick way to determine if an element supports cost functions is to look at the element dialog. If it is possible to select the Advanced button, then you can assign a cost function to that element. It is in the Advanced Options dialog that cost functions can be assigned to items, as described later in this document.

Example for a node without a cost function

The construction cost of a tank, a type of element that does not support unit cost functions, may consist of the following items:

• 1 steel tank at $250,000

• 600 ft of fencing at $15/ft

• Site clearing and grading at $20,000

• 1 SCADA system and radio transmitter at $20,000

The Cost tab for this item is shown below:


Example of a node with a cost function For an inlet, you could use a unit cost function so that the construction costs for the element are updated as the design is changed. Consider an inlet with the following cost data.

Unit Cost Function of Structure Depth Depth (ft) Cost of Subsurface

Structure ($)

6 3000

8 3500

10 4000

• 1 subsurface structure 8 ft deep at $3,500 (calculated from the unit cost function)

• 1 surface inlet at $2,000

The Cost tab for this item would appear as shown below:


D.6.4. Pump Station Costs Pump stations are a special case of nodal elements. In terms of the hydraulic model, a pump station with three pumps makes up three hydraulic elements. However, in terms of cost estimating, a pump station is a single entity. There are two ways to address this situation. You can either apportion the costs evenly between the three elements or aggregate the cost for the entire pump station on a single pump. From a reporting and management perspective, it often makes the most sense to assign all the costs to a single pump as illustrated below:

• 3 pumps at $12,000 each

• 3 pump installations at $4,000 each

• 9 gate valves installed at $2500 each

• 3 check valves at $690 each

• 1 pump station structure at $80,000

• 1 SCADA system with sensors and radio at $25,000

• Engineering and inspection at 15% of construction

• Allowance for contingencies @ 5% of construction

• Land for pumping station at $20,000


The sum of all these costs is the total cost for the element and would show up only in the selected pump. The other two pumps at the station would have zero cost. In the screen capture below, note that only three items are shown in the table, but the table can be scrolled to show the remaining items.

D.6.5. Non-Construction Costs There are numerous indirect costs that are applied to construction projects. The terminology describing these costs varies depending on local conventions, whether a public or private utility is involved, and whether construction is being done with force account labor or outside contractors. There are numerous items that can be included in these indirect costs, such as:

• Design and bidding

• Construction phase engineering services

• Inspection

• Utility overhead

• Capital clearing account

• Administration

• Legal

• Permits

• Allowance for interest on funds used during construction


• Insurance

You are able to include these costs in the following ways:

1. With each element as a lump sum.

2. With each element as a percentage.

3. For the overall Scenario as a lump sum.

4. For the overall Scenario as a percentage of construction costs.

5. For the overall Scenario as a percentage of both construction and non-construction costs (% of total cost).

6. As a factor applied to the overall project (multiplier).

A few of these costs are described in more detail below:

Omissions and contingencies Usually, cost estimators make an allowance for unforeseen items that come up during projects, sometimes referred to as "Omissions and Contingencies" (O&C). These costs are usually high when the project is being formulated initially (25%) and get smaller (5%) as the scope and details of the project are worked out.

It is important not to count the allowance for O&C twice by including an allowance on an element-by-element basis, and then another allowance for the project as a whole.

Land, easement, and right-of-way costs Many projects involve procurement of land, easements, or rights-of-way. These costs are usually not a function of element size, and so can be handled on an element by-element basis as a lump sum or as a cost per foot or acre multiplied by the number of feet or acres. If the land costs are not going to be accounted for element-by-element, but rather by a single land purchase for the entire project, a lump sum cost adjustment should be made to the appropriate Scenario.

Specifying non-construction costs Non-construction cost items for all types of elements are computed in the same manner, and can be specified as either a lump sum or as a percentage of the total construction costs. For instance, you may wish to make allowances for omissions and contingencies on an element-by-element basis. You can do this by assigning a non-construction cost item to every element that is 15% of the total construction cost of the element.

The dialogs and reports below illustrate how the construction and non-construction costs for the following elements will appear in Cost tab of the Element Editor dialog and in the cost report for each element

Pipe (using values from a previous example):

• 650 feet of 10-inch diameter pipe at $55/ft

• 7 service connections at $650 each

• Omission and contingency at 15% of construction

• Inspection Services at 5% of construction

• Uility easement at $350


Tank:

• 1 steel tank at $250,000

• 600 ft of fencing at $15/ft

• Site clearing and grading at $20,000

• 1 SCADA system and radio transmitter at $20,000

• Engineering and inspection at 12% of construction


• 2 acres of land at $50,000/acre

Inlet (using values from a previous example):

• 1 surface inlet at $2,000

• 1 subsurface structure 8 ft deep at $3,500

• Engineering and inspection at 25% of construction cost


Notes


Appendix E:

Haestad Methods

E.1. Overview Haestad Methods offers software solutions to civil engineers throughout the world for analyzing, modeling, and designing all sorts of hydrologic and hydraulic systems, from municipal water and sewer systems to stormwater ponds, open channels, and more. With point-and-click data entry, flexible units, and report-quality output, Haestad Methods is the ultimate source for your modeling needs.

In addition to the ability to run in Stand-Alone mode with a CAD-like interface, three of our products - WaterCAD, StormCAD and SewerCAD - can be totally integrated within AutoCAD. These three programs also share numerous powerful features, such as scenario management, unlimited undo/redo, customizable tables for editing and reporting, customizable GIS, database and spreadsheet connection, and annotation.

Be sure to contact us or visit our web site at www.haestad.com to find out about our latest software, books, training, and open houses.

E.2. Software

E.2.1. WaterCAD WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized pipe networks, such as municipal water distribution systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of functions, including steady-state and extended-period simulations of pressure networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more.

WaterCAD’s abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues, with extensive water quality features, automated fire protection analyses, comprehensive scenario management, and enterprise-wide data sharing faculties.

WaterCAD is available with your choice of a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.

412 Appendix E: Haestad Methods

E.2.2. SewerCAD SewerCAD is a powerful design and analysis tool for modeling sanitary sewage collection and pumping systems. With SewerCAD, you can develop and compute sanitary loads, tracking and combining loads from dry-weather and wet-weather sources. You can also simulate the hydraulic response of the entire system (gravity collection and pressure force mains), observe the effects of overflows and diversions, and even automatically design selected portions of the system. Output covers everything from customizable tables and detailed reports to plan and profile sheets.

SewerCAD can be run in a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.

E.2.3. StormCAD StormCAD is a highly-efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer collection systems. From graphical layout and intelligent network connectivity to flexible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of storm sewer modeling.

Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity, and inlet hydraulics conform to FHWA HEC-22 methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a variety of popular junction loss methods are the foundation of StormCAD’s robust gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and diversions to hydraulic jumps.

StormCAD is available with your choice of a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, an AutoCAD integrated interface, or an ArcView or ArcInfo integrated interface.

E.2.4. PondPack PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that analyzes a tremendous range of situations, from simple sites to complex networked watersheds. The program analyzes pre- and post-developed watershed conditions, and estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond routing, and also computes outlet rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple outfalls, pond infiltration, and pond detention times.

PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, and automatically creates section and page numbers, tables of contents, and indexes. You can quickly create an executive summary for an entire watershed, or build an elaborate drainage report showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed diagrams, rainfall curves, and hydrographs are fully compatible with other Windows’s software, such as AutoCAD.

E.2.5. FlowMaster FlowMaster is an efficient program for the design and analysis of a wide variety of hydraulic elements, such as pressure pipes, open channels, weirs, orifices, and inlets. FlowMaster's "Hydraulics Toolbox" can create rating tables and performance curves for any variables, using popular friction methods. Inlet calculations follow the latest FHWA guidelines, and irregular section roughness can be weighted based on any popular techniques.

E.2.6. CulvertMaster CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert hydraulics, from single barrel crossings to complex multi-barrel culverts with roadway overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use FHWA HDS-5 methodologies, and allow you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you don’t know, such as culvert size, peak discharge, and headwater elevation. Output capabilities include comprehensive detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.


E.3. Haestad Press

E.3.1. Haestad Press Publications Haestad Press provides civil engineering professionals with affordable, quality reference and textbooks dedicated to the practical application of engineering theory to hydraulics and hydrology. Haestad Press publications include:

• References and textbooks: Authored by industry-recognized experts, Haestad Press offers a complete line of reference books for use in both academic and professional settings.

• Technical Journals: With an eye towards computer technology, journals like Current Methods address the latest innovations in water resources modeling and practical modeling case studies, as well as offering credit towards certification.

• Independent Papers: Haestad Press also provides funding for engineers to write case studies of their projects, for potential publication in a variety of industry journals and magazines.

E.4. Training and Certification

E.4.1. Training and Certification Haestad Methods Continuing Education department has rightfully earned a reputation for excellence among hydraulic modelers, because of both the high quality of the educational experience and the friendly and professional environment that is provided at locations throughout the world. These training programs are famous for efficiently and effectively teaching engineers how to apply hydraulic theory and state-of-the-art software to real-world design situations.

Modelers can become certified in a variety of water-related fields, through an assortment of teaching methods including:

• JumpStart Seminars

• Comprehensive Workshops

• Publication-Based Programs To obtain more information about Haestad Methods certification programs, or to see upcoming events in a city near you, visit www.haestad.com

Accreditations Haestad Methods has achieved the highest levels of accreditation from both the International Association for Continuing Education and Training (IACET), and the Professional Development Registry for Engineers and Surveyors (PDRES). In addition to Haestad Methods’ own prestigious certifications, these

414 Appendix E: Haestad Methods

endorsements enable modelers to earn Continuing Education Units (CEU’s) and Professional Development Hours (PDH’s) for their satisfactory participation in various training and educational programs.

E.5. Internet Resources

E.5.1. Internet Resources In addition to modeling software, continuing education, and publications, Haestad Methods also provides Internet-based tools to help engineers manage their account information, manage their projects, and manage their sanity.

Instant Account Management Now you can go on-line to manage your own account information, such as to conveniently maintain your products, customize your communication settings, or indicate your areas of interest. Just visit the accounts section at www.haestad.com.

CivilProjects.com

CivilProjects.com is a special internet service for posting and locating Requests for Proposal (RFP’s). The database is updated daily with postings from around the world, and there are extensive search capabilities that allow you to find exactly what you are looking for.

CivilQuiz.com

CivilQuiz.com is a great way to treat yourself to some fun with a quick on-line engineering challenge, and maybe win a laptop or other prizes along the way. You can even submit your own questions to stump future CivilQuiz players!


Glossary

Age - An analysis for the age of water determines how long the water has been in the system, and is more of a general water quality indicator than a measurement of anything specific.

Available Fire Flow - Amount of flow available at a node for fire protection while maintaining all fire flow pressure constraints.

Base Elevation & Level - Elevation from which all tank levels are measured. For example, a tank level of two meters represents a water surface elevation two meters above the base elevation.

Boundary Node - Node with a known hydraulic grade. It may be static (unchanging with time), such as a reservoir, or dynamic (changes with time), such as a tank. Every pipe network must contain at least one boundary node. In order to compute the hydraulic grade at the other nodes in the network, they must be reachable from a boundary.

Bulk Reaction Coefficient - Coefficient used to define how rapidly a constituent grows or decays over time. It is expressed in units of 1 / time.

Calculated Minimum System Pressure - Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the system during fire flow withdrawal at a node.

Calculated Minimum Zone Pressure - Minimum calculated pressure of all junctions in the same zone as the node where fire flow withdrawal occurs.

Calculated Residual Pressure - Calculated pressure at the junction node where the fire flow withdrawal occurs.

Calculation Unready - An element that does not have all the required information for performing an analysis is considered to be calculation unready.

C-Coefficient - Roughness coefficient used in the Hazen-Williams Equation.

Check Valve - Prevents water from flowing backwards through the pipe. In other words, water can only flow from the From Node to the To Node.

Closed/Inactive Status - You can control the status of a valve to be either inactive or closed. Inactive means that the valve will act like an open pipe where flow can occur in either direction, and the headloss across the valve will be calculated using the valve's minor loss factor. Closed means that no flow will occur through the valve.

Constituent - Any substance, such as chlorine or fluoride, for which the growth or decay can be adequately described through the use of a bulk reaction coefficient and a wall reaction coefficient.

416 Glossary

Context Menu - A pop-up menu opened by right-clicking a project element or data entry field. Commands on the context menu are specific to the current state of the selected item.

Control Status - A pressure pipe can be either Open or Closed. Open means that flow occurs in the pipe, and Closed means that no flow occurs in the pipe.

Conveyance Element - A pipe or channel used to transport water.

Coordinates - Distances perpendicular to a set of reference axes. Some areas may have predefined coordinate systems, while other coordinate systems may be arbitrary. Coordinates may be presented as X- and Y-values or may be defined as Northing and Easting values, depending on individual preferences.

Cross Section Type - Tanks can have either a constant area cross section or a variable area cross section. The cross section of a tank with a constant area is the same throughout the depth. The cross section of a tank with a variable area varies throughout the depth.

Crosshair - The cursor that looks like a plus sign ( + ).

Current Storage Volume - The volume of water currently stored in a tank. It includes both the hydraulically active volume and the hydraulically inactive volume.

Database Connections - A connection represented by a group of database links. There may be a single linked external file within a connection, or there may be several external file links within a single connection.

DBMS - An acronym that stands for Database Management System. These systems can be relational (RDBMS ) or non-relational.

Demand - Represents the total demand from an individual junction for the current time period. It is based on the information from the Demand tab of the Junction Editor.

Design Point - Point at which a pump was originally intended to operate, and is typically the best efficiency point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.

Diameter - Refers to the a pipe or valve’s inside diameter. It is the distance between two internal points directly opposite each other.

Discharge - Volumetric rate of flow given in units of time/length3.

Double-Click - To click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.

Drag - To hold down one of the mouse buttons while you move the mouse.

Element - An object such as a tank, junction node, or pipe in a drawing.


Elevation - The distance from a datum plane to the center of the element. Elevations are often referenced with mean sea level as the datum elevation.

Energy Grade Line (EGL) - Sum of datum (base elevation), elevation, velocity head, and pressure head at a section.

Extended Edit Button - A small button with an ellipsis (...) as the label. Extended edit buttons are located next to drop-down choice lists, and provide further editing for the associated choice list items.

External Files - Any file outside of this program that can be linked. These include database files (such as FoxPro, Dbase or Paradox) and spreadsheets (such as Excel or Lotus). Throughout the documentation, all of these file types will be referred to as "databases" or "external files" interchangeably.

Extrapolate - To infer a value based on other known values, with the desired value lying outside the known range. Often based upon extending the slope of the line connecting the previous known values to the desired point. See also: interpolate.

Field Links - Define the actual mapping between model element attributes and columns within each database table.

File Extension - The period and three characters, typically, at the end of a filename. A file extension usually identifies the kind of information the file contains. For example, files you create in AutoCAD have the extension *.DWG.

Fire Flow Upper Limit - The maximum allowable fire flow that can occur at a withdrawal location. This is a user-specified practical limit that will prevent this program from computing unrealistically high fire flows at locations such as primary system mains, which have large diameters and high service pressures. Remember that a system’s ability to deliver fire flows is ultimately limited by the size of the hydrant opening and service line, as well as the number of hydrants available to combat a fire at a specific location.

Flow - Represents the calculated value of the pipe, valve, or pump discharge at the given time.

From Node - Represents the pipe's starting node. Positive flow rates are in the direction of "from" towards "to". Negative flow rates are in the opposite direction.

From Pipe - The pipe that connects to the upstream side of a valve or pump.

Headloss - Represents the energy lost due to friction and minor losses. The headloss field displays the pipe, valve, or pump's total headloss at the given time.

Headloss Gradient - Presents the headloss in the pipe as a slope, or gradient. This allows you to more accurately compare headlosses for pipes of different lengths.

Hydraulic Grade - Elevation to which water would rise under zero pressure. For open surfaces, such as reservoirs and tanks, this is equal to the water surface elevation. The hydraulic grade field presents the hydraulic grade for the element at the current time period as calculated based on the system flow rates and head changes.

418 Glossary

Hydraulic Grade Setting - The constraint to which a valve regulates, expressed in units of head (Length). Depending on the type of valve, it may refer to either the upstream or downstream hydraulic grade or the headloss across the valve.

Inactive Volume - The volume of water below the minimum elevation of the tank. This volume of water is always present, even when the tank reaches its minimum elevation and closes itself off from the system. Therefore, it is hydraulically inactive. It is primarily used for water quality calculations.

Inflow & Outflow - An inflow is a flow into a node from the system, while an outflow is a flow from the node into the system. A negative outflow is the same as a positive inflow, and a negative inflow is the same as a positive outflow.

Inheritance - Refers to the parent-child relationships used by scenarios and alternatives. Just as in the natural world, inheritance is used to refer to the situation where an entity receives something from its parent. For example, we speak of a child inheriting blue eyes from a parent. Unlike in the natural world, inheritance in scenarios and alternatives is dynamic. If the parent’s attribute changes, the child’s attribute automatically changes at the same time, unless the value is explicitly changed in a child.

Initial Settings - Sets the status of an element for a steady-state analysis or the first time step in an extended period simulation. The initial settings for a pipe, pump, or valve can be set using the elemental dialogs or a Table.

Initial Water Quality - Represents the starting conditions at a node for age, trace, or constituent concentration. The initial value will be slightly different depending on the analysis type.

Interpolate - Estimating a value between two known values assuming a linear relationship. See also: extrapolate.

Invert - Lowest point of a pipe opening. Sometimes referred to as the flow-line.

Label - The unique name by which an element will be referenced in reports, error messages, and tables.

Length - Represents the distance on a pipe from the From Node to the To Node, according to the scaled length of the pipe. To enter an overriding length, click the User Defined Length field and type in your desired length value.

Manning's Coefficient - Roughness coefficient used in Manning's Formula.

Material - The selection of a pipe's construction material. This material will be used to determine a default value for the pipe's roughness.

Maximum Elevation - The highest allowable water surface elevation in a tank. If the tank fills above this point, it will automatically shut off from the system.

Maximum Extended Operating Point - The absolute maximum discharge at which a pump can operate, with zero head being added to the system. This value may be computed by the program or entered manually.


Maximum Operating Point - The highest discharge for which a pump is actually intended to run. At discharges above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or it’s performance may decline rapidly.

Messages - The section that contains information generated during the calculation of the model, such as warnings, errors, and status updates.

Messages Light - A light that appears on the Tab of the Messages sheet. The light will be red if errors occurred during the analysis, yellow if there are warnings or cautions, and green if there are no warnings or errors.

Minimum Elevation - The lowest allowable water surface elevation in a tank. If the tank drains below this point, it will automatically shut off from the system.

Minimum System Junction - The junction where the calculated minimum system pressure occurs.

Minimum System Pressure - The minimum pressure allowed at any junction in the entire system as result of fire flow withdrawal. If the pressure at a node anywhere in the system falls below this constraint while withdrawing fire flow, fire flow will not be satisfied. A fire flow analysis may be configured to ignore this constraint.

Minimum Zone Junction - The junction where the calculated minimum zone pressure occurs.

Minimum Zone Pressure - The minimum pressure to occur at all junction nodes within a Zone. The model determines the available fire flow such that the minimum zone pressures do not fall below this target pressure. Each junction has a zone associated with it, which can be specified in the junction’s input data. If you do not want a junction node to be analyzed as part of another junction node’s fire flow analysis, move it to another Zone.

Minor Loss - The field that presents the total minor loss K-value for a pipe or valve. If an element has more than one minor loss, each can be entered individually by clicking the Ellipsis (…) button.

Mouse Buttons - The left mouse button is the primary button for selecting or activating commands. The right mouse button is used to activate pop-up context menus and help. Note that the mouse button functions can be redefined using the Windows Control Panel. If your mouse is equipped with a mouse wheel, you can use it for various panning and zooming functions.

Needed Fire Flow - The flow rate required at a junction to satisfy fire flow demands.

Network Element - An element that forms part of the network model. Annotation elements such as polylines, borders and text, are not network elements.

Number - The number of parallel conveyance elements in a model.

Notes - The field that allows you to enter text relevant to the model. It may include a description of an element, a summary of your data sources, or any other information of interest.

ODBC - Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) is a standard programming interface developed by Microsoft for accessing data in relational and non-relational database management systems (DBMSs ).

420 Glossary

On/Off Status - The status of a pump can be either on or off. On means that flow will occur in the downstream direction, and the pump will add head to the system according to it's characteristic curve. Off means that no flow will occur, and no head will be added.

Open/Closed Status - The status of a pipe can be either open or closed. Open means that flow can occur in either direction. Closed means that no flow will occur through the pipe.

Percent Full - The ratio of the current storage volume to the total storage volume, multiplied by 100.

Pipe Status - Indicates whether the pipe is open or closed. As input, this determines how the pipe begins the simulation. As output, it shows the calculated status of the pipe at the given time.

Polyline - A composite element that consists of a series of line segments. Each line segment begins and ends at a vertex. A vertex may be another element such as a junction, tank, or pump.

Power - Represents the water horsepower of a pump. This is the horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump into the water. Depending on the pump's efficiency, the actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary.

Pressure - The field that displays the pressure for the current time period.

Pressure Setting - The constraint to which a valve regulates, expressed in units of pressure (Force per Length²). Depending on the type of valve, it may refer to either the upstream or downstream pressure or the pressure drop.

Pull-down Menu - A menu of available commands or actions you can perform. A pull-down menu is usually selected from the menu bar at the top of the main program window.

Pump Status - A pump can have two different status conditions: On, which is normal operation, or Off, which is no flow under any condition.

RDBMS - An acronym that stands for Relational Database Management System.

Relative Speed Factor - Defines the characteristics of a pump relative to the speed for which the pump curve was entered, in accordance with the affinity laws. A speed factor of 1.00 would indicate pump characteristics identical to those of the original pump curve.

Residual Pressure - The minimum residual pressure to occur at a junction node. The program determines the amount of fire flow available such that the residual pressure at a junction node does not fall below this target pressure.

Reynold's Number - Ratio of viscous forces relative to inertial forces. A high Reynold's number indicates turbulent flow, while a low number indicates laminar flow.

Roughness - A measure of a pipe’s resistance to flow. Pipes of different ages, construction material, and workmanship may have different roughness values.


Roughness Coefficient - A value used to represent the resistance of a conveyance element to flow. In the Manning's equation, this value is inversely proportional to flow. The smaller the roughness coefficient, the greater the flow.

Satisfies Fire Flow Constraints - A true or false statement indicating whether this junction node meets the fire flow constraints. A checkmark in the box means the Fire Flow Constraints were satisfied for that node. If there is no checkmark, the Fire Flow Constraints were NOT satisfied.

Select - The process of adding one or more elements to an active selection set.

Selection Set - The active group of selected elements. A selection set allows editing or an action, such as move or delete, to be performed on a group of elements.

Shape - The cross-sectional geometric form of a conveyance element (i.e. circular, box, arch, etc).

Shutoff Point - The point at which a pump will have zero discharge. Typically the maximum head point on a pump curve.

Size - Inside diameter of a pipe section for a circular pipe.

Starting Elevation - The value that is used as the beginning condition for an extended period simulation.

Status Pane - The area at the bottom of the window used for displaying status information.

Storage Node - Special type of node where a free water surface exists, and the hydraulic head is simply the elevation of the water surface above sea level.

Sub Menu - A list of related options that is typically reached by selecting a pull-down menu item.

Table Links - A table link must be created for every database table or spreadsheet worksheet that is to be linked to the current model. Any number of Table Links may reference the same database file.

To Node - Represents a pipe's ending node. Positive flow rates are in the direction of "from" towards "to". Negative flow rates are in the opposite direction.

To Pipe - The pipe that connects to the downstream side of a valve or pump.

Total Active Volume - The volume of water between minimum elevation and maximum elevation of a tank. This is an input value for variable area tanks.

Total Needed Fire Flow - If you choose to add the fire flow to the baseline demand, the Total Needed Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire Flow plus the baseline demand. If you choose NOT to add the fire flow to the baseline demand, the Total Needed Fire Flow is equal to the Needed Fire Flow.

Total Storage Volume - The holding capacity of a tank. It is the sum of the maximum hydraulically active storage volume and the hydraulically inactive storage volume.

422 Glossary

Trace (Source Identification) - Determines what percentage of water at any given point originated at a chosen tank, reservoir, or junction.

Valve Status - A valve can have several different status conditions: Closed (no flow under any condition), Active (throttling, opening, or closing dependent on system pressures and flows), and Inactive (wide open, with no regulation).

Velocity - The field that displays the calculated value for a pipe, valve, or pump velocity at a given time. It is found by dividing the element's flow rate by its cross-sectional area.

Vertex - An element in a topological network.

Wall Reaction Coefficient - Defines the rate at which a substance reacts with the wall of a pipe, and is expressed in units of length / time.

Water Quality - The field that displays the water quality for the current time period.

Water Quality Analysis - An analysis that can be one of three types: Age, Trace, or Constituent.


References

Benedict, R. P., Fundamentals of Pipe Flow, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, 1980.

Brater, Ernest F. and Horace W. King, Handbook of Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1976.

Cesario, A. Lee, Modeling, Analysis, and Design of Water Distribution Systems, AWWA, 1995.

Clark, R. M., W. M. Grayman, R. M. Males, and A. F. Hess, "Modeling Contaminant propagation in Drinking Water Distribution Systems", Journal of Environmental Engineering, ASCE, New York, 1993.

Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, Third Edition, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 1999.

CulvertMaster User’s Guide, Connecticut: Haestad Methods, 1999.

Essential Hydraulics and Hydrology, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 1998.

FlowMaster PE Version 6.0 User’s Guide, Connecticut, Haestad Methods, 1998.

Males R. M., W. M. Grayman and R. M. Clark, "Modeling Water Quality in Distribution System", Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management, ASCE, New York, 1988.

Practical Guide to Hydraulics and Hydrology, Connecticut, Haestad Press, 1997.

Roberson, John A., John J. Cassidy, and Hanif M. Chaudhry, Hydraulic Engineering, Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1988.

Roberson, John A. and Clayton T. Crowe, Engineering Fluid Mechanics (4th Edition), Houghton Mifflin Company, Massachusetts, 1990.

Rossman, Lewis A., EPANet User’s Manual (AWWA Workshop Edition), Risk Reduction Engineering Laboratory, Office of Research and Development, USEPA, Ohio, 1993.

Rossman, Lewis A. et al., "Numerical Methods for Modeling Water Quality in Distribution Systems: A Comparison", Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management, ASCE, New York, 1996.

Rossman, Lewis A., R. M. Clark, and W. M. Grayman, "Modeling Chlorine Residuals in Drinking-water Distribution Systems", Journal of Environmental Engineering, ASCE, New York, 1994.

Sanks, Robert L., Pumping Station Design, Butterworth-Heinemann, Inc, Stoneham, Massachusetts, 1989.

Streeter, Victor L. and Wylie, E. Benjamin, Fluid Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1985.

Todini, E. and S. Pilati, "A Gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks", Computer Applications in Water Supply, Volume 1 - Systems Analysis and Simulation, ed. By Bryan Coulbeck and Chun-Hou Orr, Research Studies Press LTD, Letchworth, Hertfordshire, England.

Walski, Thomas M., Water System Modeling Using CYBERNET, Haestad Methods, Incorporated, 1993.

Zipparro, Vincent J. and Hasen Hans, Davis’ Handbook of Applied Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1993.

424 References

Notes


Index

A

Abbreviated Labels 165 Accuracy 199 Actions Tab 207 Active Cost Scenarios 240 Active Scenario 32 Active Topology 173, 218 Active Topology Alternative 173 Advanced Options 147 Aerial View 116, 117 Affinity Laws 341 Age 415

Alternative 176 Analysis 197

Alternatives 50, 167, 168, 185, 186, 374, 375 Child 168 Editor 170, 181 Inheritance 376, 377 Manager 168

Analysis Constituent 197 Fire Flow 194, 195 Hydraulic 189, 190, 334 Options 191 Toolbar 32 Trace 198 Water Age 197 Water Quality 197, 198

Analysis Results Report 29, 254 Animation Options 33 Annotation 63, 64, 249, 250

Comparison Wizard 265 Multipliers 103 Size 329

Annotation Wizard 250 Area

Enclosed by Polyline 114 Assigning Costs to Model Elements 400 Attribute

Annotation 250 Inheritance 377

Auto Prompting 101 AutoCAD 301, 302

Command Line 21

Commands 307 Drawing Synchronization 303 DXF 299, 300, 301 Element Scale 305 Entities 306, 307, 308 Exporting DXF File 299 Import WaterCAD 309 Importing DXF Files 299 Importing WaterCAD DXF Files 299 Main Window 18 Multiple Sessions 98 Proxies 309 Rebuild Figure Labels 303 Undo/Redo 308

AutoCAD Mode 17, 18, 301, 302 Graphical Layout 302 Project Files 303 Toolbars 302

Autodesk 301

B

Backflow Preventer 193 Background Drawing 299 Background DXF (AutoCAD) 299 Base 220 Base Elevation 415 Base Scenarios 180, 181 Batch Run 180, 183 Bends

Adding to a Pipe 331 in AutoCAD 306

Bernoulli Equation 335 Bibliography 423 Blocks (AutoCAD Mode) 295, 299 Borders 266 Boundary Node 415 Building Cost Scenarios 394 Bulk Reaction 275

Coefficient 415

C

C Coefficient 344, 415 Calculation 186, 198

426 Index

Options 198 Problem Summary Report 255 Results Status 35 Results Table 255 Unready 415

Calibration 191, 219 Calibration Adjustment Groups Dialog 231 Calibration Export to Scenario Dialog 224 Calibration Field Data Observation Dialog 228 Calibration Field Data Set Dialog 225 Calibration Field Data Sets Dialog 227 Calibration Group Selection Dialog 112 Calibration Groups 231 Calibration Manager 219 Calibration Options 233, 234 Calibration Options Formulae 235 Calibration Results Statistics 225 Calibration Solutions 223 Calibrations 222 Capital 383, 384 Capital Cost Estimating Overview 383 Capital Cost Reports 246 Change Pipe Width 306 Check Data 192 Check Valve 343, 416 Chemical Analysis 197 Chezy's Equation 345, 346 Child 220, 377

Alternative 168 Scenario 180, 181, 376, 378

Clipboard Copy Table 166 Copy to 34

Coefficient 421 Roughness 421

Coefficients Engineer's Reference 354

Colebrook-White Equation 346 Typical Values 355

Color Coding 56, 64, 65, 251, 252, 253, 267, 329 Column

Allow Duplicate 161 Change Units 329 Heading 165 Table Customization 164 Table Setup 160

Command Line (AutoCAD Only) 21 Commands (AutoCAD Mode) 307 Compare Scenarios 265 Composite Logical Action Dialog 215 Composite Logical Condition Dialog 212 Composite Minor Loss 129

Concentration 197 Concentration Limit 275 Conditions Tab 207 Configuration 100 Conjugate Gradient Method 339 Connection 277, 278

Database 281, 282 Editing 281 Hiding 285 Lesson 7 73 Management 279 Shapefile 288, 289 Sharing 286 Synchronization 303, 304

Connectivity Tolerance 297 Conservation

of Mass & Energy 336 Constant Power Pump 133, 342 Constituent 275, 416

Alternative 176, 178 Analysis 197, 198 Library 275

Construction Costs 146 Construction Costs Table 146 Context Menu 416 Contour 259, 260

Plan View 256 Smoothing 260

Contour Labeling 261 Control 140

Condition 141 Status 416 Valve 343

Controls Tab 206 Copy to Clipboard 34

Table 166 Copy/Paste 24 Cost 237, 363, 365, 383, 384, 385

Alternative 179, 180 Analysis 237 Manager 238 Unit Cost Function 243

Cost Manager - Button Section 238 Cost Manager - Center Pane 238 Cost Manager - Left Pane 239 Cost Tab 145 Cost Warnings Report 247 Creating a new Logical Control 203 Creating Scenarios 326 Crosshair

Location 35 CulvertMaster 412 Cursor Location 35


Curve Pump 133, 340, 341, 342

Curved Pipes 331 Custom AutoCAD Entities 306 Custom Extended 342 Custom Sort 163 Customize

Database 279 Drawing 103, 104, 105, 302, 303 Labels 165 Libraries 271 Tables 164

Cut Probability 234

D

Daily Energy Cost Summmary Section 150 Darcy Weisbach

Colebrook-White Equation 346 Equation 344, 345 Roughness Values 355

Darwin 219 Darwin Calibration 221, 222 Darwin Calibrator 219, 220 Darwin Calibrator Methodology 358 Darwin Manager 219 Data

Check 192, 193 Entry 37, 151, 377, 378 Organization 167 Validation 192

Database 277, 278 Export 279, 280, 281 Import 280, 281 ODBC 284, 285 Synchronization Options 282 Table Link Editor 282

Database Connection 277, 281, 282 Editor 281 Example 286 Manager 279 ODBC 285 Standard 279, 280, 281

Default 151 Delete

Elements 113, 305 Table 158, 159

Delete Selection Set 115 Demand 137

Alternative 173, 174 Graph 257 Multipliers 202

Demand Import Dialog 138 Design Point 133, 342 Detailed Report 253 Diffusivity 275 Discharge 193, 416 Display Precision 106 Display Tips 328

Change Units in a Column 329 Color Code Elements 329 Control Element/Label Sizing 329 Reuse Deleted Element Labels 330

Downstream Elements Selection 124 Drafting 113, 266 Drag 416 Drawing 112

Options 99, 103 Pane 19 Preview 298, 299 Review 117, 118, 295, 296 Scale 103 Setup (AutoCAD Mode) 302 Synchronization (AutoCAD Mode) 303

Drwin Calibrator Troubleshooting Tips 326 DWG 97, 303 DXF 104, 299

Background 35, 104 Exporting from WaterCAD 299 Import 299, 300 Units 104

Dynamic Inheritance 375, 376

E

Edit Elements 306 Editable Table Columns 162 Editing Elements 112, 330 Efficiency Settings Section 150 Efficiency Summary Section 151 EGL 335, 336 Element 123, 305

Annotation 249 Deleting 113, 305 Editing 24, 124, 305 Find 115 Labeling 120, 330 Modify 305 Morphing 111 Moving 113, 307 Numbering 119, 330 Rotate (AutoCAD Mode) 24 Scale (AutoCAD Mode) 24, 305 Search 115

428 Index

Selection 111, 112, 114, 119 Type 111 Visibility 104, 105

Element Detailed Cost Report 246 Element Properties 304 Elevation 415, 417, 419

Base 415 Input Mode 102 Maximum 419 Spot 261, 262

Email Address 15 Enclosed Area 114 Energy 363, 364, 365

Conservation 336 Equation 335 Grade Line 335, 417 Principle 334

Energy Cost Alternative 180 Energy Cost Manager 240 Energy Cost Theory 363 Energy Pricing Editor 242 Energy Pricing Manager 242 Energy Tab 149 Engineering Library 271, 272, 273

Constituent 275 Editor 273 Liquid 274, 275 Manager 272 Material 273, 274 Minor Loss 274

Enhanced Pressure Contours 261 Enter Key Behavior 100, 101 Entering Data for Multiple Elements 385 entering fire flow test results 228 Entities

Change into Pipe 309 in AutoCAD 306 to Pipes 309

Entity Conversion 309 EPANET

Import 316 EPS 190

Analysis 190 Equations 333 Era Generations Number 234 Error Messages 192

Results Report 187 ESRI 2, 277, 278, 294

Export Shapefile 292 Import Shapefile 289 Shapefile Connection 288, 289

Estimate 417, 419 Example Projects 14

Lessons 37 Tutorials 14

Exit WaterCAD 24 Explode Elements (AutoCAD Mode) 307 Export 23

Database 279, 280, 281 DXF 299 Profiles in AutoCAD 264 Shapefile 292, 293 Shapefile Link Editor 292 Spot Elevations 316, 317 Table to ASCII 166

Exporting a Submodel 99 Extended Edit Button 417 Extended Period Analysis 190

Lesson 2 46 External Files 417 Extrapolate 417

F

Factor Relative Speed 133

Fax Number 15 Field

Links 283, 284, 417 Share 155

Field Data Import 229 File Management 97 Filter Tables 163 Find Element 24, 115 Find Logical Action Dialog 216 Find Logical Condition Dialog 216 Find Logical Control Dialog 215 fire flow 228, 229 Fire Flow 144

Alternative 178, 179 Analysis 194, 195 Input 144, 145 Results 145, 195 Theory 194

Fire Flow Dialog 196 Fire Flow Upper Limit 419 Fire Hydrants 320 fire hydrants as flow emitters 323 Fitness 222, 223 Fitness Tolerance 221, 222 Fitness Type 233 Fitting Loss Coefficients 346, 357 Fittings Library 274 FlexTables 157 FlexUnits 105, 106


Table 107 Flow 419

Arrows Visibility 104 Flow Control Valve 343 flow emitters 323 Flow Emitters 193 Flow per Fitness Point 233 FlowMaster 412 Format 106

User Data 153 Formulas 354 Friction Method Theory 101 From Node 419 From Pipe 419

G

GA 219, 360, 361, 362 GA Calibration Tips 224 GA Optimized Calibration 220 GA Optimized Calibration Advanced Options 234 General Purpose Valve 171, 175 General Status Information 35 General Tab 275 Genetic Algorithm--GA 219 Genetic Algorithms 219, 361, 362 Global Edit 163 Global Options 100, 101 Global Settings 97 Globe Button 9 Glossary 13, 14 GO Button 193 GPV 172, 175 Grade Line

Energy 335 Hydraulic 335

Gradient Algorithm 337 Derivation 337

Graph Options 269 Graph Setup 258 Graphic Annotation 28, 266, 267 Graphical 112 Graphical Editor 109 Graphical Layout

AutoCAD 302 Stand-Alone 109

Graphically 112 Groundwater Well 318 Grouping Elements 111

Selection Sets 114

H

Haestad Methods 9, 15 Haestad Methods Knowledge Base 326 Haestad Press Publications 413 Hastad Methods Software 411

CulvertMaster 412 FlowMaster 412 PondPack 412 SewerCAD 412 StormCAD 412 WaterCAD 411

Hazen Williams Equation 344 Coefficients 357 Roughness Values 356

Head 194 Head per Fitness Point 233 Head-Discharge Points Section 136 Headloss 419

Coefficient 274 Headloss Gradient 419 Help 13, 37

Button 30 Menu 30 Technical Support 15 Tutorials 14

HGL 335, 336, 419 Input Mode 102

HGL Setting 419 Horse Power (Pump) 133 Hydrants 320 hydrants as flow emitters 323 Hydraulic Analysis 190

Options 199 Hydraulic Grade 419 Hydraulic Grade Line 335 Hydraulic Grade Setting 419 Hydraulically Close Tanks 320 Hydropneumatic Tank 318

I

Import 22, 23 Command 98 Cybernet 312, 313, 314, 315 Database 279 Database and Shapefile Data Created in V3 317 DXF Files into AutoCAD 299 EPANET 316 KYPIPE 316 Polyline to Pipe 22

430 Index

Shapefile Link Editor 291 Spot Elevations 316 WaterCAD 22, 23, 309

Import/Export Tips 311 Importing Demands 137 Importing Patterns 202 Inactive 164, 173 Inactive Volume 419

Importing from EPANET 316 Include Active Topology 164 Include In Cost Calculation 146 Inflow 419 Inheritance 375, 376, 419

Dynamic 376 Overriding 376

Initial Settings 419 Alternative 174

Initial Settings Alternative Editor for GPV 175 Initial Water Quality 419 Input 112

Data 123 Modes 102 Quick View 121

Insert Elements 111 Nodes 111

Installation Guide for Network License Versions11 Installation Problems 8 Installing Haestad Methods Products 7 Internet Address 15 Internet Resources 414 Interpolate 419 Inventory 255 Invert 419

J

Junctions 125

K

K Coefficients 274, 357 Kinematic Viscosity 274 Knowledge Base 326 KYPIPE 316

L

Label 419 Abbreviate 165

Elements 120, 330 Rebuilding (AutoCAD Mode) 303 Rotate 306 Sizing 329 Visibility 104

Laws Affinity 341 Conservation of Mass & Energy 336

Layer 105, 298, 304 Layout 39, 40

AutoCAD 302 Network 109 Pipe Using Entity 309

Legend 29, 266, 267 Quick View 121

Length 419 Level 415

Mode 102 Library

Constituent 275 Editor 272 Liquid 274 Manager 272 Material 273 Minor Loss 274

Licenses 9 Light 419

Messages 419 Line 266

Enclosed Area 114 Linear System Equation Solver 339 Linear Theory Method 337 Link Color Coding 252, 329 Liquid 102

Library 274, 275 Local

Units 165 Logical 140 Logical Control 139, 141 Logical Control Dialog 208 Logical Control Set Alternative 175, 176 Logical Control Set Editor 217 Logical Control Sets Dialog 217 Logical Controls Manager 205 Logical Controls Operation 205 Logical Controls Overview 203 Losses

Minor 346, 347

M

Mailing Address 15


Manning's Coefficient 419 Mannings Equation 345

Roughness Values 355 Typical Values 357

Manual Calibration 222 Manual Fire Flow Scenarios 195, 196 Manual Fire Flow Scenarios Dialog 196 Mass Conservation 336 Material 419

Library 273, 274 Maximum Era Number 234 Maximum Extended Operating Point 133, 419 Maximum Increment 220 Maximum Operating Point 133, 419 Maximum Trials 221 Menu 20, 21, 28

context 416 Shortcut Keys 20 Toolbars 20

Merge 99 Messages 148, 419

Light 419 Metric 100, 106 Microstation 299 Minimum

Allowed Value 106 System Junction 419 System Pressure 415 System Requirements 7 Zone Pressure 415

Minimum Increment 220 Minor Losses 346

Fitting 358 Properties 274

Mix Units in a Tabular Report 165 Mode

Input 102 Scaled 103 Schematic 103 Stand-Alone/AutoCAD 17

Model 123, 124, 189 modeling fire hydrants as flow emitters 323 Modeling Tips 317, 324 Modeling Variable Speed Pumps 324 Morphing Elements 111 Mouse Tips 330 Move

Elements 113, 307 Labels 307

Moving Element Labels and Annotation 121 Multi Segmented Polyline 331 Multiple

Pump Curve 342

Sessions 98 Units 165, 166

Multipliers 103 Mutation Probability 234

N

Native AutoCAD Entities Converting 295, 308 Network Deployment Folder 12 Network Hydraulics Theory 334 Network Licensing 9 New Adjustment Group Dialog 231 New Base 220 New Calibration 220 New Child 220 New Field Data Set 228 New Logical Action Dialog 213 New Logical Condition Dialog 209 Node 415, 419

Boundary 415 Color Coding 252, 329 From 419

Node Costs 402 Non-Construction Costs 146, 406 Non-Convergence 190 Non-improvement Generations 221, 222 Northing Easting Mode 102 Notation

Scientific 106 Number

of Digits After Decimal Point 105 Reynold's 420

O

ODBC 284 Online Help 12, 30 Open Database Connectivity 284 Operating Point 134 Operating Range Section 139 Operational Alternative 175 Optimized Calibration 221, 222 Options 34

Calculation 198 Drawing 103 Global 100 Graph 268, 269 Project 99, 101

Organize Data 167 Outflow 419 Output 249

432 Index

QuickView 121 Tables 157

Overview 219, 240

P

Parallel Pipes 319 Parallel Pumps 319 Pattern 200, 201

Demand Multipliers ................................................... 201

Pattern ..................................................201, 202

Extended Period Analysis 190, 202 Pattern Editor 201 Pattern Graph 257 Time Steps 201

Peak Demand Summary Section 150 Phone Number 15 Physical Alternative Editor for GPVs 171 Physical Properties 170, 171 Pipe 124, 125, 419

Adding Vertices 331 Align Text with Pipe 104 Fittings 274 From 419 Length 419 Length Rounding 101, 102 Material 419 Parallel 319 Splitting 111 Text 104 Tool 29, 110, 111

Pipe Costs 400 Pipe Costs Report 247 Pipe Layout Using Entity 309 Plan View Reports 255 Plot Window 267 Polygon Enclosed Area 114 Polyline

Conversion Problem 298 Enclosed Area 114

Polyline to Pipe Conversion 295 Wizard 296

PondPack 412 Population Size 234 Power 133 Precision Display 106, 107 Predefined Reports 253 Preferences 100 Pressure

Head 335

Mode 102 Pressure Breaker Valve 343 Pressure Sustaining Valve 343 Pressurized Tank 318 Preview 267 Print 22, 23, 34

Preview 33 Preview Window 267 Setup 22 Table 166

Problem Solving 311 Problems with Setup or Uninstall 8 Profile 29, 263

Plot 263 Setup 263

Project Example 14 Files 97, 98, 303 Inventory Report 255 Options 99, 101 Settings 97 Setup Wizard 99 Summary 22, 99, 100 Title 99, 100

Project Detailed Cost Report 247 Project Element Summary Cost Report 247 Project Summary Cost Report 247 Prototype 99, 151 Proxies 309 Publications 411 Pull-down Menu 20 Pump 126, 127, 319

Affinity Laws 340 Constant Horsepower 342 Curve 133, 340, 341, 342 Definition 133 Groundwater 318 Groundwater Well 318 Importing from EPANET 316 Initial Settings 174 Initital Condition 133 Operating Point 134, 340, 341, 342 Parallel and Series 319 Power 133 Theory 340 Type 342 Variable Speed 341

Pump Curve 133, 340, 341 Pump Efficiency Section 149 Pump Station Costs 404


Q

Quick Attribute Selector 21 Quick Edit Window 26 Quick Selection Set Dialog 218

R

Random Seed 234 Reaction Rates Tab 275 Rebuild Figure Labels 303 Recent Files 22 Redefine WaterCAD Blocks 299 Redo 24, 25, 308 Reference

Engineer's 354 References 423 Registering Network Programs 10 Registration 8, 9, 30 Regulating Valves 343 Relabel Elements 118 Relabel Operations 119 Relative Speed Factor 133, 420 Remove

Columns 160, 161 Elements 113 Haestad Methods Products 8

Removing Color Coding from labels imported from Pre-v3.5 files? 330

Rename Adjustment Group Dialog 231 Reports 56, 57, 58, 249

Analysis Results 254 Detailed 253 Menu 29 Plan View 255 Predefined 253 Project Inventory 255 Scenario 255 Tabular 254

Requesting Permanent Network License 10 Reservoirs 126 Residual Pressure 420 Results 249 Review Drawing 117 Reynold's Number 420 Rotate Labels (AutoCAD Mode) 104, 305 Roughness

Chezy's Equation 346 Coefficient 273, 355 Colebrook-White Equation 346 Darcy-Weisbach Equation 344 Hazen-Williams Equation 344

Manning's Equation 345 Roughness Values 354

Colebrook-White 355 Darcy-Weisbach 355, 356 Hazen-Williams 356, 357 Manning's 355 Typical 357

Rounding 106 Pipe Length 102

Rule Based 139, 140, 141, 175, 203, 205, 208 Running the Model 193

S

Sales 14 Sample Projects 14 Save 22, 24, 31

As 22, 23, 24 as Drawing*.dwg 304

Scale 103 Elements (AutoCAD Mode) 305

Scaled Mode 103 Scenario 30, 180, 183, 265, 375

Alternatives 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 185 Analysis Toolbar 32 Base 180 Batch Run 183 Calculation 186 Child 50, 51, 52, 53, 376 Comparison 53, 55, 264, 265 Editor 181, 185 Inheritance 376, 378 Lesson 3 50 Management 50, 167 Results 187 Selection 181 Summary Report 255

Scenario Management 26, 182, 371, 382 Example 378

Scenario Wizard 183 Schematic Mode 103 Scientific Notation 106, 107 Search for Elements 115 Section 138, 139 Select 28, 112

By Selection Set 24, 114 Element Types 290 Elements 24, 25, 26, 111, 112 Field Links 283 Layer 304 Text Style 305

Select Element 229

434 Index

Select From Drawing 112 Selection 112 Selection Set 114, 115

Manager 26, 114 Selection Set Dialog 232 Selection Tool 28 Series Pumps 319 Set Field Options 105 Setting 419

Hydraulic Grade 419 Settings 97, 100, 419 Setup 7, 8, 100, 302

Drawing Options 103 Global Options 100 Problems 8 Project Options 101 Prototypes 151

SewerCAD 412 Shapefile 287, 288, 289, 290, 291

Format 294 Shapefile Connection 287, 288, 290, 291

Editor 288 Example 294 Export Example 293 Export Wizard 292 Import Example 291 Import Wizard 289 Link Wizard 289 Manager 287 Synchronization Options 291 Wizard 287

Share Fields 155 Sharing Shapefile Connections between Projects293 Shortcut Keys 20 Shutoff Point 133 Simple 140 Simple Logical Action Dialog 214 Simple Logical Condition Dialog 209 Simultaneous Path Adjustment Method 337 Single Element Selection Dialog 112 Size 104 Size Elements (AutoCad) 305 Smoothing Contours 260 Snap Menu (AutoCAD Mode) 307 Software Registration 8 Solutions 223 Solutions to Keep 220 Solutions to Modeling Problems 317 Sort

Custom 163 Tables 163

Source Tracing 198

Sparse Matrix 337, 340 Splice Probability 234 Splitting Pipes 111 Spot Elevations 261, 262, 316 Stand-Alone Mode/AutoCAD Mode 17 Standard Database Import/Export 279 Standard Extended 342 Status 35

Bar 19, 35 Log 269 Pane 100

Status Bar Contents 34 Statuses

Initial Settings 419 Steady State Analysis 190 Sticky Tools 101 Storage Volume 419

Active 421 Inactive 419

StormCAD 412 Stretch 113 Submodel Import 99 Suggestions 15 Support 15 Symbol

Size Multiplier 103 Visibility 104 Visibility (AutoCAD Mode) 302

Synchronize 288 AutoCAD Mode 303 Database Links 279 Options 282 Via ODBC 285

Synchronized Units 165 System

International 100, 106 System Cost Adjustments Table 239 System Head Curve Dialog 257

T

Table 157, 161, 162 Change Units 165 Copy to Clipboard 166 Customization 164 Editing 158 Export to ASCII File 166 Filtering 163, 164 Flex Units 107 Manager 157 Mixing Units 165 Navigation 162


Print 166 Print Preview 166 Properties 160 Setup 159 Type 160

Tabular 29 Report 157

Tabular Report Window 256 Tank 125, 126

Curve 257 Hydraulically Close 320 Hydropneumatic 318 Importing from EPANET 316 Pressurized 318

Technical Support 15 Text 307

Style 305 Text Height 103, 104

How Do I 329 Multiplier 103

Theory 333, 365 Network Hydraulics 334 Valve 343, 344

Throttle Control Valve 343 Time Condition 141 T-intersections 297 Title

Project 99, 100 Tolerance 118 Tool Pane 31, 100 Toolbar 20, 302

Analysis 32, 33 and Shortcut Keys 20 Buttons 31

Top Feed/Bottom Gravity Discharge Tank 322 Topology 192 Total Active Volume 421 Totalizer 256 Totalizing Flow Meters 256 Trace

Alternative 178 Trace Analysis 198 Training and Certification 413 Tutorials 14, 30, 37

Lessons 37 Type Coercion 277

U

Undo 24 Undo/Redo Operations in AutoCAD 308 Uninstall 8

Problems 8 Unit Conversion 278 Unit Cost 243

Data Table 245 Function Formula 245 Function Manager 244 Table Coefficients 246

Unit Cost Functions 388, 389, 390 Unit System 100, 101, 107 Unit System Status 35 Units 100, 104, 106, 107, 329

Change in a Column 329 DXF 104 Local 165 Synchronized 165

Updates 9, 30 Upgrades 8, 9 Upstream Elements Selection 124 US Customary Units 100, 106 Usage 274 User Data 152

Alternative 180 User Memos 147

V

Validation 192 Valve 127, 128, 416

Characteristics 135 Check 416 Importing from EPANET 316 Theory 343

Variable Frequency Drive 148, 324, 365 Variable Speed Pump 365 Variable Speed Pump Theory 365 Variable Speed Pump VSP Tab 148 Variable Speed Pumps 341, 364 Varible Frequency Drives 363 Velocity

Head 335 Vertices

Adding to a Pipe 331 VFD 148, 324, 363, 365 View

Menu 26, 28 Tabular 157

Viewing Cost Results 396 Visibility of Symbols 104, 302 Volume 419

Inactive 419 Total Active 421

VSP 148, 149, 324, 325, 326, 363, 366, 367, 368

436 Index

W

Walk 264 Selection 264

Wall Reaction 275 Water Main 320 Water Quality

Analysis Options 199 Water Quality Theory 347 WaterCAD 3, 4, 411

Custom AutoCAD Entities 306 Documentation 12, 13 Elements 123 Import 309 Main Window 18 Theory 333 User's Guide 12

WaterCAD Engineering Library Modules 272 WaterCAD in AutoCAD 301

Files 303 WCD File 97, 98, 303 Welcome Dialog 30, 100 Well 318

Groundwater 318 White Table Columns 162 Window Color 101 Wizards 250, 292

Annotation Comparison 265 Polyline to Pipe 295, 296, 297 Project Setup 99 Shapefile Connection 287 Shapefile Export 292 Shapefile Link 289

Workshops 14

X

X - Y Mode 102 X Coordinate 102

Y

Y Coordinate 102

Z

Zone 155, 156, 157 Manager 155

Zoom 27, 31, 116


Notes

438 Index

Notes


Notes

440 Index

Notes

water cad users guide

Documents